FIRST STEPS IN LATIN
C OMPLETE C OURSE IN LA TIN FOR
ONE YEA R,
BASED ON
MA TERIAL DRA WN FROM CZESAR’S COMMEN TARIES ,
WI TH EXERCISES F OR SI GHT—READIN G, AND A
COURSE OF ELEMEN TARYLA TIN READIN G.
R . F . EEIGHTON , PH .D .
AUTHOR or CRIT ICAL H I STORY OF C ICERO’S EP ISTULAE AD FAMILIARES , H I STORY
OF 3013, LATIN LESSONS , GREEK LESSON S , ETC .
BOSTON
PUBLISHED BY GINN 8: COMPANY.
18 8 6 .
iv PREFA CE.
or of etymology, but simply as urging that the time often given to
parsing and memoriz ing and repeating formulas , which my experi
ence has taught me help but little in the mastery of the language,
can be much more profitably employed in the oral work just men
tioned. The aim, of course, is to teach the pupil to read and write
Latin ; but.may not this be accomplished more expeditiously and
pleasantly by making the language alive,— by teaching pupils to
speak, write, and read Latin as they are taught to speak, write, and
read a modern language A German university student, if the
classics be his specialty, learns not only to read and write Latin ,
but even to speak it. If Latin is to maintain its present high
place in our courses of study, it must offer something better than
mere mental training or grammatical drill ; it must introduce the
student to the priceless treasures of art and literature which
the Romans gathered from the ancient world, and which, trans
fusing with their own genius, they transmitted to coming ages .
This work can be done in no way better than by teaching Latin
as a living language. Is it not time that some one of our colleges
or universities should offer opportunities for students to acquire
a speaking knowledge of the Latin language
For those who prefer the English method of pronunciation , a
few simple rules have been given . The so-called Roman method,
which is a very near approach to the ancient pronunciation ,is now
adopted by many of our leading colleges and high schools . Great
pains have been taken in these lessons to teach the euphonic
changes that occur in verbs in the formation of the perfect and
participial stems. A thorough knowledge of the phonetic value ofthe letters of the Roman alphabet will help the student through most
of these difficulties . This is quite aside from the question of pro
nunciation , which must, after all,be governed by the prevailing
usage . The quantity of syllables, except final syllables that are
short, and the final a of the first person present indicative of verbs,
has been carefully marked, in order to secure accuracy of pronun
ciation ; and, if a serious attempt is made to pronounce according
to the Roman method , the pupil’
s ear should be trained to it from
the start.
In enumerating the principal parts of verbs, I have ventured to
deviate so far from common usage as to substitute in place of the
so-called supine the neuter of the perfect particip le. The supine in
PREFA CE. V
-um, called by many grammarians one of the principal parts of the
verb, belongs, in fact, to only about 250Latin verbs ; then , again,
those verbs that are invariably intransitive have the perfect parti
ciple in the neuter gender only . This part, then, called in the
dictionaries the supine in-um, must, in most cases, be the neuter of
the perfect participle ; and I have ventured, i nthe enumeration of
the principal parts of the verb, to give it this name, and also to
substitute, as Vanicek and other grammarians have done, in place
of sup ine stem, themore correct term particip ial stem. The retention
of the neuter of the perfect participle, in enumerating the principal
parts of the verb, instead of the masculine, is of importance from
the fact just mentioned in regard to intransitive verbs, and also
because it can be made to conform easily to the present usage of
our dictionaries.
The words in the short vocabularies at the beginning of the
lessons, as well as the examples to illustrate the rules of syntax,
are mostly drawn from the first five chapters of Carsar’
s Gallic
War . These vocabularies should be thoroughly committed to
memory. The practice of selecting examples from authors of
different periods and modes of expression tends, as it seems to me,
rather to perplex young pupils than to give them definite ideas of
the structure and formation of a Latin sentence. No effort is
made in these vocabularies to teach the derivation ofwords ; but, in
the general vocabulary at the close of the book, the prefixes, stems,
and endings of the words have been carefully indicated. In the
chapter on the formation of words, attention is mainly confined to
the formation of those words that the pupil can easily under
stand, and that can be made of service to him while studying these
lessons.
Exercises for sight-reading have been introduced early in the
course. The lesson read at sight can be assigned as the regular
lesson of the next day, and made to serve as the basis for addi
tional drill in syntax and etymology. On the third day, the pupil
should be required to translate the same lesson , as a review exer
cise, into clear and accurate English , absolutely disregarding the
literal construction of the words and sentences. These exercises
will also afford ample means for practice in pronouncing Latin ,
which is best acquired in reading connected sentences, as is the
case in a modern language. But in order to read Latin easily and
vi PREF A CE.
well, the oral practice, which I have mentioned, will be found a
valuable and almost indispensable aid.
My aim has been to introduce the pupil, by the aid of easyexamples, to the correct use of words and to the chief principles of
syntax. When these examples have been studied, and the rules to
be derived from them are thoroughly understood, the exercises
that follow, both Latin and English, w ill be found sufficient to fix
these principles in the memory. It is important, in fact indispen
sable to thoroughness, for the pupil to keep up the work of com
position . If the exercises to be turned into Latin are too numerous,
then a part of them can be omitted until the review ; but some
writing in Latin should be done every day.
The book may seem to some teachers to be too large for begin
ners. But I have endeavored to keep in view the needs of young
pupils, and have thought it better to give too much explanation
rather than not enough. Then , again , the numerous examples ; the
explanatory notes ; the frequent illustration of Latin idioms byreference to English ; the manner in which the paradigms are dis
played ; and the adjustment of the type, by which the pupil can
learn not only the leading topics of the page, but also the relative
importance of the various rules, remarks, and observations, have
all necessarily added to the size of the book, but they will all, it
is hoped, be found helpful to the pupil.
My acknowledgments are due to several of our best teachers ,
who have generously aided me by their counsel in the plan and in
the numerous details of the book. The entire work, while going
through the press, has received, in addition , the valuable revision
and oversight of GEORGE \V. COLLORD , Professor of Latin in the
COLLEG IA TE AND POLYTEC IIN IC INST ITUTE, Brooklyn ; of CA BKIE
HA RR ISON ,sometime Professor of A ncient Languages in the
UN IVERSITY on THE SOUTH ,now one of the Principals of the
BROOKLYN LATIN SCHOOL, to whom I am especially indebted for
many valuable suggestions in the revision of the chapters on syntax ;
D . A . KENNEDY,DEA nnonN-MORGA N SC HOOL, Orange, N . J . ;
and of Miss C . T. DAVIS, Professor of Latin in the PA CKER
COLLEG IA TE INST ITUTE.
R . F . L.
BROOKLYN , N .Y. ,
September , 1885 .
CONTENTS .
LESSONS .
Review of English Grammar
Synopsis for Review
Origin of Latin Language .
I . A lphabet ; C lassification of Letters
II . Pronunciation ; Sy llabication Quantity ; A ccent
VII —VII I . Latin Verb and ConjugationFirst Conjugation
XI . Latin Nouns and Declension
XII . First Declension
XII I . Subject and Predicate ; Agreement ofVerbs and SubjectNominative
XIV. Subject and Object ; Direct ObjectXV.—XVII . Second Declension A ppositive and Genitive with Nouns ;
Dative with Transitive VerbsXVII I . Prepositions
A djectives ; First and Second Declension ; A greement of
A djectives 66-71
XXL-XXII . First Conjugation ; A ctiveVoice ; ImperativeMode ;
Questions ; Vocative 71-76
XXIII .—XXXI . Third Declension ; Rules of Position ; Rules of
Gender
XXXI . A blative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Instrument 97-99
XXXII . Subject and Copula ; Predicate Noun ; Predicate Adjective
XXXII I . Indicative of sum ; Predicate Genitive 102-104
XXXIV.-XXXV. Adjectives of the Third Declension 105-110
XXXVI .—XXXVIII . Comparison of Adjectives ; Ablative with Com
paratives Genitive and Dative with A djectives ;Irregular and Defective Comparison 110-118
XXXIX. Uses of A dverbs ; First Conjugation ; Voices ofVerbs . 119-122
XL. Formation, C lassification, and Comparison of A dverbs, 122-125
XLI . First Conjugation, continued 126-129
viii
LESSONS.
XLII .
CONTENTS.
Second Conjugation ; A blative of A gent
XLIII .-XLV. Second Conjugation, continued ; Stems
XLVI .
XLVI I .
Fourth Declension
Fifth Declension
XLVI II .-LI . Third Conjugation ; Laws of Euphony ; A blative of
LII .-LV.
LVI .
LVII .
LVIII .
LIX.
LXI .
LXII .
LXIII .
A ccompaniment ; Two A ccusatives
Fourth Conjugation ; Two A ccusatives of the Same
Person and Thing ; Subjective, Possessive, and Objective Genitive ; Dative with Intransitive Verbs ;A ccusative and A blative of Time .
Verbs in -io
Uses of the Dative : Dative of A dvantage and Bisad
vantage, Dative of Possessor, Dative of A pparent
A gent, Dative of Reference, and Dative of Purpose
or End
Prepositions ; Dative with Compounds
C lasses of ConjunctionsGenitives in -ius ; Imperative Mode, A ctive VoiceNumerals ; A ccusative of Time and Space ; A blative
of Difference 180-185
Imperative Passive of the Four Conjugations ; P laceWhere 186-189
C lassification of Sentences ; Analysis of Simple Sen
tenoes
LXIV.-LXIX. Pronouns : Personal, Reflexive, Possessive, Demon
LXX.
LXXI .
LXXII .
LXXIII .
LXXIV.
LXXV.
LXXVI .
strative ; Partitive Genitive ; Determinatives ; Rela
tives ; Agreement of Relatives,Interrogatives, and
Indefinites 192-209
Uses of the Ablative : A blative Proper ; Instrumental
Ablative ; Locative ; Separation , Cause, etc . Perfect
Participles denoting parentage, etc.
Reading Latin at Sight
Infinitive Mode ; Exercises for Sight-Reading
Infin itive and Subject-A ccusative ; Complementary Infinitive ; Exercises for Sight-Reading . 216-219
Participles ; Ablative A bsolute ; Exercises for Sight
Reading . 219-225
Gerund and Gerundive ; Exercises for Sight-Reading . . 225—230Inflection and Syntax of Supines ; Exercises for Sight
Reading 231-233
CONTENTS. ix
LESSON S . PAGES .
LXXVII . Locative Names of P laces ; Place from which ; Place
in which, etc. 234-239
LXXVI I I .—LXXXIII. Subjunctive Mode ; Subjunctive of sum ;
Dative of Possessor ; Subjunctive of imo 239-250
LXXXII . Subjunctive in Independent Sentences : Optative, Hortatory Deliberative, Potential, Concessive 248-250
LXXXIII .-LXXXIV. Deponent Verbs of First C onjugation ;
A blative with Deponents . 250-255
LXXXIV. Deponent Verbs of the Four Conjugations ; SemiDeponents .
LXXXV. Periphrastic Conjugations ; Dative of Agent
LXXXVI . Table of the Four C onjugationsLXXXVII . Genitive and Ablative of Quality ; Exercises for Sight
Reading 268-270
LXXXVIII .-XC III . I rregular Verbs : possum , prbsum ; v610 ,
11610 , mal o ; féro ; A blative of Specification ; A bla
tive of Difference ; eo ; éd o ; A blative and Genitive
of Price ; 6 0 270-285
XC II I . DefectiveVerbs ; Instrumental A blative ; A blative of
Measure ; A blative of Distance ; A blative of Ma
terial ; Opus and fi sus ; praed l tus ; A blative of
Manner ; A blative of A ccompaniment ; A blative of
Characteristic ; Tabular View of the Uses of the
Ablative
XC IV. ImpersonalVerbs ; Genitive with VerbsXCV. C lassification of Dependent C lauses ; Exercises for
Sight-Reading 296-299
XCVI . Tenses in Dependent C lauses, Primary and Secondary ;
Sequence in Consecutive C lauses (32 2 . Obs . ) after
Perfect Infinitive (350. 2 )XCVII . Subjunctive in Dependent C lauses
1. Final C lauses ; Object C lauses ; Verbs of H inder ingVerbs Of F ear ing, etc.
2 . Consecutive C lauses and their Uses ; Exception in the
Sequence of Tenses ( see32 2 .Obs . ) Relative C lauses
of Result . 309-314
3. Conditional Sentences and their C lassification ; Rulesfor Sequence of Tenses not A pplicable (319.
Uses of dum, mbao , and dummbd o in Condi tional
C lauses ; Disguised Conditions 314-320
X CONTENTS.
LESSONS PAGES .
Comparative C lauses with Indicative and Subjunctive, 320-321Concessive C lauses 321-323
Causal C lauses 323-325
Temporal C lauses : ContemporaneousA ction with dum,
dénec, quoad ; Subsequent A ction with antéquam
and priusquam ; Construction of cum : (1) cuminversum, (2 ) Iterative use of cum, (3) cum His
torical, (4) Causal and Concessive cum .
Substantive C lauses and their C lassification
Interrogative C lauses : Rhetorical Questions, Direct
Questions, Double Questions, Indirect Questions, De
pendent Double Questions, Questions and A nswers, 337—341XCVIII . Indirect Discourse ; Infinitive in Indirect Discourse ;
Tenses in Indirect Discourse ; Sequence of Tenses
after other Modes ; Sequence of Tenses after an
Infinitive or a Participle ; Reflexive Pronouns ; Pro
nouns in Indirect Discourse ; Conditional Sentences
in Indirect Discourse ; Interrogative Sentences in
Indirect Discourse ; Imperative Sentences in Indirect
Discourse 342-355
XC IX. Relative C lauses : Simple Relative C lauses ; Relative
C lauses introducing purpose, result, condition, cause,
concession ; Indefinite Relative ; Relative C lauses in
Indirect Discourse 355-358
Intermediate (or Parenthetic ) C lauses ; A ttfaction of
Partial Indirect Discourse
MISCELLANEOUS ExERcrss s 363—369SUMMARY OF RULES or SYNTAX 370—381FABLEs 382-383
LIFE or CESAR . 383-388
THE HELVETIAN WAR , FROM Woonronn’s EPITOME or CE SA R , 388—397
NOTES 398—418SKETCH OE CE SAR
’
S LIFE 402-406
419—431
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARYENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY
INTRODUCTION.
LESSON I .
PARTS OF SPEECH IN ENGLISH.
NOUNS. PRONOUNS.—ADJECT IVES.
OBSERVA TION . In the study of English grammar, one of the
first things the pupil has to do is to classify and name the variouswords that he meets in his exercises . He does this in the samemanner that one might pick out, sort, and group objects of anykind : viz ., by noting the points in which they resemble one an
other. For example, we may, from certain resemblances in formand structure, select all trees of a certain kind, and call themma les from other resemblances, we Should get another class,c ed oaks ; and still another class, called beeches . Then we maystudy each class, as the oak, and learn all that is perhaps necessaryto know of the numerous individuals that compose the class. In
the same manner, we may study and classif words . Noticing thevarious ways the different words are use in sentences, we sort
them out, or roup them, into eight classes, which are called PA RTSor SPEECH . hose words that name objects are called NOUNS, fromthe Latin word nomen
, which means a name. But we soon learnthat we cannot talk or say an hing about the noun w ithout usinganother kind of word, calle VERB , from the Latin v erbum , a
word. When a noun and a verb are combined so as to express a
thought, i.e. so as to make sense, then a sentence (Lat. s ententia)is formed ; as,
Trees grow. Boys run . Timefl ies .
PRONOUNS
Charles went to Rome with his mother , and he came back withouther . In this sentence we make use of three little words, calledPRONOUNS. They are his , he, and her . Without these words, weshould be compelled to repeat the nouns , and to say : Charles wentto Rome with Charles
’
s mother, and Charles came back without
5
1. A Noun is the name of anything, as, a person, place, or
thing ; as, boy, hou se, m an , tree, city .
2 . A Pronoun is a word used for a noun ; as,
Can you tell me who w rote the line 2
OBS. We have stated that the words of our language may bedivided into eight classes, or parts, of speech. When we examinethese parts of speech, we shall soon find it necessary to divide someof the classes into other classes. For example, the word city maymean any city, i .e. it is a name common to the whole class ; while
the word Boston is a p roper, or particular, name of an individual ofthis class. We may, therefore, subdivide nouns into common and
p rop er . If we notice the use of nouns further, we shall see thatthey undergo certain changes in form, meaning, and use ; for ex
ample, the tree grows, and the trees grow . Here we notice the wordtree changes its form by assuming 3 ; this change, or modification ,
in the form and meaning of the noun , tree, is called NUMBER . Theword tree, denoting one, is in the singular number ; and the word
trees, denotin more than one, is in the p lural number . Let us now
examine the ollowing word
1. The lion is strong. 5. We praise the author .
2 . The lioness is strong. 6 . I, the author, have written .
3. The author writes . 7 . A uthor , hear thou .
4. The author’s book is read. 8 . We call the author .
OBS In Ex.1the pupil w ill notice that the word lion denotes amale , In Ex. 2 this word has been changed, or modified
, in form,
and now denotes a female. This modification of the noun to
denote sea: is called GENDER . There are three genders,—masculine,femin ine, andThe changes that we have noted so far, affect the meaning of the
noun ; there are two other changes of nouns seen in Exs . 3- 8,
which affect the uses and relations of the words . In Ex . 3 theauthor is represented as doing an act, viz .
, writing; in Ex . 4, as
possessing a book ; and in Ex. 5, as receiving an action . These uses
of nouns are called CA SES. The use of the noun in Ex . 3, as sub
ject, is called the NOM IN A T IVF. C A SE ; its use in Ex . 4, to denote
possession, is called POSSESSIVE CA SE ; its use in Exs . 5 and 8 , as
object, is called OBJECTIVEC A SE'
. The possessive is the only case
of the noun that is indicated by a change in form .
In Exs. 6-8 the word author has three different uses. In Ex. 6
it denotes the speaker, in Ex. 7 the person spoken to, and in Exs .
5 and 8 the person spoken of: This change in the use of nouns is
called PERSON . There are three persons,—the fi rst p erson, as in
PARTS OF SPEECH . 8
Ex. 6 ; the second person , denoting the,one spoken to, as in Ex. 7 ;
and the third p erson, denoting the one spoken of, as in Ex. 8 .
MODIFICATION .
These changes in the form, meaning, and use of words, are called
MODIF I CA TIONS.
N oun s .
3. A Noun, or Substantive, is the name of anything, as, a per
son, place, or thing ; as, man , book , Boston .
1. A Proper Noun is the particular name of a person or
place ; as , Brooklyn , C icero .
2 . A Common Noun is a name common to all members ofa class of objects ; as , city, r iver .
OBs . There are two clas ses of common nouns, collective and
abstract, that it may be well for the pupil to note
1. A collective noun is the name of a multitude of objects takenas a whole ; as, army, crowd, mob, legion, j ury, multitude.
2 . An abstract noun is the name of a quality considered as taken
away, or abstracted, from the object to which it belongs ; as, beauty,virtue, p rudence, mildness.
4. Nouns aremodified to express Number, Gender, Person, and
Case.
NUMBER .
1. There are two Numbers : the singular , which denotes
one thing ; as , man , boy .
2 . The p lural, which denotes more than one ; as , men ,
boys .
GENDER .
3. There are three Genders : the masculine, which denotes
the male sex ; as , lion , man .
4. The feminine, which denotes the female sex
lioness , woman .
5 . The neuter , which denotes neither male nor female ; as ,
book.
PERSON .
6 . There are three Persons
(1) The first p erson , which denotes the one speaking ; as ,
We Americans hurrv too much.
4 INTRODUCTION .
( 2 ) The secondperson , which denotes the one spoken to ; as ,
John, bring me the book .
(3) The third person , which denotes the one spoken of ; as ,
The boy has gone to school .
CASE.
7 . Case is the modification of a noun or pronoun to Show
its relation to other words . There are four cases
(1) The Nominative, which usually denotes the subject.and answers the question who? or whuti’ ; as ,
John speaks .
( 2) The Possessive, which denotes possession , and an
swers the question whoset ; as ,
John’
s book. Boys’
slates.
(3) The Objective, which denotes the relation of the directobject, or of a preposition ; as ,
The man strikes the boy.
His wealth was gained by industry .
(4) The Independent, or Case Absolute, which denotes
that the noun or pronoun has no dependence on any other
word . Its most common uses are
a . A s the case of address ; as ,
The fault, dear Brutus, is not in our stars, but in
ourselves .
b. With a participle, forming a contracted clause ; as ,
The sun having risen, we departed on our journey ;i.e. when the sun had risen, etc.
o. By pleonasm, as when a noun introduces the subjectof a remark , and then is left independent of the rest of the
sentence ; as ,
The Pilgrim fathers, where are they
6 INTRODUCTION .
syllables ; as , beautiful, more beautiful, most beautiful. (3)Irregularly ; as , good , better , best.
OBS. The adjectives a, an, and the are usually called A rticles.
EXERC ISES.
Mention the parts of speech and the cases of the nouns.
and pronouns in the following sentences z
1. Birds fly . 2 . The lion was caged . 3. The industrious
boy was praised . 4. These industrious boys are praised .
5 . The river flows rapidly . 6 . The boy’
s slate is on the
desk . 7 . The boys are in school . 8 . She plays very nicely .
9. He writes more rapidly than I do . 10. The gate of the
palace opens . 11. The house that you saw is sold . 12 . Tell
me what you did . 13. This is the man who called on you.
14. There is no terror , Cassius , in your threats . 15 . The
treaty being concluded , the council was dissolved .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
Write a common noun . Write the plural of this noun. Write the
possessive singular and plural . Write the Singular of six nouns ; the
plural of the same. Make a rule for forming the plural of nouns .
Write the possessive case of each noun . Make a rule for forming the
possessive case. Write the possessive plural. Write a pronoun . Whatis a pronoun
? Show how pronouns are used. Write all the personal
pronouns . Write a noun and prefix an adjective ; compare this adjective . In how many ways may adjectives be compared ? What classof adjectives are usually compared by more and most
LESSON II .
PARTS OF SPEECH IN ENGLI SH.
vases AND THEIR MODIFICATIONS.
OBS . If we say the boy str ikes , the word strikes expresses the
act done by the boy,—or is, as it is called, aVERB . Some other
word, however, is necessary in order to complete the meaning ;adding the word book, we have the boy strikes the book, the book
being the object that receives the action, which passes over from
8 INTRODUCTION .
M od ifi ca tion s of Ver bs .
MODE.
OBS . 1. When I say' the man str ikes, I assert striking as a fact.
The man may strike ; in this sentence I do not assert the action as
a fact, but as possible. Again , if the man str ike, he will be sorry ;I now assert the action, not as an actual fact, but as a condition of
the man’
s being sorry . I can also say, man, strike ! but I do not
assert that the man does actually strike, but simply command him
to strike . The action expressed b the verb str ike has been asserted
in four different ways, or modes . he first is called the INDICA TIVEMODE ; the second, the POTENTI A L MODE the third, the SUB
JUNC TIVE MODE ; the fourth, the IMPERA TIVE MODE. There is
another form of the verb, which expresses action , but cannot assert
it of a subject ; as, he wishes to str ike. To str ike expresses the action
in a general way, w ithout confining or limiting it to a subject ; it is,therefore, called the INF IN ITIVEMODE, i .e . without limit, unlimited .
VOICE
OBS. 2 . The man struck the boy . In this sentence the verb struck
shows that the subject, man, is the actor ; if we change the sen
tence, still expressing the same idea, to the boy was struck by theman,then the verb, was struck, shows that the subject is no longer the
actor , but is acted u on , or receives the action . This change in
the form of the ver is called VOICE. The first form is called
A C TIVEVO ICE ; and the second, the PA SSIVEVOICE.
13. Verbs are modified to express voice , mode, tense,number , and person .
1. Voice is that modification of a transitive verb which
shows whether the subject acts or is acted upon . There are
two voices
a . The A ctive Voice , which shows that the subject doesthe action ; as ,
The man str ikes .
b. The Pass iveVoice, which shows that the subject sufiersthe action ; as ,
The man is struck.
2 . Mode (Lat. modus, manner ) denotes the manner
asserting the action or being . There are five modes
a . The Indicative , which asserts the action ( or being)a fact, or inquires after a fact ; as ,
He came. Did he come
PA RTS or SPEECH . 9
b. The Potential , which as serts power , possibility , or
necessity of the action or being ; as ,
He may come. He must come.
0. The Subjunctive, which asserts the action or being as a
more condition , supposition , uncertainty , or wish ; as ,
If you had come, this would not have happened .
OBS . The Subjunctive mode has but few forms now in common use, in which it differs from the forms of the Indicative and
Potential ; as,
If I were in your place . If he be loved. If he love.
d . The Imperative , which asserts the action or being as a
command or entreaty as ,
Come thou.
e. The Infinitive ( infinitivns, unlimited ) , which expresses
the action or being in a general way , without asserting it of
any person or thing ; as ,
He w ishes to go.
That is, it is unlimited (hence its name) as to number and per
son . The verb in the other modes is called fin ite, that is, limitedin number and person . He wishes to go. To go does duty here as
a verb, expressing action, and as a verbal noun, the object of wishes .
TENSE
OBS . In the sentences I strike, I struck, I shall strike, the mode,or manner , of asserting the action is the same, but the time is different . I str ike expresses the action as present ; I struck, as past ;and I shall strike, as future . The first form is called PRESENT
TIME, or PRESENT TENSE, as tense means time ; the second, the
PA ST TENSE ; the third, the FUTURE TENSE. There are also three
other forms of the verb, asserting the action as completed in the
present, the past, or the future : (1) I have struck ; ( 2) I had struck ;
(3) I shall have struck. The first, have struck, represents the action
as completed at the present time, and is called the PERFEC T TENSE,or the PRESENT PERFEC T ; the second, had struck, represents the
action as completed in past time, and is called the I’LUPERFEC T
TENSE, or PA ST PERFECT ; the third, shall have struck, represents
the action as to be completed before some other future action , and
is called the FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.
10 INTRODUCTION .
3. Tense expresses the time of the action or being ; the
time may bep resent, p ast, orfuture. There are s ix tenses
a . The Present expresses action or being as present ; as .
He runs .
b. The Imperfect expresses action or being as going on
in past time ; as ,He was running.
6 . The Future expresses action or being as yet to come as ,
He will run .
d . The Perfect expresses action or being as completed in
present time ; as ,He has run .
e. The Past Tense ( aorist, or historical perfect) expressesaction or being as ended in past time ; as ,
He ran .
f . The Pluperfect expresses action as ended before someother past action or being ; as ,
He had run .
g. The Future Perfect expresses action or being to be com
pleted before some other future action ; as ,
He shall have run .
PERSON .
If we change the subject in the first sentence to thou. or to he,we must then change the verb str ike to str ikest, or to str ikes . These
changes are made for the sake of agreement between the subjectand the verb,—the verb ending in
-est agrees w ith thou in the
second person , and the verb ending in-s agrees with he in the third
person . Both of these subjects are Singular number ; if the sub
ject is plural , the verb must be plural as, the men strike. Hence,verbs agree with their subjects in number and person .
4. Number and Person of a verb are those modificationswhich Show its agreement with the number and person of
the subject ; as ,The boy runs . The boys run .
PA RTS OF SPEECH . 11
PARTIC IPLES
OBS . In the sentence the sun ris ing causes the day, the wording, while not directly asserting the action of rising of the sun ,
still assumes such an action ; causes directly asserts the action .
We may also say, the r is ing sun causes the day , but here r is ing has
become an adjective, modifying sun . Hence, the participle may bedefined as that form of the verb which partakes of the nature of an
adj ective, and exp resses the action as assumed.
14. The Participle is a form of the verb that partakes of
the nature of the verb and adjective . There are three
participles
1. The Present, which represents the action or being as
going on at the time denoted by the verb ; as ,
The river,flowing from the mountains, waters the plain .
2 . The Past , which represents the action or being as com
pleted at the time denoted by the verb ; as ,
The soldier , covered w ith wounds, fell .
3. The Perfect, which represents the action or being as
completed previous to the time denoted by the verb ; as ,
Having climbed to the top of the hill, we saw the beautiful
landscape.
EXERC ISES.
Name the mode, tense, and voice, of each of the followingverbs
1. They sing. 13. They are chosen .
2 . They have sung. 14. They were ruled .
3. I do fight. 15 . He has been struck .
4. I have sung. 16 . We are blamed .
5 . They were calling. 17 . You were being praised.
6 . They w ill call. 18 . You w ill be blamed .
They had called . 19. The boy is called .
8 . They called . 20. The girl has been called .
9. They have called . 21. The king was wounded.
10. They are calling . 22 . They w ill be punished .
11. They had fought. 23. They had been pun ished .
12 . They will have fought. 24. He has been praised .
INTRODUCTION .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
What is a verb ? Write a sentence containing a transitive verb.
How are verbs classified ? Mention the modifications of verbs. Write
a verb in the indicative mode. What is a participle Define the word.
How many modes are there? How many tenses ? Define tense.
LESSON III .
PARTS OF SPEECH IN ENGLISH.
ADVERBS. PREPOSIT IONS. CONJUNCT IONS. INTERJEC
T IONS.
A dver bS.
OBS. A noun and a verb are both necessary in order to form a
sentence. We have learned that modifying words are often added
to nouns to explain or to express the idea more clearly . Words are
often added to the verb for the same purpose. If we say, the boyreads, we express the fact in a general way ; but, if we wish to
speak Of the manner Of reading, then we say, the boy reach badly ,
adding the word badly ; if, of the time, we add the word now : the
boy reads now ; of the p lace, we add the word here : the boy read
here. We may join words to these modifiers, and say, the boy reads
very badly, that is, very modifies badly ; we may join a word to an
adjective, as, that book is very good. These words that we joinwith verbs, adj ectives , or adverbs, to modify their meaning, are called
A DVERBS (Lat. ad . to, and verbum , a word, or verb) .
15 . An Adverb is a word used to modify verbs, adjectives, oradverbs ; as, he speaks p la in ly ; i t is rem a rkably cold
wea ther ; he str ikes very hard .
COMPAR ISON .
1 A dverbs are compared in the same way as adjectives ; as ,
PA RTS OF SPEECH . 13
CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS.
2 . A dverbs may express time, p lace, manner , cause, or
degree.
a . A dverbs Of Time answer the question , when ? ; as , lately,
yesterday .
b. A dverbs ofPlace answer the question,where? as
,there,
here.
0. A dverbs Of Manner answer the question, in what way ? ;as , excellently , well.
d . A dverbs Of Cause answer the question, why? ; as , why.
e. A dverbs OfDegree answer the question , in what degree
as , too, very .
OBS. A dverbs modify verbs, as, the horse stands there ; but wema wish to express the idea With more distinctness than is pos
é
sib e even w ith the use of an adverb, as, the horse stands in h is s ta ll .
These words, in his stall, standing for the adverb there, are called a
phrase, and the word in, that shows the relation between stands
and stall, is called a PREPOSIT ION .
16 . A Preposifion (Lat. prac, before, and pono, p lace) showsthe relation between a noun or pronoun and some other word ; as,
he came to town ; to d ie f_
o_
r on e’
s coun try .
OBS. In the sentence John and James read, the two words, John
and James, are united by the word and . In the sentence a brave
and prudent man acts discretely ; here the two adjectives are con
nected by and. Again, in the sentence the man works in summerand in winter ; here the two phrases, in summer and in winter, areconnected by and. The earth is round, and no one doubts it, is com
d of two sentences, or clauses, connected by and. The words
that connect other words or sentences are called CONJUNC TIONS
(Lat . con. together, and jungo, j oin) .
17 . A Conjunction is a word used to connect words, phrases, or
Conjunctions area . CO-ordinate , when they connect words , phrases , 91
°
clauses Of the same rank ; as , and , but, or , nor .
14 INTRODUCTION .
b. Subordinate, when they connect C lauses of different
rank ; as , if, because, when .
I n terj ection s .
18 . An Interjection is a. word used to express sudden emotion or
feeling ; as, ala s ! 0h !
EXERC ISES.
Mention the parts of speech in the following sentences
1. ThlS book was given to me . 2 . These birds fly veryswiftly. 3. The Child likes to play . 4. The brave soldiers
fell in battle . 5 . We saw a beautiful landscape . 6 . The
gallant soldier fell, covered with wounds . 7 . I saw the sun
sinking behind the hills . 8 . The Delta Of the Mississippiwas once at St . Louis . 9. They made Victo ria queen .
10. A las ! how many changes have occurred . 11. Mary and
Eliz abeth lived and reigned in England . 12 . Give me the
book . 13. I f he give me the book , I Shall rejoice . 14. I f
I were in your place, I would go .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
What is a preposition ? What is a phrase Write a sentence con
taining an adverb ; expand this into a phrase. Write two nouns con
nected by and by but. In the sentence,the earth is round
,and no one
doubts it, and is a co-ordinate conjunction ; but in the sentence, the
sea,when it had spent its fury, became calm
, w hen is a subordinate
conjunction.
LESSON IV.
FORMS OF THE ENGLISH VERB.
19. The conjugation Of the English verb in Latin form,
t.e. the names Of the tenses are those used in conjugating a
Latin verb, is as follows
THE SENTENCE. 17
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
Sing. 1. I had been loved.
2 . Thou hadst been loved .
3. He, she, or it has been
loved .
P lur . 1. We had been loved.
2 . Ye or you had been
3. They had been loved.
PRESENT TENSE.
2 . Be (you or thou) loved. 2 . Be (ye or you) loved.
I nfi n itive III od e .
P a r ticip les .
PRESENT, Being loved . PA ST, Been loved .
PA ST PERFECT, Having been loved.
1. Conjugation is the regular arrangement Of all the forms
of a verb .
NOTE . Conjugate in the same manner the verbs hear, teach, rule,choose, run, see.
LESSON V.
THE SENTENCE.
20. A Sentence is the expression of a thought in words ; as,
iron m elts .
21. Every sentence has two parts
1. The Subject,1or that about which something is said ; as ,
Birds fly.
FUTURE PERFEC T TENSE.
Sing . 1. I shall have been loved .
2 . Thouw ilthavebeen loved .
3. He, she, or it will have
been loved.
P lur . 1. Weshall havebeen loved .
2 . Ye or youwill have been
loved.
3. Theyw ill havebeen loved .
18 INTRODUCTION .
2 . The Predicate, or that which is said about the subjectThe leaves tremble.
Sub jec t .
3. The Subject is always a noun , or some word used as a
noun . The subject is sometimes modified by a word , or
group Of words , and the combination is then called the
modified , or logical subj ect ; as ,
The cold w ind blows .
4. The Predicate is always a verb, or contains a verb.
The predicate may be modified by other words , and the com
bination is then called the modified , or logical p redicate ; as ,
The leaves fall quietly.
5 . The verb may be intransitive, and then the subjectand verb make complete sense , and the predicate contains
nothing but the verb ; as ,
Timefl ies .
6 . The verb may be transitive , and then an Object is
required to complete the sentence , and the verb and Objecttogether make up the predicate as ,
The man str ikes the table.
7 . The verb may be cop ulative,2and then a comp lement is
required to complete the sentence . The verb and comple
ment together make up the predicate ; as ,
The man is old.
8 . The analysis Of a sentence is the separation Of it into
its parts .
EXA MP LE . Time flies .
OBS . This is a sentence, because it expresses a thought . Timeis the subject, because it is that about which something is said ;
fl ies is the predicate, because it says something of the subject.
THE SENTENCE. 19
The following method Of analysis will be found useful for you n
pupils . The subject is marked S. ; the predicate is marks
(1) v .I ., i.e.Verb Intransitive ; ( 2) v .T . and O ., i.e. Verb Transitiveand Object ; (3) v .C . and C .
,i.e. Verb Copulative and Comple
ment
EXERC ISES.
A nalyz e the following sentences
1. The enemy crossed the river . 2 . Columbus discovered
America. 3. The flowers bloom . 4. The flowers are beauti
ful . 5 . Gold is yellow . 6 . A Shepherd watches sheep.
7 . Study pays . 8 . The boy learns his lesson . 9. The sun
Shines bright. 10. The lady is tall. 11. Ripe fruit is
healthful .
NOTES AND QUEST IONS.
1. The subject of a sentence may be found by asking who ? or what?
with the verb as, birds fly. Who or what fiy? A NS. birds . The
predicate may be found by asking what ? about the subject ; as , birdsfly. What about birds ? A NS. Theyfly, fly is the predicate.
2 . Copulative means the same as C opula, a link, coupler . It joins , orlinks, the subject with the complement ; as, snow is white,—snow is the
subject, is is the copula, and white the complement. There are several
o ther copulative verbs besides to be ; as, become, seem
,appear . The
adjective standing in the predicate is called the predicate adj ective, andthe noun is called the predicate noun.
Define simple sentence. Of what is a sentence composed? Define
subject. What must the subject be What is meant by copula
C lassify verbs according to their meaning . Define Object. What is atransitive verb ?
The N oun
Verb
A d jective
A dverb
INTRODUCTION .
SYNOPSIS FOR REVIEW.
C lasses
Mod2.fications
C lasses
Al odiflcations
fUses
C lasses
Modifications
bi odification
C lasses .
Modifications
C lasses
SubjectObject.
Complement.
Principal Word in a Phrase.
Common .
Proper .
N umber Singular ; Plural .
Gender : Masculine ; FeIn . ; Neuter .
P erson : First ; Second ; Third .
Case Nominative ; Possessive ;Objective.
Same as those of Nouns.
Personal .
Relative.
Interrogative .
Adjective .
Same as those of Nouns .
Predicate.
Form Regular ; Irregular .
ilI eaning Transitive ; Intransitive .
Voice A ctive ; Passive.
llI ode Indicative (Potential) ; Subjunctive ; Infinitive.
Tense Present ; Imperfect ; Future ;Perfect ; A orist ; Pluper
fect ; Future Perfect.
P erson : Fir st ; Second ; Third .
N umber Singular ; Plural .
Modifier ; Complement .
Positive Degree.
C omparison Comparative Degree.
Superlative Degree .
Time ; Place ; Manner ; Degree ; Cause.
Positive Degree.
Comparative Degree.
LSuperlative Degree.
Co ordinate .
Subordinate.
SIMPLE SENTENCE.
Declarative.
Interrogative .
Imperative.
Exclamatory.
M eaning
LATIN LANGUAGE .
Or ig in of La tin .—The Latin language was spoken at
Rome and in the adjo ining district, the plain Of Latium, from
which latte r it derives its name. It is closely related to the
tongues spoken by the Samnites , Sabincs . and other kindred
races , to which the general name Of Sabellian has been
given . These Sabellian tribes , on first entering I taly , settled
along the mountain ridges , from which they descended to the
plains like streams that flood and fertiliz e the valleys . The
Latins , who settled near the Tiber , belonged to the Oldest
Of these success ive migrations ; then came the Sabines , the
A equians , Hernicans , and Volscians , who at first pressed
hard on the Latins , and hemmed them into the narrow plain
between the Tiber and the A lhan hills , but in course Of time
coalesced with them and formed one nation .
H ow R ela ted . The Latin , as well as the Greek , San
skrit , Teutonic , Celtic , and Z end , are all Sister languages ,
and together help to form the IndO-European family . The
original language from which these sprang was spoken bythe progenitors Of all these peoples , who once lived together
somewhere in Central A s ia , and by successive migrations
peopled India and Europe, whence the name Indo-European .
The name A ryan ( pronounced dr-yan ) is Often applied to
this parent language , and to the groups that have descended
from it.
Wher e Sp ok en .—The conquests Of the Romans caused
the Latin language to spread , not onlv over Italy and Sicily ,
but over the greater part of France and Spain .
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
C LASSIFICAT ION OF LETTERS.
‘
1. Vow els .
7 . Vowels are produced when the vocal organs are Open ,
SO as to allow an uninterrupted flow of vocal sound ; when
the vocal sound is interrupted , consonants are produced , but
no Sharp line separates the least Open vowels from the mostOpen consonants .
8 . The vowels may be divided according to their qualityinto
1. Open .
2 . M edial
3. C lose
9. The Open vowel is pronounced like a in father , themouth being fully open . Starting with this sound , and by
gradually contracting the vocal organs , the medial vowels , theclose vowels , and the more Open consonants ( like i or j y ,v w ) are produced ; and at last the closure Of the vocal
organs becomes complete when the mutes are uttered .
10. e is a medial vowel between open a and close i ; o
is medial between Open a and close u ; y occurs in Greek
words only .
OBSERVA TION 1. The vowel i and the consonant i (Often writtenwere not disting uished in form by the Romans . But i, com
Ined w ith a vowel in the same syllable, was a consonant, and was
sounded like y ; as, majo r (may or ) . It is now usually written j .
OBS. 2 . The vowel u and the consonant u v, are Often inter
changed ; as : mbn-ui , I have admonished ; ama-v i , I have loved ;the ending
-ui in mOnui becomes -vi in amav i.
II . C on son an ts .
11. Consonants are divided , according to the organs
speech by which they are chiefly uttered , into
Lab ials ( or lip-letters) p , b , m, f, v .
2 . Dentals ( or teeth-letters) t, d , n , s .
3. Linguals ( or tongue-letters ) r , l .
4. P alatals ( or palate-letters) i , or i y .
5. Gutturals (or throat-letters) C k q, 3, n , h .
PRONUNC IATION . 27
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.
1. The pupil should om it the study of the classification of the
letters for the present ; the explanation will be found convenient for
reference, and when the verb is taken up the attention of the pupil
will be called to this subject as explaining most of the vowel and
consonant changes.
2 . The distinction between a surd and a sonant is the same as tha t
between p and b as heard in pad and bad .
3. Before a guttural, as in ink.
4. See p. 183. 5. 102 . 3. c.
Write the alphabet. How many letters has the Latin alphabet?
How many vowels are there ? Write the long vowels . Write the
diphthongs. What diphthongs are seldom used ?
LESSON II.
PRONUNCIATION.
22 . The pronunciation Of Latin is different in different
countries . In the United States general usage favors one
Of two ways , which may be called the Roman ( or Phonetic)and the English . Whatever method of pronunciation maybe adopted , the pupil should be made thoroughly familiar
w ith the leading features Of the Roman method , which is a
near approximation to the ancient pronunciation .
ROMAN METHOD.
23. By the Roman method every letter has always the
same sound . Each simple vowel is either long or Short ; a
short vowel has the same sound as the corresponding longvowel, but occupies Only half as much time in utterance .
I . Soun d s of the Vow els .
a as in ah , like a in father . a as in ah , like a in id ea.
6 as in p rey . 6 as in met .
I as in machine . I as in s it .
6 as in ho ly . 6 as in obey .
11as oo in moon . if as in full .
y has a sound between that Of i and u , like the French 11,
or German ii .
28 F IRST STEP S I N LA TIN .
I I . Soun d s of th e D ip h th on gs .1
as like ay (yes) , or ai in ai s le . eu like aw in few .
oe like oi in co in . ai like ei in eigh t.
an like ow in how . ui like w e in w e .
III . Soun d s of the C on son an ts .
c is always hard, like 0 in come .
g is always hard, like g in gun .
j is like y in y et .
8 is always sharp, like a in s ea.
t is always like t in time .
It is like w in w e.
qu is like qu in quart .
24. The double consonants are : a; cs (ks) , z dz The
letters not mentioned have the same sound as in English .
EXERC ISES.
Pronounce the following words
1. a'-la,
2wing ; rid-pa, turnip ; fé
'-mes , hunger ; ré'-mex ,
rower a-rel-na, sand fré’-na, bridle. 2 . ta-bel’-la, tablet ;
i-ter , j ourney ; mi-ni'ster , servant ; dO
'-lOr , pa‘
in hfI '-me-riis ,
shoulder ; a'-n I
'
I-liis , finger r ing sua'-dé O, I advise.
3. prae-Si'-di-iim, guard ; nau
'-ta, sailor ; pod-nay p un ish
ment sae'-pé, often . 4. lae-ti’-t
‘
i-a‘
, j oy pré'-t
‘
i-f’
im, pr ice ;
pé-ti-en
'-ti-a, patience coe'-lfim , heaven Cid-put , head
6 '-ci’
1-lfis , eye I; jfi’-dex, j udge ; vir
'-gO , maid ; ma
"-chi-na,
machine pul'-chér , beautiful.
N O TES A ND QUEST I ONS.
1. Diphthongs occupy twice as much time in utterance as the Short
vowels .
2 . The words will be accented and syllabicated until the subjects ofaccentuation and sy llabication have been explained.
ch has the sound of k .
th is like th in th in .
ph is like f.
be and b i: are like ps , p t .
gu and an , when making a
syllablewith the follow ing
vowel, like gw , sw .
SYLLA BICA TION . 29
How is Latin generally pronounced in this country How is long a
pronounced? Why is a knowledge of the Roman method important
?
When does n have the sound Of ng? What consonants have the same
sound as in English? A re any letters s ilent
LESSON I l l .
SYLLABI CATION.
25. A Latin word is divided into as many syllables
as it has vowels or diphthongs .
OBS. The English words mile, accurate, separate, abate, would,as Latin words, he syllabicated as follows : mI-le, ao-cu-r tV-te ,se-pa
-ra'-te, a-ba
’-te.
26 . A Single consonant between two vowels is joined
to the second vowel .
EXAM PLES .
I . fti’-b er. artisan . 3. ré-gi
’-na, queen .
2 . lau’—d o , I p raise. 4. (16 '
-mI-nus , lord.
27 . When the consonant is doubled, the first belongs
to the first syllable, and the second to the second
syllable .
EXAMPLES.
I . ah'-nus , year . 3. pen
'-na , feather .
2 . b el'-lum , war . 4. mit ’-to , I send .
28 . Two or more consonants not doubled between two
vowels belong to the follow ing vowel, but I, m, n , r , in
connection w ith another consonant, are joined to the
preceding vowel .
EXAMP LES.
1. lI’-brI, books . 5. am '-b o , both.
2 . fau'-s tus , lucky. 6 . lin ’-
gua . tongue .
3. fra’-trés , brothers . 7 . an
’-g
'
ui s , snake.
4. hb'i pés , guest. 8 . ma’-gnus , great.
30 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
29. The parts Of compounds are treated as separate
w ords .
EXA MP LES.
1. ab’-est ( ab , away, e s t, he is) , he is away.
2 . in-u’-ti-li s ( in , not, uti lis , useful) , useless .
3. ob-‘
i'-t e ( Ob and ire) , to go .
30. The last syllable Of a word is called the ultimate,
or ultima ; the next to the last, the p enultimate, or
penult ; and the one before the penult, the antep enul
timate, or antepenult .
ExA M P LES.
l . an-ten’-na, sail-yard . 4. ln-fa
'-mi-a, infamy .
9. fé-ne
’e tr i , window. 5 . m id-15, app les .
3. im-pé
-d i-men fita, baggage. 6 . dI-s cl’-pfi
-lfi s , p up il.
OBS. In the foregoing words point out the ultimate, the p enult,and the antepenult.
EXERCISES.
Syllabicate and pronounce the following words
1. scri'ba , clerk ; in'siila , island ; Sal , salt; ra
'na, frog ;
ara'tra, p lough . 2 . ma'
ppit, napkin disci’
piilfis , scholar ;
ar'ma, arms ; al
'téra, another ; pes , foot ; habe
'na , thong ;
bel'lum , war ; Sani
'tas , health ; pa
'riés , a. wall dO
'lOr , p ain ;
miigi'ster , master . 3. vul
’nI
'
IS , wound ; consuetfi'db, custom ;
sua'vis , sweet ; hae
'dfis , kid ; pre'tium , p r ice ; cica
'trix , scar ;
laeti'tiii , j oy ; re
'
gnfim,
l kingdom pl’
i'er , boy in
’
I'ria, ia
j ury ; d‘
i ’xit,2 he said ; ma
'
gnus , great ; a'mnis ,
3river ; ad
'eO,‘
I go to ; l'
i’ttera, letter .
NOTES A ND QUESTION S.
The combination ya can begin a syllable .
x is treated in syllabication as a single consonant.
The combination ma can begin a sy llable .
Compounded of ad ,to
,and 96 ,
I go.NB
C/O
N
I
34 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
1. The accent, as affected by an enclitic, will be explained later .
2 . Notice that the penult is short.
What is accent ? Write a word with the accent on the penult. How
do you accent Latin words of two sy llables? Of three syllables
? Is
the last syllable of a Latin word ever accented ? Does the quantity of
the syllable or of the vowel determine the place of accent ( A ns . The
quantity of the syllable ; the vowel may be short, but the syllable long.)When can a short penult take the accent ?
LESSON VI .
THE ENGLISH METHOD.
39. For those who prefer to retain the English pronuncia
tion , the following rules are given . The pupil should notice
that the long or Short vowel-Sounds indicated in these rules
are wholly independent of the real quantity Of the vowel .
1. In monosyllables the vowel has
a . The long sound, if it ends the syllable ; as, 81, me , ape .
b. The short sound, if followed by a consonant ; as, 5b , cum ,
hbc , h i s . Exce t pos t , monosyllables in es, and ( in plural cases)as, where it has t e long sound ; as, rés , h6 8 . be.
2 . A n accented penult has
a. The long vowel-sound before a single consonant ( or a muteth 1or r ) , or before a vowel or diphthong ; as, pa
'ter , lib-er-a
’lis ,
dé’us , sa’cra , pa
'tris .
b. The short vowel-sound before two consonants ( except a mutefollowed by l or r) or x ; as, reg
’num, rex
’l .
3. A n accented antepeuult has
a. The long vowel-sound before a vowel ; as, E’adem, h i
’
e-m is .
fii’e-rat .
b. The short vowel-sound before a consonant ; as, in’su-la,
i-tin’e-ris .
EXCEPTIONS. ( a) it before a single consonant (or a mute withl or r ) has the long sound : jfi
'v e-n is , lfl
’ri-dus , pu
’tri-dus ; but
before bl the Short sound, as in res -pub’li-ca.
36 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
It is ver common, in English pronunciation , to slur or suppress
the more iflicult consonant-sounds, particularly in such cases as
on, gn, ps, p t, tm, or as, at the beginning of a. word, as in C nidus ,
gnotus , ps eudOpteris , Tmolus , xy lon . But in an accurate
pronunciation of these as Latin or Greek words, the full consonant
sound will be retained.
Finally, there can be no correct rule to authorize the Sli shod
and slovenly habit of enunciation which is frequently allowe Tocultivate a clear and vigorous utterance of unfamiliar words is one Of
the incidental benefits of careful instruction in a foreign tongue.
LESSON VII .
LATIN VERBS.
40. Verbs in Latin , as in English , assert action , being, or
state of being.
41. Verbs are also class ified . according to their meaning,into
1. Transitive verbs, which require an object ; as ,He beats the slave.
2 . Intransitive verbs, which do not require an Object ; as,The man runs .
42 . Verbs have also voice, mode, tense, number , and person .
43. Verbs have two voices
1. The active voice, which Shows that the subject does the action ;The father loves his son .
2 . The passive voice, which Shows that the subject sufiers the
t'
ac Ion as ,The son is loved by his father.
44. There are four modes : the indicative, subj unctive,imperative, and infinitive. The indicative, imperative , andinfinitive have, in general the same use in Latin as in English . The use of the subjunctive can be learned best in
connection with the syntax Of the verb.
LATIN VERBS. 37
45 . Verbs have six tenses ‘: three for incomplete action
and three for completed action .
1. Ten ses for I ncomp lete A ction .
1. PRESENT I write, I am wr iting.
2 . IMPERFEC T I was writing, I wrote.
3. FUTURE I shall write, I will wr ite.
11. Tenses for C omp leted A ction .
1. PERFEC T I have wr itten, I wrote.
2 . PLUPERFECT I had tv’
f'itten .
3. FUTURE PERFECT I shall have written .
OBS . The indicative mood has all six tenses ; the subj unctive hasthe present, im ierfect, perfect, and mluperfect ; the im rative has
the present andfuture only ; and re infinitive has $23present,perfect, future, and future perfect.
46 . Tenses are also distinguished as ,
1. P r incip a l , or P r imary Ten ses .
l . PRESENT I write .
2 . PERFECT DEP IN ITE I have wr itten .
3. FUTURE I shall write.
l l . H is tor ica l , or Seconda ry Ten ses .
l . IMPERFECT I was writing.
2 . AORIST, or HISTORICA L PERFECT I wrote .
3. PLUPERFECT I had written.
47 . The present, future , pluperfect, and future perfect"
tenses have, in general , the same use in Latin as in English .
48 . The imperfect tense expresses an action as going on
in past time , i .e. a continued , repeated , or customary pastaction ; as ,
I was writing. I used to wr ite.
49. The perfect tense has two uses , distinguished as
(per
feet definite and aorist, or historical perfect, correspon ingto the perfectand past tenses in English ; as ,
I have written ( definite) .
I wrote (aorist, or historical perfect) .
38 F I RST STEPS IN LA TIN .
50. Verbs , like nouns , have two numbers , Singular and
plural ; and three p ersons , first, second , and third .
51. The voice , mode, tense , number , and person of a
Latin verb is indicated by the endings ; as ,
amat, he loves . amabat. he was loving.
52. The various verbal forms that have voice , mood , tense ,number , and person , make up thefin ite
3verb . Besides these,
there are three other forms derived from verbs , and partakingof their signification . These are
1. The p articiple, which gives the meaning of the verb in theform of an adjective. A Latin verb has four participles : two in
the active, the present and the future ; and two in the passive, the
perfect and the gerundive ; as,
A ctive .
im i n s , loving.
imatfi rus , about to love.
P a ss ive .
amatus , loved .
iman dus , deserving to be loved .
2 . The gerund, which gives the meaning o f the verb in the form
of a verbal noun of the second declension . I t corresponds to the
English verbal noun in -ing as,
5mandI, of loving.
3. The sup ine, which gives the meaning of the verb in the form
of a verbal noun of the fourth declension . It has two forms, onein -um, the other in -u ; as,
imi tam , to love . imatfi , to be loved.
53. The principal parts of a verb are , the p resent indica
tive, the p resent infin itive, the perfect indicative, and the p er
feet particip le. These are called the p r incipal parts , because
all the other parts of the verb are formed from them.
OBS . The supine in-um, called by man grammarians one of
the pr incipal parts of the verb, belongs , in act, to only about two
hundred Latin verbs ; then , again , those verbs that are invariablyintransitive have the perfect participle in the neuter gender only .
This part, then, called in the dictionaries the supine in-um, must,
40 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
OBS. The pupil will notice that the infinitive in Latin is formednot as in English, by placing the preposition to before the simpleform of the verb, but b adding
-re. Each of these verbs has, also ,a characteristic vowel efore the infinitive ending, which inis a , in mOneo is -e in régo is -é
’
and in audio is -i
55 . A ccordingly, Latin verbs are divided into four
classes, called Conj ugations, distinguished from one an
other by the characteristic vowel before the ending-re
of the present infinitive active, as follow s
1. The vowel before -re is called the stem-characteri stic ;thus , the stem of verbs of the first conjugation ends in a,
the second in e, the third in e, the fourth in i .
2 . Besides the present stem, there is Often a Simpler form
that forms the bas is of the entire conjugation , called the
verb-stem . In the first, second , and fourth conjugationsthe verb-stem is generally the same as the present stem ; in
the third conjugation reg is the verb-stem, and régé the
present stem ; as ,
C o n j . I . C on j . I I . C on j . I I I . C onj . IV.
mené rég mi nn
mbne-re, reg-ere, to rule.
to advise . minn-ére, to lessen .
3. The verb-stems of the first, second , and fourth conju
gations end in the vowels a, e, i ; the verb-stem of the third
conjugation ends in a consonant or in u ; hence the distinc
tion of vowel and consonant conjugations .
F IRST CONJUGA TION . 41
Tell to which conjugation each of the following verbs
belongs :
PRESENT IND ICATtvE. INFIN ITWE.
1. laud o , I p raise1 laudAre , to praise.
2 . déleo , I destroy ; 6 616119, to destroy.
3. tego , I cover ; tégere, to cover .
4. mfinio , I fortify ; infinit e, tofortify.
5 . aud io , I hear audi t s . to hear .
6 . habeo , I have ; habare. to have.
7 . haurio , I drain ; haurlre, to drain .
8 . niiméro , I count ; nfimérar e. to count.
9. ffigio , I fl ee ffigtre, toflee.
10. on e , I wonder ; sn ar e , to wander.
11. mbveo , I move ; mbvére, tomove.
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS
1. Notice that the pronoun I is supplied in translating.
How many conjugations are there ? How is each distinguished ?
What is meant by the conjugation of a verb ? How does the Latin
verb express tense?person number ?
LESSON IX.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
PRESENT INDICAT IVE ACTIVE.
56 . A ll verbs whose characteristic vowel before the
ending-re in the Present Infinitive is -d belong to the
first conjugation .
P r esen t Ten se.
57 . The Present Tense is formed by adding personal
Endings\ to the Present Stem.
1
F IRST CONJUGA TION . 43
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
1. The endings were originally personal pronouns : laudas means
not love,but thou Iovest. The pronoun, when used as the subject of the
verb,need not
,therefore, be expressed. Note, fur ther , that the endings
show the number and person of the subject, but not the gender.
OBS. This is true, in general, only when the verb is of the fi rst or
second person . With the third person , a definite subject should be ex
pressed, unless implied in what precedes or follows.
2 . Note that the Present Indicative present stem personal end
ings, and that m o imo ; also, that it has lost the m (which
appears in sum, inquam ) . The 0 stands for m and the preceding
vowel ; as , Ema ima-o-m.
3. Read, I pra ise, etc .
4. The stem is lauda, and by adding the personal ending we get
lauda-O,which is contracted into laudo.
5. Remember that the present tense in English has three forms
1. laudo , I praise, I am praising, I do praise.
2 . laud i s , thou pra isest, thou art praising, thou dost praise.
3. laudi t, he praises, he is praising, he does pr
6 . Observe that no separate Latin word is required for the pronouns
I, thou, he, we, they, etc . thus , pfign imua, we fight, contains the pro
noun we, and is a complete sentence in one word,i.e. contains a subject
and predicate as,
pugna-mus
fight-we
pt'
igna signifying fight, is the stem, and m us , signifying we, the
personal ending.
How is the first conjugation distinguished ? What is meant by thecharacteristic vowel ? How is the stem found ? What are the personalendings What do these endings Show ? Does the present tense denote
completed or incomplete action A NS . The present stem,and the tenses
formed from it, present, imperfect, and future,—denote incompleteaction .
44 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON X .
FIRST CONJUGATION (con tinued ) .
Imp erfect an d F utur e Ten ses .
58 . The Imperfect and Future Tenses are formed,
like the Present, by adding the endings to the Present
StemPA R TI A L P A R A D IGM .
1. A nalysis of the Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative A ctive
1. Present ind. Pres. stem Personal endings .
2 . Imperf. ind . Pres. stem Tense-sign-ba Personal endings .
3. Future ind . Pres . stem Tense-sign-bi Personal endings .
FI RST CONJUGATION . 45
OBS. The future, like the present, has lost the m in the first
person singular : imabo amabom as the present amo amom
( of. sum) .
VOCA BULARY.
PRESENT. PRESENT Su n.
1. rOgo. ask.
2 . plough.
3. para.p repare.
4. narro. narrate.
EXERC ISES.
A nalyz e ; translate into English
rOgat . 6 . pfign l bl tfs .
7. dbnablmus .
rOgl bts .‘ 8 . parabtt.
portabant .2 9. arabunt .
laudab lmus . 10. vbcabts .
NOTES AND QUESTIONS.
1. In translating the second person singular, as well as the second
person plural, you is commonly used ; as , Emu , you love, and m ans.
you love but ima is used of one person, and amas of more
than one.
2 . Observe that, in the conjugation of the imperfect and future, the
stem and personal endings are the same as in the present ; that between
these there is a tense-sign,-ba in the imperfect and -b1 in the future.
The elements of the verb then, in the imperfect and future tenses, are
l et. The Stem ; 2d. The Tense-sign ; 3d . The Personal Endings ; as ,
lauda-ba-mus
pra ising-were-we
lauda being the stem ; -ba were, the tense-sign ; and omus , we, the
personal ending.
What is tense ? How many divisions of time ? What is mode ?
How many modes ? How is the present tense formed ? How the future ?
Write the inflection in the imperfect ; in the future.
46 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XI .
LATIN NOUNS.
INFLECTION.
59. The meaning of Latin nouns is altered by In
flection ; that is, by changing the form of the word,
generally the endings, to denote some modification of
its meaning, or to Show its relation to other words.
The Inflection of nouns, of pronouns, and of adjectives,is called Declension . The Inflection of verbs is called
Conj ugation .
Stem an d Sum .
60. The body of the word , to which the suffix is attached ,is called the stem ; as ,
mili tia : milit is the stem, and -is the termination .
-When the stem ends in a vowel and the suffix begins w ith
a vowel, contraction takes place, and the final vowel of the
stem sometimes disappears ; as ,
mensae : the stem is mensaa, and the suffix -i-s, which unite
to form mensas , the 3being dropped .
1. Each case-form, therefore , contains two distinct parts
the stem, which gives the general mean ing of the word ; and
the case-suffix, which Shows the relation of that meaning to
some other word ; as , in
mili tia, of a soldier the general idea, soldier, is expressed bythe stem mul t the relation of; by the suffix -is .
OBS. It may be found convenient to divide inflected words notonly into stem and termination , but into base and termination, thebase 1being the part of the word that remains unchanged by inflection ; as, s ervus ( which stands for s erv o s ) , a slave, gen . sex
-vi , of
a slave. s ervO is the stem,-'
I'
is the termination , or case-suffix ;the O is dropped before i to form s erv i , of a slave ; but s erv to
which the case-endings are added, remains unchanged by inflection ,
and may be called the base.
48 FIRST STEPS I N LA TIN .
1. The Nominative, the case of the subject of the sentence .
It answers the question who? or what? ; as ,
The boy reads . Who reads ? The boy.
Th e fi re burns . What burns ? Thefire.
Boy andfire are , therefore, in the nominative case.
2 . The Genitive, usually translated into English by the
possessive case. or by the prepos ition of . It answers the
question whose of whom i of what as ,
The man's coat. Whose coat? The man
’
s.
The heat of the fire. Of what‘t Of thefire.
Man’
s and of thefire are genitives .
3. The Dative , usually translated by the prepositions to
or for . It answers the question to or for whom or what? ; as ,
The teacher gives a book to the boy . TO whom ? To
the boy.
To the boy is , therefore, in the dative.
4. The A ccusative, the object of a transitive verb, and of
many Latin prepositions . I t names the object, whom i or
what i ; as ,
The man strikes the boy . Strikes whom? The boy .
The child fears the fire . Fears what? Thefi re.
Boy and fire are accusative.
5 . TheVocative, or the case used in addressing a person
or thing ; as ,
0 boy ! 0 fire !
The fault, dear Brutus , is not in our stars .
Boy ,fire, and Brutus are in the vocative case .
6 . The A blative, usually translated by from , with, by, in ,
or at ; as ,
The boy str ikes the ball w ith the bat . With what ?—Withthe bat.
Then with the bat is the ablative.
OBS. 1. The Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Ablative are
called the oblique cases .
OBS. 2 . A seventh case, the Locative, denoting the place when ,
is found In a few words .
LA TIN NOUNS . 49
GENER A L VI EW OF THE CA SES A ND THEI R ENGLI SH
EQUIVA LENTS.
R e l ation to C o r re spon d ing A n sw e r s w h a t
O th e r W o rd s . C as e in Eng l ish . Que s tion .
Nominative. who or what it
0 0 Q
Gemti ve. Possessi ve, or of.Possession, or of whose ? of whom .
with objective. of what i’
Objective, w ith To or forDative. Indi rect Obj ect.
to or for . whom i or what?
A ccusative. Direct Object. Objective. whom or what
Vocative. Case ofA ddress . Independent .
Used in addressingperson or thing .
Objective, with With, in, from, by ,
Ablative. A dverbial. with, in, from, at
whom i? or what
DEC LENSION.
66 . Latin nouns have five Declensions, which are
distinguished by the final letters of the stem, or by the
terminations of the genitive Singular as,
OBS. The method of distinguishing the declension by the end
ing of the genitive singular had better be adopted at first, because
it is used in dictionaries and vocabularies to designate the deelen
50 F IRST STEPS IN LA T IN .
sion, and because the use of the stem is confusing to young pu ils.
The plan of cutting off -rum or -um from the genitive plura in
order to find the stem, and so determine the declension, presupposesthat the pupil is already able to decline the word.
General Rules of Declension
Neuter nouns of all declensions have the nominative, accu
sative, and vocative singular alike ; the nominative,
accusative, and vocative plural are also alike, and always
end in d .
The nominative, accusative, and vocative plural are alike in
all nouns of the third, fourth, and fifth declensions .
The nominative and vocative are alike, except in the singular
of nouns in -as of the second declension .
The dative and ablative plural are always alike.
The genitive plural always ends in-um.
EXERC ISES.
A nalyz e the following sentences . State the Latin case to
be used to represent each noun
1. The sailor has a cottage. 2 . The cottage of the sailor
has a table. 3. Galba sees the gates of Rome . 4. Titus
wounded the man w ith an arrow . 5 . Titus gave the book
to his friend . 6 . The sailors of Galba wound the sailors of
Titus with arrows . 7 . The soldiers of Caesar defend the
towers w ith stones . 8 . Caesar sees the walls of Rome.
9. The leaders of the people give peace to the city .
NOTES A ND QUESTI ON S.
1. The base is the same as the stem with the final vowel removed ;
the endings , therefore, contain the final vowel of the stem and the
suflixes, both being obscured by contraction . If the stem ends in a
consonant, then the stem and base are the same, and the endings are
the simple case-endings ; as, reg-is . Reg is both the stem and the base
to which the case-endings may be attached unchanged.
2 . Note that gender in English denotes sex,—masculine nouns
denoting males, feminine nouns females , and neuter nouns neither ma le
norfemale. In Latin, this natural distinction of gender is applied only
52 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
EXERC ISES.
Decline the following words like mensa . Give the mean
ing ,
8the case, the stem, the gender, the number , and the
case-endings of each
1. insulae .
2 . agricOlae.
3.
68 . T follow reek nouns is in
serted for convenience of reference ; they should be omitted
for the present :
SYN . P orta is the gate of a city ; janua , the door ( street-door)of a house ; valvae,folding-doors in a temple and fine buildings .
NOTES A ND QUEST I ONS.
1. Nouns in -E, «is, and i s are Greek words, mostly proper names.
2 . A ll nouns in a are feminine unless they denote males ; as , nauta,
a sailor, is masculine by signification. (See
3. The base of mensa is mens and to this the case-endings are
added to form the cases . The stem of mensa is mensé the final -ii of
the stem disappears in the dative and ablative plural.
SUBJECT A ND PRED ICA TE. 53
4. A s there is no article in Latin, mem e may mean table, a table, or
the table, according to the sense required.
5 . The pupil should learn the vocabularies so well that he can give
at once the English when the Latin is pronounced, or the Latin when
the English is pronounced.
6 . The ending -ae is the case-ending of the genitive. (See
7 . In the vocabularies, i t . indicates the masculine gender ; F ., the
feminine ; and N ., the neuter .
8 . In translating the exercises, give all possible meanings of each
form . For example, insfilae may be genitive or dative singular, or
nominative or vocative plural : of an island, to or for an island, ye
islands, or O islands .
How do you distinguish nouns of the first declension ? How the
gender? How do you find the stem ? (This can be found by taking
away the case-ending of the genitive plural,
-rum. ) How do you accent
agrloblae? What is the quantity of the penult of puella
? How
many numbers have Latin nouns ? How many cases Name them.
How many genders ?
LESSON XIII .
SUBJECT AND PBBDIOATB.
EXAMP LES.
l . agri cola vbcat, thefarmer calls .
2 . agricblae vboant, thefi zrmers call .
3. puellae laudant. the girls p raise.
OBS. In the sentence the farmer cal ls , farmer is the subject,and is in the nominative case ; calls is the predicate. Study the
other examples, and note (1 if the subject is singular, the verb is
singular ; ( 2) if the subject is plural, the verb must also be plural ;and (3) that the subject and the predicate agree in person as well
as in number. Hence the following rules
SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE
m. RULE I .- 'l‘h e subject of a fin ite verb is put
in the nominative case.
54 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
AGREEMENT OF THE VERB .
70. RULE II . A fi n ite verb agrees w ith its sub
j cet-nom inative in n umber an d person .
71. Model for parsing nouns
agricbla vbcat. the farmer calls agricbla is a masculine noun ,
masculine by signification first declension, because it has -ae
in the gen itive singular ; stem, agrtcb’
l‘
declined, sing. agricb’
la,
agricb’
lae, agricb’
lae, agricb’
lam, agricb’
la, agricb’
ld, plural agricb'
lae,
agricb’
la'
rum, agricb'
lis, agrico’
las , agricb’
lae, agricb'
lis. It is nomina
tive singular, and is the subject of vbcat , according to Rule I
The subj ect of afinite verb is in the nominative case.
72 . Model for parsing verbs
agri cOla vbcat, the farmer calls : vbcat is a transitive verb of
the first conjugation ,indicative mode, present tense, third person
singular , to agree with the subject agricOla, according to Rule IIA finite verb agrees with the subj ect-nominative in number and person .
VOC A BULA RY.
régina.-ae, F . , queen . pugno , i re,fight.
scri'
ba, -as , M . , clerk. cOn-firmo , a re , establish.
délecto .2 -5re, delight. porto , fi re. carry.
occupo r h e.take possession of; seize . d éno, «i re.give.
EXERC ISES.
A nalyz e the following sentences ; parse each word ; trans
late into English
1. rég'
ina laudat.3 4. Laudas .
4
2 . scribae portant. 5 . Laudamus .
3. puellae laudant. 6 . Reg‘
inae dOnant.
Translate into Latin
1. We fight, they fight, he fights . 2 . The5 sailor calls .
3. The queen praises . 4. The queens praise. 5 . We praise.
6 . They establish.
56 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
74. Model for pars ing the object
agri cbla nautas vbcat, the farmer calls the sailors : nautas is a
masculine noun of the first declension , masculine by signification ,
and first declension because it has -ae in the genitive singular
stem,nautd declined, sing. nauta, nautae, nautae, nautam, nauta,
nauta, plural nautae, nautarum, nautis, nautc'
ts , nautae, nautis. It is
in the accusative plural, the object of v6 cat, according to Rule IIIThe direct obj ect of a transitive verb is p ut in the accusative.
VOC A BULA RY.
fi'
lia,1-ae , F .
, daughter . paro ,2p repare.
péci'
ini a,-ae. F .
, money . arc .p lough.
imic i tia ,-s e. F .
, friendship . give.
Ep is tii la ,-ae , F .
, letter . ex specto. expect.
EXERC ISES.
A nalyz e the following sentences ; parse each word ; trans
late into English
1. A gricblae“nautam vbcant. 2 . Vbcamus . 3. Regina
filiam 5 amat. 4. Regina amicitiam cbnfirmat. 5 . Laudamus .
6 . Puella épistiilam exspectabat.
Translate into Latin
1. The queen calls . 2 . The queen calls her 6 daughter .
3. They establish friendship . 4. They praise , they call,
they prepare. 5 . The queen praises . 6 . We praise .
7 . The girls are expecting7 letters .
NOTES A ND QUESTI ON S.
1. A few words of the first declension have the dative and ablative
plural in-5bus ; as, fi lia, a daughter ; d ea, a goddess .
2 . Write the infinitive.
3. The infinitive of do is d i re ; short a before -re.
4. See 63.
5 . Render her daughter . The pronouns hi s her,their , are seldom
expressed in Latin ,when no confusion could arise from their omission.
In translating, they are to be supplied from the context.
NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION . 57
6 . Not to be translated.
7 . Remember that the indicative has three forms in English .
Which cases of the first declension are alike in the singular? Which
in the plural? Write the ablative singular of fi lia. How many ways
can you translate v6 cant ? Name the stem of vbcant. Is vbcant a
complete sentence why? What is a sentence What is the case of
the direct Object in Latin ? What tenses express incomplete action ?
Where does the direct object usually stand
LESSON XV.
NOUNS. SECOND. DECLENSION.
75 . Nouns of the Second Declension end in -er ,-ir,
-us, and -os, masculine ; mm and -on , neuter .
a . Those in -os or -ou are Greek words, chiefly proper nouns .
1. Nouns in -us are declined as follows
P A R A D IGM.
2 . The stem of nouns of the second declension ends in -6
thus the stem Of dOmInus is dOmIn6
3. The characteristic -0 becomes -u in the nominative Of
nouns in -us or -um ; it disappears in the end ings-i and -is
( for -o-i and -o-is ) . The nominative Singular of deminus
was originally Gammon.
62 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XVI I .
NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION.
79. Nouns in «um are declined as follows
P A R A D IGM .
C a se s . Singular .
bellum,war .
belli, ofbellO, to orfor war .
bellum,war .
bellum, 0 war .
bellO, with,f rom or by war . wars .
1. Like bellum , decline
1. templum , temple. 3. exemplum, examp le.
2 . dOnum, gift. 4. oppid um, town.
D a tive C a se after Tr an s itive Ver bs .
EXAMP LES.
1. Librum puért‘
) dat , he gives the book to the boy.
2 . Galba Belgis insid ias p i rat, Galba p repares snares for theBelgians .
OBS. In the sentence, he gives the book to the boy, or he gives the
boy the book, note that the verb gives is transitive, and that i t isfo llowed by the direct object, book, in the accusative, and an ind irect object, boy, in the dative. Hence the following rule
IND IRECT OBJECT.
80. RULE VI . Th e in d ir ect obj ect of an action
is put in th e dative .
1. A fter many transitive verbs the dative of the indirect
object is used , together w ith the accusative of the direct.
bella, wars .
bellOrnm, of wars .
bellis, to orfor wars.
bella, wars .
bella, 0 wars .
bellis , with,f rom, or by
64 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
2 . Note the order of the words'
: the indirect object usually precedesthe direct.
What nouns of the second declension are neuter ? What is thedifference in the manner of declining magis ter and puer
? Whatcases are alike in neuter nouns ?
LESSON XVI I I .
PREPOSITIONS.
81. Latin Prepositions are used either with the A c
cusative or w ith the A blative.
EXA M PLES.
in Galliam , into Gaul .
in Gallifi, in Gaul .
cum v iris , with ( in company with) the men .
ex ( or 6 ) prbvincia,from ( out of ) thep rovince.
5. per Oppi da, through the towns .
p
oo
re
r-a
OBS. Note that the preposition in , w ith the accusative, meansinto ; with the ablative, it means in . per means through, and is
followed by the accusative ; cum is followed by the ablative, and
means with ( in company with) .
VOC A BULA RY.
cum , prep . w . abl., with.
6 6 , prep . W . abl . , from, concern
ing, for .
ex , prep. w . abl . ,from, out qf.
ab , prep . w . abl . , from, away
ad , prep . w . acc., to, towards .
frumentum , J, N ., grain .
bra,-ao, F ., coast, shore.
pr6v incia,-ae, F .
, p rovince.
s ine, prep . w . abl., without.
Gal l ia, -ae, F ., Gaul.
in , prep . w . acc., into ; w . abl.,
in or on .
amb ti lo , walk.
hab i to , dwell in .
porto , carry.
comporto , collect.
PREPOSITIONS. 65
EXERC ISES.
A nalyz e the following sentences parse each word ; trans
late into English
1. Frfimentum in prbvinciam2
portant. 2 . In oppide
habitabat. 3. Magister cum puéris in agrO ambillat. 4. Virab insiilae Ora ambfilat. 5 . Cum Belgie amic
‘
itiam cOnfir
mant. 6 . Fr iimenta ex agris comportant. 7 . A uxilium a
viris implOrant. 8 . Reman’
i agrbs vastabunt.
Translate into Latin
1. They dwell in the town . 2 . In the province . 3. Into
the province . 4. He conveys grain from the fields . 5 . In
the town . 6 . Into the town . 7 . He conveys the grain into
the town . 8 . He walks in the field with ( his )3son . 9. They
walk away from the shore. 10. With the Gauls . 11. He
establishes friendship with the Romans .
NOTES A ND QUEST I ON S.
1. a and 6 are used only before words beginning with a consonant ;
ab and ex before either a vowel or a consonant.
2 . A preposition with its noun is a phrase ; when the phrase limits a
verb,as it does in this case, it is called an adverbial phrase ; when it
limits a noun , it is an adj ective phrase. No special model is necessary
for parsing nouns with prepositions .
OBS. Observe the distinction between the prepositions in and ex , and
ad and ab . in (w ith the accusative ) and ex denote motion to andfromthe inside of a place ; ad and ab ( or a ) denote motion to and f rom the
outs ide of a place. Thus , véni t in I ti liam , when one comes into I ta ly ;ex I téli i , when one comes out of I taly ; but ad I taliam , to I taly ,
when
there is no notion of entering into Italy conveyed ; just so ab I tali fi,away from I taly, when it is simply expressed that he came away fromItaly .
3. Words in parenthesis are not to be translated .
Which cases do prepositions govern ? Mention a preposition that
governs the accusative. What kind of a phrase is a preposition and
its noun ?
66 FIRST STEPS IN LAT IN .
LESSON XIX.
ADJECTIVES.
— I‘IBST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
82 . A djectives are words used to describe nouns ; and
as nouns are of different genders, adjectives are declined
to agree w ith the genders of the noun .
1. A djectives of the first and second declens ions have
one form for the masculine gender , another for the feminine,and a third for the neuter . Thus
The masculine is declined like dOmInus .
The feminine is declined like mens a.
The neuter is declined like bellum.
EXA M PLES.
1. v i r bdnus . a good man . 3. v iri bOnI. good men .
2 . régina bbna, a good queen . 4. v lrds bOnbs , good men.
5 . templum magnum, a great temple.
OBS. In these examples, note that the adjectives are all in thesame gender , number , and case as the nouns . Hence the followingrule
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
83. RULEVII — A d jectives agree w ith th eir n oun s
in gender , n um ber , an d case.
1. Declension of adjectives of the first and second deelen
s ions ( stems ending in-6 or -d is as follows
P A R A D IGM . bbnus , good .
ADJECTIVES. 67
2 . Decline together mfirus altus , a high wall .
C ases . Singular . P lural .
miiras altus , a high wall. n dri'
alti, high walls .
mfir i’
alti , of a high wall. miirbrum altbrum, qfhighwalls .
miir'
c'
) to orfor a high wall. miiris altis , to orfor high walls.
mfirum altum,a high wall. miirbs alt-Os, high walls .
mfire alte, 0 high wall.
{mfirb altO, with, f i
'
om, or by miiris altis, with, from, or by
a high wall. high walls .
3. A djectives usually stand after their nouns , but an em
phatic adjective may stand before the noun .
4. A djectives are often used as nouns , especially in the
plural masculine or neuter : as , bbnt. good men ; multa ( neut.
plur . ) many things ; omnia. all things .
84. Model for parsing an adjective
réglnam bbnam laudo , I praise the good queen : bbnam is an
adjective of the first and second declensions ; stems. bone? and
bond ; declined, singular bb’
nus, bb’
na, bb’
num, etc . ; plural bc‘
in i,
bb’
nae, bb’
nc‘
i, etc . It is in the accusative feminine singular, and
agrees with rég‘
inam , according to RuleVII . A dj ectives agree withtheir nouns in gender, number, and case.
VOCA BULA RY.
multus , -a, -um , many . di scipii lus ,-i
'
, M ., pup il.
nbvus , -a, -um. new. miirus , -i , M ., wall .
c i rus , -a, -um , dear . lacrima.-ae , F ., tear .
altus , -a,-um , high or deep . R hénus , -i , M .
, Rhine ( r iver) .
magnus , -a,-um , large. ripa,
-ae , F ., bank.
fl iiv ius , -i , M ., r iver . l i tus , -a,-um , broad .
r i pIdus ,-a,
-um , swifl . v érus , -a,-um , true.
SYN . M fi rus denotes any wall ; paries (gen .-5tis ) , wall of a
house ; moenia (gen .—6 rum ) , wall of a city to protect from the
enemy.
68 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
85 . Decline together the following, making the adjectiveagree with the noun in gender , number , and case.
1. oppi dum mfinitum , a fortified town .
2 . puer bbnus , a good child.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Multis cum lacrim'
is i 2 . In 1 prOvinciam mag nam .
3. Per multOs agrOs . 4. Cum servis bOnis . 5 . Trans 2
Rhénum pfignat. 6 . Importamus friimentum in Galliam .
7 . Magister bOnus dat librum n6vum carO discipfiléfi 8 . A d
ripam Rhéni'
.
Translate Into Latin
1. Of the high walls . 2 . A cross the broad river . 3. The
master gives the book to the good boy . 4. With many men .
5 . With good Slaves . 6 . A cross the broad rivers . 7 . The
good girl loves the queen .
SYN . Magis ter (magis , greater ) is a master of a school, of a
feast, etc. dbminus , master of a family, or of slaves .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. Note the meaning of in , followed by the accusative.
2 . The preposition trans is followed by the accusative, and means
across .
3. The pupil is expected to analyz e the sentences, to point out the
modifiers of the subject and of the predicate, and to parse each word.
What is an adjective Of what declensions are adjectives ? The
rule for the agreement of adjectives ?
LESSON XX.
ADJECTIVES.
—PIBST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
86 . Besides adjectives in -as,-a, mm, there are others
of three terminations in -er ,-a,
-um. They are declined
as follows
A DJECTIVES. 69
PA R A D IGM . ni ger. black.
Singul ar . P lu ra l .
Masc. Neuter . Masc . Fem. Neuter .
niger nigra nigrum nigri nigrae nigra
GEN . nigri nigrae nigri nigrbrum nigr i rnm nigrbrum
DA T . nigrae nigrb nigris nigris nigris
A C C . nigrum nigrum nigrum nigrbs nigr i s nigra
VOC . niger nigra nigrum nigri nigrae nigra
A BL . nigrb nigra nigri”
) nigris
tdner , tender .
1. n iger is declined in the masculine like magister. anddrops the e ; téner is declined in the masculine like puer,
and keeps the e. Both are declined in the feminine likemensa, and in the neuter like bellum .
2 . Most adjectives in -er drop the e in inflection ; i .e. , are
declined like n i ger . The following retain the e, and are de
clined like tener
l . mi ser, wretched . 4. li cer , torn .
2 . asper , rough. 5. li ber , free.
3. téner , tender . 6 . pro sper , fortunate.
A nd the compounds of -ger and
-fer .
87 . Decline together , making the A djective agree with
the Noun in gender , number , and case :
1. puer aeger , a sick boy. 2 . v i r liber , a free man.
3. puella pulchra, a beautiful girl.
70 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
VOCA BULA RY.
aeger ,-gra, g rum, sick. pdp ifl us , -i , M . , peop le.
mi ser , -6ra. -6rum, wretched. meus ,-a,
-um (voc. M . mi ) , my .
nos ter , -tra, -trum, our . périctilum,-i , N .
, danger .
asper , é ra,-6rum, rough. ltScus ,2 -i , M ., place.
R fimanus ,l -a,
-um , Roman . cas tra, -6 rum N ., camp .
t ai nus , -i , M . ,Rhone ( river) . matriménium,-i , N .
, marriage.
occiipo, seiz e. lfi dus , -i , M ., school.
SYN . M i ser (opp. beatus ,fortunate) , said of one who feels himself unfortunate ; infeliz ( opp . félix ) , of one for whom nothinggoes according to his wish .
EXERC ISES.
Pronounce ; translate ; decline each noun , and give its
stem ; parse the verbs :
1. MagnO cum3péricfile. 2 . Ex Gallia. 3. In Galliam .
4. In Gallia. 5 . Trans t danum in Galliam. 6 . In esper’
ie
loc'
is castra lata conlOcat. 7 . Reman‘
i libéra Gallbrum “op
pida occupant. 8 . Puellae bOnae rég’
inam pulchram amant.
Translate into Latin
1. In great danger . 2 . With great danger . 3. In com
pany with the beautiful girl . 4. The beautiful girl loves
the queen . 5 . Out of Gaul into Italy . 6 . Into the free
town . 7 . The Roman people seiz e the towns .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. In the Latin expression for Roman people the adjective Rbmanusalways follows the noun .
2 . lOcus is masculine in the singular , but is both masculine and
neuter in the plural, and is thus declined : nom. 160i , passages in books ,
and Rica, places ; gen. lc rum ; dat. lbc‘
i s ; acc. 1606 5 and lbca ;
voc . lbci and lbca ; abl. lbci s .
3. cum stands between the adjective and the noun .
4. The genitive of the possessor (190) usually stands between the
noun and the adjective limiting the noun .
With what cases are Latin prepositions used ? When is in used
with the accusative ? What is the gender of nouns of the second de
clension How does vi r'
i aegr'
i differ in meaning from aegfi v IrI ?
72 F I RST STEPS IN LA TIN .
PLUPER FECT TEN SE .
P er so n . F o rm ation . Exam p le . Engl ish .
Sing. 1 Perf. stem ram ami veram I had loved.
r i s ami vérds Thou hadst loved.
rat i mi vérat He had loved .
P lur . 1 rfimus amévér imus IVe had loved.
r i tis ami vérétis You had loved .
rant amévérant They had loved .
F UTUR E PER F ECT TENSE .
Sing. 1 Perf. stem ro
r is
rit
P lar . 1 rimus
r itis
r int
OBS. The characteristic vowel of the stem is shortened in the
first person plural of the perfect, and in the third person plural it
is changed to e in the pluperfect and future perfect it is
changed to 5. Final consonants are usually less distinctly pronounced, and for this reason are oftener dropped . In this wayfimfiv érun t is shortened to fimfivére ,— in this form v is never
dropped .
1. A nalysis of the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect
A ctive Of all Conjugations
1. Perfect Perf . stem Personal endings .
9 Pluperfect Tense Sign-ra Personal endings .
3. Put. perfect Tense Sign-ri Personal endings .
2 . In the tenses formed from the perfect stem , v between
two vowels is often suppressed . and the second vowel is
merged in the first ( except te) ; as ,
EXA M PLES.
PLUPERFECT amaveram amaeram emi ram
FUTURE PERFEC T amévéro amaero ami ro
PERFECT , 3d per . plur . amavérunt amaerunt ami runt
PERFECT, 2d per . plur . amavisti amaisti amasti
I shall have loved.
Thou wilt have loved .
He will have loved.
We shall have loved.
You will have loved .
They will have loved .
74 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
1. d o is irregular ; it has a short before -re,and the perfect is déd i .
2 . Translate the perfect both ways ; as , he has la id waste, and he la id
waste.
3. The preposition circum means around, and is followed by the s e
cusative, as are also trans , across , inter, between, among, and propter ,
on account of :
4. Note the two objects of dédit.OBS. Note that the pluperfect and future perfect have, in addition
to the personal endings, a tense Sign ,-ra
,-r i as,
amfivé-ra-nt, loved-had-they,
the perfect stem being amav‘
i the pluperfect tense sign-ra, had , the
personal ending-nt, they.
What kind of time does the perfect denote? What are the divi
sions of time ? How is the present stem found ? The perfect stem?
Decline filia .
LESSON XXII .
PIBST CONJUGATION.—ACTI
'VE VOICE.
IMPERAT IVE MODE. QUEST IONS.
90. Simple sentences are, in Latin as in English
1. DECLA RA T IVE ; as, puer laudat , the boy p raises.
2 . INTERROGA TIVE ; as, puernel laud at , does the boy p raise ?
3. IMPERA T IVE ; as, laudate, p raise ye .
4. ExcLAMA TORY ; as, quam forti ter pfi gnat, how bravely he
fights l
91. In Latin , questions are asked by means of Inter
rogative Pronouns , A dverbs , or Particles, and are not
distinguished by the order of the words, as they are in
English.
1. In s imple questions , expecting the answer yes or no.
an Interrogative Particle is used , indicating what answer is
expected .
F IRST CONJUGA TION .—A CTIVE VOICE. 75
a . Questions with the syllable-ne appended ( enclitic) ask
for information , w ithout indicating what answer is expected .
b. Questions with nonne expect the answer yes .
0. Questions w ith num expect the answer no .
2 . For questions w ith Interrogative Pronouns , see 245 .
92. The Imperative Mode is used in commands, ex
hortations, and entreaties .
PRESENT .
F o rm a tio n . Exam p le . Eng l i sh .
Pres . stem Love, or love thou.
Pres . stem te ami te Love, or love ye.
F UTURE .
Pres . stem to Thou sha lt love.
to Il e shall love.
Pres . stein tOteu u
ntO
VOC ATIVE.
93. RULEVIII .— Th e vocative is u sed , eith er w ith
or w ith out an in ter j ection , in add r essin g a p er son or
th ing .
VOC A BULA R Y .
arma ,-6 rum N .
, arms . rOs a ,-ae , F . ,
rose .
proelium ,-I, N . , battle . narro , tell, narrate.
Galb a,-as , M . , Galba . COp ia ,
-ae , F ., abundance .
porta,-as , F ., gate. cop ias F .
, forces .
aed lfi c ium ,-‘
i , N ., building . Ti tus , -
‘
i , M ., Titus .
vi r , v i ri , M .,man . natura ,
-ae , F ., nature .
ins i diae ,-5 rum F ., snares . négé tium ,-i , N ., business .
F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
SYN . Vir , a man , a distinguished man , a husband ; homo ,-In.is ,
a man , a human being, includes both sexes ( opposed to v ir a
fellow) .
EXERC ISES.
Pronounce ; translate ; decline each noun , and give its
stem ; parse the verbs
1. Vastate provinciam . 2 . Vita, Tite, proelium. 3. V605.puéros . 4. Matronane1puellam vocat ? vocat. 5 . Nonne
Galba insidias parat? 6 . Num poeta regi’
nae2rosam dat ?
7 . Matfirate , viri'
.
3 8 . Matiira, Cassi .4 9. Date , viri , R6
man'
is arma .
I
Translate into Latin
1. Call . 2 . Call (ye) . 3. Call the men . 4. Does the
sailor call ? Yes . 5 . Does the farmer plough ? 6 . Tell the
story . 7 . Call the men , C assius . 8 . Hasten , men . 9. Haste
(ye) . 10. Call the men from 5the fields . 11. Praise (ye) .
12 . Praise the pupils .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1.-na is an enclitic, i .e. it seems to lean on the word before it. The
most common enclitics are -que ( and) , -ve, and 416 , used in asking
questions, and also cum , with, when used with pronouns ; as,
puéri puellaeque ad sunt, the boys, and girls too, are here.
-que is the enclitic in English ,
too is the enclitic. The -ne appended
to mi tréna in Ex. 4 throws the accent on the penult ; as,ma-tré-na’ne.
2 . Dative case.
3. See RuleVIII .
4. See 7 5 . 5 .
5 . Use the preposition .
From what stem is the imperative formed ? Does the imperative
denote completed action ? Give the personal endings of the impera
tive. Note that the imperative has no first person . How many tenses
has the imperative?
NOUNS.-THIRD DECLENSION . 77
LESSON XXIII .
NOUNS. THIRD DEOLBNBION.
94. Nouns whose genitive singular ends in-is belong
to the Third Declension .
a . The nominative endings are various : a, e, i, o, y, c, l, n , r ,
s, t, and x ; and nouns of three genders belong to this
declension .
95 . Nouns of the Third Declension may be divided
into two classes
1. Nouns Whose stem ends in a consonant.
2 . Nouns whose stem ends in the vowel i .
96 . Nouns whose stem ends in a consonant increase in
the genitive ; that is , the genitive has more syllables than
the nominative as , index , ind ie-is .
97 . Nouns whose stem ends in a vowel do not increase in
the genitive as , tarris , tun-is . See 110 and 113.
98 . Consonant stems are divided , like the consonants ,
into
1. Lab ial stems
2 . Dfi
ental ate-
ma
3. Lingual stems
4. Gufffi far s tems
99. The Sign Of the Nominative Singular is s , which ,however , is dropped after I, n , r , s , or combines with c or gof the stem to form so : 0 or g s ; t or d disappears before
3 ; as , st. mult (w ith change of vowel)mfl es . The nominative of neuter nouns is the same as the
stem (with sometimes changed vowel , see 100.
80 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XXIV.
NOUNS. THIRD DECLENSION.
102 . Stems ending in Dentals : t, d, s, n .
1. Stems in t, d .
PA R A D IGMS.
2 . Stems in s ( r ) .
PA R AD IGM .
82 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
c . Note that s of the stem becomes r between two vowels ; as ,
fl 6 s , fl 6 ris ( for flfis is ) ; hbnos , later form hbnor , hbnfiris ( for
hon6 s is ) .
d . In the nominative and vocative singular, the case-ending s is
Sometimes dropped ; as , fulgur , régié , Virgo , nomen . Nomina
tives in 0 have also lost the final n of the stem ; the stem of régio
is région
VOCA BULA RY.
caput, capi ti s , N ., head. causa,
-as , F ., cause, reason.
numen , flfimlnis , N . , r iver . legatié , légi ti énis , F . , embassy.
Jara, -s e, M ., the Jura . v irtfi s , virtfi tis , F .
, valor .
ob , prep.w . acc., on account of longus ,
-a,-um, long.
SYN . Pepiilus ( originally the patricians) came to include thewhole peop le ; pleb s , the plebeians, a part of the co le without
olitical rights, until political equality was esta lis ed by theicinian law , B .C . 367 ; Quiri tes , the Roman p eop le in their civil
capacity .
103. Decline together the follow ing
1. caput magnum , a large head .
2 . miles bbnus , a good soldier .
3. mi les floor , a sp ir ited soldier .
EXERC ISES.
Pronounce ; translate ; decline each noun , and give its
stem ; parse the verbs
1. Milites laudant. 2 . Regina virtfitem militum laudat.
3. Virginés carmen longum cantant. 4. A d flfimen t da
num. 5 . Milites ob ciipid‘
itatem glOriae piignant. 6 . Prin
ceps mOrés viris l dabat.
NOTES A ND QUEST ION S.
1. Note that the ending-is is long in plural cases of the second
declension .
How is the stem of nouns of the third declension found'
.
l Whatcases are alike in neuter nouns ? The stems of Latin words often
appear in English words derived from the Latin ; as, princip-a l ( princip
stem of princeps ) .
84 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
VOCA BULA RY.
consul , c6ns iilis , M . consul . soror, s6 r6 ris , F ., sister .
agger, aggéris , M . , mound . imperator, -t6 ris , M ., commander .
fr i ter, fratris , M ., brother . Stator, 6 r i t6 ris , M ., orator .
C aesar , C aesaria, M ., Caesar . v ictor , v ictbris , M .
, victor .
105 . Decline together the following
1. cénsul des ignfitus , consul elect.
2 . timor magnus , greatfear .
EXERC ISES.
Pronounce ; translate ; decline each noun , and give the
stem ; parse the verbs
1. Consul OratOrem laudat. 2 . Consul Oratoris élbquentiam
laudavit. 3. Frater sbrdrem amat. 4. Fratrem libéravit .
5 . Caesar sOrOrem in matrimonium dédit (gave) . 6 . Caesar
consul censfilem Titum accfisavérat.
Translate into Latin
1. They have praised the orator . 2 . They praise the
orator’
s eloquence . 3. The brothers love ( their ) sisters .
4. They have liberated the consul . 5 . To Caesar , the
consul. 6 . They accuse Caesar , the consul . 7 . The
judge praises the king. 8 . I praise the justice of the
king.
NOTES AN D QUESTIONS.
How is the nominative singular of most nouns formed (Ans. The
nominative is formed by adding s to the stem .) What exceptions ?
(A ns . Neuters, and nouns whose stem ends in a lingual.) pater,mater,frater (gen . patris , matris , fratria) , seem not to increase in the geni
tive. The stems are really péter mater , h ater , and they are con
tracted to paw , mat h fratr i.e., patris stands for pateria, etc.
NOUNS.— TH IRD DECLENSION . 85
LESSON XXVI .
NOUNS. THIRD DECLENSION.
Stems ending in a Guttural : c, g.
PA RA D I GMS.
1. Note that the stems are judIc reg radtc d iic and
leg jud ic has a variable vowel .
2 . The case-endings are the same as those given in 100.
3. The s of the nominative and vocative Singular unites
with c or g of the stem to form as ; as, regs : tax. See 32 . 2 .
NOUNS.— TH IRD DECLENSION . 89
5 . Milites pro libertate pfignant. 6 . Inter fines GaIlOrum.
7 . In hostium niiméro. 8 . Canes pfignant. 9. Caesar
turrim oppiignabat.
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. cm forms the genitive plural in-um
,as ci num ; so also
p i nk ,bread ; and jfivénis, a youth.
DO nouns having i-stems increase in the genitive
? What is meantby increasing in the genitive How do such nouns form the nomina
tive from the stem ? What vowel change is common ? In what does
the genitive plural usually end
LESSON XXVIII .
NGUNS. THIRD DECLENSION.
110. Neuters ending in -e,-al, -ar are declined as
follow s :
P A RA D IGMS.
90 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
1. The stem of mare ends in -i which is changed in the
nominative to e. The stem of an imal ends in -ali the i
being dropped , and the a Shortened in the nominative singu
lar ; as , stem an imali nominative animal . an imal stands
for an imale , the final e being lost, and does not, therefore .
increase in the genitive .
111. Rules for Position :
1. A djectives and genitives generally follow their nouns .
2 . A dverbs and Oblique cases, w ith or w ithout prepositions,
generally immediately precede the verb.
3. The indirect object generally precedes the direct object.
4. When a noun with an adjective is limited by a noun in the
genitive, the adjective stands first, and the genitive between it and
its noun ; as, magnum reginae pécfi lum , the large cup of the
queen or , the queen’
s large cup .
5. The rules may be reversed for the sake of emphasis ; then
the emphatic place for the verb is at the beginning ;
for the obj ect, at the end of a sentence ;
for the genitive, before the noun it limits ;
for the adj ective, before the noun ;
for the adverb, at a distance from the verb ;
for the indirect obj ect, after the direct.
VOCA BULA RY.
bear , tempus , tempbris , N . , time.
endure. jfi s , jfi ri s , N ., r ight, law .
an imal , an imalis , N .
, animal. co llis , collis , M ., hill .
cremo ,-are, -av i , burn . v ecti gal , v ect
‘
igali s , N .,tax,
cus té s , custéd is , M .
, guard . revenue.
frigus , frigbris , N ., cold, frost. n6men , n6minis , N .
,name.
Decline together the following
1. nav i s longa ( lit., a long ship ) , a ship of war .
2 . v ect'
i gal magnum , a large revenue.
3. m i re magnum , a great sea .
NOUNS. TH IRD DECLENSION . 93
117 . Decline together the following
1. sinis tra pars , the left side.
2 . riipés s inistra, a rock on the left.3. bpm comp létnm, afinished work.
OBS. Note that, in nouns of the third declension, the stem is
the same as the nominative ; as, cbnsul, enitive cbnsul -is , or
becomes the same after the vowel is modifie as , nomen, genitivenam in-is ; or that s is added to the stem to form the nominative ;as, hostis.genitive hosti
-s .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
l . Partem urbis occupant. 2 . COnsul in urbe habitabat.
3. ROmfI lus nOmen nOvae urbi dat . 4. Fratres in litore
miiris cum sOrOribus stant. 5 . A nte liicem. 6 . De monte
in flfimen . 7 . In monte . 8 . In pace paramus bellum.
9. Milites arcem servabant.
SYN . Oppidum is a fortified town, a fortress a small city or
town ; nrb s , a large city (w ith reference to its buildings ; es
cially to Rome) ; civi tas , a state, (1) a community living under t e
same laws ; (2) right of citizenship ; res pub lica, a commonwealth.
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
What is the genitive plural of mons , urb s , pars? A re these words
declined in the singular like consonant stems ? What three classes ofnouns of the third declension (Ans . l st. Consonant stems ; 2d.Vowelstems ; 3d . Mixed stems . ) What nouns have -i as the regular ending
in the ablative singular? What nouns have -e or -i In what does
the nominative plural of masculine and feminine nouns end ? (A ns . i s . )In what, the nominative plural of neuter nouns
? (A ns . In -a , and those
whose ablative singular ends in-i only , or in -e and -i
,have -ia. ) What
nouns have -ium in the genitive plural? How is the nominative formed
from the stem ? What is the regular ending of the accusative singular
What nouns have -im in the accusative
A BLA TIVE. 97
EXERC ISES.
Determine by the foregoing rules the gender of the fol
lowing nouns
1. consul , -fi118 , consul . 14. civi tas , -atis , state.
2. sermb, -6nis , discourse. 15. légfitib. -6ni s , embassy.
3. Oratié ,-6nis , speech. 16 . 16x . legis , law .
4. dux , diicis , leader . 17. v irtiis , 41th , virtue.
5. multi tiido ,-Inis , multitude. 18 . frigus ,
-6 ris , cold .
6. impér i tor , -6 ri.s , commander . 19. 6nus , -6ris , load .
7 . légio ,-6nis , legion . 20. vulnus , é ris , wound .
8 . obses , -id.is , hostage. 21. crfi s , crfi ris , leg.
9. p6 testds , i tis , power .
"2 cus tos , -Od is , guard .
10. i nimal, animal . 23. ri dlx ,-Icis , root.
11. tut t is , 48 , tower . 24. princeps , -ip is, chief .
12 . contentib, -6n:ls , contention . 25. sémen ,-inis , seed .
13. crimen ,-inis , charge. litus , -6 ris , shore.
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.
1. A n abstract noun is the name of a quality ; as , valor, virtue.
2 . A collective noun denotes in the singular number, a collection of
individuals ; as, army, legion.
How many ways of determining the gender Of nouns ? What are
they What nouns are masculine by signification What, by ter
mination ? What nouns in common use are exceptions Give the
rules for feminine nouns. What are the terminations of neuter nouns
LESSON XXXI .
ABLATIVE.
CAUSE, MANNER, MEANS, AND INSTRUMENT .
EXA M P LES.
pal lidus Ira fuit , he was pale with anger .
magné new auxi lium a C aesare pétunt, with afl ood of tearsthey seek aid from C tesar .
3. Divi tiacus Gal lérum anim 6 s v erb is confi rmat , D ivitiacus
encourages the minds of the Gauls by (or , bymeans of ) words .
98 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
4. ferré dim i cant fratrés , the brothers fight with the sword for
their country.
5. mfl i tés l i p i d ibus pfignant, the soldiersfight with stones .
OBS. In the foregoing examples the nouns that denote the cause
( ira) , the manner (fl étfi ) , the means the instrument ( ferr6 ,
lap id ibus ) , by which the action of the verb is performed, are inthe ablative w ithout a preposition, and are modifiers of the predi
cate. This usage is expressed by the following rule
ABLATIVE CA SE.
122 . RULE IX.-Th e cause, m ann er , m ean s , an d
in str um en t ar e d en oted by th e ab lative w ith out a
p r eposition .
123. Rule for position
Expressions of manner , means, and instrument are placed after
the direct Object ; those of cause usually precede it ; all precede
the predicate.
VOCA BULA RY.
pbdes , ped i tis , M .,foot-soldier . timi dus , -a ,-um , timid, afraid.
lap is , lap i d is , M .,stone. pas ser , pasaéria, M .
, sparrow .
Sagitta,-as , F .
, an arrow. mus ca ,-ae, F .
,fly.
v es ter , -tra, -trum , your . d évbro , A re ,-av i , devour .
SYN . C ons i lium , advice, counsel ; conci lium , an assembly, a
meetin (of part of the people) lex , a law passed in a c6mi tia, an
assemgly of the whole people, and regularly approved ; sci tuma law passed in a conc i lium .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Caesar urbem crémat. 2 . Pater tuns urbés Gallias
igne crémat. 3. Regnum cOpiis conciliabat. 4. Ve S igne
crémant. 5 . Hostium Sagittae regem vestrum vulnérant.
6 . Amate , puéri , sOrOrés . 7 . Consulés oppidis nOmina dant.
8 . Milites consiilis laudant. 9. Virginem timidam vbcant.
10. Passer magnO cum gaudi51muscam dévOrabat. 11. Marci
filius Gallis signum tiiba dat.
100 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
4. Tullia fi lia réginae es t , Tullia is the daughter of the queen .
5. puella amAta es t , the girl is loved.
OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that in Ex. 1the adjectivesimply modifies the noun, without the intervention of a verb ; in
Ex. 2 the adjective is connected with the noun by means of the
verb est. The first adjective is called an attr ibutive adj ective , the
second is a p redicate adj ective, and is called the comp lement. In
Ex . 3note that the descriptive noun filia stands in the same part
of the sentence as the subject which it modifies ; it is called an
appos itive. In Ex . 4 the descriptive noun is used to form the
predicate, and is called a p redicate noun, or comp lement. Note that
the predicate adjective agrees with its noun in gender, number, andcase , the predicate noun agrees with the subject in case. Note
the position of the predicate adjective ; it may, however, precedethe verb for the sake of emphasis. In Ex. 5 the verb sum helps
to form the perfect tense of the verbs-and is therefore called an
auxiliary verb hence,
124. The verb sum is either an auxiliary or a copulative
verb. It is an auxiliary verb when it helps to form some Ofthe tenses of other verbs ; it is copulative when it joins thesubject to some other word which is used to describe the
subject. The word thus used to describe the subject may be
a noun or an adjective , and is called the comp lement. If the
descriptive word is a noun , it is called a p redicate noun ; if
it is an adjective, then it is called a p redicate adj ective.
PRED ICATE NOUN
125 . RULE X.— A n oun in th e p r ed icate, d en oting
th e sam e p er son or th in g a s th e subj ect, agrees w ith
it in case .
OBS. Note that a noun used to describe another noun or pro
noun , and denoting the same person or thing, is put in the samecase . When the descriptive noun is in the same part of the sen
tence, it is called an A PPOSIT IVE ; and when it stands in the predicate,usually after intransitive verbs of to be, to become, to remain , etc.
,
and w ith passive verbs of naming, calling, choosing, appointing, etc.,
it is called a PREDICA TE NOM INA TIVE.
PREDICATE ADJECTIVE.
126. RULE XI .—A p r ed icate ad j ective agrees w ith
its subj ect in gen d er , number , an d case.
SUBJECT A ND COPULA‘
.
12 7 . Partial Paradigm of sum , I am.
”v
OBS. The verb sum , 1am,belongs to none of the four conjuga
tions ; it is both irregular and defective, i .e.,it wants certain parts.
It is used in Latin, as in English, to help conjugate the passivevoice of regular verbs.
PR IN C I PA L PA RTS.
PRESENT STEM, as PERFECT STEM , fuI
PRESENT. INF IN ITIVE. PERFECT . FUTURE PART .
sum esse fut fiitilrus
IND I CA TIVE PRESENT .
VOCA BULA RY.5
testis , testis , M . a. F ., witness . b ell icfisus , -a,-um , ad j., warlike.
A rar , A taris , ace. A rarim, M ., pulcher , -chra.
-chrum , adj.,the A rar ( now the Saone) . beautiful .
c6mes ,-i ti s , M . a F .
, a compan ion . m iilier , mulieris , F ., woman .
cas e, -as , F .,cottage. éguas , -i , M ., horse .
128 . Decline together the following
1. réli quae cbp iae the remaining forces .
2 . puella pul chra , a beautiful gir l.
3. Opp i dum magnum , a large town .
SYN . Pestino , hasten impatiently, hurry ; prbpéro , hasten
energy, but without hurry or impatience .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English8 V.C . C S. V.C . C
1. Puella est pulchra . 2 . Equus est animal . 3. Oppidum
est magnum . 4. POpI‘
ilus ROmanuS est testis . 5 . Flumen
est A rar .
l 6 . Amici SI'
ImuS (we are) . 7 . Caesar est impé
rater . 8 . A riovistus est réx . 9. Virti'Is est cOmes Sapien
tiae . 10. Puella est nautae fi lia . 11. Est ( it is) casa
agricdlae . 12 . Est 2 ( there is) parva insiila . 13. Multa
animalia pulchra sunt.
"FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
1. We are, they are, you are. 2 . The fields are large.
3. The islands are small . 4. She is the daughter of the
sailor . 5 . We are Romans . 6 . The cities are large .
7 . There is a large town . 8 . We are friends . 9. It is a
large town . 10. The town is large.
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. What is the rule for the gender of A rar 7
2 . In English, when the subject is indefinite, we use the word there
with some form of the verb to be ; as, ins ifla es t parva may mean
the island is small, an island is small, ( there) is a small island
, ( it) is a
small island, or the island is a small ( one) .
What is the present tense of sum ? Why is sum called a copula?
What is the noun or adjective after it called ? Why ? Note that the
complement, if a noun , agrees with the subject in case ; if an adjective,in gender, number, and case. Note that the verb sum in all the fore
going examples is copulative.
LESSON XXXIII .
INDIGATIVE OP SUM . PREDICATE GENITIVE.
129. The verb sum is conjugated in the Indicative
Mode as follows
P A RTI AL P A R AD IGM .
104 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
1. The predicate genitive occurs most frequently with
sum and fac io , and the passives of puto , habeo , and exis timo .
2 . The genitive of Personal Pronouns is never used in this
construction the neuter of the corresponding Possess ive
Pronoun is used ; as ,
EXAMP LE .
est tuum ( not tui ) v i dére , it is your duty to see.
VOC A BULA RY.
multi tt'
id o ,-‘
inis , F ., multitude. tempus , tempbris , N ., time.
-6nis , F ., speech, oration. mercator , -6 ris , M ., merchant.
m i ser , -éra,—érum .adj ., wretched. mo rs , mortis , F ., death .
supp licium ,-'
i , N ., punishment. creber , crebra, crébrum , fre
impérium ,-'
i , N ., power , sway . quent, numerous .
SYN . P r6 v6co , (1) to call forth, summon ; ( 2 ) to appeal to the
people . A ppello , ( l ) to address w ith the appropriate title ; ( 2) toappeal to one magistrate from the decision of another .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Regina érat pulchra . 2 . Viri in proelio fuérant .
3. A riovistus fuit réx GermanOrum . 4. Eri'
mus l beati .
5 . Eritis miséri . 6 . Puellae fuérunt pulchrae . 7 . Erantne
puellae in Silva? 8 . Num Caesar consul érit ? 9. COpiae
Belgarum in prOvincia sunt. 10. Shmus in Gallia.
NOTES A ND QUESTI ON S.
1. The pronoun is contained in the verb .
Give the rule for the gender of nouns in-do. For nouns in -io. What
are the principal parts of sum ? Give a synopsis of sum in the indica
tive. What is the rule for a noun in the genitive? The position
?
What is meant by a predicate genitive On what does the predicate
genitive depend?
A DJECTIVES. TH IRD DECLENSION . 105
LESSON XXXIV.
ADJECTIVES. THIRD DECLENSION.
132 . Adjectives of the Third Declension are declined
l ike nouns, and may have
1. A different form for each gender in the nominative singular .
2 . Two forms,—one for the masculine and feminine, and an
other for the neuter .
3. The same forms for all three genders .
133. A djectives of the Third Declension in -er have three
endings in the nominative, and are declined like acer, sharp .
The stem ends in -i
PA R AD IGM .
Decline like Acer the following
1. céler , céléris , célére. swift.2 . équester , éques tri s , Equestre, equestrian .
3. alacer , fil écri s , al écre, lively, eager .
1. Celer is the only adjective of this class that keeps the
e before the r in the Oblique eases . C éler , when used as an
adjective , has the genitive plural in-ium ; but as a noun ,
denoting military rank , it has celerum in genitive plural , and
célére in ablative Singular .
OBS . Note that adjectives ending in-er have -i in the ablative
singular of all genders .
106 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
135 . A djectives of two endings have-is or -or in the nom
inative masculine and feminine , and -e or -as in the neuter .
They are declined like mi ti s , m ild , and mi ti or , milder .
P A R AD IGMS.
Singular . P lu ra l .
C ases .
Masc. and Fem. Neuter. Masc. and Fem. Neuter .
mitium
mitem
mitior , milder ( comparative degree) .
mi'
tior mitius mitibres
OBS . Adjectives ending in -is are also i-stems, and have -i in the
ablative of all genders . Note that comparatives have two endings
in the nominative ; and that the ablative singular ends in -e or -i,
and the nominative plural in-es and -a, not -ia.
1. M itis is declined like acris , acre ; all comparatives of
adjectives are declined like mitior, except p lus , more, which
is declined as follows
C ases . Singular . P lura l .
Masc. and Fem.
plfirium
plfiribus
A DJECTIVES. TH IRD DECLENSION . 109
P A R A D IGM S.
C ases . vétu s , old . len s , going . par , equa l .
M. St F . M. St F .
vétus
vétér is
vétéri
véterem vétus iéns
vétus
vétére -i ) eunte ,-i
vétérés vétéra
vétérum
vétéribus
vétérés , -is vétéra
vétérés vétéra
vétéribus
R ules for the Obl ique C ases of A dj ectives of th e Th ir d
D eclen s ion .
ABLATIVE SINGULAR .
137 . Most adjectives of the third declens ion have -i in the
ablative s ingular , but consonant stems have-i when used as
adjectives , -e when used as nouns . Participles in-a s , when
used as such , or as nouns , regularly have-e ; but as adjec
tives , -'
i .
GEN ITIVE AND NEUTER PLURAL .
138 . The genitive plural commonly has-ium . Consonant
stems have -ium when the stem-characteristic is preceded bya long vowel or by a consonant ; -um , when the stem-charac
teristic is preceded by a short vowel ; as , audax , gen . plur .
audacium ; d ives , gen . Sing . div i tis , gen . plur . d iv i tum ; so
vetus (vétéris ) , vétérum ; fiber (uberis ) , fibérum ; caelebs ,
unmarried , caeli bum. The neuter plural has-ia ; only vetus
has vétéra.
Participles have-ium ; as , aman s , aman tium .
139. Decline together the follow ing
l . puella félix , a happy girl . 3. d 6num ingén s , a large gift.
2 . mare ingéns , a vast sea. 4. servus audax , a bold servant.
euntés euntia parés par ia
cantium parium
euntibus paribus
euntés euntia parés paria
euntés euntia pi rés par ia
euntibus paribus
110 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
VOC A BUL A R Y.
félix , gen . fél'
icis , happy . récéns , gen . récentis , recent.
audax , gen . audacia, bold, auda brién s , gen . bri entis , r ising.
cions . mfi lier , mfi l iéris , F ., woman .
divés , gen . d iv l tis , r ich. fl én s , gen . flentis , weeping.
par , gen . pfiris , equal. vétus , gen . vétéri s , old, ancient.
pbténs , gen . pbten tis , powerful. grex , gen . grégis , M .
,flock.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Milités sunt audacés . 2 . Régés sunt pOtentés .
3. Viri divités sunt. 4. Muliérés félicés érant. 5 . Belgae
spectant inl Orientem sOlem . 6 . Consilium diicis audax est.
7 . Muliérés fientés Caesarem implorant.
Translate into Latin
1. The soldier is brave . 2 . The leaders are hold . 3. The
men are rich . 4. The weeping woman implores the consul .
5 . The town is Old . 6 . The women are not happy .
NOTES A ND QUEST ION S.
1. Towards .
What adjectives have but one ending? A re they vowel or con
sonant stems ? DO they increase in the genitive? In what does the
ablative singular end? In what does the genitive plural end
? Does
the ablative always end in-i Does the genitive plural always have
-ium ? Explain when they have -i in the ablative, and when -e.
LESSON XXXVI .
COMPARISON OF ADJBOTIVBS.
A BLA T IVE W IT H C O M PA RA T IVES.
140. A djectives are compared, in Latin as in English,
in three ways : l st. Regularly, i .e., by adding peculiar
terminations ; 2d. By prefixing the adverbs magi: and
max ime , more and most ; and 3d. Irregularly .
112 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
142 . The Construction w ith Comparatives .
EXA MP LES.
l . servus est félicior rége, the slave is happ ier than the Icing.
2 . servus es t félicior quamlréx , the s lave is happ ier than the king.
OBS . In the first example, note that the comparative is followedby the ablative ; in the second example, quam, than, is used withthe comparative, and the following word is in the same case as thenoun preceding the adjective. The idiom is expressed in thefollowing rule
ABLATIVE WITH COMPARATIVES.
143. RULE XIII .— Th e comparative d egree is fol
low ed by th e ab lative w h en quam , th an , is om itted .
Comparatives with quam are followed (by the nomina
or) by the case of the corresponding noun before them.
EXA MPLES.
l . fortibrem vid i néminem quam Mariam, I have seen no
braver man than Mar ius or
2 . H i bernia minor quam Br itannia existimatur , I reland is
considered smaller than Br itain .
144. Model for pars ing comparatives and superlatives
s ervus es t félicior rége, the servant is happ ier than the king
félicior is an adjective in the comparative degree, from the posi
tive felix ; stemfella , comp . felicior, super . felicissimus . P élicior
is an adjective of the third declension , and is declined like mélior ,mélius , etc. It is nominative Singular masculine, and agrees w ith
servus . RuleVIII . : A dj ectives agree with their nouns in gender ,
number, and case.
VOCA BULA RY.
ri pax ,-acis , ravenous . Aer , aéris , M .
, the air .
C i céré , C i cérbnis , M ., C icero . cla ns ,-a ,
-um ,c lear , famous.d octus , -a, -um , learned . vélfix , gen . v élécis , swift.
grfiv is , -e , heavy, severe . mendax ,-acis , lying.
SYN . Vulnéro, to wound by a cut or thrust ; saucio , to woundany way.
COMP A RISON OF A DJECTIVES. 113
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
l . Vir félix erat . 2 . Vir felicior érat . 3. Judex siipiéns
est. 4. Jiidéx Sapientio r érat quam réx . 5 . Siimus 2
pOtentés . 6 . Estis pdtentidrés . 7 . Régés sunt pOtentissimi .
8 . C icérO érat vir doctiss imus . 9. Liix est vélOcior quam
sdnitus . 10. ROma clarissima 8 urbs érat. l l . GallOrum
omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae . 12 . Jfira est mons altis
SImus .
Translate into Latin
l . The men are happy . 2 . We are happier . 3. The
soldiers are brave . 4. The brave soldiers are powerful .
5 . The soldiers are more powerful . 6 . The journev was
difficult. 7 . Gold is heavier than Silver . 8 . The servants
are very happy . 9. The Romans were braver than the
Gauls . 10. C icero was a very renowned orator . 11. The
soldiers are braver than the general.
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
1. Quam is a conjunction , and is not inflected ; it means than.
2 . The subject is included in the verb .
3. The superlative is not always translated by most ; it is sometimes
best rendered by very . SO the comparative may be translated in vari
ous ways ; as, audacior , bolder , ra ther bolder ( i .e. bo lder than usual ) ,too bold .
In how many ways are adjectives compared ? Decline the compara
tive Of poten s , altus . To what declension of adjectives do superla
tives belong? What is the rule for the agreement of adjectives ?
By what case is the comparative degree followed
114 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XXXVII .
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
GENITIVE AND DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
II . C omp a r ison by A dver bs .
145 . A djectives ending in-as preceded by a vowel
( except those in -quus) commonly form their compara
tive and superlative by means of the adverbs magis ,
more, and max ime, most.
EXA III P LES.
P o s itive . C om p a r ative . Sup e r lative .
idbneus ,fi t. mi xime idbneus
dfibius, doubtful. mi ximé diibius
nbxius, hurtful. maximé nbxius
1. A djectives in -quus form their comparatives and super
latives regularly ; as ,
antiquus , ancient, an tiquior , an tiquis s imus .
146 . Dative with A djectives.
EXAM PLES.
1. vict6 ria Germanarum pbpulb R bmané periciilasa est, the
victory of the Germans is dangerous to the Roman people.
2 . puella érat matri s imi lis , the girl was like her mother .
3. cas trie Idaneus lbcus es t, thep lace is suitablefor a camp .
OBS. In the foregoing examples, note the adjectives periculésa,s imi lis , and idbneus , and that each is construed w ith the dative.
The idiom is expressed in the follow ing rule
DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
147 . RULE XIV. Th e d ative is used after man y
ad jectives to den ote th e ob j ect to w h ich th e qual ity
is d ir ected .
l . The adjectives that take the dative are chiefly those
signifying useful, p leasant, friendly, fit, like, inclined , ready,
116 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XXXVIII .
COMPARISON OI‘ADJECTIVES.
I II . I r r egu la r an d D efective C omp a r ison .
149. A djectives in -er form their comparative regu
larly , but their superlative is formed by adding-r imus
to the nominative.
EXAMPLES.
1. A lso vetus , old (gen . veteris ) has the super . véterr imus .
2 . The following Six adjectives in -ilis , declined like
mII'
tis ,l form their superlative by adding
-limus to the stem,
after dropping the final vowel :
P o s itive . C om p ar a tive .
simi lis , similar .
dissimi lis, unlike.
gracilis , slender .
hiimi lis , low.
3. Compound adjectives ending in-dicus , -f icus , -v5lus ,
form their comparatives l l] -entior , and their superlatives in-enti ssz.mus ( as If from positives ending in
-ens )1 as ,
NOTE . These comparatives and superlatives are formed as from
the participles d icéns , saying, féciéns , doing, vbléns , wishing.
COMPA RISON OF A DJECTIVES. 117
4. The follow ing adjectives , in common use , are compared
irregularly
P o sitive . C om p a rat ive . Supe r lative .
150. Defective C omparison .
1. Seven adjectives have no positive ; they are
cl térior , cl tlmus , hither, hithermost.
deterior , d éterrlmus , worse .
interior , intlmus , inner, inner most.
6 cior , Ocis s imus , swifler.
prior , primus ,former , first.
prbpior , proxlmus , nearer , next.
ultérior , ultlmus ,farther , far/best.
2 . The follow ing are irregular in the superlativel
fl
mmfi
www
3. The following adjectives are irregular
jiivénis .l young. <313312; nfitfisénior
major natfi
mlnImus n i tu
sénex , old . i max imus natfi
151. Compare the following
1. céler , swift. 4. mi ser , wretched . 8 . latus , broad .
2 . audax , bold. 5 . émana, loving. 9. dfl lgens , diligent.
3. fortis , brave. 6 . s i p iens , wise. 10. bbnus , good.
7. altus, high.
mélior , better .
péjor , worse.
major , grea ter .
minor , less .
pli s (neut. more.
divitior ,
di tior ,
optimus , best.
pessimus , worst.
mi ximns , grea test.
minimus, least.
plfirimus, most.
divitissimus ,
ditisslmus ,
118 F IRST STEPS IN IJATIN .
OBS.1. The comparative may be translated in various ways ; as,audacior , bolder , rather bold, too bold .
OBS. 2 . The superlative audacis s lmus may mean boldest or
very bold .
OBS. 3. The superlative w ith quam denotes the highest degree
possible ; as, quam plfi rimi , as many as possible quam max imum ,
as large as possible.
OBS. 4. P er in composition with adjectives has the force of very ;as, perm i gnus , very great.
VOCA BULA RY.
primus ,-a,
-um ,first. sfipér ior , sfipérius , higher , upp er .
8 61, s é lis , M ., sun. HOr i tius , J.M .
, Horace.
terra, -ae, F ., earth. Li biénus , 4, M .
, Labienus .
lfina, -ae , F ., moon . Vergl lius , 4. M .
, Vergil .prOpior, prbp ius , nearer . H bmérus , -I, M .
, Homer .
cltérior , cl térius , hither . scientia, -ae, F ., knowledge, skill.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Nostrae filiae pulcherrimae sunt. 2 . Iter per provin
ciam est facilius . 3. I tinera erant diffi cillima. 4. Sol
major est quam terra. 5 . Luna minor est quam terra .
6 . Régés cum proximis civitatibus pacem confirmant.
7 . Oppidum est in citeriore Gallia. 8 . Labienus summum
montem2occupavit. 9. Horatius erat bOnus poeta, Vergi
lius melior , HOméruS Optimus .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
1. These words are added for convenience of reference ; they can
be omitted for the present.
2 . The summit of the mountain .
How do adjectives ending in-er form their comparativ es
? How
may superlatives be translatedit What adjectives form their superla
tives like faci lis What is meant by comparison of adjectives 11 How
many degrees of comparison are there ? How is each formed ? How
declined‘2
122 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
Translate into Latin
1. We are blamed . 2 . They are praised . 3. You were
being praised . 4. They will be praised . 5 . The girls are
called . 6 . The boy is calling. 7 . The men fight bravely .
8 . They will be carried. 9. We were being called . 10. They
w ill be called . 11. He is (being) praised . 12 . He was
being praised . 13. They blame the Romans severely .
14. They are blamed severely by the Romans .
NOTES A ND QUEST ION S.
What is meant by voice in grammar? How many voices ? Give
the meaning of the present passive in Latin . What verbs only can bein the passive voice
LESSON XL.
ADVERBS.
FORMAT ION, cuxsswmn non, AND COMPARISON.
I . F orma tion of A dver bs .
EXAMP LES.
OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that the ad
jpctives are all
of the first and second declensions ; that the adver s are formedby changing
-o the characteristic vowel of the stem,into -e
Hence the rule
157 . A dverbs are formed from adjectives of the Firstand Second Declensions by changing the characteristic
vowel of the stem to -é‘
124 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
II . C la ss ifi ca tio n of A d ver bs .
161. The adverbs enumerated in the foregoing examplesdenote, for the most part, the manner of the action , and are
therefore called adverbs of manner . A dverbs may also
denote the time, the p lace, the degree, or the cause of the
action expressed by the verb.
III . C omp a r is on of A dver bs .
162 . The comparative of adverbs that are regularly com
pared is the same as the neuter accusative singular of the
comparative of adjectives , and consequently ends in -ius .
l . The superlative of the adverb is formed from the super
lative of the adjective by changing the final vowel of the
stem to -é.
EXA M PLES.
2 . I f the adjectives are irregular in their comparison , the
adverbs have the same irregularity .
EXA M P LES.
A DVERBS. 125
3. A few adverbs not derived from adjectives are com
pared.
EXAMPLES.
P o s itive . C om par ative . Supe r lative .
diii ,for a long time.
saepe, qflen.
4. Form from each of the following adjectives an adverb,
and compare it
l . s lmfl i s , -e, like.
2 . fortis , -e, brave.
céler , i ris , i re, quick.
gram ,-e , heavy .
li ber , b ra, 4mm ,free.
amicus , -a ,-um, fr iendly.c
a
m-h
o:
163. Model for pars ing adverbs :
mfl ltés fortl ter piignan t , the soldiers fight bravely : fortl ter isan adverb of manner derived from the adjectivefortiscompared, fortiter, fortins, fortissime of the positive degree,
and modifies pfignant , according to Rule XVI . : A dverbs mod ifyverbs, adj ectives, and other adverbs .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
What is an adverb ? What is the usual position of an adverb in a
sentence ? (A ns. It stands immediately before the word it limits . )How are adverbs classified How are adverbs formed from adjectivesof the second declension ? How from adjectives of the third deelen
sion ? How are adverbs compared? How are English adverbs formed ?
Form an adverb from brave ; compare it. Write a sentence in English
containing an adverb of place ; of manner ; of degree.
aeger, g ra, g ram, sick.
5mm , gen . 41th , loving.
61655119, gen.-n tis , elegant.
altus . -a., mm, high, deep .
ctipl dus , -a, -um , greedy.
ferbx , gen. é cis ,fierce.
128 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
OBS. 1. The perfect participle has three endings for the three
genders, and is declined like bbnus ; as , dmatus,-a,
-um. It mustagree, like an adjective, in gender, number, and case, with thesubject.
EXA MP LES.
puer im i tus es t , the boy was loved.
Virgo ami ta eat, the virgin was loved.
nbmen dmi tum es t, the name was loved .
puéri amati sunt, the boys were loved.
v irginés im i tae aunt, the virgins were loved.
nbm ina imi ta aun t, the names were loved .
OBS. 2 . In the foregoing examples, note that the participle
agrees w ith the subject like an adjective .
VOCA BULA RY.
PRES. IND . A CT . PERF . PART . PASS.
dn o , love. im i tum
laudo , p rais e. laudfitum
porto , carry . porté'
itum
vbco , call . vbcatum
énun tio , report.1 énun tifitum
occul to , conceal. occult i tum
comporto , collect. comport i tum
SYN . Infan s ( in , not, fari , to speak) , an infant ; puer , a boy, fromabout seven to sixteen ; { dwescen s ( adblesco , to grow) , a youth,from about sixteen to twenty
-four ; jfivénis , a youngman or woman,from about twenty
-four to forty-five .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Laudati'
estis . 2 . Onus portatum est. 3. Régés
culpati sunt. 4. Vulnératus sum. 5 . Vulnerati’
sfimus .
6 . Nostra consilia host'
ibus 2 énuntiata sunt. 7 . In tant'
a
multitfidine équitum nostra fiiga occultata est. 8 . Mag na
cOpia frfiment’
i comportata erat.
SECOND CONJUGATION . 129
Translate into Latin
1. You were called . 2 . You were praised . 3. You have
been praised . 4. You shall have been praised . 5 . The
corn has been collected . 6 . A n abundance of corn has been
collected . 7 . They Shall have been praised . 8 . We had
been called . 9. They were loved .
a 10. They were (being)loved .
‘ 11. They were loving.
5 12 . The work was praised .
13. The girl has been called .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. Written also enuncio.
2 . Dative case .
3. The aorist (perf . ) passive.
4. Imperfect passive.
5. Imperfect active.
From what stem is the perfect passive formed ? What are the
principal parts of a verb ? Mention the three stems . What verbs canhave a passive voice Can they take an object in the passive voice
LESSON XLII .
SECOND OONJUGATION.
PRESENT , IMPERFECT , AND FUTURE ACT IVE.—ABLATIVE
OF AGENT .
166 . A ll verbs whose characteristic vowel before
ending-re in the Present Infinitive is é
‘
, belong to
Second Conjugation . Thus
PRESENT.
mbus o
hab so
130 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
1. The Present, Imperfect, and Future A ctive are formedby adding the verbal endings to the present stem .
PA R T I A L P A R A D IGM .
[The personal endings are the same as in the first conjugation ; the“connective vowel,
”
or the final vowel of the stem,is 5 instead of d,
and is retained in the present tense.]
PRESENT.
P erson . F orm ation . Exam p le . Engli sh .
Sing. 1 Pres . stem o
P lur . l
IMPERFECT .
Pres . stem bam
bi s
bat
bimus
bant mbnébant
FUTURE.
Pres . stem bo
bis
bit
Plur . 1 bimus
bitis
bunt
a . The verbal endings are the same as in the first con
jugation . See 58 . 1.
167 . Ablative of Agent.
EXA MPLES.
1. vulnérfitus es t Sagitti s , he was wounded with arrows .
2 . vulnéri tus es t 5 mi'
ll te, he was wounded by a soldier .
mbnébo
mbnébis
m6nébit
mbnébimus
mbnébitis
m6nébunt
I was advising.
Thou wast advisingHe was advising.
We were advising.
You were advising.
They were advising.
I shall or will advise.
Thou wilt advise.
He will advise.
We shall or will advise.
You will advise
They will advise.
132 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
by the master . 12 . The girl is crowned by ( her ) mother .
13. He was wounded by a spear . 14. He was wounded by
a soldier . 15 . C rassus is called by (his ) friend . 16 . The
towns will be seiz ed by the Belgians .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
What is the characteristic vowel of the second conjugation In
what does the present stem end A nalyz e the imperfect ; i.e., mention
the stem, the tense sign, the personal endings.
LESSON XLIII .
SECOND CONJUGATI ON.
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICAT IVEACT IVE.
169. The Perfect Stem of a regular verb of the
Second Conjugation may be formed,
1. By adding vi‘to the present stem. (This rule is
applicable to but few verbs . )2 . By dropping e of the present stem and adding at.
This is the more common way of forming the perfect stemof the second conjugation .
EXAMP LES.
PR INC IP A L PA RTS.
SECOND CONJUGATION . 133
170. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Tenses
are inflected as follows
PA R TI A L PAR A D IGM .
[The personal endings are the same as in the first conjugation ; thecharacteristic vowel of the stem changes from i to Ein the third per
son plural Of the perfect, to t in the first person plural, and to e'
in the
pluperfect and future perfect ]
134 F IRST STEPS IN LA T IN .
VOCA B ULA RY.
PRESENT . PRES . STEM. PRES. INF .
d éleo , destroy . délé d élére
comp leo ,fi ll . comp lé comp let e
mbneo , advise. mbné mbnére
taceo , be silent. tacé tact-Ere
d ébeo , owe. débé d ébére
hi b eo , have. habé h i bére
dbceo , teach. dbcé dbcére
téneo , hold . téné ténére
man eo , remain . man ( 6 manére
augeo , increase. aug( é augére
jfib eo , command . jiib ( é jfib ére
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Délévit, délévérant, délévérint. 2 . DOcuéras , dOcuér it.
3. MOnuistiS . 4. Habuérit, mOnuérunt, dOcuérunt. 5 . DO
cuist‘
i puellam. 6 . Régi'
na mOnuérit. 7 . Ténuimus Sagittas .
8 . Rég‘
ina timet. 9. Puellae timuérunt. IO. Mbnébit,mOnuérit, mOnuérant . l l . Dbcuéras , dOcuérint, dbcébunt,
dOcent. 12 . Mansit, auxit, jussit.
Translate into Latin
1. We have destroyed , they had destroyed . 2 . We have
taught, he has taught. 3. Thev were teaching, he had
taught. 4. They taught, they are s ilent, they were advis ing.
5 . You fear , you were fearing , you w ill fear , you have
feared , you had feared . 6 . They command , they will
command , they have commanded , they had commanded .
7 . They have increased .
NOTES A N D QUEST I ON S.
1. The -vi of the perfect stands for fui , perfect of sum ; as, ima
( st. of m e ) fuI perf . amatui'
ami ui amavi so délé (st.
of déleo ) inf déléfui déléuI délév i ; m6n (é~ ) int
monfuI m6nuI ( the final vowel of the stem being dropped ) ; also ,dOO Ie-I fuI d ocfui aboni . Sometimes the final vowel of the
136 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
OBS. Formula for the conversion of sentences to the passive
vorce z
172 . The subject of the active voice becomes , in the
passive voice , the A blative of A gent (with a prepos ition ) ,or Instrument (Without a preposition ) . The object in the
active voice becomes the subject in the passive.
EXA IIIPLES.
v . T . o .
1. magister laudat puérum
v . P.v . Ab. of Agent.
puer laudatur amagis trb
s. v .T . o .
2 . Sagitta vulnérat mfl i tem
v . P.v . A b. of Inst.
miles vulnératur Sagitta
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Délétur , timentur , timébantur , timébuntur . 2 . Dbcétur,
dbcébatur , ddcébitur . 3. Ténébantur , ténébat. 4. Hébéris ,
habébaris , habébéris . 5 . Onéra gravia a servis timébantur .
6 . Summus mons 1 a TitO LabiénO ténébatur . 7 . Disciphl‘
i
a magistrb dOcentur 8 . MOnébimin‘
i , mOnébatur, mOné
batis . 9. A ugentur , j ubétur , jiibébitur .
SECOND CONJUGA TION . 137
Translate into Latin
1. They are ( being) taught, they were (being) taught,they will be taught. 2 . The master teaches the pupils .
3. The pupils are taught by the master . 4. He is feared ,
he was feared , he will be feared . 5 . We are advised , we
were advised , we shall be advised . 6 . The boys were being
taught by the master . 7 . The soldiers are wounded by the
arrows .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. The top of the mounta in ; lit .,the highest mountain.
Define voice in grammar . From what stem are the tenses of in
complete action formed ? Give the rule for changing a sentence from
the active to the passive voice .
LESSON XLV.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICAT IVEPASSIVE.
173. The Part icipial Stem of verbs of the Second Conju
gation is formed by adding-to ( or -so) , nom .
-tus ( or -sus ) ,to the verb-stem. Some verbs change final 6 of the present
s tem to Short i in the participial stem others drop the stem
vowel altogether . Many verbs of this conjugation have no
participial stem .
P re s . I n d icat ive . P r e sen t Stem . P e r fect Stem . P art . Stem .
déleo, destroy. déléto
mOneO, advise.
dOceO, teach.
maneo, rema in .
haereo, stick
Sileo, be silent.
timeo,fear .
1. The tenses of the indicative mode , formed from the
participial stem , are inflected as follows
138 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
PA R TIA L P A R A D IGM .
[The analysis of the tenses formed from the participial stem in the
second conjugation is the same as in the first conjugation ]
P e r son . F o rm ation .
tus éro
tus éris
tus érit
ti érimus
ti ér‘
itis
ti ét ant
PERFECT A ND A ORIST.
Exam ple .
Engl ish .
Perfect. A orist.
PLUPERFECT.
I had been advised.
Thou hadst been advised.
He had been advised .
We had been advised.
You had been advised .
They had been advised .
FUTURE PERFECT.
mbni tus éro
mbnitus eris
mbnitus et it
mbniti er‘
imas
mbnitl en tis
mOniti érunt
I sha ll have been advised .
Thou will have been advised.
He will have been advised .
We shall have been advised .
You will have been advised .
They will have been advised .
VOC A BULA R Y.
flétum ,1weep .
p laci tum ,2p lease .
nOcItum , hurt.
con tentumfi hem in .
cénsum ,3 think.
haesum ,‘stick .
rIsumf’ laugh .
140 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XLVI .
FOURTH DECLENSION.
Nouns of the Fourth Declension end in -as mas
and at neuter . They are declined a OIIOws :
P A RA D I GMS.
FOURTH DECLENSION . 141
1. The stem of nouns of the fourth declension ends in -u which
is usuallv changed to i before-bus . Masculine and feminine nouns
form the nominative by adding 3 ; neuters, which are very few,
have for the nominative the Simple stem lengthened to u.
2 . The dative and ablative plural of the following words ends
in -ilbas artus , j oint, partus , child-birth, portus , harbor, tr ib us ,tribe, véru ; and also of words of two syllables in
-cus, as lacus .
3. A few nouns of the fourth declension are femin ine ; as, dOmus ,
house, { dds (pl) , Ides, manna, hand, i cus , needle, and some others .
4. Carefully distinguish the fourth from the second de
clension
(1) A noun with nominative in -as and genitive in-t is of the
second declension .
( 2) A noun w ith nominative in -as and gen itive in is of the
fourth declension .
‘VOC A BULA R Y.
exercl tus , dis , M ., army . currus , a s . M ., a char iot.
(16mm , F ., house . mfinus , dds . F .
, a hand .
ifisus , M ., p laying, sport. Sénatus , 418 , M ., senate.
equi tatus , 41s , M ., cavalry . con spectus , -fi s , M., sight, view .
Sons , 413, F ., a needle. sus tIneo , sus tinére, sus tlnui ,
ar cus , 413, M ., a bow . sus ten tum , sustain .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
l . Sénatus exercitum laudat. 2 . A gricbla taurum corni
bus ténet . 3. Pater dOmi‘
Is aedificat. 4. Currfis hostium
ab omnibus militibus visi’
érunt. 5 . Galba dbmi‘l fuit.
6 . In conspectfi exercitiis . 7 . In conspectfi exercitiis nostr‘
i
agri vastantur . 8 . Equitatus sustinébat hostium impétum.
NOTES A ND QUESTI ON S.
1. The locative form dOmi means at home ; it has the same form as
the genitive of the second declension.
How many declensions in Latin How is each distinguished Of
what gender are most nouns of the fourth declension ? Mention a
feminine noun of this declension.
142 F IRST STEPS IN LA T IN .
LESSON XLVII .
FIFTH DECLENSION.
175 . Nouns of the Fifth Declension end
are feminine. They are declined as follow s
P A R A D I GMS.
1. Only two nouns of the fifth declension are mascul ine : di és ,
a day, méridi és , midday ; though d ies is sometimes feminine in
the singular, especially when it means afixed time.
2 . Only two nouns of this declension are declined throughout
the plural ; they are 6163 and res . In some words, only the nomi
native, accusative, and vocative plural are used ; others want the
plural entirely .
144 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XLVIII .
THIRD CONJUGATION.
PRESENT, IMPERFECT , AND FUTURE INDICATIVE ACTIVE.
176 . Verbs of the third conjugation are distinguished byhaving e short before -re in the present infinitive . The verb
stem, obtained by dropping this characteristic é, ends in a
consonant or in u .
EXAMPLES.
PRINC IP AL PAR TS.
1. The Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative A ctive
are inflected as follows
PA RTI AL P A R A D I GM .
[The characteristic vowel of the present stem changes to i, u, etc., in
the inflection of the verb. The personal endings and tense Signs are
the same as in the first conjugation, except those of the future, where
the characteristic vowel changes to d or 6 before the personal endings .]
TH IRD CONJUGA TION 145
IMPERFECT.
P e r son . F orm atio n . Exam p le . Engl ish .
Sing. 1 Pres . stem bamu has
bat
P lur . l bi mus
batis
bant
FUTURE.
Sing. 1 Pres . stem m
P lur . 1
C BS. In the formation of the tenses, note that the future of the
first and second conjugations always has the tense Sign-bi the
i disappears before 0 ( as, imabib imab o ) , and becomes u in
the third person plural . The future of the third conjugation con
sists of the present stem ( the characteristic vowel being lengthened)and the rsonal endings ; i becomes e in the second and third
Dersons Singular, and in the plural.
VOCA BULA RY.
scrfbére s crip si , write.
légbre 1631, collect, read.
ins truére in s truxl , erect, arrange.
contendére contendi, hasten.
d imittére dimis i , dismiss .
gérére gess i , carry, carry on.
mittére mist, send.
cingére cin z l , surround .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
S. 0 . V. T .
1. Puer librum scribébat .
légébat. 4. Hostés urbem cingunt.
T . S. 0 .
2 . Mittitis servOs . 3. Frater
5 . D isciphli littéras
I was ruling.
Thou wast ruling.
He was ruling.
We were ruling.
You were ruling.
They were ruling.
I sha ll or will rule.
Thou will rule.
He will rule.
We shall or will rule.
You will rule.
They will rule.
146 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
scribent. 6 . Caesar aciem instruébat. 7 . Puer dOna mittet .
8 . Caesar célériter l concilium dimittit. 9. Caesar in I taliam
mag ais itinéribus 2 contendit. 10. Belgae cum Germanis
continenter bellum gérunt. 11. Helvétii légiitbs ad Caesa
rem mittunt.
Translate into Latin
1. We write, we were writing, we Shall write. 2 . He
reads , he was reading, he will read . 3. We send , we were
sending, we shall send . 4. The queen writes a book .
5 . Friends will send books . 6 . The boys were writing.
7 . They had called a Slave . 8 . Caesar hastens into Gaul.
9. The Romans are carrying on war with the Gauls . 10. We
read , they write. 11. We draw up the line of battle, we
were drawing up the line of battle .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. For words not given in the special vocabularies, look in the
general vocabulary at the end of the book .
2 . By long marches.
Define sentence. What are the essential parts Of a sentence ? Men
tion the personal endings of the present, of the imperfect, of the future
indicative.
LESSON XLIX .
THIRD CONJUGATION.
P ERFECT , PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICAT IVEACT IVE.
177 . The Perfect Stem of verbs of the third conjugationis regularly formed by adding
-si to the verb-stem.
EXA MP LES.
TH IRD CONJUGA TION . 149
179. Laws of Euphony ;
b is changed to p before 8 .
EXA M PLES.
scn'
bo , wr ite, perf. ( scrib s i ) soripal .
nfibo , marry ( of woman) , perf. (nubs i ) nupsl .
2 . t and d are dropped before 3, or become with 3, ss .
EXAM PLES.
mitto , send, perf . (mittal ) mil l .
0laudo , shut, ( C lauds l ) C lausl .
laedo , inj ure, ( laeds l ) laesl .
cédo , yield, ( ceds i ) 00831.
3. c, g, qu , h , w ith 3, become x.
EXA M PLES.
d ico , say, perf . ( di cs i ) dixl .
jungo , j oin , ( jungs i ) jua .
0oquo , cook, ( coquai )tréh o , draw, ( traks i ) trfixf.
4. Verbs whose stems end in l , m , n , or r , and a few
others , form their perfects in-ui ; those whose stems end in
a vowel form their perfects in-vi -t
‘
tvi ,-évi , -ivi ) .
EXA MPLES.
0610 0616re 061ui , cultivate.
£10 Slére Slut, nourish.
sEro sérére SEruI, connect.
frémo frémére frémui , rage.
pbno pbnére pbsui , p lace.
pas co (v. st. pa pas cére pavi , feed.
cerno cernére crév i (17 8 . decide.
clipio C fipére clip ivl , desire.
VOCA BULARY.
regbre réxI, rule.
oarpére carpal , p luck.
d iicére atiz i , lead.
pingére pinxi , paint.
nectére néxI, or néxui , tie.
nfibére 11111381.marry ( said of a woman) .
as cendére ascendl , ascend.
150 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
EXERC ISES.
Form the perfect of the following verbs , and account for
the euphonic changes
1 d imitto , dismiss . dico , say, tell.
2 . 0ontendo ,
‘hasten . vinoo , conquer .
3. Oingo , surround . (161130, select.
4. d ilco , lead. tr i ho , draw.
5 . tégo , cover . d efendo , defend.
6 . lud o , p lay. C laudo , shut.
7 . tango ,2 touch. frango ,
3 break.
Translate into English
1. Régina nuntiOs nbn misérat. 2 . Puéri épistfilas scrip
Sérunt. 3. Caesar aciem instrl‘
ixérat. 4. Impérator urbem
miiris‘cinxit. 5 . Belgae cum Germanis continenter bellum
gessérunt. 6 . Még ister filium et puellam5 dOcuit. 7 . Rég
‘
ina
et réx épistiilas scribent.
6
Translate into Latin
1. The boys have written letters . 2 . We have written ,
we had written , we shall have written . 3. He has conquered ,
he had conquered , he Shall have conquered . 4. They have
sent, they sent , they had sent, they Shall have sent. 5 . The
boys and the girls wrote“ letters . 6 . The slaves have led
the boys and girls .
“ 7 . They have defended. 8 . We are
playing. 9. He hastened into Gaul.
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. Stems ending in -nd form the perfect by adding -i, not S i .
2 . tango : verb-stem tag present stem tang present tango, infini
tive tangé'
re, perfect te'
ligi .
3. The verb-stem is frag the present stemfrong perfectfrigi .4. Why ablative
5 . When the object consists of two or more nouns joined by st, and,
both must be in the accusative.
6 . When the subject consists of more than one noun joined byat, and, the verb must be plural .
How is the perfect stem of the third conjugation regularly formed?
How are stems of the third conjugation classified ?
152 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
1. Note the change in the present of Short e to i , and in
the third person plural to n . In the imperfect the character
istic is long e in the future a , which changes to 5.
ABLATIVE OF A CCOMPA NIMENT .
181. RULE XVIII —’1‘h e ablat ive is used to d enote
accom pan im en t, usually w ith th e p r eposition cum .
1. Note that w ith , when it means together w ith or in com
pany with , is translated by cum w ith the ablative .
EXA MP LES.
1. m itto servum cum puérb, I send a slave WITH A BOY.
2 . nos tri équi tés cum fund i tfiribus Sagittarilsque fl iimen
tr an sgres si aunt , our cavalry crossed the r iver WITH THE
SLINGERS A N D A RCHERS.
2 . Carefully distinguish this construction from the instru
mental ablative , which Shows with what or by what an action
is done .
EXA M PLE .
puer vulnératus es t Sagitti'
s , the boy was wounded with (by) arrows.
VOCA BULA RY.
PRESENT . PRES. INF . PERFECT.
0ingo cingére
frango frangere
OC C Ido occid ére
d iv l d o d iv l dére
d i ligo d i ligére
d éligo d éllgére
d éfend o d éfend ére
vinco v in cére
v ivo vivére
lasao laedére
flecto flectére
mergo mergére
OBS. Form the perfect of each verb,
phonic changes .
PARTIC IPLE.
0in0tum, surround.
fractum , break.
occisum, kill.
d ivisum , divide.
dfl ectum, love.
d éle0tum , select.
d éfen sum , defend.
v i0tum, conquer .
v ictum , live.
laesum , hurt.
fléxum , bend .
mersum , dip .
and account for the eu
TH IRD CONJUGA TION . 153
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Déligitur . 2 . C ingitur . 3. Puer ab omnibus diligé
batur . 4. Urbs miirb l cingitur. 5 . Urbs a? civibus defen
ditur . 6 . Omnés vincentur . 7 . Téli'
s occidéris . 8 . A
Caesare dficébamur . 9. a dficébamini . 10. Bella géré
bantur . 11. Cum Germfinis pfignant. 12 . Cum décima
legibne vénit. 13. Titus cum equitibus mittitur.
Translate into Latin
They are ( being) selected . 2 . We are conquered , we
were conquered , we shall be conquered . 3. The city will be
surrounded by a wall. 4. The soldiers will be conquered by
the enemy . 5 . The soldiers will be killed with the weapons .
NOTES AND QUESTIONS.
1. Why ablative ?
2 . Why is the preposition expressed?
What are the personal endings of the present passive voice ? Whatare the future endings of this conjugation ? What verbs have a passivevoice What is meant by voice in grammar
LESSON LI .
THIRD CONJUGATI ON.
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT
PASSIVE —TWO ACC USAT IVES W‘ITH ONE
182 . The Participial Stem Of verbs of the third conjugation is formed by adding
-to nom.-tus ( or -so nom.
-sus) ,to the verb-stem.
154 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
1. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative
Pass ive are inflected as follows
P A R TI A L P A R A D IGM .
[The personal endings, tense signs, and formation, are the same as
in the first and second conjugations .]
PERFECT A ND A ORIST .
P e r son . F o rm ation . Examp le .
Perfect. A orist.
I was ruled.
P lur . 1
PLUPERFEC T .
P er son . F o rm ation . Exam p le . Eng l ish .
Sing. 1 Verb-st. tus Cram rectus éram I had been ruled .
tus érés rectus ér i s Thou hadst been ruled .
tus brat rectus érat He had been ruled .
P lur . l ti éri mus recti éramus We had been ruled .
ti éri tis recti ér i tis You had been ruled .
ti érant recti érant They had been ruled .
FUTURE PERFECT.
P ll l l' . 1
183. Euphonic changes :
I . g, qu , h become 0 before t.
EXA MP LES.
régo , rule, part. stem ( regtus )c uo , cook, ( coqutus )tr i be , draw, ( trfihtus )
I shall have been ruled .
Thouwilthavebeen ruled .
He will have been ruled .
We shall have been ruled .
Youwill have been ruled .
They will huve been ruled .
156 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN.
Learn the principal parts of the following verbs , and
account for the euphonic changes
v ivo v ivére v ixi victum. live.
d iioo d iicere dfixI dactum , lead.
div i de div i ders d iv is i divlsum. divide.
lilao lfi dére lfi s i lfisum, p lay.
cano canére céclni sing.
légo légére lég‘
i lectum , read.
184. Two A ccusatives w ith oneVerb.
EXA MP LES.
1. C as sarem sententiam rbgi vit, he asked (”
cesar (his) opinion .
2 . C aesar A edufis frumentum fl i gl tavit, Caesar demanded corn
of the fEdui.
3. Titus régem s erménem célav it, Titus concealed the conversa
tionfromthe Icing.
4. C aesar ssntentiam a cons ifl e rbgatus est, Cwsar was asked
his opinion by the consul.
5. pacem ab R émani'
s peti t , he seeks peacefrom the Romans.
OBS. Note that in Exs . 1, 2 , and 3 the verbs of asking, demand
ing, concealing, are in the active voice, and are followed by two
accusatives , one of the person , the other of the thing. In Ex. 4 the
verb of asking is in the passive voice, and the accusative of the
person in the active becomes the subject in the passive . In EX . 5
the person after a verb of asking (petit ) is ut in the ablative with
a preposition . The idiom is expressed in t e following rule
TWO ACCUSATIVES. PERSON AND THING .
185. RULE XIX. Verbs of a sk ing , d eman d in g ,
teach in g , and con cea l in g tak e tw o accusatives, one of
th e person an d the oth er o f th e th ing .
1. The accusative of the thing may remain with the passive
voice of verbs of teaching, and also w ith rbgo .
2 . P éto and postino generally take the accusative of the thingand the ablative of the person w ith a or ab ; quaero . the accusative
of the thing and the ablative of the person with 6 , ex , 5 , ab , or de.
SYN . P éto , to beg, rbgo , to aslc, are general terms for either a
request or a demand ; pos tino , to demand as a r ight flagl to , to de
mand with earnestness ; posco , to ask as a right, as a pr ice, or salary.
FOURTH CONJ UGA TION . 157
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Ducti érant, missus est, ciucti sunt. 2 . Victi sunt.
3. Puet i ii magistro mOniti érant. 4. Castra vallO cincta l
sunt. 5 . Exercitas ROmanuS ab Helvétiis sub jfigum missus
est. 6 . Nuntii ad exercitum nostrum missi sunt. 7 . Réx ct
régina omnibus 2 ce‘
iri 3 fuérunt. 8 . Caesar omnia consilia
A eduOs eelat. 9. Consul Cas sarem sententiam rOgabat.
Translate into Latin
1. They have been led , they have been sent. 2 . He has
been sent, we have been sent, he had been sent. 3. You
Shall have been sent. 4. The city has been surrounded by
a wall . 5 . The Helvetians have been sent. 6 . We have
been conquered , we had been conquered , we Shall have been
conquered . 7 . He was sent, he will be sent, he has been
sent, he had been sent. 8 . We shall not be conquered bv
the enemy . 9. They asked Titus his Opinion . 10. Caesar
concealed his plans from the Helvetians . 11. The Helvetians
seek peace from Caesar .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. Neuter plural .
2 . Dative after cm .
3. Masculine by preference.
LESSON LII .
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
PRESENT, IMPERFECT , AND FUTURE INDICAT IVE ACTIVE.
ACC USAT IVE OF THE SAME PERSON.
186 . The Fourth Conjugation includes all verbs that have
i long before-re in the present infinitive. The present stem
is found by dropping-re of the present infinitive .
EXAM PLE .
PRES. IND . PRES. INF .
aud io , hear . audIre
158 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
1. The Present, Imperfect, and Future Tenses , Indicative
A ctive , are formed by adding the verbal endings to the
present stem .
P A R T I A L P A R AD I GM .
[The personal endings and the tense signs are the same as in the
fi rst and second conjugations, except in the future, where the charac
teristic vowel of the stem becomes a or E. The third person plural
indicative is audiunt, not audi-uh ]
PRESENT.
P e r so n . F o rm ation . Examp le . Eng l ish .
Sing. l Pr es . stem o
P lur . 1 audimus
andiunt They hear .
IMPERFECT .
Pres . stem bam
bi s
bat
P lur . 1 bamus
batis
bant
FUTURE.
Sing. 1 Pres . stem m I shall or will hear .
Thou wilt hear .
He will hear .
P lur . 1 We shall or will hear .
You will hear .
18 7 . Two A ccusatives of the Same Person .
EXAMP LES.
C aesarem con sfilem cre i v érun t , they elected Cazsar consul.
con sfi lés creantur C aesar et Serv ilius , Cwsar and Servilius
are elected consuls .
ROmfi lus urb em R amam vacav it , Romulus called the city Rome.
urbs R éma a R émfi lo v bcata es t.
I was hearing.
Thouwast hear ing.
He was hearing.
We were hearing.
You were hearing.
They were hearing.
160 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
1. When suns refers to a noun in the plural, as is the case in th is
sentence, render it their ; when it refers to a noun in the singular ,
render it his , her , or its .
2 . By means of, etc. Why ablative ?
3. Their can be omitted in translating.
What are the personal endings of the present ? What is the presen tstem of audi o ? What is a predicate accusative ? How many con
jugations ? How do you distinguish each ? What is the present sternof each ? How found ?
LESSON LIII .
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
PERFECT , PLUPERFECT , AND FUTURE PERFECT ACTIVE.
THE SUBJECT IVE AND THE OBJECT IVE GENIT IVE.
189. The Perfect Stem of a regular verb of the fourth
conjugation is formed by adding-vi to the present stem .
EXA MP LE .
PRESENT. PRES. STEx . PERF . STEM .
audi o , hear. aud i
1. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative
A ctive are inflected as follows
PA R T I A L P A R A D IGM .
[The personal endings, the tense signs, the formation, and the changes
of the characteristic vowel of the stem are the same as in the first,second, and thi rd conjugations .)
PERFECT A ND A ORIST .
Eng l ish .
Perfect. A orist.P e r son . F o rm ation . Exam p le .
Perf. stem
sti
t
P lar . 1 mus
stis
runt
or re
I have heard . I heard .
Thou hastheard . Thou didst hear .
He has heard. He heard .
We have heard . We heard .
You have heard . You heard.
They have heard . They heard.
FOURTH CONJUGATION . 161
PLUPERFECT.
Sing. l Perf. stem ram andivéram I had heard.
P lur . l rimus audivbriimus We had heard.
ri tis audi'
vbri tis You had heard .
rant andivérant They had heard.
FUTURE PERFECT.
Sing. 1 Perf. stem bro audivéro I shall have heard.
brie audivér is Thouwilt have heard.
brit andi'
vérit He will have heard.
P lur . 1 brimus audivérlmus We will have heard.
2 . Synopsis of Rules for Forming the Perfect Stem
1. MostVowel Stems ( 55 .3) form the perfect stem by addingan -ui) to the characteristic vowel of the present stem : as, fin e ,
imav i daeo , délév l ; mbnee , mbnui ; audio, audlvl .
2 . Most Consonant Stems form the perfect stem by adding-st
to the verb-stem : as, dfice , dfixi ; tége , text.
3. Many Labial and Lingual Stems, and a few others, form the
perfect stem by addingout to the verb-stem : as, dbme , dbmui
510, 51111; wneo, ténui.
4. A few Consonant Stems form the perfect stern simply byadding 4 to the verb
-stem ( this is the case when the stem vowel is
long by nature or by position) as, accendo , accend i ; verte ,
verti ; prE-no do, prE-hendi .
5. The PerPect Stem is sometimes formed by reduplication and
by adding 4 to the verb-stem ( the stem vowel a is generally weak
ened to i, but before r to e) as , 056 0, cécldi ; tondee , tbtendl ;
ci ne , céclnl ; pat io , pl péri .
6. Some verbs lengthen the stem vowel and add -t to form the
perfect ( that is, the reduplication disappears and the vowel is
lengthened) : as, 1650 ( lb-Hg! lé-ig-i 165i ) , légi ; fi cie ( fé-fic-ifé-lo-I feet ; ci ple , cépi ; age , 631.
OBs . The v is often dropped and the syllable contracted ; as ,imi lvfl rat lmi rat, audi (v )6rat audiérat.
162 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
190. Subjective, Possessive, and Objective Genitives .
EXAMP LES.
1. oppidum R émdrum, a town of belonging to) the Remi .2 . Div ltlaci studium, the zeal of Divitiacus the zeal that
D ivitiacus manifests) .
3. imer glériae, love of glory a desire to obtain glory) .
4. timer hostium crescit, fear of the enemy fear towardsthe enemy, not fear exper ienced by the enemy) increases.
OBS. In the first example, note that the genitive designates the
assessor it is called the possessive genitive. In Ex. 2 the genitive
esignates the subj ect or agent of the action or feelin it is called
the subj ective genitive. In Exs . 3and 4 the genitive esignates the
obj ect towards which the action or feeling is directed ; it is called
the obj ective genitive. Hence the qualifying genitive may be
1. A POSSESSIVE GEN ITIVE, denoting the author or thepossessor ;as , C aeséris prdv incia. Casar
’s province.
2 . A SUBJECT IVE GEN ITIVE, denoting the subj ect or agent of theaction or feeling ; as, amer Dei , the love of God the
love which He feels ) .3. A N OBJECTIVE GEN ITIVE, denoting the obj ect of the action
or feeling ; as, amor D el , love to towards) God.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Pfinivit, pfinivérat, punivérit. 2 . A udivéram, audi
véro . 3. Milites castra mfinivérant. 4. Pfinivimus puérum.
5 . Erfidivi , ériidivit, érfidivisti , ériidivéram . 6 . Puéri 1
librum ténés . 7 . Légatus consilia GallOrum énuntiat.
Translate into Latin
1. We have heard, we heard, we had heard,‘We shall have
heard . 2 . They have punished , they had punished , they
will have punished . 3. He has slept . 4. We fortify, we
have fortified, we had fortified , we shall have fortified.
NOTES A ND QUESTION S.
1. Why genitive ?
What is meant by the possessive genitive ? Give the rule for the
geni tive after nouns . What is the objective genitive ? How is the
perfect stem of verbs of the fourth conjugation formed ?
164 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
182 . Dative with Intransitive Verbs .
EXAMPLES.
1. haec sententia puéré placet, illa disp licet, this opinion
p leases the boy, that disp leases (him) .2 . mili tia es t duci parere , it is the duty of a soldier to obey the
leader .
3. fertfina fi vet fortibus ,fortunefavors the brave.
OBS. We have already learned that the dative is the case of theindirect object, and is used to express the person or thing to or
for whom or which anything is done. In the sentence, I send the
book to the boy, boy in Latin must be in the dative, as mitte librum
puérd ; but in the sentence Caesar comes to the city, city in Latin is notdative, a preposition must be used, as C aesar ad urbem vénit.
In the foregoing examples, note that the verbs are intransitive ;that they signify to favor , to lease, to obe etc. ; that the are fol
lowed by the dative general y without t e Sign to or or . The
idiom is expressed in the following rule
DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
193. RULE XXI . Th e dative Of th e indir ect
Object may be used w ith most intran sitive verbs
sign ifying to favor , p lease, trust, a ss is t, and th e ir
con traries ; also , to believe , p er suade, comm and , obey ,
ser ve, r es ist, thr ea ten , sp a r e, p a r don , be an gr y .
I . Some verbs which , from their signification , might be
included in the foregoing lists are transitive, and take the
accusative ; as , juvo , ad juvo, to help , laedo, to inj ure, delecto,to delight, offendo , to oj
‘
ead , and jubeo, to command .
2 . Verbs compounded with sans , bane, male, take the
dative.
EXA MPLE.
illis s i tis fécére, to satisfy them, lit. to do enoughfor them.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Miiniébantur , pfiniéris , piiniuntur . 2 A uditur , audié
bantur , audiétur . 3. Castra a Labienb l mfiniébantur
4. Bellum a Caesare finiébatur . 5 . Milités castra2 miime
bant. 6 . Mali puéri'
a magistrO piinientur . 7 . Imprbbi' 3 a
mégistriitibus piinientur . 8 . Caesar bellum finit. 9. Bellum
FOURTH CONJUGA TION . 165
ii Caesi re finitur . 10. Parce puéro. l l . Prbbus a invidet
ném‘
ini .‘ 12 . Mi lédicimus miilis .
3
Translate into Latin
1. He will be heard , they will be heard , they were (being)heard , they are ( being) heard. 2 . The soldiers fortify the
camp . 3. The camp is fortified by the soldiers . 4. The
war is (being) finished , the war w ill be finished , the wars
were (being) finished . 5 . The boys are (being) punished ,the boys will be punished , the boys were (being) punishedby the mas ter . 6 . The soldiers obey the leader .
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.
1. See 17 2 . 2 . See 80. 2 . 3. Used as a noun ; see 83. 4.
4. The genitive and ablative of nullus are used instead of néminis
and némine.
What is the passive voice ? In what case is the agent after a verb
in the passive voice ? What are the principal parts of a verb in the
passive voice ?
LESSON LV.
FOURTH cosmeArIos .
PERFECT , PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT PASSIVE.
194. The Participial Stem of the fourth conjugation is
formed by adding-to, nom.
-tus (or -so , nom.-sus ) , to the
present stem.
EXA M P LE .
PRES. Su n . PERF . Su n . PAB’N C . STEII .
eudi aud iv i eudite
PR IN C I PA L PA R TS.
A CTIVE VOICE.
PRES. INF PERFECT.
audire aud iv i
PA SSIVE VOICE.
PRES. INF . PERFECT .
audiri aud itus , -a, -um sum
166 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
1. The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative
Passive are all formed by adding to the perfect participle
the present, imperfect, and future tenses of the verb sum.
P A R T I A L P A R A D IGM.
[The personal endings, tense signs , the changes of the characteristic
vowel of the stem,and the formation
, are the same as in the other
conjugations ]
2 . The Participial Stem of verbs of all four conjugationsis generally formed by adding
-to ( euphonically -so) nom.
-tus (or -sus) , to the present stem.
168 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
LESSON LVI .
THIRD CONJUGATION.—VERBS IN -to .
197 . A few verbs of the third conjugation ending in-io,
ior ( passive) , are inflected in the tenses formed from the
present stem like the fourth conjugation wherever the fourthhas i followed by a vowel .
P A R T I A L P A RA D IGM .
IMPEBFECT.
ci pbrem l ci piébar
FUTURE.
capiéris (re)
PLUP . cépéram captus éram
IMP . ci pe capére
INF . capére
PART . ci piéns captiirus
capbrer
capiémur
capiémini
captus essem
capimini
chpiendus
GER. chpiendi , -db, -dum SUP . captam, captii
TH IRD CONJUGATION . 169
eiipére eiip itum, desire.
factum , make, do .
fossum, dig.
jaotum, throw, hurl.
partnm, bring forth.
qum um, shake.
raptum , seize.
taste.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English :
l . Fiigiunt, fiigiébant, fiigient, fi'
Igiant. 2 . Jiicit, jacié
bat, ji ciet, jiiciat. 3. Citpimur , ciipiébamur , capiémur ,
ci piiimur . 4. Milités arma ciipiunt. 5 . A rms 5 militibus
ci piuntur . 6 . Vir fossam d it . 7 . Fossa ii virO d itur .
8 . Milités li pidés ac téla ct'
miciébant .
l 9. Li pidés ac téla a
militibus conjects érant. 10. Ffigite , milités , in urbem.
NOTES AND QUESTI ONS.
1. Written also eonjicfl bant.
When does a verb in -ia keep the i ? What is the verb-stem of
cl pie Ans . The verb-stem of cl pie is cap-3 the present stem is
formed by adding -i j o £0) to the verb-s tem. Inflect the present
of ci ple ; of jl cie . The compounds of jl cie are written and pro
nounced as follows : (ex jficie ) bieie , pronounced as if written
O-yieie ; so also ah iolo ab jfioie ) abyioie, etc.
LESSON LVII .
USES OF TEE DATIVE.
DATIVE or lNTEREST.—DAT IVE or PURPOSE.
OBS. We have learned that the dative may be used with transitive or intransitive verbs ; the datives with these verbs are essentialto the completion of the sense, and are usually so closely connected
with their verbs that they could not be omitted . The dative is
VOCA BULA RY.
eiipivi
feel
ibdi
“ is!
jéci
Pi pi fl
( no Perfrl pui
“ piv i
170 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
often merely added to a sentence, which would make com lete
sense without it, for the pur Se of designatingthe person or t ing
interested in the action of t e verb, or aiiecte by it . This use of
the dative, called dative of interest, may be stated as follows
198 . Dative of Interest.
1. The dative of advantage and disadvantage.
2 . The dative of possessor .
3. The dative of apparent agent with perfect participles and
gerundives ( this dative designates the person interested in doing
the action, and not merely the agent) .
4. The dative of reference ( this dative depends not on a single
word, but is loosely connected with the whole predicate, and merelydesignates the person or thing with reference to whom or which the
action is done) .
5 . The dative used where the English idiom would lead us to
expect the genitive.
6 . The dative of purpose or end, denoting the object or end forwhich something is or is done.
DATIVE OF PURPOSE OR END .
199. RULE XXIII .— Th e dative is used w ith em
an d a few oth er verbs to denote th e purpose or end ,
usually w ith anoth er dative of th e per son or th ing
affected or in terested .
EXAMP LES.
1. dbmus dbminls aed ificata es t, nan muxihua, a house is
builtfor its owners, not for themice. (See 198 .
2 . mihi es t amicus , I have a friend, lit . there is a friend to me
( emphasizes the fact of possession ; see 198 .
3. virtue nbbis celenda est, we have virtue to cultivate. (198 .
tbgimenta galeis mili tés iaeére jiibet, he orders the soldiersto make coverings for their helmets . Galois depends on tégi
menta fficére rather than on ( Sabre alone . (See 198 .
5. légfiti C aesar! ad pédés prbieiunt, the ambassadors threw
themselves at Caesar’
s feet, lit . to Caesar at his feet. (198 .
6. sh av it mihi fi lium, he cured my son, out of regard to me ;sanav it ti lium meum , he cured my son, not caring Whose
son . ( See 198 .
172
9.
10.
11.
12 .
FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
extri , outside, beyond.
infri , below, under .
inter , between, among.
intri , within.
13. juxta, next to.
14.
15 .
16 .
17.
18 .
2 .
3.
ob,for, on account of.
pénes, in the power of.
per, through, by the aid of .
pane, behind .
post, behind, after, since.
19. praeter , past, besides.
20. prbpe, near .
21. propter , on account of.
22 . sécnndum, following, afl er,ac
cording to.
23. supr i , above.
24. trans, across, on the other side.
25. ultra, beyond.
26 . versus, towards (placed after
noun ) .
Ten prepositions are followed by the ablative :
5 , ab, abs, from,after , by.
absque, but, for , without (rarein classic authors ) .
cOram,in presence of.
cum, with.
dé, downf rom,from,concerning.
6 . 6, ex, out of; from.
7. prae, before, in compar ison with.
8 . prb, bqfore, for, instead of.9. sins , without.
10. ténus , up to,as far as ( some
times with genitive ) .
The following four prepositions are followed by the
accusative when motion to a p lace IS implied ; by the ablative
when rest in a p lace 1s implied
in, denoting motion to a place, INTO with accusative ; rest in a
place, IN with ablative.
ub , denoting motion to a place, UNDER with accusative ; rest in a.
place, UNDER with ablative.
uper , denoting motion to a place, A BOVE w ith accusative ; rest
in a place, A BOVE with ablative.
supter ( sub ter ) , denoting motion to a place, UNDER with accusa
tive , rest in a place, UNDER w ith ablative .
OBS.1. Ténus (with abl. like versus (w ith ace. Is placed after
its case ; and cum is annexed to the ablative of the personal and
relative pronouns .
OBS. 2 . A and 6 are used before consonants ; ab and ex before
vowels and consonants .
201. The Use of Prepos itions .
We have learned ( 81. N . 2 ) that a preposition with its object is a
prepositional phrase (or adj unct) . Such a phrase enables us to ex
PREPOSITIONS. 173
press an idea more distinctly : as, C cesar came there ; if we substi
tute into Gaul for there, the sentence reads Caesar came into Gaul,
expressing the thoughtwith greater precision than with the adverb
alone. The preposition w ith its object, into Gaul, or in Galliam.
is a phrase modifying the verb.
The pupil should gradually commit the lists of prepositions
to memory .
202 . Dative withVerbs Compounded with a Preposition .
1. dux suis mili tibus l dérat, the leader was assisting his soldiers.
2 . C aesar Gal liae praeiuit, Casar ruled over Gaul .
3. C aesar interfuit p ilgus e, C aesar was p resent in the battle.
OBS. Verbs compounded with certain prepositions govern the
dative, when they ac uire a meaning from t e preposition which
calls for the dative. hen the simple verb is transitive, the com
pound may take both the dative and the accusative : as, jungl re,to j oin, takes the accusative ; but adjungére, to j oin to, takes the
dative also ; when the verb is intransitive, it takes the dative only.
Hence the following rule
DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS.
203. RULE XXIV. Th e dative of th e ind ir ect
Obj ect is u sed w i th man y verbs compounded w i th
ad , ante, can , in , in ter , ob, p ost, p r a e, p r o , sub, and
sup er , and sometimes cir cum .
VOCA BULA RY.
A qui tania, F ., A quitania, a province in Southern Gaul.
Pyrenaei , -6 rum, M . PL., the Pyrenees .
pertinee , pertinere , pertinui , stretch.
speoto , spectat e, speetl vi, Spectamm , look at.
septentribnés , -6num , M ., the north.
divide , dividére, d iv is i , d iv isum , separate, divide.
dives , -itis , rich.
incOle , c hlére ,-etilui,2 inhabit, dwell .
centendo , centendére , oentend l , cententum, contend, hasten .
pervénie , pervénire , pervéni , perventum , arrive at.
174 FIRST s'rnp s IN LATIN .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1 A quitania a Garumna fliimi'
ne8ad Pyrénaeos pertinet.
2 . A pud Helvetios nobilissimus ct ditissimus fuit Orgétérix .
3. Gallos ab A quitan‘
is Garumna fliimen dividit. 4. Ger
mani'
trans Rhé’
num incolunt. 5 . Spectat inter occasum
solis et septentriones A quitania.
‘ 6 . Caesar hiberni'
s Labi
enum praepésuit. 7 . Belgae ad inferiorem partem fliimi'
nis
Bheni pertinent. 8 . Caesar in Italiam magnie itinéribus"
contenait. 9. A pud‘Cicérénem légimus . 10. Milites
omnes in oppidum irrumpunt.’
NOTES AN D QUEST IONS.
1. Commit to memory the prepositions that always require the
ablative.
2 . No participial stem.
3. How is flfimlne parsed
4. Subject of spectat.5 . Why ablative ?
6 . A pud is used with names of authors ( instead of in , with the name
of the work ) . Translate, we read in C icero.
7. Most of the prepositions enumerated above are often used as pre
fixes in composition with verbs, and modify their meaning : as, pane“ .
to place ; post-pa dre, to place after . A few prepositions are never
used alone, but always occur in composition
amb round, about ; as, ambh'
e, to walk around.
con together ; as, conjungére, to j oin together .
dI 6153 asunder ; as, disoédére, to depart.
ln with adjectives and verbs, means not, nu as indoctus ,
unlearned ; I-gnosco not to know.
or red back, again ; as, rEfl cBre, to make again, refi t.
36 3 aside ; as sédfioére, to lead astray.
v5 , not (serves to negative the positive idea in the word with
which it is compounded, or intensifies it) ; végrandis , not large.
When do in and sub require the accusative ? How does the use of
a difier from ab When is to the sign of the dative When must itbe translated by ad ?
176 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
5. Causal Conjunctions, denoting cause as, nam, namque ,
Enim, éténim, for .
EXAMP LE .
Hisfr iends will abandon him,for his father has done so.
11. Subor d inate C onj un ction s .
OBS. A subordinate clause is so united to another clause (orclauses) as to be dependent on it ; as, the messenger departed w henhe w as sent. Here the messenger departed is the princi al, or olead
ing clause ; when he was sent modifies departed, and is t e subordi
nate clause. Dependent clauses perform the office of a noun,
adjective, or an adverb, and hence are called noun, adjective, oradverb clauses they are often named from the subordinate con
junctions by which they are introduced. (See
206 . The Subordinate Conjunctions comprise
Temporal, denoting time ; as, cum, when .
Comparative, denoting comparison ; as, quam, v51ut, as, j us t as.
Conditional, denoting condition ; as, at, if.Concessive, denoting concession ; as, licet, although.
Final, denoting purpose or end ; as, ut, ne, that, that not.
Consecutive, denoting consequence or result ; as, quin , so that
not ; ut, so that.
7 . Causal, denoting cause ; as, quid , quod , qubniam, because.
8 . Interrogative, used in askingquestions : as,-ne ( enclitic) , nbnne.
mun , whether ; an, or ; annbn , or not.
One. 1. Of the three words meaning and
a. et connects independent words and clauses, as in Exs. 1, 2.
b.—que ( enclitic) connects words or clauses that are to be con
sidered together, or as a whole, as in Ex . 3.
c . atque ( ad , in addition to, and qne, and) , and also, indicate s
that the second word is more important than the first,as in Ex. 4.
OBS . 2 . Most of the causal conjunctions are subordinate .
G
u
h
w
w
i—i
207 . Model for Parsing a Conjunction :
In Ex. 1et is a coordinate conjunction , and connects the com
pound subject ltina and stella. Hence the following rule
208 . RULE XXV. C on jun ction s conn ect w ords ,
p h r ases, clauses, and sen ten ces .
GENITIVEs IN -I US. 177
EXERC ISES.
Parse the conjunctions in the following sentences
1. Neque pater néque filius virum laudat. 2 . Hostés
Italiam longé latéqne vastavérant. 3. Liberi erant non
ma‘
igai , sed b6n‘
i pulchrique . 4. Hémines sunt aut fel‘
ices
aut infel‘
ices .
LESSON LX.
GENITIVES IN -ius .
IMPERAT IVE MODE, ACTIVE VOICE.
209. Nine A djectives of the First and Second Declensionshave their genitive singular in
-ius , and dative in -i , in all
genders . These adjectives are
l lius , other . tbtus , whole. alter, other (of two) .nfillus , none. nuns .any. neuter. neither .
sblus , alone. anus , one. titer, which (of two) .
1. The plural of these adjectives is declined like the pluralof bonus . The singular is thus declined
178 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
210. The Imperative Mode has two tenses , the Present
and the Future .
1. The Present Imperative has only the second person .
2 . The Future Imperative has the second and third persons .
3. The first person of the Imper . is supplied by the Subjunctive .
4. The Negative of the Imperative is né.
211. The Present and Future Imperative A ctive of the
Four Conjugations is inflected as follows
180 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Lauda, exercé, scribe , bhed‘
i . 2 . Laudate , exercéte ,
scribite , 6béd‘
ite. 3. Disce , puer . 4. Ti céte , puér‘
i . l 5 . Mili
tés in hnum 16cum véniunto . 6 . Miles ex altéra parte urbis
vén‘
ito . 7 . Spes téta Rémanos désérit.
Translate into Latin
1. Praise thou, exercise thou, write thou, obey thou.
2 . Praise ye, exercise ye, wr ite ye, obey ye . 3. Call the
boy . 4. Learn , boys .
1 5 . Call ye , punish ye , advise ye,
rule ye . 6 . The soldiers of both armies are brave . 7 . They
come to one place . 8 . Which (of the two) does he praise ?
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. Case and rule.
How many modes Define each . Does the use of the Latin impera
tive differ from the same mode in English? How many persons has
the imperative How is the first person supplied
LESSON LX I .
NUMERALS.
AC CUSAT IVE OF T IME AND SPACE—ABLAT IVE OF
DIFFERENCE.
212 . Numeral adjectives express number ; they are
divided into three principal classes
1. CA RD IN ALS, which answer the question how many : as, fi rm s ,
one ; trés , three.
2 . ORD INA LS, which express rank or order ; they answer the ques
tion which in order, or one of ho wmany : as, p rlmus , first.
3. DISTRIBUTIVES, which answer the question how many to each,
or how many at a time : as, b lni , two each, or two by two ;
b is b ina mal a , twice two app les .
4. Numeral adverbs answer the question how ofl en as , b is , tw ice.
NUMERA LS. 181
213. The Cardinal Numbers are indeclinable, except
tim e, one, duo , two, trees, three, and the hundreds be
ginning with ducenti, two hundred. The hundreds are
declined like the plural of bonus ; and the first three
cardinals are declined as follows :
1. In the plural, anus often has the meaning of same, only. It
is also used in its ordinary sense w ith a plural noun of a singular
meaning ; as, fine cas tra, one camp .
2 . Mi lls is either an Adjective or a Noun
a. As an Adjective it is indeclinable, and limits the noun ; as,
EXA MPLES.
1. mi lk 1161111116 8 , (1thousand men .
2 . cum bis ml lle hbmln ibus , with two thousand men .
b. A s a noun it is indeclinable in the singular ; in the plural it
is declined like the plural of mi re (110) mnia, mnium , mnlbus ,mfl ia, mnibus . It is followed by the genitive, unless a declined
numeral comes between, as in Ex . 3; as,
EXA MPLES.
1. mme hbmlnum , a thousand men ( lit. , of men) .
2 . tr ia mfl ia hbmlnum , three thousand men ( lit., of men) .
3. tria mfl ia “ Goentl mIlItés , three thousand three hundred soldiers .
182 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
OBS . 1. The numbers between 20and 100are expressed either
by the larger numeral first w ithout at , or by the smaller numeralfirst w ith et ; as, v igin tl iinus , twenty
—one, or fi rm s et v igintl , one
and twenty . The numbers above 100always have the larger numberfirst ; as, centum et sexaginta sex , or centum sex i gin ta sex ,
one hundred and sixty-six.
OBS. 2 . The numerals 18 , 19, 28 , 29, 38 , 39 have the smaller
numeral first, w ith the preposition d é to indicate subtraction ; as ,
duéd év igin tl , find év igintl , dubdétr igin ta, etc.
3. Distributive numerals are sometimes used to Show a plural
signification in those nouns, the plural forms of which have other
wise a singular meaning ; as, bina cas tr a, two camps ; binae
aed és , two houses binae littérae , two ep istles . Duo cas tr a would
mean twoforts duaa aedés , two temp les ; duae littérae, two letters
(of the alphabet) .
OBS . 3. The year is expressed by annus with the ordinal
numerals ; as, annus mfl l és lmus octingentésimus octbgés lmus
quintus , the year 1885.
OBS . 4. P rior is used instead of primus when only two things
are Spoken of ; al ter is often used for sécundus .
214. A ccusative of Time and Space.
EXA MPLES.
l . R émfilus septem et tr lginta régn i v it annbs , Romulus
reigned thirty-seven YEA RS.
2 . fossa pedes trécentbs longa es t , sex pEdes alta, the ditch
is three hundred FEET long, six FEET deep .
3. castra ab urbe mnia passuum octo ab sunt, the camp is
eight MILES distantfrom the city.
OBS. Note that annbs , in Ex . 1, expresses duration of time that
pedés and mfl i a , in Exs. 2 and 3, denote the extent of space, and
are also in the accusative. The idiom is expressed in the followingrule
A CCUSATIVE OF TIME AND SPACE.
215 . RULE XXVI . D uration of time and exten t
of Space ar e exp r essed by th e accusative .
1. Distance is sometimes expressed by the ablative . (SeeA blative of Difference ,
EXA MPLE.
mi'
llbus pas suum sex a C aesaris cas tris cons édi t, he eu
camped A T THE DISTA NCE of Six M ILESfrom Caesar’
s camp .
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON LXII .
IMPERATIVE PASSIVE OF THE POUR CONJUGATIONS.
THE PLACE TO WHIC H.
216 . The Imperative Passive of the Four Conjugations isinflected as follows
188 F I RST STEPS I N LATIN .
OBS . In the foregoing examples, note that in l , 2, 3, the namesof the places to which the motion is directed are not the names of
towns ; in each case the preposition is expressed. In Exs . 4, 5, the
nouns denoting the place to which the motion is directed are names
t
o] towns the accusative is used w ithout a preposition . Note,urther, that dbmum , dbmbs , and rits , like names of towns, have
no preposition . The idiom is expressed in the following rule
THE NAME OF THE PLA CE TO WH ICH .
218 . RULE XXVII .—Th e name Of th e p lace
w h ither , or to w h ich , regu lar ly requ ires th e p reposi
tion in or ad .
1. But w ith names of towns and small islands , and with
dbmum, domos , and rfis , the preposition is omitted .
VOCA BULA RY.
édfioo , A re,-fiv1, A tum , educate.
s trénué briskly, vigorously.
Bri tan nia, -ae, F ., Britain .
attingo ,-tingere, -tl gl , tactum , touch, reach.
inatl tfi tum,-I, N . custom ; PL . institutions .
géro , gérere, ges sI, gestum , bear , carry on .
vergo , vergére, turn, lie toward .
persuddeo, a nadere, q uas i , -su5.sum , convince, persuade.
fi clle, facilius , faomss ime , easily.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Puer, béne édiicare . 2 . Puer , strenué exercére.
3. Puer , prObé ec lére . 4. Puer , diligenter ériidire .
5 . Puer , béne édficato r , strenué exercétor , prObé ec litor ,
diligenter érfiditor . 6 . In fines VécontiOrum die septimo
pcrvénit. 7 . Hera quarta Britanniam attigit. 8 . Nocte ad
Caesarem pervenérunt. 9. In Gallia ulteriore maltOs l annOs
manébimus . 10. ProximO die Caesar é castris cOpias
suas édfixit. 11. COnsul A thenas prOfectus est. 12 . Caesar
Miletum prOpéravit. 13. Multi'
ex urbe rfis migrabant.
14. SérO dOmum venisti .
CLASSI FICATION OF SENTENCES. 189
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
T he quantity of long final syllables has hitherto been marked ; the
pupil should be taught to account for the quantity of all final sy llables .
Define the imperative . How many tenses has the imperative? A re
the personal endings the same for all four conjugations ? A fter verbs
of motion, how is the place to which expressed With names of towns,
how is the place to which expressed ? What other words omit the
preposition
LESSON LXIII .
CLASSIFICATION OF SENTENCES.—ANALYSIS OP SIMPLE
SENTENCES.
219. Sentences may be classified, with respect to
their mean ing, as
1. Simp le. 2 . C omplex . 3. C ompound .
220. A Simple Sentence contains but one subject and
one predicate, either of which may be compound.
EXA MP LES.
1. Messengers come.
2 . The swiftmessengers come quickly .
3. The boys and girls laugh and p lay.
OBS. Messenger is the subject of the first sentence, and come is
the predicate . In Ex . 2 the and swiftmodify messengers, and are
called the Modifiers of the Subject . The swift messengers is themodified, or logical subject ; come quickly is the modified, or logical
predicate . The third sentence has a compound subject, boys andgirls, connected by the coo
’
rdinate copulative conjunction and, and
a compound predicate .
221. A Complex Sentence is composed of one inde
pendent clause in combination w ith one or more de
pendent clauses .
EXA MP LES.
1. The general, who is cautious, will succeed .
0 IVhen the rain descended, thefloods came.
OBS. The first sentence contains two parts : the general will
succeed, and who is cautious. Each part contains a subject and
predicate, and is called a clause ; hence the definition :
190 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
222 . A clause is a part of a sentence containing a
subject and predicate.
OBS. The clause, who is cautious, really performs the office of an
adjective, as we may use in place of it Simply the word cautious,and say the cautious general will succeed. The adjective clause,who is cautious, performing the office of a Single word, is called a
DEPENDENT CLA USE ; the other clause, the general will succeed, not
performing the oflice of a single word, is called an INDEPENDENT
CLA USE. The two clauses, connected by who, are so combined thatone modifies the other ; they form in combination a COMPLEXSENTENCE. In the second sentence, thefloods came is the independent clause, modified by the clause when the rain descended, i .e. bya clause telling when the floods came ; and as this clause performsthe office of a sin le word, an adverb, the two clauses in combination form a Comp ex Sentence .
223. A Compound Sentence is composed of two or
more independent clauses .
EXAM P LE .
The rain descended, and thefl oods came.
OBS . This sentence consists of two parts, the rain descended and
the floods came, each of which is independent, and makes completesense b itself . The sentence is COMPOUND, because it consists oftwo in ependent clauses .
SIMPLE SENTENCES C LASSIFIED.
224. Simple sentences may be Declarative Interrogative ,Imperative, or Exclamatory .
EXA M PLES.
1. C aesar was stabbed. 3. Love j ustice, and hate evil .
2 . W'
as Casar stabbed by Brutus ? 4. What a cruel deed he has done !
M od ifi er s .
225 . The Subject or the Predicate may be modified
(1) a word , ( 2 ) a phrase, (3) a clause.
EXAMPLES.
mfl i tés fortés , brave soldiers .
Oppida s ine praes i d ib, towns without garr isons .
réx A lb i nérum , the king of the A lbans .
puer , qui'
legit , the boy, who reads.fi
OO
t
—t
192 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
sources , and abundant streams of revenue gushed forth .
14. There “ is a pleasure in the pathless woods . 15 . The
soldiers were brave.
3
NOTES AND QUESTIONS.
1. Expand this sentence into a compound sentence.
2 . There is used as,
an introductory word, to fill out the sentence,
and is, therefore, called an erpletive (Lat. exp lére, to fill out) .3. IS this adjective attributive or predicate
What is a sentence ? C lassify sentences . Write a simple sentence.
Expand it to a complex, then to a compound sentence. Of what is a
complex sentence composed? What is a clause ? What is a depen
dent clause ? (A ns . A dependent clause is one used as a noun , an
adjective, or an adverb .) Mention the modifiers of the subject ; of thepredicate.
LESSON LXIV.
PRONOUNS.
OBS. Charles went to Rome with his mother , and he came backwithout her . In this sentence we use three little words called
PRONOUNS ; they are his, he, and her . If we had not these words, we
would be compelled to say :“ Charles went to Rome with Charles
’
s
mother, and Charles came back without Charles’
s mother.
"The
pronouns take the place of the nouns , and hence the definition
228 . A Pronoun is a word used for a noun. Pronouns
are divided into eight classes :
Personal Pronouns : Ego , I ; 116 8 , we, etc.
Reflexive Pronouns : suI, of himselfiPossessive Pronouns : meus , my, etc.
Demonstrative Pronouns : 1110, this, etc.
Determinative Pronouns : is , he, that ; ipse, self; etc.
Relative Pronouns : qul , who, and its compounds.
Interrogative Pronouns : quis , who ? and its compounds.
Indefinite Pronouns : i llquis , some one, etc.mfl
o
cn
hh
wwt-s
F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
230. The Reflexive Pronouns refer to the subject of
the sentence, and do not, therefore, require a nomina
tive case. The reflexive pronouns of the first and
second persons are the same as the first and second per
sonal pronouns ; the reflexive of the third person is
thus declined :
Singula r and P lura l .
NOM . (Wanting )GEN . sui, of himself; herself; itself, or themselves.DA T. Bi b i,for himself; herself; itself, or themselves .
A CC . s é, himself, herself, itself; or themselves.
VOC .
ABL . 8 6 , by himself, herself; itself; or themselves .
1. The use of the Personal and Reflexive Pronouns can be under
stood from the following conjugation of laud o , with subject and
object expressed :
630 me laudo , I p raise myself ; nds nOs laudamus , we p raise
ourselves ; tfi te laudas , you praise yourself ; v6 s vbs laudatis ,
you p raise yourselves ; is ( ea) 36 laudat , he ( she) praises himself(herself) ii ( eae) Se laudan t, they p raise themselves ; also, C icero
sé ( i .e . C i cérbnem ) laudat, C icero p raises himself ; C i cero eum
( i .e . C as sarem) laudat , C icero p raises him.
2 . The reduplicated forms, sese, tété, meme, for as, ta, me,
often occur .
3. Cum, when used with the ablative of the personal pronoun ,
is appended to it : as, mecum , with me ; vdbis cum, with you.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
231. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from
personal pronouns, and denote possession . They are
meus , mea , meum , my or mine.
tuus , tua , tuum , thy or thine.
suus , sua, suum, his, hers, its, or their.
Easter , n6 s tra, Ddstrum, our .
vester , vestra, v estrum, your.
196 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
Rule for Position
1. The Personal Pronoun s, when connected by conjunctions toother words, stand first. Ego always precedes ( see Ex .
2 . Contrasted words are put as near together, or as far apart, as
possible ( see Ex.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Ego vOco , tu vOcas , amicus vOcat. 2 . Tu es tristis .
3. NOS siimus pOtentés , séd vOS pOtentiOréS estis . 4. In me
st in té et in nObis omnibus est animus immortalis . 5 . Ego
et frater ambiilamus . 6 . Ego a té laudabor , sed tl‘
I a me
pfiniéris . 7 . Mi frater , audi . 8 . Ego sum mains , sed tfi es
bOnus . 9. Caesar suOs milites in Galliam mittet, sed in
prOvinciam nostrOs . 10. Caesar Divitiacum ad sé vOcat.
Translate into Latin
1. I call, thou callest, the friend calls . 2 . I praise you,
you praise me , we praise you . 3. He comes in company
with you . 4. I give ( to) you the book . 5 . I am sad , but
you are joyful . 6 . I am a Roman , but you are a Gaul .
7 . I am praised by you. 8 . My brother and I are praising
you. 9. You are reading, but I am writing. 10. They
differ from one another .
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.
Why are reflexive pronouns so called ? Name the personal pro
nouns . How is the lack of a third personal pronoun supplied? Give
the rule for the use of possessive pronouns. (Ans . Same as for adjec
tives : A dj ectives, adj ective pronouns, etc.,agree. See RuleVIII . ) HOW
can you tell after a transitive verb whether sué s mi lités means his,her , its, or their soldiers The reflexive BS is often written 5 636 ; as,
puer 3636 laudat, the boy pra ises himself:
DEMONSTRA TIVE PRONOUNS. 197
LESSON LXV.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. PARTITIVE GENITIVE.
234. Demonstrative Pronouns are so called because
they point out what object is meant. They are
1. B io, this , this near me.
2 . Iste, that, that near you.
NOM . istud
isti
istum istam istad
istO isti istO
3. me , that, that near him .
235 . Decline together
1. haec 2 d ies , this day. 4. ma d bun s , that burden.
2 . is ta tua sOror, that sister 5 . ista d tempus , that time.
of thine. 6 . hbmo is te, that (worthless )3. M ac 16316 , this legion. man .
OBS. 1. B io , used for what is near the speaker , is called the
demonstrative of the firstperson ; is te, used of what is near the per
198 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
son addressed, is called the demonstrative of the second person ille,
used of what is remote from both, is called the demonstrative of thethird person .
OBS. 2. The demonstratives are often used in the oblique cases
as personal pronouns ( him, her , it, them) of the third person .
EXAM P LE .
cm at tratt en Gina v id eo , I see him and his brother .
236 . Partitive Genitive.
EXAMPLES.
pars mfl ltum, part of the soldiers .
alter cons iilum , one of the ( two) consuls.finus mi ll tum , one of the soldiers .
nlhfl v ini , ( nothing of wine) no wine.
multum aes tatis , a largepart of the summer .
magna es t corpbris pars aperta, a great part of the body isexposed.
ca
m-b
es
to
w
OBS. In each of the foregoing exam les, note that the genitiveexpresses the whole, and that the wor which the genitive limitsdesignates a part. This use of the genitive is called the partitive
genitive. The idiom is expressed in the following rule
PARTITIVE GENITIVE
237 . RULE XXVIII . W ord s d en oting a par t ar e
fol low ed by th e gen itive den ot in g th e w h ole .
NOTE. Instead of the partitive genitive w ith numerals, theablative with ex, out of ; as, from,
is regularly used with cardinals .
EXA MP LES.
1. ilnus ex mili tibus , one of the soldiers .
2 . quin que ex mili tibus , five ( of ) soldiers .
3. th us db multIs , one of the many.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. 11113virum laudant. 2 . H60‘bellum est saevissimum .
3. Hfijus discipfili diligentiam laudo . 4. Hic puer diligens
est, ille iners . 5 . HOrum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae .
6 . Laudabo illins " filium. 7 . Pzi ter filiam suam et filiam
200 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
LESSON LXVI .
DETERMINATIVE (DEMONSTRATIVE) PRONOUNS.
238 . The Determinative Pronouns are is , ea, id , this
( and he, she) , that ; its compound Idem , ead em , l d em , the
same ; and ipse, ip s a , ip sum , he, self, very same. They
refer to some person or thing determined by the con
text
1. Is , this , and he, she, it.
C a se s . Sin gu lar .
Fem. Neuter . Fem. Neuter .
eOrum
2 . Idem,
2the same.
eadem idem eaedem cadem
earundem ebrnndem
eidem eisdem or iisdem
eundem eandem idem eOsdem easdem eadem
eOdem cadem eOdem eisdem or iisdem
3. Ipse , self, he.
OBS. 1. Ip s e is often called an intensive p ronoun ; it Shoul d not
be confounded with 8 6 ; as, vir ip se rel audat, the man himselfp raises himself:
DETERMINA TIVE PRONOUNS. 201
OBS. 2. Idem often means also ; as, C ICGrO Grat Orator { dem
que phnbsbphus , C icero was an orator, and also a philosopher ( lit.,the same was a philosopher ) .
OBS. 3. Is , that, is often used as a personal pronoun (he, she, it,they, them, etc.) of the same gender with the noun for which it
stands : as, 010e mul tbs lib rbs scrips it ; eos ( i.e. lib rOs )lib enter légo , C icero has written many books ; I read them ( i.s . the
books) with pleasure.
Decline together :
1. ip sa hOmo , the man himself.2 . id oppi dum , that town .
the cause itself.the very same cause.
4. 1160 ipsum tempus , this very time.
5. Idem prtnoeps , the same chief:
6 . i dem bellum , the same war .
3. ipsa causa, l
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Is Ori bat pOpil lum. 2 . Ipse tfi me'
laudabas . 3. Ipse
mégister me laudiibit. 4. Ipsi in eOrum finibus bellum gé
runt. 5 . Caesar eOdem itinere ad eOS contendit. 6 . Caesar
Divitiiicum ad Sé vOcavit. 7 . Psi ter filiam suam et filium
éjuS ad sé vOcat.
NOTES A ND QUEST ION S.
1. Idem, compounded of is and -dem, is declined like is , but it
shortens isdem to Idem, and iddem to Idem, and changes m to n
before the ending-dem.
Why are demonstrative pronouns so called ? (A ns . Because they
point out the noun. ) Mention the demonstrative of the first person .
When must his or her be expressed by Gina When by suns Whatare determinative pronouns Why so called ? Mention them . Ips e
is often called an intens ive pronoun, because it makes the word to which
it is added more emphatic.
202 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON LXVII .
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
240. Relative Pronouns are so called because they
relate to some preceding noun or pronoun , called the
antecedent ; they are gut and its compounds . Qut is
declined as follows :
1. Quicumque ( quiounque) and quisqfi is , whoever, are called,
from their signification, general relatives. Quicumque is declined
like qui . The only forms of quisquis in use are quinquis , the
neuter qui dquid , and the ablative quoquo.
241. Agreement of Relative Pronouns
EXAMP LES.
1. puer qut magistmm amat bonus est, the boy who loves the
master is good.
2 . puer quem magis ter amat bonus eat , the boy whom the
master loves is good .
3. Ego , qui té laudav l, réx Sum , I , who havep raised you, am Icing.
OBS. In Ex. 1, qui stands for puer. and connects the second
statement or clause, loves the master, with the boy is ood. The word
quI is said to relate to puer ; it is, therefore, cal ed a RELA TIVEPRONOUN ; it also binds the two clauses together like a conjunction , and this is the real peculiarity of relatives, as all pronouns
have antecedents . The word puer , which the clause (10! magistrum amat modifies, is called the ANTECEDENT . The sentence in
which the relative stands is called the relative clause ; the other, the
p r incipal clause .
NOTE (1) that qui is masculine gender, to agree with its ante
cedent, puer ; ( 2) . that it is Singular number and third person, to
204 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
the subject of amat ; Rule XXIX . The three words, qui magis
trum amat, are called a clause ; it is a relative clause, because
introduced by a relative pronoun ; it performs the ofiice of an
adjective, i .e., it describes puer , and is therefore called an adj ective
clause. Since it is subjoined to the leading clause (puer b bnuses t) , as modifying it, it is called a subordinate clause. A sentence
consisting of two clauses, one of which is subordinate, is called a
comp lex sentence. (See
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Puer , qui stiidet, discit . 2 . Felix est is rex , quem
omnes civés amant. 3. A llobrOgés , qui trans RhOdanum
vicOS posseSSiOnésque habébant, ad Caesarem véniunt.
4. Multi hOminés aedificavérunt dOmOS, in quibus nOn habi
tavérunt. 5 . Caesar v60at Casticum , cfijus1pater regnum
multOS anuOS2obt
’
inuérat. 6 . A h Océlo, quod est citériOris
prOvinciae oppidum extrémum . 7 . Proximi'
sunt Germanis ,
qui trans Rhénum incOlunt.
Translate into Latin
1. The boy , whom you have blamed , is my brother .
2 . The man has built a house , in which he has not lived .
3. He summons Casticus , whose father held the sovereignty
in Gaul for many years . 4. The boy who studies will learn .
5 . The Germans , who dwell across the Rhine , came into
Gaul . 6 . Caesar will hasten into the province with the three
legions which he had levied in Gaul . 7 . Caesar led from
winter quarters the three legions which were wintering in
Gaul .
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.
1. C hina, whose.
2 . Why accusative
Give the rule for the use of relative pronouns . What is a pronoun ?
How many classes What is a clause A relative clause ? What isthe antecedent ? Define sentence. To what is a relative equivalent
?
(Ans . A personal pronoun a connective ; as, the boy who studies, etc.
,
the boy and he studies . )
INTERROGA TIVE PRONOUNS. 205
LESSON LXVIII .
INTERROGATIVE PBONGUNS.
245. The Interrogative Pronouns, quis and qui , with
their compounds, are used in asking questions. They
are declined as follows
1. 01115 , who, which, what?
2 . 0111, who, which, what1’ is declined like the relative quI.
3. Quiz is used both as a noun and as an adjective ; quid isalways used as a noun ; quI and quod are used as adjectives.
EXA IVIP LES.
l . quid commls it, what has he done ? (Noun .)2 . quod fi clnue commis it, what deed has he done ? (Adj3. quiz vbcat, who calls (Noun .)4. qui (or quis ) h6m o vbcat. whatman calls (Adj.)
4. Qui z and qui are often strengthened by the addition of nam
in emphatic interrogation ; as , qui snam, or qui dnam, who then
what then 1?
5 . Wh en the question refers to one of two, titer , iitra, iitrum,
which of two, is used.
6 . Recollect that the interrogative particles are-na, used when
asking for information Simply ; n 6nne, when the answer yes is
expected ; and num , when the answer no is expected . If an inter
rogative pronoun or adverb is used, then -no, nbnne, or num is
not required . There is no single word in Latin equivalent to our
yes and no, in answer to questions. The answer may be expressed
206 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
by repeating the verb with a negative adverb, if no is the answer ;
and with or w ithout an adverb, if yes is the answer .
EXAMPLES.
1. veni tne , has he come ? veni t , or veni t véro , yes (he hascome) .
2 . matt bnane puellam vboat , does the mother call the girl ?
vbcat , yes ( she calls) .
3. n6nne bbnus puer eat, is not the boy good
7. N e is annexed to the word to which it especially refers .
EXA MPLES.
1. tfine pubrum dboés , do YOU teach the boy2 . dbcésne puérum, do you TEA CH the boy ?
3. puérumne (16063, do you teach the BOY?
8 . Questions in Latin, as in English, may be Single or double .
I s the soldier brave is a single question . I s the soldier brave or
cowardly is a double question . In asking a double question in
Latin , the first clause usually has utrum or -ne, and the second an.
EXA MPLES.
1. utrum vir legit an s crib it , does the man read or write
2 . utrum patriam amat , annOn , does he love his country or not?
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Quis mé v60at? 2 . Quis scribit has littéras ? 3. Quodcarmen légis ? 4. Quis tibi hunc librum dédit? 5 . Quaeest mulier quae vénit? 6 . Uter consulum amicus vester est?
7 . Quisnam té vécavit, Tulli ? 8 . Qui cOnsul est CicérOne
prfidentior
Translate into Latin
1. Who is that man ? 2 . Who are those soldiers ?
3. What soldiers are these ? 4. “ Tho has called us ?
5 . Which book have you ? 6 . Who gave you that book ?
7 . Who has come into the city ? 8 . Who was walking with
you in the garden ? 9. Which boy wounded you with a
stone?
208 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
adjectives ; the masculines and feminines are used either as nouns
or adjectives
quldam , quaedam, quoddam or quiddam , a certain one.
qui spiam , quaep iam, quodpiam or quidp iam, some one.
quiv is , quaev is , quodv i s or qui dv is, any one
quilib et, quaelib et, quodli‘
bet or quid llb eaI(youp lease) .quisque , quaeque, quodque or quidque, every one.
unusqui sque, finaquaeque, nnumquodque, each.
EXA DI PLES.
quivl s hOmo , any man.
al iquis hbmo , a man, any man ( it matters not who) .
quid am hbmo , a certain man (whose name I could men
tion , or whom I could identify, if I chose) .al iquem ad m6 mi ttent, they will send somebody to me.
ali quod bbnum, some good thing.
{ li quid bbn’l (part. something good .
247 . Decline together
1. pater meus , myfather . 6. t6 tus ille diés , thatwholeday.
2 . is con sul , that consul. 7. v ir quidam ROmAnus , a
3. Id em v ir , the same man . certain Roman.
4. eadem navis , the same ship . 8 . is te alter , that other fellow .
5. quiv is h6mo , any man . 9. quis nauta, what sailor ?
10. C l cérb ipse, C lariss imus Stator, C icero himself ; the most
famous orator.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English :
1 A l‘
iquOs2ad eum misérunt. 2 . Narravit quidam cOram
mé istam fabulam . 3. Narrabit aliquis cOram me illam
tabulam . 4. A liquem locum occupavit. 5 . Cum aliquibus
militum3ve
'
nit. 6 . Quidam eX militibus 8 décimae légiénis
véniébat. 7 . T itus quendam Gallum ad Caesarem misit.
Translate into Latin
1. In company with those soldiers . 2 . In company with
these soldiers . 3. Some one praises the king. 4. A cer
USES OF THE A BLA TIVE. 209
tain one is praising the king. 5 . Who praises the king?
6 . Some soldiers are brave . 7 . A soldier came to Owsar .
8 . Some one will tell this story . 9. The generals will come
in company with some of the chiefs . 10. IS the soldier
brave? Is the soldier brave or not? 12 . Caesar sent a
Gaul to C icero .
NOTES AND QUESTI ONS.
1. Used only after at, né, nlsl , num, and relatives ; as,at quis , né
quis ; but of course i llu qui dam, etc., may be used after the same
particles : as, 81quis , if any BI q iS, if some.
2 . Is i llqubs used as a noun or adjective ?3. See 237 .
LESSON LXX.
USES OF THE ABLATIVE.
SEPARATION, SOURCE, CAUSE, MATERIAL, AGENT .
OBS. We have learned that the ablative is used to denote the
relations expressed in English by the prepositionsfrom ; with or by ;at or in . In expressing all these relations , the ablative performs
the ofiices of three cases that in some languages were kept distinct.These uses of the ablative may be classified as follows :
1. THE ABLA TIVE PROPER , expressing the relation from, or
WHENCE.
EXAMPLE
virum culpa ltbérat, he frees the man from blame.
2 . THE INSTRUMENTAL, expressing the relation with, by, or
WHER‘EWVITH .
EXAMP LE .
h ostium fines ferrO et igni vastant, they lay waste the
enemy’s territory with sword and fire.
3. THE LOCA TIVE, expressing the relation in, at, or WHERE.
EXA MP LES.
1. Rbmae v iv it, he lives at Rome.
2. castris 8 5 ténuit, he kep t himself in camp.
210 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
The general rule for the Ablative Proper may be stated as
follows
ABLATIVE PROPER .
248 . RULE XXX . Separation , cause, source, an d
or igin are den oted by th e ablative w ith or w ith out
a pr eposition .
EXA MP LE .
m6 tlmc‘
n'
e IIbEras , youfree mefromfear ( separation) .
OBS. The prepositions are omitted chiefly w ith verbs signify ingto abstain, relieve, remove, exclude, dep rive, cease, and want, and w ithadjectives of kindred meanings ; but, if a person is specified, the
preposition must be used ; as, té ab 1116 imprbbfi li'
bbravi'
, I haver id you of that scoundrel.
1. Compounds with a, ab , (16 , 6 , ex, denoting separation from a
person or place, take the ablative when used figuratively ; but, in
a local and literal sense, they usually require a preposition with the
EXAM PLES.
1. Iter ab A ri re H elvetii avertéran t, the Helvetians had
turned their marchfrom the A rar.
2. H elvétii‘
h6 c obnatfi dés istunt, the Helvetians desist
from this attemp t.
2 . The Ablative of Cause is used without a preposition with in
transitive and passive verbs of emotion, and with adjectives thatare passive in meaning.
EXAMP LE.
Helvetii sua v icto'
ria insblenter glérifibantur , the Helve
tians boasted insolently because of their victory ( cause) .
OBS 1. When the moving cause is a person, the preposition a
or ab Is used with the ablative ; or ob , per , or propter, with the
OBS. 2 . The ablatives causa and gratia,for the sake of, are usedwith a genitive preceding, or w ith a possessive pronoun in agree
ment .
OBS. 3. Expressions of trust and distrust ( fi do, cfinfi do, diffi d o ) ,and many adjectives and participles expressing emotion, and frétus
and contentus , are used with the ablative.
3. Perfect Participles denoting parentage or birth, gén ltus ,
natus , ortus , etc., generally take the ablative without a prep
osition .
EXA MP LE .
P isa amp lisslmb génére natus , P iso, born of a very illus
trious family.
212 FIR ST STEPS IN LA TIN .
5 . If the sentence is complex, translate, first, the p rincipal clause,
and then the subordin ate clauses in the order of their importance.
It is always easier for the pupil to translate the principal clause
first than it is to pick out words here and there w ith the hope of
being able finally of putting them together into a sentence. Whenthe meaning of the principal clause has been obtained, then take
the subordinate clauses.
6 . Consult the dictionary or vocabularies only as a last resort.
The pupil must, however, remember that only the nominative singu
lar of nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, and the first person singular
present indicative active of verbs, are given there ; i.e., the dictionary
gives the meaning of words w ithout reference to their grammatical
relations . The case, person, number, mode, tense, or voice, must be
determined by the grammar . It is, therefore, essential that the
declension of nouns and the inflection of the regular verbs . be
thoroughly memorized, so that the pupil can distingui sh by the end
ings the different parts of Speech, and determine at once the force
and relation of the words .
Sigh t-R ea d ing .
FA BLE.
In pratO erant trés bOvés in maxima concordia. Sedmeadow oxen greatest harmony
dissidiO inter eOs ortO, Singfil'
i a fér'
is petiti et laniati sunt.
discord arising one-by-one wild-beasts attack tear
NOTES A ND QUESTI ON S.
The pupil can discover by the forms of the words that bbvés is in
the nominative plural, and is the subject of the verb érant ; pr i to ,
after the preposition ,is in the ablative singular , and its nominative
is pratum, for which form the pupil must look in the dictionary .
C oncord ia is also in the ablative, and is modified by the adjectivemaxima.
Note the mode, tense, and voice of pétItI and li ni flti aunt, and
translate them.
What is the subject of the first sentence The predicate Has
the subject any modifiers Has the predicate? In what case is trés
In what case is s ingiili?
INF IN IT IVE MODE. 213
LESSON LXXII .
INFINITIVE MODE, ACTIVE AND PASSIVE.
EXERC ISE FOR SIGHT -READING.
OBS In the sentence I wish to see you, the verb, to see, namesthe actlon in an indefiniteway, w ithout limiting it to any particularsubject ; and hence, a verb that expresses an action in this un
limited manner is said to be in the Infin itive Mode (Lat. infin ftus ,without limit) . The infinitive expresses simply the action or state
implied in the verb in an abstract manner, w ithout specifyingeither person, number, or time, and thus merely indicates whetheran action is in progress or corn leted. The infinitive may be used,like a noun, as the subject or 0 ject of a v rb, but it differs from a
noun in several important particulars : (1 It may be modified byadverbs, but not by adj ectives, as I wish To SEE you IMMEDIA TELY ;2) it governs a noun or pronoun in the ob
’
ective like a verb. Inatin, the infinitive has voice and tense like a verb, but, like a
noun , admits of two cases : the nominative when it is the sub'
eet
of a verb, and the accusative when it is the object of a verb . heinfin itive is also used in Latin to represent the tenses of the indicative mode in Indirect Discourse. (For this use, see Hencethe uses of the infinitive may be stated as follows
250. Uses of the Infinitive .
1. The infinitive is used as an indeclinable abstract noun
in the nominative and accusative .
2 . The infinitive is used in Indirect D iscourse to represent
the tenses of the indicative . (See
OBS . The infinitive has voice and tense, and takes adverbial
modifiers like any verb ; it governs the case of its verb.
251. In Latin there are Four Infinitives in each voice ,the Present, Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect. They are
formed from the stems as follows
A CTIVE VOICE.
Present infinitive present stem re .
Perfect infinitive perfect stem see .
Future infinitive future participle and esse .
Fut. perf. infin . future participle and fui s s e .
214 F I RST STEPS IN LA TIN .
PA SSIVE VOICE.
Present infinitive present stem rI for l st, 2d, 4th conjugations .
verb-stem i for 3d conjugation .
Perfect infinitive perfect passive participle and esse.
Future infin itive supine and h i ( the word Iri is the present ihfinitive pas sive of s o , I go, and amatum Iri has the idea of
going to be loved) .Fut. perf. infin . Perfect passive participle and fbre .
P A R T I A L P A R A D I GM .
216 F IRST STEPS IN LA T IN .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
What is the subject of the leading clause ? the predicate? The
modifiers of the predicate? The subject of the subordinate clause ?
What kind of a clause is it ? In what case is GallI ? Why is Germi nIs dative ? How is qua translated
? Define the word infinitive.
Give the uses of the infinitive. How is the present infinitive formed ?
Form the present infinitive of régo ,vbco , timeo , mflnio, pflnio .
How is the perfect infinitive formed? How the future infinitive
With what does the participle, of which the future infinitive is com
posed, agree Write all the active and passive infinitives of the
following words : dbno ,to give nfimlno , to name ; h i beo ,
to have
débeo ,to owe ; dfi co ,
to lead di co ,to say ; fi nio ,
to fi nish ; mflnio ,
to fortify. Write a sentence in English with an infinitive .as subject ;as object.
LESSON LXXIII .
INFINITIVB AND SUBJECT-ACOUSATIVE. COMPLEMEN
TARY INFINITI'VE.
EXERC ISE FOR SIGHT READING.
252 . Infinitive and Subject-A ccusative.
OBS. 1. Sometimes the subject or object of a verb is a whole
clause, beginning with the word that.
EXAMPLES.
Predicate.
1. That Cazsar conquered Gaul is certain.
Sub. Pwd . Object.
2 . He says that Caesar conquered Gaul.
In the first sentence, that Caesar conquered Gaul is the subject of
the verb, and is called a subj ect-clause ; in the second sentence, the
same words become the object of the verb say, and are called an
object-clause. Such clauses are expressed in Latin by the accusative
With the infinitive.
8 hi
EXAMPLES.
Obj11 00h. 003.can “ “ t.
1. C as aér em ( acc.) v icis se ( Infin .) Gallbs or d icit.
2 . pfitat m6 scribére, he thinks I am writing.
3. DIvIcO réspondi t Ita H elvétibs ins tltfi tbs esse, Divico
replied that the Helvetians had been so educated.
INFINITIVE AND SUBJECT-A CCUSA TIVE. 217
4. C aesar Dumnbrlgem dés ignfiri sentiébat, Cwsar perceived
that Dumnorix was meant.
5. d icit montem ab hostlbus ténéri , he says that the hill is held
6 . rfimor érat C i ti ltnam servas armasse, there was a report
that Catiline had armed the slaves.
OBS. 2 . Note the translation of the foregoing sentences . The
subject-accusative is translated as if it were a nominative precededb the word that. The infinitive is translated like any finIte verb .
t e, further, that dicit is a verb of so ing p ittat, a verb of think
ing ; réspondi t, a verb of tellin an sentiébat, a verb of per
ceiving. Hence the following ru es
SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE.
253. RULE XXXI . Th e subject of th e infi ni tive
is put‘
in th e accusative.
SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE.
254. RULE XXXII . Verbs of say ing , th in k ing ,
know in g , p er ceiving , h ea r in g , and th e l ik e , are fo l
low ed by th e accusative w ith th e infin itive .
1. Various Impersonal Phrases, such as oertum es t, it is certain ,
nhoesse est, it is necessary, jus tum est, it is j ust, etc., are followed
by the accusative with the infinitive.
INFINITIVE AS SUBJECT .
255 . The Infinitive, w ith or w ithout a subject-accusative, may be used as the Subject of aVerb.
EXAMP LES.
1. dul oe prb patriambri est, to diefor one’s country is sweet.
2 . C aesar! nuntifitum est équl tés accédbre, itwas announced
to Ccesar that the cavalry was approaching.
OBS. The predicate adjective, agreeing with the infinitive, is
neuter.
COMPLEMENTARY INF INITIVE.
256 . RULE XXXIII . Th e infi n itive w ith out a
subject-accusative is used w ith many verbs to com
p lete th eir mean ing .
218 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
EXAMP LES.
l . C aesar p rbfi c isc‘
i m i tfirat, Caesar hastens to set out.
2 . p i rat bellum gérére, hep repares to wage war.
3. mi li tes pfignare pos sun t, the soldiers are able tofight.
OBS. The Complementary Infinitive is used with certain verbs
to complete their meaning ; it is generally either the direct objectof a transitive verb, or an accusative of limitation, as in Ex. 3
, the
soldiers are able as to fighting. The verbs that the complementaryinfinitive is used after usually denote ability, obligation, intention ,or endeavor ; after verbs SignIfying to abstain, to begin, to cease, to
continue, to dare, to fear, to hesitate, to be wont, and after the passive
voice of verbs of saying, believing, reckoning.
Note the translation of the following sentences ; parse
each infinitive , and give the rule :
1. gratum es t técum amb ifl fire, it is p leasant to walk with you.
2 . p i rat bellum gérére, heprepares to wage war .
3. aqua frigida es t , water is cold .
sentio { quam fr igidem esse, I perceive that water is cold .
5 . audib imicum aegrétum es se , I hear that (my) fr iend is sick.
6 . C aesar in Gal lia h iémar e cons ti tuit , Cazsar deter mined to
winter in Gaul .
7 . mfl ltés urb em cus tbdire débent, the soldiers ought to guard
the city.
8 . libér'
i e6 rum in serv l tfitem abd i ci n 6n debent, their chil
dren ought not to be led into servitude.
9. cans tl tuérun t jfimentbrum quam max imum nitmérum
co'
e'
mere , they determined to buy up as great a number ofbeasts of burden as possible.
Sigh t-R ead in g .
STORY OF HORATIUS.
TullO régnante, bellum inter A lbfinés et ROmfinOS exor
Tullus reigning nom.
tum est. Forte in duObus exercitibus ét ant trigemin'
i frfitrés ,by chance three born at one birth
nec aetate nec viribus dispares , apud ROmanOS Horatii ,neither nor unlike
apud A lbfinés Cum his Eigunt reges , ut pro 805.arrange
quisque patria dimicent ferro. A rma igitur capiunt, st infight accordingly they take
220 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
2 . Like a verb, the Participle has difierent voices and tenses ;
like an adjective, it has declension and gender ; and like both, it
has two numbers.
3. Transitive verbs have usually Four Participles : two in the
active voice (present and future) , as iman s , HmAtfi rus ; and two
in the passive voice (perfect and the gerundive, or futur e) , as
imatus , imandus .
4. Intransitive verbs have usually on ly the participles of the
active voice.
5. Participles govern the same cas es as their verbs.
6. Participles agree with nouns like adjectives.
F ORMA TION OF P A R TI C IP LES.
[The present participle is formed by adding-nt
,nom . ms, to the
present stem ; the future, by adding-tiiro, nom . t hrus , to the modified
present stem, or verb-stem ; the perfect, by adding-to
,nom .
-tus -so,
nom .-sus ) , to the verb-stem ; the gerundive, by adding
-ndo,nom.
-ndus,
to the present stem.]
PA RTIC IPLES, A CTIVE A ND PA SSIVE. 221
7 . The present stem of verbs of the fourth conjugation ends in'
-ie ( as audie in the present participle and gerundive.
8 . The Present Participle is declined like imans or prudens ;
note that the vowel is long before-ns, but short before -nt. The
Perfect and Future Participles are declined like b 6nus .
Form and translate the Present and Future A ctive
Participles , the Perfect Passive , and the Gerundive of the
following verbs :
17500 , A re, -RVI, 4mm , call. d éleo ,-6 re , -6vI, -6 tum, destroy.
pfigno , «i re , 43nd , 4mm ,fight. fleo ,-6 re, 4 171, -6 tum , weep .
hab s o ,-6 re ,
-ui , -Itum , have. taceo ,-6 re, -uI, -Itum , silent.
dfi co ,-6re, duxi , ductum , lead . v ivo , é re , v i , v ictum, live.
régo ,-6re , réxi , rectum, rule. dico ,
-6re, d ixi , dictum, say.
muni o ,-Ire, -Iv i , -i tum ,for tify. fini o ,
-Ire, -iv i , -Itum,finish.
D is tin ction s of Time.
EXAMP LES.
1. case omnes hontes C aesar ! ad pédés prbjéoarnnt, they all,weep ing, threw themselves at Ca sar
’
s feet.2 . Gal lia in trés partés est divisa, Gaul is divided into threeparts .
3. Div lti i cus flans , a C aesar s haeo pétébat, Divitiacus , weeping, begged these things from Caesar .
4. Bi b ianna, monte occupatb, nostrbs expectAbat, Labienus,
having takenpossession of themountain,was waitingfor our men.
5. mi les pfignans Cad it, the soldier fallsfighting.
6. hos tlbus ffigatis C aesar subs révbcAVit, when the enemywere put to fl ight, Caesar recalled his men .
OBS. The Present Participle has usual] the same meaning and
use in Latin as in English It denotes t e action as oing on at
the time denoted by the principal verb. The Perfect articiple is
used, in Ex . 2 , like a predicate adjective, but the idea is conveyed of
the action being completed before the time denoted by the principalverb. Note the translation of Exs. 3, 4, 5, and 6 .
TIME OF THE PARTICIPLE.
258 . RULE XXXIV. Th e par t icip le r ep r esen ts
th e time as p r esen t, p a st, or futur e, relatively to
th at of th e p r in cipal verb .
222 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
ABLAT IVE ABSOLUTE.
259. In Latin there is no Perfect Participle in the active
voice . Its place is often supplied (1) by the A blative
A bsolute the noun and the participle are both in the
ablative , a construction Similar to our independent case) ,or ( 2 ) by a Clause with a Conjunction .
EXA M P LES.
1. urbe capta (abl . abs.) Gives ffi gérun t. the city having been
taken, or being taken, or after the city had been taken, the
citizensfl ed.
2 . urbe a C aesars capta, cIvés fI‘
igérun t, when the city had been
taken by Caesar, the citizensfl ed .
OBS. Note thatwhen the noun and participle are both in the ahlative, and used independently of the rest of the sentence, the con
struction is called ablative absolute, i .e. absolute meanin freedfromdependence. ( A word is said to depend on another w en its
gender, number, mode, tense, or person is determined by that
word. In English, the Independent Case is used in the same waywith articiples ; as,
EXA MP LES.
l . Noun participle ; as, the city having been taken, the citiz ens
fl ed.
2 . Noun being adjective ; as, the soldiers beingbrave, the enemywas conquered.
3. Noun being noun ; as, he came toRome, Caesar being consul.
Note (1) that the noun in the Ablative Absolute denotes a
different person or thing from that denoted by any other word in
the sentence ; note ( 2) that the words in the‘
Ablative Absolute
express the time or circumstance of the action in the lead ing clause ;note (3) that words like a C as efire , modifying the Ablative A bsolute, stand between the noun and the participle. Hence the
following rule
ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.
260. RULE XXXV. A n oun or p ronoun , w ith a
par ticip le or an ad jective, or tw o n oun s , m ay be pu t
in th e ab lative, to Oxp ress th e T ime or C ir cum stan ce
of an action .
224 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. SOle Oriente,l fi
’
Igiunt tenebrae. 2 . Bellum Gallicum ,
Caesare impérfitOre , gestum est. 3. Puer , me invito, abiit.
4. Civés cum hostibus urbem oppI'
Ignantibus acriter dimica
bant. 5 . Hostés , victOriam adepti , in castra Sé récépérunt.
6 . Milités , pilis conject'
is , phalangem hostium perfrégérunt.
7 . Caesar , urbe captti ,2 discessit. 8 . Exercitus rédiit, bell
‘
I’
oasum de intégrO tentatiirus . 9. Quis est, qui mé unquam
vidérit légentcm? 10. Hosté'
s amnem transgressi castra
miinivérunt. 11. EX amissis civibus dOlor fuit. 12 . Caesar
cum 8615. décima légiOne prOfectiirus est. 13. Solem Orien
tem8cum maxima vbluptate spectamus .
Translate into Latin
1. When this was known , Caesar departed . 2 . When this
rep ly had been given , the men departed . 3. Caesar , when he
went to Gaul , took three legions . 4. Caesar , afl er he had
subdued Gaul,‘set out for Rome. 5 . He assists others with
out robbing himself .
5 6 . Under Caesar as commander , the
soldiers fought bravely. 7 . Many things go on without your
perceiving it.e 8 . After I had spoken , you went away .
9. Because their leader was killed , the soldiers fied. 10. The
soldiers , by throwing their weap ons , repulsed the line of the
enemy . 11. I come to assist you. 12 . When the leader
ordered , the soldiers assaulted the town . 13. This happened
one hundred years before the founding of the city. 14. Did
you hear me when I said that 15 . I saw my friend sitting
in the garden yesterday . 16 . Owsar is going to set out from
the camp with five legions . 17 Caesar lost his father when
he was" Sixteen years ( old) .
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.
1. When the sun rises,temporal clause .
2 . Remember that there is no perfect active participle ; its place is
supplied by the ablative absolute, or by a clause with cum ; as, urbe
capta cum urbem cépis set.
GERUND A ND GERUNDIVE. 225
3. The present indicative follows the third conjugation . See 176 .
4. Observe that the ablative absolute can be used only when the
subject of the subordinate clause is different from that of the principal
clause (except in such phrases as ea invi tb , aga inst his w ill, used in
indirect discourse, and a few others not to be imitated .
5. Lit. not robbing himself; sé n6 n spblians .
6 . Lit. you not perceiving it, té n6 n sentiente.
7. Use agens , present participle .
Note that verbs of the second conjugation often weaken the char
acteristic vowel of the stem to i as,mbn i-tus . Sometimes this vowel
disappears ; as, dbceo , doc-tus .
How many participles may a transitive verb have ? What is a
participle? Give the meaning of the word. Show how the participle
is used as a verb,and as an adjective. What time do participles de
note ? How are they generally best translated? What is the meaning
of absolute ? Of ablative absolute ? Have we a similar construction in
English? Explain the English construction . Give the rule for the abla
tive absolute in Latin . When is one word said to depend on another ?
What active participle is found in English , but not in Latin ? (Ans .
The perfect ; as, having loved .) Give the stem and ending of the present
participle of imo.
LESSON LXXV.
GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
EXERC ISE FOR SIGHT—READlNG .
262 . The Gerund is a verbal noun of the Second
Declension , used on ly in the Genitive, Dative, A ccusa
tive, and A blative Singular . It corresponds to the
English verbal noun in -ing.
EXAMP LES.
1. imd causa,for the sake of loving.
2 . fi tllis b ibondb , usefulfor drinking.
3. ad agrum Aran dum ,for ploughing thefield.
4. dbcendb dis cimus , we learn by teaching.
1. The Nominative of the Gerund is supplied by the Present
InfinitiveEXA M P LE .
sori'
bl re es t fl tIle , wr iting ( to write) is useful.
226 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
2 . The Gerund and Gerundive are formed by adding-ndi
and -udas , respectively , to the present stem .
P A RA D I GM .
3. Declens ion of the Gerund .
C as es . Exam p le . Engl ish .
amdre
amandi'
émandb to or for loving.
j i mdre, or w ith a pre lovin1 position Amandum
y.
i mandb with,from,
or by loving.
EXA M P LES.
NOM . s crfbére es t fi tfl e , ( to wr ite) wr iting is useful .GEN . ars s cri bendi es t uti lis , the ar t of writing is usef ul .DA T . ch arta s cri bend é es t fi ti l is , paper is useful for writing .
A C C . {s crfbére d isco , I learn to write ; or ,
inter sori'
ben dum d is co , I learn dur ing wr iting.
A BL . s cri'
ben d 6 d is c imus , we learn by wr iting .
OBS . Note that the accusative case of the gerund is found onlyafter prepositions, and cannot be used as the direct object of a
transitive verb.
228 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
EXAM P LES.
l . i gr icbla h5min és m is it. ad agrum Eran dum (gerundive) ,thefarmer sent men (for p lowing) top low thefield .
2 . ad eds res conficien d ds (gerundive) Orgétbrix déll gi tur ,
Orgetor ix is chosen ( for executing) to execute these p lans
ad eas rés conficiendum (gerund) , etc.
3. are puérbs édiicandi diffic i lis es t, the art of training boys
is difiicult.
OBS. 2 . In the dative, and in the ablative w ith a p reposition , the
gerund with a direct object is rarely used . Generally after prepositions the gerundive construction should be used ; as, ad cdp iendamurbem, not ad cdp iendum urb em ,for taking the city.
OBS. 3. The gerundive construction can be used only after verbs
that take the accusative, so also after iitor , truor , fungor , pbtior ,and ves co r , which in early Latin were followed by the accusative .
If the verb is intransitive, or governs any other case than the accusative, the gerundive is used impersonally with es t in the nominativesingular neuter.
EXAM PLE .
1. vfilétud lnl paroendum es t , the health must be spared ( lit.,there must be sparing of the health) .
OBS. 4. The gerundive construction cannot be used when the
object is a neuter pronoun or an adjective, as it would be impossibleto distinguish the gender .
1. s tfidium i gendi i l i quid , desire of doing something.
2 . oiipi d l tas pliira b i b and i , greedfor having more.
264. Gerund and Gerundive Constructions .
1. The genitive of the geru nd and gerundive is used after nouns
and adjectives as an objective genitive.
a . The genitive of the gerund and gerundive is common w ith
causa, for the sake of , to express p urp ose.
2 . The dative of the gerund and gerundive is used after adjec
tives ( rarely after nouns) that are followed by the dative of nouns .
3. The accusative of the gerund and geru ndive is used after the
preposition ad , to denote p urp ose, and sometimes after inter, circa ,
ob ; also after verbs Signifying to give, to deliver, to agree for, tohave, to receive, to undertake, to demand .
230 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
libr‘
is tuis legend'
is hOS tres dies cum multa véluptate exégi .
5 . A rs civitatis gfibernandae est difi icillima . 6 . PrOficiS
cendum 2 mihi erat i116 ipsOdie. 7 . Hostes in spem vénérant
pOtiendOrum cas rum . 8 . Caesar q uendi finem fécit.
9. A sinus idOneuS est Onera portandO. 10. A sinae idOneus
est Onéribus portand‘
is . 11. Catilina bellum suscépit rei
publicae délendae causa. 12 . A ger cOlendus est.
Sigh t-R ead in g .
STORY OF HORATIUS ( continued) .
Jam singuli Siipérérant, sed nec spe nee viribus pares .
one on each side survive
A lterlus érat intactum ferrO corpus , et geminata victOria'
.
untouched double
ferOx animus . A lter fessum vulnere fessum cursu trahébatweary running drag
corpus . Nec illud proelium fuit. ROmiinus exsultans A lbaexult
num male sustinentem arma conficit, jacentemque spOliat.holding up kill lying prostrate strip
NOTES A ND QUEST I ON S.
1. The stem of audio is here audie
2 . The gerundive used impersonally .
What is a gerund ? How is the gerund declined What is used as
the nominative of the gerund? How is the gerund formed
? I s the
gerund ever used in the plural? What is generally used instead of
the gerund with its ObjectNote that the gerundive has three uses : (1) The predicate use with
the verb sum ,to form the passive periphrastic conjugation as
,
urb s délenda est, the city must be destroyed, see 2 8 8 . (2 ) The imper
sonal use (2 63. Obs . 3) in the neuter gender, w ith the verb eat, wi th
the same force as above ; as, pfignatum est mlhi, I must fight ( lit.,
fighting must be done by me) . (3) The gerundive use,which is alway s
active in meaning, being equivalent to the gerund ( see Withtransitive verbs the personal construction is regularly used ; as ,
epis tifl a mlhi est scribenda, I must write a letter ( lit., a letter must bewritten by me) .
232 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
OBS. Note, in the first two of the ioregoin examples, that the
supines rbgétum and peti tum are construe w ith mittunt and
v énérant , both verbs of motion ; these supines express the purp oseof the motion . In Ex. 3 the supine is used With the adjectivefaci le, and answers the question in what respect? ( 298 ) Note,further, that rbgAtum and péti tum are each followed by the
accusative, the same case that the verbs rOgo and peto require .
The idioms are expressed in the following rules
FORMER SUP INE
266 . RULE XXXVII . Th e sup in e in -um is used
after verbs of motion , to exp r ess th e purpose of the
motion .
1. The supine in-um governs the same case as its verb .
LATTER SUPINE
267 . RULE XXXVIII .- Th e sup in e in mil is used
to l im it th e mean in g O f ad ject ives sign i fying w onder
ful , ag r eea ble, ea sy or d iflicult, w or thy o r unw or thy ,
hono r able or bas e, and th e noun s fd s , n éfds , and
op us .
1. The supine in 41takes no object.
OBs . 1. The future infinitive passive imi tum iri is made up ofthe present infinitive passive of s o , I o, and the supine in
-um of
m o , and is, literally translated, it is einq gone (by somebody) tolove ; so that the apparent (or logical) subject is really the grammatical object .
OBS. 2 . The supine in mm is not very common ; only about twohundred and fifty verbs, chiefly of the first and third con
'
ugations,have a supine ; the supine in 41 is still less common. ence the
prpipriety of calling the third stem the particip ial stem, asVanicek
an other noted grammarians have done.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Legat‘
i tét'
ins féré Galliae ad Caesz‘
irem gratiilatum
convénérunt. 2 . Orator dignuS est auditfi . 3. D ivitiacus
ROmam ad sénatum venit auxilium postulatum. 4. Id facile
dictuest. 5 . A eda‘
i legatbs ad Caesarem mittunt régatum
234 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
LESSON LXXVII .
LOCATIVE.
PLACE WHITHER? WHENCE? WHERE?
268 . The name of the place whither , whence, and
where, regularly requires a preposition .
1. The name Of the place whither, or to which, regularly requires
ad or in with the accusative.
EXA M PLES.
l . in Galliam , into Gaul.
2 . in urb em, into the city.
3. ad a rh em , towards ( the vicinity of ) the city.
4. ad R 6mam , towards ( the vicinity of ) Rome.
OBS. Note that A T, meaning near , not in , is, w ith all names Of
places, to be translated by ad or apud , w ith the accusative.
2 . The name of the place whence, or from which, regularlyrequires an, ab , d é , 6 , or ex, w ith the ablative.
EXA M PLES.
ab urb e , awayfrom the city .
ex A frc from ( out of ) Africa.
ex Oppid 6 , from the town .
5 R bma,from about ( the vicinity of ) Rome.fi
Cfl
lO
l—i
3. The name of the place where, or in which, regularly requires
in with the ablative .
EXA M PLES.
1. in Gal lia, inGaul. 3. in A frica, in Afi ica .
2 . in portfi , in the harbor 4. in cas trie , in the camp .
Nam es of P laces .
269. RULE XXXIX. R elation s of p lace are ex
p r essed by a n oun w ith a p repos ition ; but w ith
n am es of tow n s and sm al l island s , and a lso w ith
donu ts , r u s , an d a few o th er w or d s , th e p repo sition
is om itted , an d
PLACE TO WHICH .
1. The name of the place whither , or to which, is put in the
Accusative.
238 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
tris sé ténuit. 8 . Vir multOs anuos dOm‘
i vixit. 9. Miles
hiimi jacébat. 10. A tticus , C icérOniS amicus , multbs anuOs
A thén‘
is vixit 11. Karthagini reges creabantur . 12 . Magnas res Pompejus dbm
‘
i militiaeque , terramérique gessit.
Translate into Latin
1. Caesar came to the camp. 2 . Caesar came into Gaul .
3. Caesar came from Gaul. 4. The consul lived at Rome .
5 . The consul came from Rome to A thens . 6 . Caesar came
into Italy . 7 . The boy set out for home. 8 . In the summer
my friends and I Shall depart from Rome. 9. I shall set out
for M iletus , they will set out for A thens . 10. In the first
watch , the soldiers departed from the camp with a great
tumult. 11. Caesar set out for Rome. 12 . Caesar set out
from Rome . 13. Caesar wished to be first at Rome . 14. I
w ill depart into the country at the beginning of summer .
15 . My friend lived many years at A thens . 16 . Your friend
lived many years at my house . 17 . Many apples lay on the
ground .
Supplementary Exercises
1. I w ill dwell at A thens , but you at Rome . 2 . Many
great generals were born at Rome . 3. He died at Corinth .
4. The soldiers lie on the ground in summer . 5 . Caesar ,
(when he was ) made quaestor , hastened from I taly to Spain .
6 . He came into I taly . 7 . They were with me both in peace
and in war . 8 . He returned from the city to the countrv.
9. I have lived at A thens , at Rome , and at Carthage .
10. When the speech had been delivered , Caesar departed .
11. He came to Rome in the consulship Of C icero . 12 . In
Caesar’
s consulship , the Germans crossed the Rhine .
NOTES A N D QUESTIONS.
1. If urb s or oppi dum is added in apposition, the preposition in
must be used.
How is the place to which expressed? The p lace from which ? The
p lace at which, or where ? With names Of towns, how is the place to
which, the place from which,and the place at which expressed With
240 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
are happy . Ex. 2 expresses a command indirectly, i.e. commandingan act in which the first or third person is to be the actor ; the
imperative is used to express a direct command . The question inEx . 3 implies doubt, or uncertainty, and hence the subjunctive isused. The indicative is used in asking questions that do not
imply doubt .
OBS. 3. The
pupil Should note that may, can, must, might, could,
would, should, w en denoting emphasis or contrast, or meaning per
mission or duty, are not the Signs of the subjunctive, but require
separate verbs ; as, the soldiers can fight, meaning the soldiers are
able tofight m ili tés piign i re pos aunt . hIay andmight are usuallyrendered by the proper tenses of l icet ; can and could, by pos sum ;
must and should, by Oportet, néces s e cat, or the gerundive .
OBS. 4. The translations of the subjunctive mode given below
in connection with the conjugation of the verb are the most
common meanings when used in independent sentences . The
meanings in dependent sentences will be illustrated in the exercises
further on .
SUBJUN CTIVE MODE .
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 241
OBS. 5 . The subjunctive is sometimes translated by the EnglishIndicative ; sometimes by the Potential, with the auxiliaries may,might, would, should ; sometimes b the Sub
'
unctive ; sometimes bythe Infinitive ; and it is often used
,
for the mperative, especially in
prohibitions .
EXAMP LES.
1. cum aim , since I am. 5 . ad sum ut v ideam , I am here
2 . s im , may I be. to see ( that I may see) .
3. st es sem , if I were. 6 . s imus , let us be, may we be.
4. né fuéris , be thou not. 7 . s i fuérit , if he should have been.
OBS . 6 . The Present Imperative has no first or third person .
If It 13 required, in an imperative sentence, to use the first or third
person, the subjunctive is to be used ; as,
272 . Instead of the regular forms Of the Imperfect Sub
junctive , and the Future Infinitive Of sum , the follow ing);
are frequently used
244 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
2 . Translation of the Subjunctive
1. m et, let him love.
amémus , let us love.
cum v 6nis s et, when he had come, or having come.
s i C aes ar pfign et , if Caesar ( should) fight.s i C aesar es set dux , if Caesar were leader .
amAVErit, suppose he ( has) loved.
cum am5v érit , since he loved.
civés mei s in t beati , may myfellow-citiz ens be happy .
nel audiat, let him not hear .
41
00
0
co
oo
q
cz
cn
VOCA BULAR Y.
trans-grédi or ,-gr6d i ,
-gres sus sum , dep.
,cross .
extra, prep. and adv., outside of; beyond.
in créd ib ilis , -e , incredible.
jungo , jungére , junx i , junctum , j oin, unite.
sagittar ius , -i‘
i , M ., archer .
excelsus , -a, -um , lofly.
consanguineus , -a, -um , related by blood, kindred.
ln-fluo ,-fluére , -flux i , -fluxum,flow into,
‘
empty.
impéditus , -a, -um , part., hindered.
EXERC ISES.
Tell the mode , tense , number , and person of the following
1. Amaret , amémus , amet. 2 . Amavissem , iimavér int ,
amarent . 3. Laudaret, laudavissent, laudavérit. 4. VOcet ,vOcarent, vécavissent. 5 . Vulneres , vulnéret, vulnérent .
6 . Exspectémus , exspectarémus , exspectavissémus . 7 . R6
gem ,rogaverlm, rogav1ssem.
NOTES A ND QUEST I ONS.
1. N emay be an adverb,as né lmet, let him not love ; né may be a
conjunction,as né commeah
'
i prbh ibérétur, cas trie i ddneum
lOcum délégit, he chose a suitable place for a camp , that he might not be
cut of f rom supplies ( i.e . lest he should be cut of , no is an inter
rogative particle (always an enclitic ) , as audivitne, does he hear
I low many tenses has the subjunctive ? How is the imperfect
formed
SUBJUNCTIVE OF THE F OUR CONJUG A TIONS. 245
LESSON LXXX.
SUBJUNOTIVE OF THE POUR OONJUGATIONS.
AC TIVE VO IC E.
276 . The inflection of the Subjunctive A ctive Of the
conjugations is as follows
P A R T IA L P A R A D IGM .
PRESENT .
audiamus
audiant
Iu PERFEC T .
audi rem
audir et
PERFEC T .
PLUPERFEOT .
ami vissem
amiivmses°
amavisset
amavissémus
amavissétis
ami vissentP
w
fi
ifi
fi’
t‘
246 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
VOC A BULA R Y.
r i ti s , -is , F ., rafl . lénItAS, F ., sofl ness, smoothness .
atatao , s tatuére , s tatui , s ta im-pédi o ,
-ire ,-ivi or -ii , -itum ,
tfi tum , p lace at. hinder .
statfi ra, -ae , F .
, size, statue . fund i tor , -6 fis , M ., slinger .
n ih i l ( indecl. neut. noun ) , linter , -tris , F ., boat.
nothing . calvus , -a, -um , bald .
EXERC ISES.
Tell the mode , tense , number , and person Of the follow ing
1. MOneat, mOnérémus , mOnérent. 2 . MOnuérim, mOnu
issem , mOnuissent . 3. Habeam , habeant, habérent. 4. De
leret, délévérim , délévissem . 5 . DOceat, dOcéret , dOcuérit.
6 . Régat, régéret, réxérit . 7 . Régamus , régérémus , rexé
rimus . 8 . Mittamus , mittérent, misissent . 9. Contendas ,
contenderes , contendéris . 10. Dficant, dficérent, diixérint,
dfixissent. 11. Vincat, vicérit, vicisset. 12 . A udiat ,
audiret, audivérit. 13. A udivisset, audirémus , audiant.
14. Miiniiis , mfinirés , mfin’
ivéris . 15 . Véniatis , vénirétis ,
vénéritis .
LESSON LXXXI .
VERBS.—SUBJUNOTIVE PASSIVE.
277 . The inflection Of the Subjunctive Pass ive Of the four
conjugations is as follows
P A R TI A L P A R A D IGM .
PRESENT .
248 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON LXXXII .
SUBJUNOTIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENOES.
IMPERAT IVE.
278 . The Latin Subjunctive has two principal uses
I . It is used in INDEPENDENT SENTENOES to eXpress
1. A Wish ( Optative Subj unctive) ; negative is né.
3.
4.
5.
An Exhortation or a Mild Command, chiefly in Prohibitions
(Hortatory Subj unctive) negative is né.
A Question Of Doubt or of Deliberation (Dubitative or Deliber
ative Subj unctive) negative is né.
An A ction as Possible, not as Real (P otential Subj unctive) ;negative is nén .
A Concession ( C oncessive Subj unctive) negative is n é .
I I . It is used in DEPENDENT C LAUSES to express
a .
Condition ( Conditional C lause, seeComparison ( Comparative C lause, seeConcession ( Concessive C lause, see
Purpose (F inal C lause, see
Result ( C onsecutive C lause, seeCharacteristic (Relative C lause, see
Cause ( C ausal C lause, seeTime ( Temporal C lause, seeIndirect Question ( I nterrogative C lause, see
CD
NI
CD
OI
FB
OG
M
H
co
The Subjunctive is also used in relative clauses ( seein intermediate clauses ( see and in subordinate clauses in
Indirect Discourse ( see
fl
Oz
Ol
fli
ww
EXAMP LES.
(fi tinam ) mfl i tés fortibrés fuis sen t, would that the soldiers
had been brave.
pfign émus , let us fight.
pfignet , let himfight.
né pfi gnémus , let us not fight.
quid fi cérem , what was I to do ?
Ego cens eam , I am inclined to think, or I should think .
s it clarus S cip ib , granted that Scip io be renowned .
SUBJUNOTIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENOES. 249
OBS. Ex . 1expresses a wish, and the verb is therefore in the Optative Subjunctive ; uth am , would that, 0 that, frequently precedes
the optative subjunctive ; the negative particle is h e. Note, further,that the present and perfect imply that the w ish ma be fulfilled ;the imperfect and pluperfect , that the w ish is not ulfilled,—the
imperfect representing an unfulfilled w ish in present time, the
pluperfect in past time . Exs . 2 and 3 ex ress a mild command,commanding an act in which the first or thi rd person is the actor ;the verbs are in the Hortatory Subjunctive ; the negative particle ish e, not n6n . Ex. 4 expresses a Prohibition . Ex . 5 asks a delibera
tive or doubtful question ; the verb is in the Dubitative or Delibera
tive Subjunctive. Ex. 6 makes a cautious, polite, or modest statement,and the verb is in the Potential Subjunctive. Ex . 7 expresses a
concession, and the Concessive Subjunctive is used .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English :
1. Scribamus . 2 . Ne scribamus . 3. Laudémus nOmen
Dei . 4. Mali l séeernant Sé a bim'
is .
l 5 . Utinam pater
véniat. 6 . Amémus . 7 . Véniamus in urbem . 8 . Sint
beat'
i .2 9. Utinam magister discipfilOs landet. 10. Utinam
magister diseipiilOs laudaret. 11. Utinam in litOre maris
ambfiliirem . 12 . Utinam mi gister discipfilOs laudavisset.
Translate into Latin
1. Let us love our country . 2 . Let us praise our friends .
3. May you be happy . 4. DO not write the letter . 5 . Would
that he were present. 6 . May the pupil study . 7 . May
the teacher praise the pupils . 8 . Would that the teacher
praised the pupils . 9. Would that the teacher had praised
the pupils . 10. Let him walk with his friends .
NOTES A ND QUESTION S.
1. See 83. 4.
2 . Note that (1) when the wish is for something future, the presentsubj unctive is used, but the perfect may be used ; ( 2 ) when it is for
something p resent, the imperfect subjunctive is used ; (3) When it is forSomething past, the pluperfect subjunctive is used . A s the p resent and
past cannot be changed, the wish expressed by these tenses is unfulfilled .
Mention the chief uses Of the subjunctive . Give the uses of the
subjunctive in independent clauses . What negative is used w ith the
subjunctive ? What w ith the imperative? How many persons has
the imperative How is a future, a p resent, and a past wish expressed?
250 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
SYNOPSIS FOR
1. Optative
Hortatory
Sub juncti ve m3. Dubitative, or
Ind epend en t Deliberative .
Sentences
4. P otential statements .
5. C oncessive
LESSON LXXXIII .
DEPONENT VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
ABLATIVE WITH DEPONENTS.
279. Many verbs are used only in the Passive Voice , butwith an A ctive meaning. These are called DEPONENT
( laying aside) , because they lay aside the active form and
the p assive mean ing.
1. They occur in all four conjugations, and the conjugation towhich they belong is determined by the characteristic vowel of the
present infinitive. They are inflected like the passive of other
verbs, and have also the gerund, participles, and supines of the
active voice .
2 . Deponents of the First Conjugation are inflected as follows
P R I N C I P A L P A RTS.
REVIEW.
I’Vishes .
Exhortations.
Commands .
Prohibitions.
Questions ofDoubt.
Deliberation .
Indignation.
Impossibility.
DEPONENT VERBS. 253
The Perfect Participle of a few deponent verbs may have a
passive meaning ; as,
EXAM P LE .
1. fideptns , having obtained, or having been obtained.
280. A blative with fi tor, fruor, etc.
EXA M PLES.
p liir im ls mi rItImIs rébus frulmur et fi timur , we enj oy and
use very many maritimep roductions .
C aesar opp id é pOtitur , Caesar obtains possession of the town .
lacte v escun tur , they live on milk.
fungi tur officid , he performs his duty .
OBS . Note the translation of the deponent verbs in each of the
foregoing sentences ; note that each is construed w ith the ablative,as if it were an accusative . The idiom is expressed in the follow
ing rule :
A BLATIVE WITH DEPONENTS.
281. RULE XLI . Utor , fr uo r , fun gor , p btior ,
vescor , an d th eir com p oun ds , ar e fo l low ed by the
ablat ive .
LESSON LXXX IV.
DEPONENT VERBS.
282 . A Synopsis of Deponent Verbs of the Four Con
jugations is as follows
P R IN C I P A L P A R TS.
P re sen t . P res . I nf . P e r f . I nd .
mi'
ratus sum,admire .
vér itus sum, fea r .
pOti'
tus sum, possess .
256 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
8 . Hostés urbem aggrédiuntur . 9. Puer , né mentitus sis .
10. Magnos hominés virtute mét’
imur , non fortiinz‘
i . 11. Prae
ceptor gaudébat. 12 . Cives maxnme gams i sunt. 13. Rémus
Numitoris greges infestare Solitus est.
Translate into Latin
1. We admire , we fear , we approach ,1we measure . 2 . You
admire , you fear , you approach , you measure . 3. We ad
mire , we were admiring, we have admired , we had admired .
4. We rejoice , they rejoice. 5 . We have rejoiced , theyhave rejoiced . 6 . We dare , we dared , we have dared .
7 . We trust, we trusted , we have trusted , we will trust.
8 . The garden of the king is adorned .
NOTES A ND QUEST I ON S.
1. Use the proper tense of aggrédior.
Define deponent verbs . Why are these verbs so called ? Of what
conjugation are they? How many participles may a deponent verb
have ? What deponents have four participles How many stems has
a deponent verb What active forms have deponent verbs
LESSON LXXXV.
PBBIPHBASTIO CONJUGATIONS. DATIVE OP AGENT.
284. The Periphrastic1C onjugations are formed by
combin ing the tenses of eas e with the future active
participle and w ith the gerundive .
1. A ctive P er ip h r as tic C onj uga tion .
28 5 . The A ctive Periphrastic Conjugation , formed bv
combining the tenses of eas e with the future active parti
ciple , denotes an intended or future action .
OBS . The subjunctive has no future tense ; its place may besupplied, whenever it is necessary to distinguish accurately futurefrom p resent time i n subordinate clauses, by the periphrastic subjunctive, which may be called the future subj unctive.
PERIPHRA STIC CONJUGA TIONS. 257
P A R T I A L P A R A D IGM .
l l . P a s s ive 4 P er ip h r a stic C onj uga tion .
286 . The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation , formed bycombining the tenses of ease with the gerundive, denotes
necessity or duty .
P A R TIA L P A R A D I GM .
258 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
28 7 . Dative of the A gent.
EXA M PLES.
l . dfl igentia oblenda est uéb is , we must cultivate a habit ofcarefulness ( lit ( a habit of ) carefulness is to us to be
cultivated) .2 C aesari omni a fino tempbre ét at agend a, C aesar had tb
do everything at one time ( lit . , everything was to C aesar to be
done at one time) .
3. omn ibus mdriendum eat , all must die ( lit. , ( the necess ity of )dying is to all) .
4. C aesari in Galliam matfi ram dum , C aesar had to hasten into
Gaul ( lit., ( the necessity of ) hastening into Gaul was to
Caesar ) .
OBS . In Exs . 1and 2 note that with the gerundive the person
upon whom the obligation rests of doing the action is expressed bythe dative ; this dative expresses not merely the doer of the action ,
but the person interested in doing it, and is, therefore, to be classi
fied under the Dative of Interest ( see 193. Note that the verbs
in Exs. 1and 2 are transitive,6and the periphrastic forms have a
subject w ith which they agree in gender , number , and case in Exs .
3and 4 the verbs are intransitive, the periphrastic forms have no
subject, but are of the third person singular, neuter gender . The
verb is here used impersonally, but the agent is in the dative .
The idiom may be stated as follows :
DATIVE OF AGENT .
288 . RULE XLII .— Th e d ative o f th e agen t is u sed
w ith th e gerun dive to d en ote th e p er son in ter ested
in d o in g th e action .
1. The dative of agent is often used after perfect participles .
2. The agent with passive verbs is usually denoted by the abla
tive with a or ab .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Patria amanda est. 2 . Amandus est ille puer . 3. H ic
liber tibi légendus est. 4 Caesar castra motfirus est.
5 . Caesar. cum Soladécima leglone profectfirus erat. 6 . Mill i
scribendum est. 7 . Obsidés tibf datfirus sum . 8 . Frfimen
tum A edu'
is 6 dandum est. 9. Epistfila tibi scribenda est .
TA BLE OF THE FOUR CONJUGA TIONS. 261
2 . The PERFEC T STEM ( found by adding to the present stem
-vi for the l st and 4th conjugations ; -vi, or generally -ui , for the 2d ;and -si to the verb-stem of the 3d) , on which are formed the
tenses in the active voice that express completed action ; viz .,
a . The PERFECT,
IND IC A TIVE.
b. The PERFEC T and PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.
c. The PERFEC T INF IN ITIVE.
an d P er so n .
Fut.
Perf.
INF IN ITIVE
BUBJUNCTWE.
INDICATIvE
INDICATIVE.
Sing .1
P lur .1
P lur . I
Sing . l
P lur .1
re 51
s
H
H
Sing.1
P lur .1
PLUPERFEC T, and FUTURE PERFECT
PER FEC T STEM .
l st C on j . 2d C on j . 3d C onj .
amavi monui réxi
amavi-Sfi monui-sti rexi-sti
amavI-t mbunl-t réxI-t
amavI-mus mount-mus réxI—musamavi-Sus monui-s tis rexi-stisamave-runt , re monué-runt , re réxé-runt.re
amave-ri-m monué-ri-m réxé ri-mamave-ri-S monuG-ri-S réxe-ri-Samave-ri-t menue-ri-t réxé-ri-tamave-ri-mus monué-rI-mus réxé—r’l—musamave-rI-tis monue-rl-tis réxé-ri-tisamavth ri-nt monue-ri-nt rexé-ri-nt
amavis se m6nui-sse rexi-sse
amave-ra-m monué ra-m réxe-rwmamave-ri -s monue-rafi s réxé rfi-s
amave-ra-t monué ra-t réxé—ra-tamave-ra-mus mbnué-ra-mus réxé—ra-musm ove-tans monué-ra-tis réxé—ra-tisamave-rwnt monue-rwnt réxes rap nt
amavi-sse-m monui-sse-m réxi-sse-mamavi-sse-s monui-sse-s réxi-sse-samavi-Sse-t monui-sse-t rexi-sse-t
amavi-sse-mus monui-Sse-mus réxi-sse-musamavi-Sse-tis monui-SSGtiS rexi-sse-tisamavi-sse-nt m6nui-sse-nt
amavé ro mbnueh ro réxé-toamave-ri-s monué-ri-s réxe-ri-samave-r i-t monne-r i-t réxé ri-tamave-rI-mus mbnué-rI-mus réxe-rl-musamave-rT-tis monué-rI-tis réxé-ri-tis
amave-ri-nt monué-ri-nt réxé—ri-ut
4th C onj .
audiviaudivi-sti
audivI—taudivI-musaudivi-stis
audivés runt, re
endive-ri-maudive-ri-Saudive-ri—taudivé-ri-musaudive-rI-tis
audivé-ri-nt
audivi-sse
audive-ra-maudive-ra-saudivé-ta-t
audivé—rapmusaudive-ra-tis
audive-ra-nt
audivi-sseomaudivi-sse-saudivi-sse-taudivi-ssé-musaudivi-ssé tisaudivi-sse-nt
audive-roaudivé-r i-saudivé-ri-t
audive-rI-musaudivG-rI-tis
audivé—ri-nt
262 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
THE FOUR CONJUGAT IONS.
—AC T IVE VO ICE.
R ecap i tu ta tion .
Give the meaning, stem , formation , principal parts ,
euphonic changes , mode , tense , number , and person of
each of the follow ing
1. audit
2 . érfi d iébat
3. amAmus
4. dbcémus
5. régit
6 . vécémus
7 . vulnérat
8 . m a
9. timent
10. monébunt
11. culpfib ant
12 . crédun t
13. mi ttun t
14. frangl ti s
15. terrétis
laudfib it
17 . claus lmus
18 . nar ran t
Supplementary Exercises
1. Lauda, cxercé, scribe, obedi . 2 . Laudémus , exer
ceamus , scribamus , 6bédiamus . 3. Utinam pz'
iter fabulam
névam narret ! 4. Fidem servémus . 5 . Tacete , puéri .
6 . Laudfite , exercéte, scribite , Chedite . 7 . Cépias majoréshabérémus . 8 . Utinam pater véniat ! 9. Né pfignémus .
10. Dicit Caesarem oppidum expfignavisse . 11. Dicit Cae
sarem Oppidum expiignare . 12 . Caesar in Gallia hiémare
constituit. 13. Littéras scribamus .
Translate into Latin
1. He praises . 2 . We teach . 3. They write . 4. He
hears . 5 . They were teaching. 6 . He will write . 7 . Thev
will hear . 8 . We do not ask . 9. They are reading.
légébat5
pfinivGrun t
pangun t
pétent
persuasérat
dbcébun t
lauda( v§) roériid i (v ) 6ritducébat
exeroébis
érfid i ( vi ) s tidi s cit
h i b i ti vérunt
vbcat
scripséro
dédi t
ténuérat 4
nar rate
266 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
I
THE FOUR C ONJUGAT IONS.
—PASSIVE VO IC E.
R ecap i tu la tion .
Give the meaning, stem, formation , principal parts ,
euphonic changes , mode , tense , number , and person of each
of the follow ing
1. narratu r im i ti sfimus v id émini2 dbcen tur 3 docti sunt v incébaris
3. légébantur4
aud i tus es t nil nébun t
4. audi ébar mis s a es t aed ifi c i ti s
5. mbnéris érfi d iti aunt parati St i mus
6. v605b6ris lectus es t érfid i tur
7. p iin iun tur vbcfitus es pfin itae sum:8 . d ii céria 5 mun itum es t Educator
9. v incar pun iti érAmus oppugnata es t
10. narran tur laudatus éx'at Gdficfiti fuéran t
11. m6v 6mur laudi tae sun t culpabari s
12 . dbcére puérbs puéri ex erci ti sun t laudétur
audi tor puella ornata es t v is i Eran t
14. imémur mbn i ti Eran t cingétur
Supplementary Exercises
1. D iscipiilus a magistrO laudatur . 2 . Puer , béne édii
cator . 3. LabOra. 4. Dicit puer sé laudatum esse . 5 . D6
bémus laudari . 6 . Milites jussi sunt pfignare . 7 . D iscipiili
a magistrO dOcentur . 8 . C redo eum illOs puérOS laudatfirum
esse . 9. BOni discipfili student exercéri in littérarum stfidiis .
Translate into Latin
1. He was told . 2 . They are telling . 3. I was (being)taught. 4. We are taught. 5 . He is heard . 6 . They w ill
be taught . 7 . We shall be sent. 8 . He was conquered .
9. They were seen . 10. I was being called . 11. Thou w ilt
have been blamed . 12 . He is being praised . 13. Thou wilt
have been praised . 14. They have been sent. 15 . They
have been called . 16 . They w ill have been heard . 17 . She
has been taught. 18 . He has been heard . 19. Yo have been
268 FI RST STEPS I N LA TIN .
3. See above, note 4.
4. Notice that rég tus rec-tus .
5. Verb—stem dno tum ductum.
How do you distinguish the conjugations Give the present stem
of the first conjugation . What is mean t by the pr incipal parts of a
verb What are the principal parts in the passive voice How is the
perfect of each conjugation formed What verbs take two accusatives
of the same person or thing? Give the tense-Sign of the imperfect
indicative active . How is the participial stem of each conjugationformed ? What is the tense-sign of the present
? (A ns . It has none . )What is the tense-sign of the future perfect
? (A ns . amavE-ri—mus . )Has the indicative any special sign to mark the mode ? (A ns . No . )What are the personal endings of the present
? These endings were
originally personal pronouns , and have, accordingly , the force of pro
nouns in English . Remember that the verbal endings contain
1. The tense-Sign as —ba in fimfi-ba—m .
2 . The mode-vowel ; as -ii in rég-fi-s .
3. The personal ending ; as-s in rég
-a-s .
A re the future participle active and supines formed from this stem ?
(A ns . Strictly they are not ; the future participle active is an adjectiveform to nouns in -tor
,-sor as , lee-tor, fut. part. lec-tfi rus ; the supine
is a noun of the fourth conjugation in -tu or -su, nom .-tum or «mm ;
but as the form is the same as the participial stem,and as the suffixes
begin with t, these forms are usually referred to this stem . )
LESSON LXXXVII .
GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUALITY.
exeacns s FOR SIGHT - READING.
Genitive of Quality .
EXA M P LES.
vir maximi cons i li i , a man of very great sagacity .
fos sa quindécim pédum , a ditch offifl een feet.
v ir es t excellen tis ingén ii , he is a man of excellent disposition .
C aes ar Dumnbrlgem m i gn i an im i et mAgnae in ter G all é s
auctbri tati s cégnbvérat , C aesar knew that Dumnor ix was
( a man) of great courage and infl uence among the Gauls .
GENITIVE AND ABLA TIVE OF QUALITY. 269
291. A blative of Quality .
EXAMP LES.
1. summa v irtiite i d iilésoéns , a youth of the greatest valor .
2 . C i tilin a ingéni b 111516 fui t, C atiline was a man of a bad
disposition .
3. C aesar fuls se trad itur excelsa statura, Caesar is said to
have been of tall stature .
OBS . In the foregoing examples, note that the nouns added for
description (as cons i lil. pédum , ingénii , anlmi , auctbri tAtis ) areall in the genitive case, and that, in every instance, the genitive is
accompanied by an adjective (as maxImI.quin décim, excellentis ,
m i gni , magnate) . This gen itive cannot be used without an accom
panying adjective : as , a man of talent is hbmo ingéniésus ( noth bmo ingénil ) ; but, a man of great talent is hbmo magni ingénii .
Note , further, that in every instance the relation expressed is be
tween two nouns ; thus , a ditch of fifteen feet is fos sa quindécim
pédum , but when latus is added , we must say fos sa quindécim
p éd és lata, a ditchfifl eenfeet deep . (Note that i nlml and auctb
r itati s , in Ex . 4, stand in the predicate after the intransitive verb
esse understood .) A genitive added in this way to a noun for
further description is called a DESC R IPT IVE GENITIVE, or a GEN IT IVE OF QUA LITY, or OF CHA RA C TERISTIC ; if it stands in the
predicate after an intransitive verb, it is called a PRED ICA TE
GEN I TIVE OF QUA LITY, etc . Note that in Exs . 1, 2 , 3, under 291,the nouns vi rtute , ingénib, and s tatfiraareadded to express uality,or for further descrip tion, and that these nouns are in the a lative.
Distinguish the attributive (virti'
ite) and the predicate use ( ingfinib,statura) . The idioms are expressed in the follow ing rule :
GENITIVE AND ABLATIVE OF QUA LITY.
292 . RULE XLIII .—A n oun d en oting qua lity , quan
tity , or d escr ip tion , an d h aving an ad jective jo in ed
w i th it , m ay be put in th e gen itive or in th e ablative .
OBS . The use of the ablative is more common ,but the two cases
are often used indifferently, and sometimes both are found in the
same sentence .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Germani viri corpOrum ingenti magnitudine fuérunt.
2 . Cati lina fuit magna vi et animi et corpOris . 3. Bibracte
est oppidum apud A eduOs maximas auctOritatis . 4. Caesar ,
vir summi ingénii ( or summo ingéniO) , prfidentiam cum
éq uentia junxit.
270 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
Sigh t-R ea d in g .
CE SAR’
S LA NDING IN BRITA IN .
Erat1ob has causas summa difi‘
icultas , quod navés propterfor because
magnitfidinem, nisi in altO, constitui2nOn p6terant ; militi
siz e deep (water ) station could
bus 3autem—ignOtis lbeis ,4 impeditis manibus ,magnO et graviunknown encumber
armOrum Onére oppressis Simul et dé navibus désiliendumweight load both
et in fluetibus consistendum et cum hostibus érat piignanand wave stand-firm
dum ; cum illi 5 aut ex arido , aut paulum In aquam progressi ,while dry ( land ) a little
omnibus membris expéditi , notissimis locis , audacter
m
telalimbs free well-known dart
cénicérent, et équos insuéfactOS incitarent.hurl train push-ou
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. Subject ? Position Eng. there was .
2 . Rule for this infinitive
3. The construction is, mi li tibus désfl iendum ét at, the soldiers
had to leap . Rule for mi li tibus being in the dative ?
4. Explain these ablatives. 5 . To whom does ill! refer
LESSON LXXXVI I I .
IRREGULAR VERBS.
293. I rregularVerbs deviate from the common inflection
in some of the parts formed from the present stem. The
tenses formed from the perfect and participial stems are
inflected alike in all verbs . The forms called irregular are,
for the most part, either syncopated or ancient forms .
1. The most common Irregular Verbs are1. sum , I am. 5 . féro , I bear
2 . vblo , I wish. 6 . s o , I go.
3. malo , I prefer . 7 . fio , I ammade, or become.
4. nfilo , I am unwilling . 8 . édo , I eat.
9. queo , I am able.
272 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
3. P TO-sum , I help , I p rofit, is inflected like am , but retains its
original d (préd before a vowel, and loses it before a consonant ;
as
PR IN C I P A L PA R TS.
PRES. INF . PERF . IND . PARTIC IPLE.
p r6 d-es se
4. Like sum are conjugated ah-sum , ad-sum , d é—sum , ih -sum ,
inter-sum , oh -sum , prae-sum , sub-sum ( no perfect) , super-sum.
EXA MP LES.
1. C aesar p6 tes t Iter dare Casar is able to give, or can
give, a passage.
IRREGULA R VERBS. 273
2 . C aesar pbtérat Iter d i re, C aesar was able to give, or could
give, a passage.
3. C aesar pbtérit i ter dare, Casar will be able to give a passage.
4. C aesar pbtui t i ter d i re , Caesar has been able to give, or could
have given, a passage.
SYN . P os sum , I am able, because I have sufiicient power ; queo ,
I am able, because circumstances allow .
EXERC ISES.
Name the mode, tense, number , and person of the fol
lowing forms
1. Pbtest, pOtérat, pétérit. 2 . Possiimus , pétéramus , pOté
rimus . 3. Ego possum légére, tu pOteS scribére . 4. Caesar
oppidum expiignare pOtest. 5 . Amicis 1prOdesse possumus .
6 . Caesar pOtest iter Helvétiis dare . 7 . D ivitiiicus pliiri
mum 2 in réliqua Gallia pOtérat. 8 . Caesar urbi praeérat.
9. Multi 8 Siipersiimus . 10. Caesar équités praemittit.
‘
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS.
1. 202 . 2 . plfirimum pos se, to be very powerful seeVocabulary .
3. multi modifies né s (we) , the omitted subject of supers iimus .
Translate, many of us survive ; of us is appositive. See 202 .
If the simple verb is transitive, the compound is transitive, and is
followed by the accusative. What is an irregular verb ? Mention the
most common irregular verbs. Of what is pos sum compounded?
Give its composition ; account for the euphonic changes.
LESSON LXXXIX.
IRREGULAR VERBS (con tinued ) .
294. The Irregular Verbs volo , and its compounds ,and male , are inflected as follows
P R I N C I P A L P A R TS.
P r es. I n f . P er f . I n d . P a r ticip le .
wish.
be unwilling.
p refer .
IRREGULAR VERBS. 277
P A SSIVE VO I CE .
OBS. 1. In the Present and Imperfect Tenses of féro the only irregu
larity is the omission of e and i in some of the terminations : thus,fer-s fer-is , fer-t fer-it, fer-rem fér-érem, fer-t e fér-ere, etc .
The forms of féro are derived from three independent stems, seen in
OBS. 2 . The compounds of fi re are conjugated in the same way
af-fero (ad, fero ) af-ferre s t-tuli al-lfitnm, bring to.
nu-fero (ab, fero ) au-ferre ah-stuli ah-li tum, carry away .
ef-fero (ex, fero ) ef-ferre ex—tuli é-li tum,carry out.
in-fero ( in , fi re ) in-ferre in-tuli il-latum, carry into.
of-fero (ob, fero ) oi-ferre oh-tuli oh-latum, present.
prO-fero (prfi , fero ) prO
-ferre prO-tuli pré-Ii tnm,
carryforward .
ré-féro (re, iéro ) ré-ferre ret-tuli ré-li tum,bring back.
278 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
296 . A blative of Specification .
EXAM P LES.
1. réx nbmine fuit, he was king in name.
2 C laud ius altérb péde, lame in onefoot.3. H elv étii réliqué s C al las v irtfi te praecédunt , theHelvetians
surpass the other Gauls in valor .
4. oppida sua omnia, niiméro ad dubdécim incendun t, theyburn all their towns, about twelve in number .
OBS . In the foregoing examples, nam ine , péde , v irtfite , andnumérd , show in what resp ect or particular the statement is true,i.e.
, t e Helvetians surpass the other Gauls in resp ect to valor . The
principle is expressed in the following rule
A BLATIVE OF SPEC IFICATION .
297 . RULE XLIV.
—A n oun , ad j ective , or verb
m ay be fo l low ed by th e ab lative to den ote in w h at
r esp ect its sign ifi cation is tak en .
EXERC ISES.
Name the mode , tense , number , and person of the fol
lowing verbs
1. Périmas, férébamus , féramus , férémus . 2 . Quid fers ,mi 1Smice ? 3. Ferte Viro auxilium . 4. POpiIlus Romanus
diii injurias tiilit. 5 . Helvétiis bellum inferre VOlI‘
imus .
6 . Férimur , férébamur , férémur , féramur . 7 . A uxilium
militibus ii diice fertur . 8 . Hi omnes linguii , institfitis ,
légibus inter Sé difiérunt. 9. Fer mihi auxilium . 10. Oppi
dum RémOrum nOmine Bibrax 2 longé abérat.
Translate into Latin
1. We hear , we were bearing, we will bear . 2 . They
hear , they will bear . 3. He has borne , he had borne , they
had borne . 4. We are borne, we were borne , we Shall be
borne . 5 . He is borne , he was borne . 6 . He has been
borne , he had been borne . 7 . Bear aid , they will bear aid ,
he has borne aid . 8 . They differ in language and laws .
NOTES A ND QUEST ION S.
1. 231. Obs . 1.
2 . Bib rax , gen .-actis , F . (French modern name B ievre) .
280 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
OBS. 3. The compounds of eo usually take-n ,
rarely-ivi in the per
fect tenses as, adeo, I approach, makes adii , adiéram, i dissem,etc .
OBS. 4. The compounds of eo which have a transitive meaning are
conjugated throughout in the pass ive as, i deo, I approach ; PA SS .
adsor , adir is , aditur , i dimur , adimini , i deuntur , etc .
OBS. 5 . Ambio, I go about, retains the i throughout, and is conju
gated regularly like a verb of the fourth conjugation . Hence we find
ambiébam,but occasionally ambibam,
the gerund ambiendi , etc. The
perfect participle is ambitus , though the verbal substantive is ambitus .
299. Edo , I eat.
P R I N C I P A L P A R TS.
PRES . INF . PERF . IND . PARTIC IPLE .
édére or es se ed i esum
OBS. 1. Edo is of the third conjugation, with variations ; e’
or t
before 3 or t is dropped, and the d of the stem changed to 3; also the
original 3 takes the place of the r ; as, édé-re es-se, not ca re.
OBS. 2 . The passive voice is regular ; only éstur is generally used
instead of édi tur , and essétur instead of édérétur . The perfect par
ticiple is ésus .
IRREGULA R VERBS. 281
300. The A blative of Difference .
EXA M P LES.
1. 8 61multis p artibus major es t quam terra , the sun is very
much ( lit., by many parts) larger than the earth.
2 . altérum i ter mult6 expéd i tius Erat , the other route was much
more passable (more passable by much) .3. hie lbcus aequé spatid ab cas tris A riov is ti et C aesaris
fibérat, this p lace was ( distant by an equal space) the same
distancefrom the camp of A r iovistus and (from that) of C aesar .
OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that the ablatives parti
bus , multc'
i, sp i tid , express the measure of difference . These
words follow the comparatives, major and expéditius ; the abla
tive spétib denotes extent of space, which is usually put in the
accusative ( see but may be in the ablative, as it is in thi s
case, denoting the degree of difl'
erence ( lit., was absent by an equal
distance) . Hence the follow ing rule
ABLATIVE OF DIFFERENCE.
301. RULE XLV. Th e ab la tive is u sed , w ith
com par atives an d w o r d s im p ly ing com par ison , to
d en o te th e m easur e o f d iffer ence .
OBS. The ablative of dif erence includes the ablative of distance.
( See 215 .
EXERC ISES.
Name the mode . tense , number , and person of the fol
lowing verbs
1. Imus , ibamus , ibimus , eamus . 2 . Ego abeo , tfi ex
itinére rédis . 3. It, cunt , ibit. 4. Ivit, ivérat, ite, itis ,
ivéramus . 5 . I , quO té fata VOcant . 6 . I , lictor, déligii
puérum ad palum . 7 . Caesar multOgravius quéritur . 8 . UnO
die longiOrem meh sem faciunt. 9. Hibernia dimidiO minor
( est) quam Britannia . 10. MultO major alacritas exercitai
in jecta est. 11. Ite , milités . 12 . Edimus , édamus , édunt.
Translate into Latin
1. They go , they were going, they will go . 2 . He was
going, he will go , he goes . 3. We go , we were going, we
will go . 4. Go thou, I go , I have gone , I had gone . 5 . The
sun is much larger than the earth . 6 . The tower was ten
feet higher than the wall . 7 . My country is much dearer
to me than life . 8 . They make the year one day longer .
282 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XC II .
IRREGULAR VERBS ( con tinued ) .
ABLAT IVE AND GENIT IVE OF PRICE —EXERC ISE FOR
SIGHT - READING .
302 . The I rregular Verb no ,I became or am made, is
inflected as follows :
PR IN C I P A L P A R TS
PRES. INF .
fiéri
OBS. 1. Fio (which stands for fa—i—o ) is used as the passive of fdcio,which has no passive forms (except fi ciendus and factus ) ; on the
other hand, factus sum,I have become, has the meaning of the perfect
of fi o ; fiéri is not really a passive form,but an old infinitive active,
fiérei .
OBS. 2 . The i in fi o is always long , except in fit and when not fol
lowed by r ( in present infinitive and imperfect subjunctive ) .OBS. 3. Most compounds of facio with prepositions change a to i
(present stem ) , and are inflected regularly ; the passive ends in -fi cior ;other compounds retain a and have fio in the passive.
OBS. 4. Queo, I am able, is conjugated like eo, but as it is an nu
usual verb , it is here omitted ; it has a compound, néqueo, I am unable.
284 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
he can become good . 4. The soldier sells his country for
gold . 5 . The soldier values money highly . 6 . He sold his
corn at a less price . 7 . Caesar became consul .
NOTES A ND QUESTI ON S.
1. Predicate adjective ? 2 . Rule for cons iilés 3. Rule
4. Why subjunctiveHow may price be expressed
? When is the ablative used Whenthe genitive
?
Sigh t-R ea d in g .
CE SAR’
S LAND ING IN BRITA IN ( continued) .
Quod fibi Caesar Rnimadvertit , nii.vés1 longas (quarum
and this when ( acc . )
et spéciés érat barbaris2 infisitatior , et mOtuS ad I
'
Isum ex
appearance unusual motion service
péditior ) paulum removeri ab onerzi riis navibus,et rémis3
remove of burden oar
incitari , et ad liitus apertum hostium ec’
mstitui ,latque inde
push-ou side Open thence
fundis , Sagittis , tormentis hostés submbvéri l jussit . A tque ,s ling engine (acc . ) driven order
nOstriS militibus cunctantibus , maxime propter altitI'
Idinemdelay chiefly depth
maris , ( is ) qui décimae legiOn iS aquilam férébat, contestatustenth appeal to
deos ut ea rés légioni feliciter événiret Desilite ,”
inquit,happily turn-out
milites , nisi vultis‘aquilam hostibus prOdére . Ego certéabandon at-Ieast
meum reipiibhcae atque Imperfité ri ofi’ieium prae stitéro .
”
duty fulfil
HOe cum magna véce dixisset, sé ex navi prOjécit, atque in
hostés aquilam ferre coepit . Tum nostri , c5hortati inter sé ,exhort
né tantum dédécus admittérétur , finiversi ex niivi désiluéshame permit all-at-once
runt. HOS item ex prOximis niivibus cum cOnspéxissent,also nearest caught-sight-oi
subsecfiti hostibus 2 apprOpinqudrunt .
follow-close approach
NOTES A ND QUESTION S.
1. The construction is juss it nfivés rémbvéri , etc .
2 . Why dative ? 3. Why ablative 4. See V610.
The subjunctives can be omitted until the review.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 285
LESSON XC III .
DEFECTIVEVERBS.—INSTRUMENTAL ABLATIVE.
305 . DefectiveVerbs want some of their parts . The fol
low ing are the most common Defective Verbs that do not
use the tenses formed from the present stem
1. coepi, I begin . 2 . mémin i , I remember . 3. 6 dI, I hate.
OBS. There is a large number of verbs that are more or less
defective ; those enumerated here are the most defective of those
that are commonly used.
1. Od i , coepi ( for the present of which incipio is used) , andmém lni are only used in the Perfect Tenses, and hence are some
times called p reteritive ( or past) verbs.
P A R T I A L P A R A D IGM .
I ndi cative .
Sub junct ive .
méminérim bdérim nbvérim
Im pe r ative .
I nfi n it ive .
mémin isse nOvisse
P ar t ic ip les .
b sus
OBS. 1. Instead of coepi and its tenses, the passive coeptus
sum, etc.,is used before an infinitive passive ; as, urbs aed ificar i
coepta es t , the city began to be built.
286 F IR ST STEPS IN LATIN .
OBS. 2. N OV! is properly the perfect of nos co , I learn to know.
OBS. 3. M émini . Odi . and ndvi have in the perfect, pluperfect,and future perfect the meaning of the present, imperfect, and
future respectively .
2 . The follow ing have only the tenses formed from the present
stem, and these are in many cases incomplete
1. 510, I say . 3. fi ri , to speak. 5 . salve , ha il.
2 . inquam , I say . 4. quaes o , I ask, beg. 6 . queo , I can .
a. A io , I say ( for fig-io , cf. ad-fig-ium ) , has only the following
forms
OBS. i between two vowels j ) is pronounced like y ; ai is not
a diphthong.
b. Inquam , say I , has only the following forms
OBS . Inquam , inquit , like the Eu lish say I , says he, are always
used parenthetically, themselves an subjects following betweencommas after a word or words of the quotation . It is used,except in poetry, only in direct quotations . (See
288 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
OBS. 1. The ablative of measure is used w ith the comparativeinstead of quam w ith the nominative or accusative . (See
OBS. 2 . The measure of difference is denoted by the ablative .
( See This ablative is common w ith the ablative of pronouns
( 6 25 qu6 ) and of adjectives of quantity quanta, multo,
pau16 , etc.) and w ith verbs implying comparison (as, antécello ,
excello , supero ,
OBS . 3. Distance may be denoted by the ablative . (See
OBS . 4. Price, when a definite sum, is denoted by the ablative .
(See Here belongs the ablative w ith dignus , ind ignus .
For ablative of specification , see 297 .
OBS. 5 . Here belongs the ablative, with the adverbs an te and
pos t, to denote how long before or after a thing happens ; as, paucisante d iébus , or paucIs d iébus ante , a few days before ; paucispos t diébus , or paucis diébus pos t , a few days after . The accu
sative can be used ; as, an te paucos annés , a few years before.
A BLA TIVE OF MATERIAL .
308 . The material of which anything is made is regularly
expressed by the ablative with ex or as, but constare , to con
sist, sometimes omits the preposition .
EXA M PLE .
En lmo cons ti mus et co rpora, we consist of soul and body.
OBS. 1. The ablative of material is used w ith words of plentyand want, especially w ith verbs signifyingfi lling, abounding, supp lying, furnishing, and the like .
OBS. 2 . Opus and fisus , signifying need, are followed by the
ablative of the thing needed .
EXA MP LE .
duos nob is opus es t , there is need to us of a leader .
OBS. 3. Sometimes the thing needed is the subject and opus
the predicate ; hence we may say either dfice n6b‘
is opus es t, there
is need to us of a leader, or dux néb is est, a leader is a need to us e
OBS . 4. The adjective praed l tus is followed by the ablative .
EXA MP LE .
v irtute p raedltus , endowed with virtue.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 289
ABLATIVE OF MANNER .
309. The A blative of Manner generally takes the prepo si
tion cum , unless it has a modifying adjective or genitive
(when cum may be omitted ) .
OBS. But cum is never used with the following ablatives
m6d 6 , ratibne, more , généra, rité , etc. ; also, has mente. hbc
061181116 , 32 lége , meo pérlofilé , jut e, in juria, etc .
EXAM P LES.
cum our! sorIb it, he writes with care.
cum (or without cum ) magna our! sortbit, he writes with
great care.
3. magno flétfl auxi lium a C asei n pétant, with a fl ood oftears they seek aid from Caesar .
intellégbbat magné cum péricifl o prévinoias futurum
( esse ) , he perceived that it would be attended with the great
danger to thep rovince.
5. C aesar omn ibus 06pm prbfi cis ol tur , Caesar departs with all
his forces.
ABLATIVE OF A CCOMPANIMENT .
310. The A blative of A ccompaniment takes the prepo
s itiou cum, except in a few military and other phases .
EXAMP LES.
l . cum déolm i légiéne v éni t, he came with the tenth legion .
2 . subséquébatur omni bus 06pm , hefollowed close with all
his forces .
1. If WITH signifies in company with, in confl ict with, cum mustbe used ; but relations cross, and whenever manner or accompaniment can be regarded as means, the preposition is omitted.
311. A blative of Quality or Characteristic. (See
OBS. Note the close connection between these three uses of the
ablative of manner : the first, he writes with care, care being an
attendant circumstance ; the second, he comes with the tenth te ion,the ablative designating that w ith which he is attended ; the t ird,an attendant quality . (See
290 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
312 . The Uses of the A blative may be tabulated as fol
lows :
1. A BLA T IVE PROPER
2 . INSTRUMENTA L
A BLA TIVE
3. LOCA TIVE
SYN . c o , say or speakformally lbquor ( lbqui ) , speak or talk( opposed to taceo , keep silent) ; for ( fart) , talk, use articulate
speech ; aio , assent, say yes, expresses the assertion of the speaker
(opposed to négogs
; in quam , inquit , say I , says he, used to intro
uce the very wor of the speaker, and always comes after one or
more words of the quotation (305 . 2 .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. A it, aisn’
? 510 . 2 . Inquit, tatur . 3. Ociilis vidé'
mus ,
auribus audimus 4. Vir lapide interfectas est. 5 . Solus
potitus est império Romfilus . 6 . Vir dimicat ferre. 7 . Virculpa dignus est. 8 .
“ Omnia périérunt,”
inquit Caesar ,
consii lite , milites , vestrae salut'
i 9. Eadem condiciéne
deditiénis usus est. 10. German‘
i viri corporum ingenti
magnitudine fuérunt.
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
Learn the synopsis of coepi'
, mémInI , Gd i . What is a defective
verb? Which defective verbs have in the perfect and pluperfect the
meaning of the present and imperfect How are the uses of the abla
tive classified ? Give the chief uses of the ablative proper ; of the instru
mental ablative ; of the locative ablative.
The Place from which .
Separation .
Cause ( including Source, Origin, fi'étus, con
tentas , fido , cbnfido, difl'
ido, and A gencywith a or ab after passive verbs ) .
Means, Instrument, Deponents, iitor , etc.
Measure, Measure of Difference, Price, dignus, indigna s .
Comparison .
Specification .
Material,Plenty , and Want, 6pus, iisus,
praeditns .
Manner, A ccompaniment (with cum) ,Quality .
Place where.
Time and C ircumstance.
A blative A bsolute.
292 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
314. The Impersonal uses of verbs may be classified as
follows
1. Verbs relating to the weather as , fulgurat, it lightens ;
gran d Inat, it hails ; lfi ces cit, it grows light tonat, it thunders
illiicescit, it becomes light.
OBS. Sometimes these verbs are used personally, the name of
the deity or some other agent, generally expressing a cognate idea,being expressed as the subject ; as, Jupp l ter p lui t, Jup iter rains ;diés illfi cescit , day dawns .
2 . Verbs relating to thefeelings. The person who feels is put in
the accusative ; as, m6 ml séret , it grieves me ( i .s . I grieve) . The
following verbs of the second conjugation belong to this class
P R IN C I PA L P A R TS.
PRES. INF . PERF . IND . PARTIC IPLE.
décére décuit it becomes .
dédécére dédécuit, it is unseemly.
libére libuit and libitum est, it pleases .
licere licuit and licitum est, it is lawful.
liquére it is clear .
misérére
Latin idiom
Becomes a youngman to bemodest, or
To be modest becomes a young man ,véréoundum 8 8 36
English idiomadulescentem .
I t becomes a youngman to bemodest,
OBS. 1. A s the English idiom requires a subject, the pronoun itis placed before the impersonal verb in translating.
OBS. 2 . These verbs are not used in the imperative ; the sub
junctive is used in its place ; as, pud eat te, shame thyself. Some of
these verbs have a passive voice, as ml séreor, I p ity ( am moved
miséritum est, it excites pity.
6portuit, it behaves.
piguit and pigitum est , it verses .
placui t and placitum est, it pleases .
paenituit, it causes sorrow .
piiduit and piidi tum est, it shames .
(per )taesum,it wear ies .
EXA MP LE .
A C T IVE.
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 293
by p ity) , and occasionally other parts (1) Participles : déobns ,
becoming ; llhéus , willing ; 1106115 , free ; llcltus , allowed . ( 2 ) Gerundives : poenl tendus , to be repented of ; pudendus , shameful.(3) Gerunds : p l gendum , poenl tendl , -6 ,
-um ; pudendi , 6 ,-um .
OBS. 3. A ll of these verbs (except m lséret, 6portet, taedet)can have a neuter pronoun as subject, and are then personal : as ,
n6 o pudot n é, this shames me ; haeo llbent , these things p lease.
LIb et and Hos t can have an adjective used as noun as subject, asn 6n omn ia li cent, not every thing pleases ; and déoet and dbdéoet
can have any word as subject, as virtue v 6 : déoet, virtue becomes
you. See 315 . 3
3. Some personal verbs seem, in certain senses, to be used im
personally ; but they are not truly so, because the real subject isgenerally an infinitive or a clause. Such verbs are
PERSONAL. I I P I BGONAL.
he, she ( it)falls upon. it happens ( ill) .
it belongs to .
it is useful.it befalls (well ) .it is agreed upon.
it is expedient.
it escapes .
EXAMPLES.
1. ut l éris inter 363 et pons intbreu et, so that the Tiber
and bridge might be between them (personal use) .
2 . in téres t omn ium reoté fi oére, it concerns all to do right
( impersonal use) .
4. Intrans itive verbs, when used in the passive ( the participle isneuter ) as, curr ltur , there is running, or they run mlh i crédltur ,it is credited to me, I am believed n 6u hos tibus paroltur , there is
no quarter given to the enemy, or the enemy is not spared t i'
inv i
d étur , there is envy to me, i .e. I am envied ; hos tibus rBSis tunt, they
294 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
once is ofi’
ered to these op inions . When the Agent is mentioned, it
is put in the ablative with the preposition a or ab . or may remain
in the dative : as , (Act.) H elvetii’
fortlter pfignavérun t, the Hel
vetians fought bravely ; ( Impers .) 5b H elvéfi h fortl ter pfign i tum
eat, it was fought bravely by the Helvetians, i .e. the Helvetians fought
5. The passive of the periphrastic conjugation is often used im
personally ; the participle is then always neuter ( see 28 7 . Obs.)as, mlhi
'
s cri bendum est, I must wr ite ( lit., the necessity of wr itingis to me) 111i scribendum est, he must wr ite.
OBS. 1. The persons are expressed in the follow ing way in the
present indicative, and similarly in the other tenses :
pfidet m6, it shames me, or I am ashamed .
pfidet té, it shames thee, or thou art ashamed .
pfidet sum,it shames him, or he is ashamed .
piidet 1168 , it shames us , or we are ashamed.
piidet vbs, it shames you, or you are ashamed.
piidet 068 , it shames them, or they are ashamed.
OBS. 2 . The impersonal verbs llbet, itpleases, ll oet, it is lawful,and expédi t, it is expedient, are used Wl tll the dative ; as, llcet
mlhi ire, it is lawfulfor me to go, or I may go.
315 . Genitive with Verbs .
VERBS OF MEMORY.
1. Verbs of reminding, remember ing, and forgetting,— réoordor
( rarely) , mémlnl , rémlniscor , and oblIvis cor , are followed by
the genitive ( sometimes by the accusative) .
EXAMP LES.
1. m ini vIv6 rum, I ammindful of the living.
2 . rlmlnisol v irtfi tis , to remember virtue.
GENITIVE OF CRIME.
2 . Verbs of accusing, convicting, condemning, and acquitting take
the accusative of the person and the genitive of the crime.
1. praetor reum crimln is absolv lt, thepraztor acquitted the
prisoner of the cr ime.2. arguit m6 tut ti , he accuses me of theft.
296 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English :
1. Mihi ire licuit. 2 . Pfignandum est pt6 patria.
3. Réminiscére pristinas virtii tis Helvetiorum . 4. A nimus
méminit praetéritérum 5 Fratris me'
I'
mé miséret. 6 . Con
tr6versiarum et dissensmnum obliviscimin‘
i . 7 . Vir reus estcriminis . 8 . T6 fortfinae tuae paenitet. 9. R6mani eum
capitis damnavérunt. 10. Illud mea magni interest.
11. A bsolvant té judices injfiriiirum. 12 . Plitcuit Caesar‘
i ,’
ut ad A riovistum légiités mittéret. 13. Bum ad mortem- V
ducI oportuit. 14. I s ad mortem dficendus fuit.
Translate into Latin
1. I may go . 2 . I must fight. 3. The soldiers must fight.
4. We may go . 5 . We must depart. 6 . I am ashamed of
my fault. 7 . They accuse him of treachery . 8 . A true
friend never forgets a friend . 9. Caesar acquitted the soldier
of the crime .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.1. Learn the definition and translation of impersonal verbs ; how
classified ; and the synopsis under 313. 3.
2 . I tpleased Caesar, i.s . Caesar determined the clause beginning with
ut is the subject of plhcui t.What is an impersonal verb Translate pfignatur , pfignandum
est, m6 p lgs t. What case is used with Heat ? With 6portet ? How
is may, can, expressed in Latin ? How “
is must, might ? In what two
ways can must be expressed? (SeeExs . 13and What verbs govern
the genitive or accusative ? What the genitive alone
LESSON XCV.
CLASSIFICATION OF DEFENDERT CLAUSBS.
316. OBS. 1. The pupil has now learned the construction of
simple sentences . The rules and principles that have been applied tothese sentences are applicable to all independent clauses ; It is onlyin dependent, or subordinate, clauses that difiiculty is like] to occur.
The pupil should, therefore, obtain an accurate knowl go of the
CLA SSIF ICA TION OF DEPENDENT CLA USES. 297
various kinds of dependent clauses, for this will aid him ve muchin determining the tense and mode to be used . We have earned
that a complex sentence must contain one or more subordinate
clauses The subordination is expressed by some connectin word,which 18 always some form of the relative or some word t at has
acquired the use of the relative. This word may be a pronoun, aconjunction , or a conjunctive adverb.
The sea, WHEN it had spent its fury, became calm.
The boy, WHO reads, learns .
He came, THAT he might see the city.
He demanded THA T Caesar should not make war upon the
fEduans .
He says THAT the mountain is held by the enemy.
IF he conquers, he will rej oice.
H is friends will abandon him, BECA USE his father has done so.
So great is thepower of honesty, THA T we love iteven in an enemy.
I inquired WHA T he was doing.
Life is short, THOUGH it extend beyond a thousand years .c
ea
se
-a
cn
e!
P
a
a
r-t
H
OBS. 2 . In Ex. 1of the foregoing sentences, note that'
the clause
when it had spent its fury, expresses time, and is combined with theleading clause, the sea became calm, by means of the subordinate
temporal conjunction when the clause is, therefore, called a TEM
POR AL CLA USE ( see 206 . If we combine the two clauses bymeans of a coo
‘
rdinate conjunction the sentence becomes
compound ; as , the sea spent its fury, A ND then it became calm. In
Ex. 2, the subordinate clause 13 introduced by the relative who
( 241. and is called a RELA TIVE CLA USE. In Ex . 3, the subordinate clause is introduced b the subordinate final con
'
unctionthat ( 206 . the clause is , t erefore, called a FINAL LAUSE.
The clause in Ex. 5, introduced by that, is an INFINITIVE CLA USE341. Ex . 6, if he conquers is a COND IT IONA L CLA USE ; and in.x. 7 , because hisfather had done so is a CAUSAL CLAUSE. A clause
introduced by a consecutive conjunction is called a CONSEC UTIVECLA USE, as Ex. 8 ; one introduced by a concessive conjunction, asin Ex. 10, is called a CONCESSIVE CLA USE.
The relative clause performs the office of an adjective, becausewho reads modifies boy the reading boy ; it is called an A DJECTIVECLA USE. The temporal clause in Ex. 1performs the office of an
adverb, and is, therefore, called an ADVERB CLAUSE ; in Exs . 4, 5,and 9, the clauses that Caesar should notmake war upon the zEduans,that the mountain is held by the enemy, and what he was doing, are
Objects of the transitive verb demanded, of inquired, and of says,i.e. each performs the office of a noun or substantive, and is , there
fore, called a NOUN , or SUBSTANTIVE, CLAUSE. Hence, clausesmay be classified as
298 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
I . COORDINA TE, see 205 .
1. Final .
3’
532223323? Named from their mean
4. Comparative. Ing, as Shown by some
5 Concessive1ntroductory word ; the
6
.
Causalsame word may 1ntro
j duce clauses ofdifferentII . SUBORDINA TE 7. Temporals kinds, according to cir
8 . Interrogative.
umstan9. Infinitive.
033°
10. Relative.
1. Substantive. Named from the part of
2. A dj ective. speech whose Office they3. A dverb. perform .
OBS. 3. Noun Clauses include : (1) Infinitive clauses, 342 . 1;( 2 ) some final and (3) consecutive clauses, and 3; (4) clausesintroduced by quod , which give prominence to the fact stated, or
present it as a ground or reason, 342 . 4 ; ( 5) and dependent interrogative clauses, 342 . 5. Adjective Clauses are connected to the
clauses on which they depend by means of relative pronouns. A d
verbial Clauses are connected to the clauses on which they depend
by means of conditional, comparative, concessive, final, consecutive,causal, or temporal conj unctions. The pupil should note that sometimes a clause connected by a final or consecutive conjunctionbecomes Virtually the Object of the verb on which it depends, and
is then classed as a Noun Clause. ( See 342 . 2 and
EXERC ISES.
C lassify the following sentences
1. The bridge , which spans the river , was built by a ski]
ful engineer . 2 . When the war closed , I’Vashington retired
to MountVernon . 3. I f you would be happy , you must be
active . 4. When the battle was concluded , the commander
began to count his loss . 5 . He takes exercise , that he mayrecover his health . 6 . The ground is dry , although it has
rained . 7 . The sun causes ( that all things should bloom,
i .s . ) all things to bloom.
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
What is a clause ? Mention the various classes of subordinate
clauses . What is an adjective clause ? Substantive clause ? Expand
the complex sentences in the foregoing lesson into compound sentences.
How many kinds of adverbial clauses? Write an adjective clause.
300 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
clauses. In dependent clauses, the tense of the subjunctive isalways dated at the same time as the tense of the leading verb .
In order to determine what tense of the subjunctive Should follow( in the dependent clause) the leading verb
, special rules are
necessary, called the rules for the SEQUENCE OF TENSES . Forthis purpose the tenses of the indicative mode are divided intotwo classes, according as they represent actions as p resent or future,or as past. The former are called PR IMA RY, and the latterSECONDA RY, or HI STORICA L, TENSES . The tenses of each classcan be seen from the following table
1. PR IMA RY.
FUTURES. PERFECT .
ami bit, he will love. ami vit, he has loved.
imi vbrit, hewill have loved.
2 . SECONDA RY.
IMPERFECT . A ORIST. PLUPERFEC T .
imi bat, he was loving. imi vit, he loved . imi vérat, he had loved .
318 . Sequence of Tenses .
EXA MP LES.
P r ima r y . P r esen t and F utu re Tim e in D epend en t C lauses .
1. PRESENT
scio quid agi s , I know what you are doing.
scio quid égéris, I know wha t you have done.
scio quid actfirus Sis, I know what you are going to do.
2 . PERFECT
cbgnbvi quid i gi s , I have learned what you are doing.
cOgnOVI quid égér is , I have lea rned what you have done
cbgnbvi quid acti'
irus sis, I have learned what you are going to do.
3. FUTURE
audiam quid i gi s , I shall hear wha t you are doing.
audiam quid égéris , I shall hear what you have done.
audiam quid actiirus sis, I sha ll hear what you are going to do.
4. FUTURE PERFECT
cOgnOvéro quid i gi s , I shall have learned what you are doing.
cOgnOvéro quid égéris , I shall have learned what you have done.
cbgnbvéro quid actfirus sis, I shall have learned what you will do.
TENSES IN DEPENDENT CLAUSEs 301
Second ar y , o r H isto r ica l . P as t T im e in Depend en t C lauses.
5 . IMPERFEC T
Sciébam quid i gérés , I knew what you were doing.
sciébam quid égissés. I knew what you had done.
sciébam quid actfirus casés, I knew what you were going to do.
6 . A ORIST
CbgnOvi quid i gérés , I learned what you were doing.
cOgnOvi quid égissés, I learned what you had done.
cbgnbvi'
quid actiirus essés, I learned what you were going to do.
7 . PLUPERFECT
cbgnbvéram quid i gérés, I had learned what you were doing.
cOgnOvéram quid égisses, I had learned what you had done.
cbgnbvéram quid actiirus essés, I had learned what you were goingto do.
OBS . In the foregoing examples, note (1) that each verb in the
leading, or principa clauses, of Exs . 1, 2 , 3, 4, is in a primatense— present, perfect, future, future perfect ; (2) that each ver
in the dependent, or subordinate, clauses of the same examples, islikewise In a primary tense, but in the present subjunctive whenthe action is continued or incomfl ete ( i .e. relatively present or
future) with reference to the action denoted by the leading verb,and in the p erfect subj
unctive when the action is com leted ( i .e.
. relativel past) with re erence to the action denoted by e leadin
verb. ote, further, that each verb in the leading, or principal,clauses, of Exs . 5, 6, 7, is in a secondary, or an historical, tense,imperfect, aorist, pluperfect, and also that each verb in the de
endent, or subordinate, clauses is likewise in a secondary,or an
istorical, tense : in the imperfect subjunctive when the action is
continued or incomplete with reference to the action denoted by the
leading verb, and in the p luperfect sub'
unctive when the action is
completed with reference to the action denoted by the leading verb.
The pupil should note that, after a future or future perfect tense,the Sim ls future is represented in the dependent, or subordinate
clause, y the present subjunctive, and the future perfect by theperfect subjunctive ; and also that, in such cases, the de ndentsubjunctive may be present or past, w ith reference either to t e timeof speakin or to the time of the main action : as, in audiam quid
Agas , the oin
gmay be going on either at the time of speaking or
at the time 0 hearing, i .e. I shall hear THEN what you are doingNow , or what you a re doing THEN ( i .s . when I hear ) . Finally, the
pupil should note that, whenever the future in the dependentclause is subsequent to the future of the leading verb, the present
or imperfect of the active periphrastic subjunctive is used. Hence,the pupil w ill observe that the subjunctives in the dependent clausesadapt their verbs to the tenses of the verbs in the leading clauses ;
302 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
i .e. a primary tense in the leading clause is followed by a primarytense in the subordinate clause, and that a secondary, or an his
torical, tense in the leading clause is followed by a secondary, or
an historical, tense in the subordinate clause. The rule is calledthe rule for the SEQUENCE OF TENSES, and is, in general, the samein Latin as in En lish . For those dependent sentences that requirethe subjunctive, t e rule may be stated as follows
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
319. RULE XLVII. A p r imar y ten se in th e lead
in g clause i s fo l low ed by a p r im ar y ten se in th e
d ep en d en t clause an d a secon d ar y ten se is fo llow ed
by a secon dary .
OBS. The rules for the Sequence of Tenses are not applicable toindicative clauses ( i .e . to clauses that have their verbs in the in
dicative) , nor to conditional sentences ( regardless of mode) . For
these, special rules are necessary ( see
320. The Sequence of Tenses mav be represented as
follows
P rimary Tenses The P resentSubj unctive, forPresent, incomplete acti on .
gifif:(Defin ite) are followed by The P erfect Subj unctive, for
Future
,
Perfectcompleted action .
Secondary Tenses The Imperfect Subj unctive,Imperfect, for incomplete action .
A orist (Perfect) ,are followed by The P luperfect Subj unctive,
Pluperfect, for completed action .
OBS. In the following examples, note that the tense of the subjunctive is always dated at the same time as the tense of the leadingverb ; i .e. the tense of the Latin subjunctive is the same as the
tense of the indicative or potential in the English sentence . The
commonest tenses of the subjunctive in dependent clauses are thepresent and imperfect, the latter being used in such dependent
clauses for the English aorist as well as for the real imperfect.
EXA M PLES.
1. vénio ut v ideam , I come to ( in order that I may) see.
2 . v éni ut v ld érem, I came to ( in order tha t I might) see.
3. Ita mendaz St at, ut ném6 s I crédéret, he was such a liar,
that no one believed him.
304 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
2 . l6qu6bantur, étiam cum v ellet C aesar , sese n6u es s e
pugnatur6 s , they were saying that they would notfight, evenwhen Caesar should wish. it.
3. inten'Ogo té, qui d acturus s is , I am asking you what you will
do, or are going to do.
OBS. 1. Instead of the periphrastic form,futurum si t (or es set )
ut may be used ; and these words must be used when the verb hasno participial stem, and therefore no periphras tic form (and alsofor the future perfect active, which is wanting in the periphrastic
conjugation) ; as, n6u dub ito quln scripturus s is n6u dub i to
quln futurum s it, ut scrIbas , I do not doubt that you will wr ite.
OBS. 2 . The future perfect represents both the perfect definite
and the aorist, transferred to the future ; as, fécéro , I shall have
done it, or I shall do it. The future perfect is used w ith a much
greater exactness in Latin than in English ; as, ut sémentem
c éris , Ita métés , as you shall have sown, so will you reap . The
English idiom often uses the present, or the simple future, for thefuture perfect : as you sow , or as you shall sow, Instead of as you
shall have sown.
OBS. 3. In applying the rules for the sequence of tenses, consider
(1) whether the leading verb is primary or secondary ; ( 2) remember that the tense of the Latin subjunctive is the same as the tense
of the indicative or potential in the English sentence (may, can,will, and shall being present ; might, could, would, and should, past) .
EXERC ISES.
A pply the rules for sequence of tenses to the following
examples
1. scrips it ut n6 s m6n6ret, he wrote to warn us, or that he might
warn us.
2 . scripsit ut n6 s m6neat, he has written to warn us, or that he
may warn us .
3. causa quae es set quaes iit. he asked what the cause was .
4. v 6ni t tit v ldeat, he has come to see, in order to see, or that he
may see.
5. vani t ut vId éret, he came to see, or that he might see.
6. du impérat ut mfl l tés s ti ti 6nes suas servant , the leader
commands the soldiers to keep their stations, or that the soldiers
should keep their stations .
7. curat ut puérI corpus exerceat, he takes care that he mayexercise the boy
’
s body ( i .s . to exercise the boy’
s body) .
SUBJUNCTIVE I N DEPENDENT CLA USES. 305
8 . H ann ib al magnum exerci tum in I taliam dfix i t ut cum
R dm i nis pfignfiret , Hannibal led a large army into I taly to
( that he might) fight with the Romans .
9. n 6u dub i to quin C aesar hos tes supéravérit , I do not doubt
that Caesar has overcome the enemy.
10. n 6u diib i tAbam quin C aesar hostés supérav is set , I did
not doubt that C assar had overcome the enemy .
11. cons idér i bimus quid fi c iat, we sha ll consider what he is
doing.
12 . cons idfir i b imus quid féoérit, we sha ll consider what he has
done.
13. considdrdb imus quid factfi rus s it, we sha ll consider what he
is going to do ( or will do) .
Supplementary Exercises
1. NOn dfib‘
itabam qu'
in Caesar hostés supérz‘
ivisset .
2 . NemO dfibitabat quin milites fortissime pugnavissent.
3. NémO diibitat quin puérum semper béne édficavérim .
4. Pater ciirat ut ego béne édficer , strénué exercear , prObé
ec lar , diligenter érfidiar . 5 . Magister curabat ut discipli
lus béne édficarétur , strenué exercérétur , prObé ec Iérétur ,
diligenter érfidirétur . 6 . NOR est dubium quin discipulus a
me béne m6nitus sit. 7 . NOR est diibium quin urbs amili
tibne expl‘
ignata sit. 8 . InterrOgo té quid actiirus sis .
9. InterrOgaVéro té quid actiirus sis . 10. Interrégiibam té
quid actiirus essés . 11. NOn dubitavi'
qu‘
in scriptiirus essés ,
or n6n diibitavi quin futurum esset ut scribérés .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
How many tenses has the indicative mode ? How many has the
subjunctive ? What are primary tenses ? Secondary tenses ? How
do the forms of the perfect subjunctive differ from those of the future
perfect indicative ? Has the subjunctive future tenses ? How is this
lack of future tenses supplied in dependent clauses What is the rule
for the tense in a dependent clause containing a subjunctive ? Is the
rule for sequence of tenses applicable to indicative clauses?
306 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XCVII .
SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES.
I. FINAL C LAUSES.
OBS. Final Clauses are those that tell the purpose of an action .
They are introduced by the Final Conjunctions ut , that, in order that ;né ( or ut us) , that . not, in order that . not, lest ; qu6 ut e6 ,that thereby) , whereby, in order that, when there is a comparative in
the final clause ; the Relative Pronoun qui ut is , that he) , inorder that he ; and the Relative Adverbs, ub i , unde, etc. ut ib i , etc.
SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE.
RULEXLVIII .—F in al C lau ses tak e th eir verbs
in th e p r esen t or imp er fect subjun ctive , accord in g as
th e leading verb is in a p r imar y or secon dar y ten se .
OBS. 1. The leading verb ma be in any tense, but the presentor imperfect subjunctive is usually used in the final clause . The
relative pronoun is used in final clauses chiefi after verbs of
sending, coming, giving, choosing, etc ., when t e antecedent is
indefinite.
EXA MP LES.
vanérunt ut pacem pétérent, they came to seekpeace.
pugnamus né serv i simus , wefight that we may not be slaves .
C aesar castell a communit , qu6 ffioil ius H elveti6s pr6
h ib ére pos sit, Caesar erects forts that he may the more easilykeep of the Helvetians .
4. mul tes mi ss ! sunt qui ut ii ) uth am expugnar ent
soldiers were sent ( that they might assault) , or to assault the
city .
l6oum ub i c6ns ideret d élégit, he selected a p lace where he
might encamp ( that he might there,
OBS. 2 . The ablative qu6 ut 35 ) is used in clauses denotingpurpose, especially with comparatives .
OBS . 3. These final clauses may be translated by to sometimesby that may, that might, etc .
SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 309
they might meet death more bravely . 7 . Caesar has
encouraged his soldiers in order that they may meet death
more bravely . 8 . Caesar demanded that the enemy should
not make war upon the JEduans . 9. I fear that my friend
will not come . 10. I fear lest my friend is not coming.
11. I wish you to answer me.
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
1. The English infinitive expressing a purpose (equivalent to that,
in order that) is to be translated by a t with the subjunctive.
2 . See 321. Obs . 2 .
What is a final clause ? When do final clauses become objectclauses after verbs of doubting ? Give the rule for the sequence of
tenses in final and complementary final clauses . What is an objectclause ?
2 . C ONSEC UTIVE C LA USES.
OBS. Consecutive Clauses are those that tell the consequence, or
result, of an action . They are introduced by the consecutive con
junctions ut , so that ; ut n6n , so that not ; (after negatives)quin qui and n é, how and not) , whereby not, but that ; qudmlnus
ut a6 minus ) , that thereby the less ; and the relative pronoun
qui ut is ) , that, so that.
SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT.
322 . RULE XLIX . C on secutive C lauses tak e th eir
verbs in th e subjun ctive mod e , th e ten se being d e
term in ed by th e regu lar ru le fo r Sequen ce Of Ten ses .
OBs . In Consecutive C lauses there is an EXCEPTION IN THE
SEQUENCE OF TENSES, the same tense being used that would benecessary if the clause were inde ndent ; i.e., the present is usedafter past tenses to denote the continuance of an action or state intothe present, the perfect to imply final result, and the imperfect todenote that the action is contemporaneous with that of the pr mcipalverb : as, Verrés Si c i liam p er trienn ium Ita v exav it, ut ea
rdstl tui in an ti quum s tatum nfi lld m6d 6 pos ait , Verres so
harried Sicilyfor three years as tomake it utter ly impossiblefor it to berestored to its original condition .
EXA MP LES.
1. tan tus timor exerci tum occupavi t , ut omn ium mentés
perturbaret , so great fear seized the army that it disturbed
the minds of all.
310 F IRST STEPS IN LA T IN .
2 . tempes tas ( tanta) cobrta est, quae nave: relcéret, so greata storm arose, that it drove the vessels back.
3. ades t némd quIn v ideat, there is no onepresent that ( or who)does not see.
4. n6n dub l to qui‘
n s i pientiss lmus sin, I do not doubt that you
are very wise.
323. Consecutive C lauses are used after
1. Demonstratives like tans , tantus , such ; e tc, Ita, so ;tam , i dea , to such a degree, etc . and expressions implyingcharacteristic and degree.
2 . Verbs and expressions of hinder ing and resisting, delaying and omitting, and the like also of doubt and uncertainty .
These verbs are followed by qui‘
n with the subjunctive , butonly after a negative , or a question implying a negative .
1) For né and qudminus , with the subjunctive after verbs of
hindering, etc., see 321. 3.
EXAMP LES.
1. German i rétlnéri n6n pbtérant quIn in bontés téla cani
cérent , the Germans could not be restrained from hurlingdarts against the enemy.
2 . facet s n 6n pos sum quIn cbtttdis littéras ad té mittam , I
cannot do without ( I cannot help ) sending you a letter every day.
OBS. 1. The sequence of tenses after verbs of hindering, and thelike, is the same as in final clauses ; after verbs of doubt and un
certainty, the same as in interrogative clauses
OBS . 2 . A fter Negative Indefinite expressions (as némd, nfi llus ,n ih il , quia) , quin is equivalent to qui n6n , quae n6n , etc. quln
is often used in the sense of a t n6n , and after negative expressions
of doubt and uncertainty, in the sense of ut. A fter negative verbs of
hinder ing and refusing, quIn may be used in the sense of quomlnus
( see below )EXAMP LES.
l . i des t némé quln v i deat , there is no onepresent who does not
see.
2 . némé est tam fortis quln perturb étur, no one is so brave as
not to be disturbed.
3. n6n dubltart deb et quin fuérin t poétae, it ought not to be
doubted that there werepoets.
4. néque récusare quIn armls con tendant, and that they do
not refuse to contend in arms.
312 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
R ela tive C lauses of R esul t.
324. Relative C lauses of Result are used to define or
to characteriz e an indefinite or general antecedent.
EXA MP LES.
1. sdcfi tae sunt temp es tates quae nos tras in cas trie con
tlnérent, storms ( of such sever ity) followed, which ( that they)kep t our men in camp .
némd es t qui n6n cfipiat, there is no one but (who does not)desires .
3. aun t qui pfi tent, there are some who think.
OBS. Relative clauses of result are used to characterize the ante
cedent, especially when it is otherwise undefined, as in the foregoingexamples, and are, therefore, called relative clauses of characteristic .
The relative clause, quae con tinérent (Ex. describes the
severity of the storms by saying that they kept the men in the
camp, i .s . by mentioning a character istic of It ; in Ex. 2 the relative
clause follows a general negative némé , and in Ex. 3 it follows anindefinite antecedent.
1. Relative C lauses of Result occur also after
a . finus and sdlus .
b. d ignus , ind ignas , Iddneus , and aptus .
c . Comparatives with quam , to express disp roportion .
EXA M PLES.
1. 361i centum ét an t qui creari possent, there were only one
hundred who could be app ointed.
2 . fabfi lae dignae aunt, quae légantm'
, the fables are worthy tobe read .
3. majus gaudium fuit , quam quod un iv ersum hbmines
capéren t, the j oy was greater than (what) men could take in
all at once.
OBS. The Indicative may be used after affirmative sentences inthe statement of definite facts w ith a definite antecedent ; but if a
general characteristic is denoted, the subjunctive must be used .
EXAM PLES.
1. multl sunt qui érIp iun t , many are they who snatch away.
2 . multi sunt qui érip iant , there are many to snatch away.
3. sunt qu'
i'
the indefinite pronoun quld am ) quod sen tiunt
n6n aud ent d icére, some dare not say what they think.
SUBJUNCTIVE I N DEPENDENT CLA USES. 313
The following table shows the indefinite pronoun or adverb
to be used in Negative Final or Consecutive C lauses . In
English we may say either that no one, or lest any one, etc .
but in Latin always lest any one, etc.
For Consecutive C lauses in Indirect Discourse, see 351.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Tantus sfibitc‘
) timor omnem exercitum occiipavit, ut
n6n mediocriter omnium ment6s animosque perturbaret.
2 . Quid obstat qubminus mocoia statim Oppfignémus .
3. NOn dfibito quin verum dixéris . 4. NémO érat qui
ciipéret me 6 civitate expellére. 5 . Nemo fuit omnium
militum qui vulnérérétur . 6 . Vir prObus dignus est qui ab
omnibus di igi tur . 7 . Rfifum Caesar idOneum judicavérat
quem mittéret. 8 . Tanta vis prbbitatis est ut eam vel in
hoste diligamus . 9. Milites rétinére n6n possum quin lon
gins prOcurrant. 10. Quid té impédi’
vit quOminus vénirés .
Translate into Latin
1. So great a storm arose that it drove the vessels back .
2 . I hindered him from going home . 3. There was no one
who did not rejoice. 4. There were some who thought
Owsar was in the city . 5 . I do not doubt that you speak
the truth . 6 . What prevents us from seeing the games?
7 . The fear of the soldiers was so great that he did not lead
them from the camp. 8 . He deserves to be heard . 9. He
was a suitable person to send to be sent) .
314 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
Mention a clause of result in English . How does it differ from one
of purpose? After what conjunctions are consecutive clauses used
When is qudmlnus used ? What is a relative clause of character
istic Give an example of one . What is the antecedent After what
verbs and expressions are consecutive clauses used ? When do con
secutive clauses become substantive clauses ?
3. CONDIT IONAL SENTENCES.
EXAM PLE .
Condition (Protasis ) . Conclusion (A podosis) .
If he has money, he gives it.
C BS. The foregoing sentence contains a condition, if he hasmoney, and is, therefore, called a COND ITIONA L SENTENCE . The
sentence is Complex, because it consists of two clauses, a
principal, or leading clause, he gives it, called the conclusion, and
a subordinate, or dependent clause, if he has money, containingthe condition . The clause containing the condition is called thePROTA SIS, and that containing the conclusion , the A PODOSIS .
The apodosis is regularly introduced by the conditional conjunction if ,— in Latin SI, or a compound of st : as, n i s i , unless (usedinstead of si n6n after negatives) ; etiams I. ets i , although ; sin ,
but if ( see Conditional and Concessive Conjunctions, An
indefinite relative may introduce a conditional clause ( seeHence the following definition
PROTA SIS AND A PODOSIS.
325 . In Conditional Sentences , the clause containing the
condition is called the protas is , and that containing the con
elusion the apodbsis .
C la ss ifi ca tion of C on d i tiona l Senten ces .
SIMPLE PRESENT AND PA ST COND ITIONS.
Present or Past 1. If he has money, he gives it.Indicative 2 . If he had money, he gave it.
FUTURE CONB ITIONS.
Fut. Ind . or Pres. 1. If he has ( or shall have) money, he will give it.or Perf. Subj 2 . If hehad ( or should have) money, hewould give it.
316 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
to p resent time, and the pluperfect to p ast time. Hence the follow
ing classification of conditional sentences
SIMPLE PRESEN T A N D PA ST CONDITIONS.
1. Simple Present and Past Conditions, nothing implied as to
their fulfilment. A ssume as a fact the supposition , and the conclu
sion must follow : A ny present or pas t tense of the indi cative
in both clauses .
EXA M PLES.
a. PRESENT : s i pécfiniam b i h et, d at , ifhe has money, he gives it.
b. PA ST : s i pécfiniam hab ébat, d hb at, ifhehadmoney, hegave it.
FUTURE C ONDITIONS.
2 . Future Conditions may be stated in two ways : (1) More
distinct and vivid, the future indicative being us ed in both
claus es ; ( 2) less distinct and vivid ( i .s . less probable) , the sub
junctive being us ed in both c lauses . The presen t subjun ctive
is us ed for continued action , th e perfect subjunctive for
comp leted action .
EXA M PLES.
a. s i pécfiniam h i béb it , d i b it, if he has ( i .e. shall have) money,he will give it.
b. s f pécfiniam h i beat , act, if he should have money, he would
give it.
c . 817pécfiniam habuérit, d éd érit, if he should have had money,he would have given it.
UNREA L PRESENT A ND PA ST COND ITIONS.
3. Unreal Present and Past Conditions, unfulfilled in present
or past time : Imperfect or p luperfect subjunctive in b oth
claus es .
EXAM PLES.
a. PRESENT : s! pécfin iam habéret , d i ret , if he had money (hehas not) , he would give it ( now, present time) .
b. PA ST : sf pécfiniam h i buis s et, dédisset, if he had hadmoney(he had not) , he would have given it ( then, at some past time) .
OBS. The pupil should note that the rules for Sequence of
Tenses are not applicable to Conditional Sentences ( see 319.
For conditional sentences in Indirect Discourse, see 355 .
SUBJUNCTIvE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 317
MODE IN COND ITIONA L SENTENCES.
326 . RULE L. C on d ition a l Sen ten ces w ith s i , n is i ,
n'
i , s in , tak e
SD IPLE PRESENT AND PA ST COND ITIONS.
1. A n y p r esen t or pas t ten se Of th e ind icative in
both clauses w hen n oth in g is im p l ied as to th e fu lfi l
m en t of th e con di tion .
s f i deal; béne eat. if he is here, it is well.s f hdérat , béne Brat, if he was here, it was well.sI v i let. laetor , if he is well, I rej oice.
sf vfilébat. laetAbar , if he was well, I was rej oicing.
OBS . A s stated in the rule, the mode of the conclusion ( apodosis) is, as a rule, in the indicative ; but it may be also in theimperative or subjunctive, according as a command, wish, or modestassertion ( 2 7 8 . 2) is to be expressed.
fi-P
CO
IO
H
Exam p le .
s! d ermis . expergis cére, if you are sleep ing, awake .
FUTURE COND ITIONS.
2 . Th e futur e in d icative in both clauses, to r ep re
sen t th e sup posed futur e case in a d is tin ct and vivid
man n er ; th e p resen t or per fect subj un ctive in bo th
clauses, to r epr esen t th e supposed futur e case in a
less d is tin ct and vivid m an n er .
EXA MP LES.
s f id créd és , err l b is , if you shall believe that you will go wrong.
at ads it , béne s it, if he should (hereafl er) be here, itwould bewell.3. SI adfuérit. béne s it. if you should have been here, it would be
well.
4. 31 id créd id éris ( rare) , erravéris , if you believe should
have believed) that, you would go have gone) wrong.
O
H
OBS . 1. If the action of the condition is regarded as completedbefore that of the conclus ion begins, the future perfect indicativeis used instead of the future, or the perfect subjunctive instead ofthe present subjunctive.
Exam p l es .
1. st mul tae hort i tus Grit, fort i ter pfignabunt.if he shall haveencouraged the soldiers, they willfight bravely .
318 F IRST STEP S IN LA TIN .
2 . st mfl ltés horti tus s it, fortl ter pfignent, if he should haveencouraged the soldiers, they wouldfight bravely.
UNREAL PRESENT AND PA ST CONDITIONS.
3. Th e imp er fect o r p luperfect subjun ct ive in both
clauses, to rep r esen t th e sup posed ca se as un r ea l , or
con tr a r y to fact. Th e imperfect den otes p r esen t time,
and th e p luperfect p a st.
EXA MP LES.
I . s i hd es set, béne es s et, if he were ( now) here (he is not) , itwould be well .
2 . st adfuis s et. béne fuis set, if he had ( then ) been here (he wasnot) , it would have been well.
3. sf v i l éret. laeti rer, if he were (now) well, I would rej oice.
4. st vhluis set , laetfltus essem , if he had ( then) been well, I
would have rej oiced .
C ond ition a l C lauses after D am , Motto , and
D umm iido .
327 . Conditional C lauses introduced by dum, mbdo.
and dummbdo ( negative dum né , mbd o né, dummbdo ne) ,
if on ly, provided that, take the present or imperfect
subjunctive.
EXA BI P LES.
1. dummbdo inter me atque te m ilrus inters it, provided that
the city wall is between us .
2 . dum ras m i neant, verbs fingant, if only the facts rema in,
they may make up words .
OBS. l . The Apodosis except in a few involved forms of condi
tional sentences regularly corresponds in mode w ith the Apodosis
( see foregoing examples) . But see 326 . Obs.
OBS. 2 . Frequently the present subjunctive of a future condi
tion becomes imperfect by sequence of tenses. For conditional
sentences in Indirect Discourse, see 355 .
1. Verbs in the conclusion of unreal conditions are some
times in the imperfect or pluperfect indicative ( the indicative is regularly used after verbs denoting duty , necessity ,
prop riety , ability, and the like) also , the historical perfect
320 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
Translate into Latin
1. If I do this , it is well. 2 . I f I should do this , it
would be well . 3. If I had done this , it would have been
well . 4. If he says this , he is mistaken . 5 . I f he speaks
the truth, he will be praised . 6 . If he had had money , he
would have given it. 7 . I f he had spoken the truth , he
would have been praised . 8 . If you were here, you would
think differently . 9. I f this were so , I should be glad .
NOTES A ND QUEST IONS.
What is a conditional sentence ? Of how many parts does it con
sist ? What name is given to each part? How may conditional
sentences be classified ? Is a conditional sentence complex or com
pound? What tenses does the subjunctive lack ? How is this lack
sometimes supplied? Is the conclusion a principal or a dependent
clause ? What time does each tense denote ?
4. C OMPARAT IVE C LAUSES.
OBS. Comparative C lauses are those that illustrate or explainthe leading statement, by furnishing a standard of measure. The
leading clause often has some correlative word like i ta. s ic , so, etc.
Comparative clauses are introduced by comparative conjunctions ;38 ,
quam , than , as.
ut, uti.
s icut or siciiti , as, so as.
quemadmbdum,
vélut , j ust as.
MODE IN COMPARATIVE CLAUSES.
329. RULE LI . C ompar ative C lauses in troduced
by a t, an, s icut, quémadmddum , etc ., fo llow ed by the
d em on strative p ar ticles i ta , etc ( so ) , etc ., r egular ly
tak e th e ind icative or th e subjun ct ive as in indepen
den t sen ten ces.
A ‘t sémentem fécéris , Ita métés , as you sha ll have sown, so shall
you reap .
SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 321
330. RULE LII . C omparat ive C lauses in troduced
by do si , u t s i , gnamei , quas i , tanquam , tanquam s i ,
velut , velut s i , are, in fact, cond itional clauses , Of
wh ich th e conclusion is om itted or imp lied , an d
th erefor e tak e th e subjunctive l ik e oth er cond ition al
sen tences.
EXAMPLES.
1. m6 adspicitis , qul s i mons trum sim, you gaze atme as (youwould gaze) if I were a monster.
2 . 8 6qu§ni absentia A riovis ti crfid éli tdtem v61ut s i obram
Edess et, horrébant, the Sequani kep t shuddering at the
cruelty of the absent A riovistus as ( they would have shuddered)if he were (had been) present.
OBS. Ordinary com arative clauses which merely illustrate a
precedin statement ta 9 the indicative, unless the sub'
unctive is
used as In independent sentences . But comparative c auses that
express a condition, with the apodosis omitted, take the subjunctive, the tense being determined by the rule for sequence of tenses
rather than the ordinary use of conditional sentences . The English translation would lead us to expect only the imperfect and
luperfect, as it makes the comparison an unreal one (32 6 .
But the tense of the subjunctive is generally controlled by the tensein the lead ing clause although occas ionally the sequence is
not observed, but the rule for conditional sentences prevails . In
the first example the present sub'
unctive is used in the com arative
clause, though the unreality of t e comparison is implied, ecause
the leading verb is in the present tense ; hence,
I . The tenses follow the rules for the sequence of tenses ,rather than the ordinary use of conditional sentences . In
English , the translation implies the unreality of the com
parison .
OBS. For Comparative C lauses in Indirect Discourse, see 351.
5 . CONCESSIVE C LAUSES.
OBS. Concessive Clauses are those which concede or admit something opposed to the main statement, and are generally introduced
in English by though or although. The concessive conjunctionstake the subjunctive or indicative according to the followmg
322 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
a . quamquam , although, generally takes the indicative.
b. quamvis ( quam and vis , as mus h as you p lease) ,quamtumv is , ut , DB, and cum , although, and the relative
qui cum , is , 630 , all take the subjunctive whenused concessively .
c. li cet , although, is properly a verb, and takes a sub
stantive clause with the subjunctive.
d . etsi , tamer-I, suam-i , or s i , take the indicative or
subjunctive, like conditional clauses w ith s i .
MODE IN CONCESSIVE CLAUSES.
331. RULE LIII . C on cess ive C lauses are in tro
d uced by con cessive con jun ct ion s ,— a lth ough , gr an t
in g tha t, an d tak e th e in d icative to r ep resen t th e
con cession as a fa ct th e subjun ctive to r ep r esen t it
as m er ely p oss ible , o r a s con tr a r y to the fa ct.
1. quamquam intellégun t. tamen nunquam d icunt, although
they understand, yet they never speak.
2 . quamv is fortés s int , although they are brave.
ut d és int v irés , although the strengthfails .
4. h e s it summum malum dblor , although pain may not be the
greatest evil .
CO
1. The relative qui is often concessive, equivalent to
although with a personal or demonstrative pronoun , and
takes the subjunctive .
EXAMP LE .
culpatur , qui innbcéns s it , he is blamed, although he is innocent.
OBS. For Concessive C lauses in Indirect Discourse, see 351.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Quamvis mblestus dblor sit, malum n6n est. 2 . Ut
desint virés , tsmen est laudanda vbluntas . 3. Li'
cetl me
hortétur , nOn piignabo . 4. Patres métus cepit, vélut Si jam
ad portas hostis esset.
3 5 . Multi omnia recta negligunt,
324 F IRST STEPS I N LA TIN .
OBS. The statement of the reason which is not the real one is
introduced by n6n qu6 , n6n quod , n6n quia, with the verb most
commonly in the subjunctive.
Exam p le .
n6n quod ddleant, not because they grieve.
1. Causal Clauses ' introduced by cum or the relative qui
regularly take the subjunctive .
EXA M I LES.
1. cum v ita métfis p léna s it, since life is full of fear .
2 . quae cum i ta s int , and since these things are so .
3. O fortanate ad iiles céns , qui tuae virtfi tis H dmérum prae
cdnem invénéris , 0 for tunate youth, since you ( lit. who)have obtained Homer as the herald of your valor .
2 . Causal Clauses introduced by quod , quia, quoniam ,
take the subjunctive ( in Indirect D iscourse , 348 ) to state
the reason as the assertion or op in ion of some one else.
EXAMP LE .
Sdcri tés accusatus es t quod corru péret jiiv sntutem ,
Socrates was arra igned because (as was alleged) he corrupted
the youth.
coon WITH VERBS or EMOTION .
3. Quod is used after verbs of j oy and sorrow , p raise and
blame, thanks and comp laint, satisfaction and anger , to give
the ground of the emotion , and is followed by the subjunc
tive or indicative , according to 332 or 332 . 2 but see 342 . 4.
EXAMP LES.
1. jiivat m6 quod v isen t s tudia, I am delighted because studies
arefl ourishing ( indicative) .‘7gaud et miles quod vi cérit hostem , the soldier rej oices be
cause he has conquered the enemy ( subjunctive) .
OBS. 1. For Causal C lauses as the subj ect, obj ect, or appositive,see 342 . 4 ; for the Infinitive afterVerbs of Emotion , see 342 .
OBS. 2. For Causal C lauses in Indirect Discourse , see 351.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Laudabat me, quod filium meum culparem . 2 . QuOniam jam nox est , in vestra tecta discédite . 3. Caesar ab
SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLA USES. 325
A edui'
s friimentum fiiigitabat, quod milites magna inépiii
urgérentur . 4. Omnes cives gaudent, quod dficés militum
cupiditate'
s coercuérunt. 5 . Succenseo tibi, quia lficrum
iim‘
icitiae antépésuisti . 6 . A edui legatbs misérunt questum
quod Harfidés agree ebrum popularentur . 7 . QuOniam rés
its 8 6 hi bet, in urbem rededmus .l
Translate into Latin
1. You have praised me because I have praised you.
2 . The citiz ens rejoiced because Caesar restrained the sol
diers . 3. I am angry with you, because you have preferred
gain to friendship. 4. He complained because he was not
assisted by them.
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.1. See 27 8 .
What is a causal clause ? Mention the causal conjunctions . Whendo clauses introduced by these conjunctions take the indicative ?
When the subjunctive ? How is cum translated when it denotes
cause What is the construction after verbs of emotion ?
7 . TEMPORAL C LAUSES.
OBS. Temporal C lauses are such as denote the time of an action
by mentioning something else which was ( I)antecedent to, ( 2 ) con
temporaneous with, or (3) subsequent to it. he temporal conjunctions are
1. ANTECEDENT : postquam (pos teaquam ) , afl er that, afl er ;
ut , as ; lib i, when ( lit. where) ; s imul i o , or s imul ac , s lmul .
as soon as ; ut primum , cum primum , thefirst moment that;cum (quum ) , historical, when, after .
2 . CONTEMPOBANEOUS : dam, dbnec , while, as long as, until ;
quoad , quamdifi. as long as ; am ( quam) , when .
3. SUBSEQUENT : aut uam , priusquam, before.
C BS. The subjunctive is used in temporal clauses only in in
direct discourse, or to express cause, doubt, purpose, desire, etc., as
will be explained hereafter.
326 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
I . A n teced en t A ction .
333. Temporal C lauses , introduced by postquam , postea
quam, ub i, lit. tit primum , ub i p rimum , slmul 20. etc . take
the indicative ( commonly the aorist indicative or historical
present) .
1. pos tquam id hn lmadvertit. cdp ids suds C aesar in p roz i
mum collem subducit, after C aesar had observed this, he
withdrew hisforces to the nearest hill.
2 ubi se paratbs esse arb i trati sunt. Oppida incendun t,
when they thought they were ready, they burnt their towns .
no stri. simul in aridb cons ti terun t, in hostes impétum
fecerunt, our men, as soon as they gotfooting on dry (ground) ,made an attack on the enemy.
mi li tes , pos tquam v ictbriam hd epti sun t, nihi l réliqul
victis the soldiers, after they had gained a victory,
lefl nothing to the vanquished .
5. pos tquam v idi t, etc., cas tra pbsuit, he pitched his camp ,after he saw it, etc.
6. ubi oertlbrés facti sunt, when they were informed .
OBS. A fter the antecedent conjunctions, the aorist (Latis frequently rendered in English by the pluperfect ( see
334. RULE LV.—D um , d
'
o‘
nec, quoad , while, as longas, tak e th e ind icative (an y ten se) .
EXA M P LES.
1. hbc féci, dum licuit , I did this as long as I was allowed.
2 . intermis i , quoad n6n ll cuit, I stopped it as long as I was not
allowed .
335. RULE LVI .—D am , dbnec, quoad , until, tak e
th e indicative in th e statem en t of a fact , the sub
jun ctive w hen p urp ose is exp ressed i .e. if the aecom
p l ishmen t of th e pu rpose is the l im it of th e action ) .
1. M i ld in sbnatu fui t ed d ie, quoad ei natus d imis sus est.
M ilo was in the senate on that day, until it adj ourned .
328 FI RST STEPS IN LA TIN .
EXAMP LES.
l . n6n prius duces d imittun t (320. quam sit ooncessum,
they did not dismiss the leaders till it was granted.
priusquam quicquam cdnaratur , D ivi tiacum ad sé vooari
ihhet (320. before he took ( should take) action , he ordered
Divitiacus to be summoned to him.
nee prius sunt v is ! quam cas tris appropinqul rent, and
they were not seen until they were nearing the camp .
A nt i quam and prius quam often have, in historical narra
the same construction as cum Historical ( see
EXAM P LES.
priusquam visus est C aesar , quam fama perferrétur ,
C aesar appeared before any tidings were brought.ducentis ann is ante quam urb em capercut, in I ti liam
Gall! d ésoend érunt, the Gauls came down into I taly two
hundred years before they took the city.
2 . The subjunctive is used after antEquam and priusquam
(generally a present or future stands in the leading clause) when
the action is represented as possible (Potential Subjunctive, 2 7 8 .
l . or when the statement of a general truth is made.
EXAM P LES.
1. an té v idémus fulgiiratidnem quam sbnum audiamus , we
see the flash of lightning before hearing ( i .e. before we can
hear) the sound (potential) .
2. co llem , priusquam sentiatur , communi t, he fortifies the hill
before it was ( could be) perceived.
3. tempest“ minatur , m téqum surgat, the tempest threatens
before it rises (general truth) .
3. The subjunctive w ith an indefinite second person as the sub
ject (you one, any one) is especially common .
EXAMPLE .
priusquam incipil s , consultb bpus es t, before you ( i.e. any one)begin , there is need of deliberation . (See 308 . Obs.
038 . A ntdquam and priusquam are often written as separatewords ; the translation is often before with the present participle.
SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLA USES. 329
IV. C onstruction s of Cum.
CUM TEMPORAL.
338 . RULE LIX. Cum Temporal when) , in troducing a clause th at d efi nes th e mer e time of an
action , may be used wi th all the tenses of th e
ind icative.
EXAMP LES.
1. cum C aesar in Galliam vénit , altérius factidnis prin
olpés Grant A edul, when Caesar came into Gaul, the zEdui
were at the head of oneparty .
2 . cum verbs faciunt, majorés subs extollunt. when they
speak, they extol their ancestors .
CUM INVERSUM.
1. When the clauses are inverted, so that the temporal clause
expresses the main statement and becomes substantially the lead
ing clause, the indicative must be used.
EXAMP LES.
1. hbc faoére neetu app l rl bant, cum matru fiunmae rd
pente pr6curr6runt, they werepreparing to do this by night,
when the women suddenly ranforth.
2 vix agmen nbviss lmum prboeu l rat. cum Gall! human
translre n6n d iibltant, scarcely had the rear advanced, when
the Gauls without hesitation crossed the river .
OBS. The verb in the leading clause is usually the imperfect or
pluperfect indicative, often preceded by the adverbs vix, jam, etc.
Sub ltb and ri pente are often used in the temporal clause.
ITERATIVE USE OF CUM.
2 . When cum ( or ub i, slmul do, or the general relatives qui
oumque, qubtiéns ) means whenever, as often as, and designates
repeated or customary action , it is followed in some writers by the
subjunctive, in other writers by the indicative.
EXAMPLES.
1. cum quaepiam obhors impétum fécérat, hosti sw eb“ ,
whenever any cohort had made an attack, the enemy retreated.
330 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
2 . cum in jus duel dbb itdrem vIdis sent, und ique convola
bant , whenever they saw a debtor taken to court, they hurr ied
together (made it a rule to hurry together) from a ll quarters.
CUM HISTORICAL.
339» RULE LX. 0am , mean ing when, is used in
H istor ical N arration w ith th e imp er fect subjunctive
for con tempo ran eous action , w i th th e p lup er fect sub
junctive for an teceden t action .
EXAMPLES.
l . cum clv i tl s armis jus suum exséqui conarétur, Orgé
tbrix mortuus es t, when the state was attemp ting to assert its
authority by force of arms, Orgetor ia: died .
2 . C aesar , cum P ompéjum vIcis set. in I talian trajécit, when
Caesar had conquered P ompey, he crossed over to I taly.
3. Caesar! cum id nuntiatum esset, maturat (320.b.) ab urb e
prbfi cisol , when this ( had been) was announced to Cwsar ,
he hastened to set outfrom the city.
OBS. Cum, followed by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive,is enerally historical , i .e. it is used In historical narration, s
torIcal tense standing in the leading clause . The subjunctive Is
translated like the indicative. A notion of cause often intrudes,as in Ex. 3. Cum nunti l tum es set points out both the time and
giause of Caesar
’
8 setting out. Usually the temporal clause comesrst
CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CUM.
340. RULE LXI . Cum C ausal since) and cum
C on cessive although) may be used w ith an y tense
of th e subjunctive .
EXAMPLES.
quae cum ita s int , and since these things are so.
A canl , cum sé defendére n6n pos sent, légfitds ad
C aesarem mi ttunt (320. the zEduans, since they were not
able to defend themselves, sent envoys to Cwsar .
n ihi l m6 ad jiivat (320. b.) cum posset. he gave me no assist
ance, although he had it in his power .
332 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
noluit i bire puer .
‘ 5 Donec té vidérat, noluit i bire puer.
6 . N6n exspectandum"sibi 7 sti tuit dam in Santbnés Helvétii
'
pervénirent. 7 . Tum, cum rés magns'
is permulti amisérant,Romae fides cécidit. 8 . Caesar priusquam codem est pré
feotas , lfina visa est. 9. E6 postquam Caesar pervénit
obsidés , arma , servbs8p6poscit.
°
Translate into Latin
1. When I was at A thens , I heard Z eno . 2 . When ambas
sadors came to Caesar , he demanded corn . 3. When they
had advanced three days , the enemy appeared . 4. Caesar
determined not to wait until the enemy should arrive.
5 . A fter Caesar perceived that, he led his forces to the
nearest hill . 6 . The boy was unwilling to depart until he
had seen you ( i .e. he waited for the purpose of seeing you) .
7 . While the senate was preparing war against Owsar , he
made himself dictator . 8 . Before Caesar attempted any
thing, he calls Divitiacus to himself. 9. I waited until he
came.
NOTES A ND QUESTI ONS
1. When the battle had been going onfor a long time.
2 . Why ablative ?
3. A ccount for themode ; the subjunctive is common with expecto .
4. See 337 . 2 . Obs .
5. The subjunctive in this sentence shows that the boy waited for
the purpose of seeing you, i.e. he intended to see you ; the next sentence
implies only that he did see you, without implying an intention .
6 . Supply esse.
7. Why dative8 . Note that when several nouns follow each other in the same con
struction , the Latin differs from the English either in omitting the
conjunction altogether or in repeating it after each word, e.g. either
ob s idés , arma, servds , or ob s idés et arma et servbs ; not
ob s idés , arma, et servds , as in English .
9. See178 . 2 .
SUBJUNCTIVE I N DEPENDENT CLA USES. 333
Mention the three chief uses of cum. When does cum temporal
take the subjunctive ? Give the meanings and uses of dum. Give
the meanings of cum. What mode is used with most of the particlesof time When do anti quam and priusquam take the subjunctive ?When the temporal clause refers to future time, what mode is used
after cum after anthquam When the temporal clause intro
duced by cum contains the main statement, what mode is used‘i
Which are correct : cum es t, cum fuit, cum Gu t, cum iul rit, cum
mdnébat ?
8 . SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES.
OBS. A clause may perform many of the Offices of a noun, and
is, therefore, called a noun, or substantive, clause.
THA T GLA SS Is MA LLEA BLE was known to the ancients. The de
pendent clause, that glass is malleable, is equivalent to a
noun , and is the subj ect of was.
We perceive THA T F IRE 18 HOT . The dependent clause in this
sentence is the obj ect Of the verb perceive.
A peculiarity of the English is, THA T IT HA S so MA NY BORROWED
WORDS. The clause introduced by that is equivalent to a
noun standing in the predicate after is ; the clause is, there
fore, an attributive complement explanatory of peculiarity.
I t is known THA T CE SA R CONQUERED GA UL. I t has no meaninguntil explained by the clause introduced by that, which is
equivalent to a noun , and is, therefore, in apposition with it,
i.s. exp lanatory of it.
I know nothing about WHA T YOU A RE A SKING . The clause what
you are asking is the object of about. In English, what is at
once interrogative (as in the sentence above) and introducessubstantive clauses or it is a compound relative ( corresponding to qui , quae. quod ) , and introduces adjective clauses.
Hence
341. A Substantive C lause is one which, like a noun,
is the subject or object or complement of a verb, or
is used as an explanatory modifier of the subject or
object.
334 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
342 . Substantive C lauses may be classified as follows
INFINITIVE CLAUSES
1. The accusative with the infinitive is used as the subject of
u se or of impersonal verbs, and as the Object of the following :(1) Verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving, and ( for In
direct Discourse, see 348 ) equivalent expressions .
( 2) Verbs of wishing and willing, permitting, commanding, and
forbidding (most Of commanding and forbidding, except jiibeo and
véto , are followed by ut or 116 with the subjunctive) .(3) Verbs of emotion ( joy, sorrow , and also verbs of hoping,
p romising, threatening, swearing ( these verbs are sometimes followedby the complementary infinitive, see
EXA MP LES.
l . dicit montem ab hos tib us tenérl , he says that the mountain
is held by the enemy.
2. dulce pt 6 patri i mdri est, to die for one’
s country is sweet.
3. C aes ar prbfl ciscl m i ttu nt. Casar hastens to depart.
4. dioltur montem ti ndri , it is said that the mountain is held.
OBS. 1. In the foregoing)examples the pupil will notice that
the infinitive is used as su jcet (Ex . 2) or as object (Ex. or
that the infinitive with a subject accusatIve is the subject or objectof the verb. Substantive clauses have their verbs in the infinitive orsubjunctive mode, with a subject of infinitive in the accusative case.
OBS. 2 . A ll substantive clauses are regarded as of the neuter
ender. The tense of the verb in the infinitive clause is determined
y the rule in 319.
FINAL CLAUSES
2 . Final Clauses are object clauses after verbs of fearing, andafter verbs Of asking, allowing, etc. See 321. 2 .
l . ni tl tur ut Vincat , he str ives to conquer ( lit. thathemay conquer ) .2 . timeo ut lhbbrés sus tlneas , I fear ( that) you will not endure
the labors .
3. 11611 vl reor, n ! n6n vanil s , I do not fear ( that) you will notcome.
4. v éreor né eat, I fear ( that) he will go.
OBS. 1. The clause of purpose may be translated by that withmay, might, shall, or should, or by the Infin itive.
336 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
OBS. The pupil should note that, when the conjunction that
introduces a clause denoting pu ose or result, it takes the subjunctive, according to 321, or 32 2 ; ut otherw ise it is usually the Sign
of the accusative with the infinitive ( see 342 . l and That is
to be rendered by quod when it introduces a substantive clause
that contains the ground or reason, or that is the object of somever
gof emotion or feeling ( accusative and infinitive may also be
use
INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
5. Indirect Questions are clauses ( introduced by some interrogative word) , which are the subject or object of a verb, or which
depend on verbs expressing doubt or uncertainty.
EXA MPLES.
1. scio quid quaerfis , I know what you are asking (Object) .2 . quid diés iérat incertum es t, what a day will bring forth is
uncertain ( subject) .3. dub i to an pdnam , I doubt whether I should notp lace, i .e. I am
inclined to think, etc .
(1) A fter verbs of trial, an indirect question is introduced bys! in the sense of whether .
EXAMP LE .
circumfunduntur hos tés s i quem adi tum répérlre possint,
the enemy pour round ( to see) if they canfind an entrance.
OBS. 1. Dub i to may also be followed by quin with the subjunctive if the sentence is negative ; but, if there is no negative, it is
followed by indirect question ; and, when it means to hesitate, bythe infinitive .
OBS. 2 . Note the difference in meaning between Ex.1and solo
quod quaeris , I know what the thing which) you ask, i .e. the
answer to the uestion you ask. In EX. 1, quid Is an interrogative
pronoun ; in t e other example, quod is a relative.
SYN . P lacet , itpleases , i.e. it is one’
s will or determination ; llbet
( lubet) , itp leases, I .e. it agrees with one’
s inclination.
EXERC ISES.
Translate into English
1. Milités pontem fdcére jussi sunt . 2 . Ego bOnus esse
dicor . 3. Caesar milités hortdtus est, ut acriter dimica'
irent.
4. Caesar jussit milites castra Infinite . 5 . Caesar vétuit
milites pontem rescindére. 6 . Sdpiéns semper beatus sitl
SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 337
nécesse est. 7 . SO] efficit ut omnia flOreant. 8 . Omnes
civés métuébant, né urbs ab hostibus expfignarétur . 9. Phi
cuit e‘
i ut ad A riovistum legatds mittéret. 10. Nunquam
pi'
Itavi fOre”ut suppléx ad té vénirem. 11. Sentimus
uivem esse albam. 12 . C audeo quod vil les .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
1. The particle ut is often omitted, especially after verbs of wishing
(vblo , ndlo , mi le , and ti oio ) , necessity, etc . also after di e and fac .
2 . That it would happen. When there is no supine, idre ut (or
fiitfirum esse ut ) is used for the future infinitive ; the clause with utis the subject of ibro.
What is a clause How are clauses classified ? What is an inde
pendent clause A dependent clause How are dependent clauses
classified Define each . Express in Latin to die for one’s country is
noble. With what does noble agree? What gender must it be What
is the gender of all substantive clauses
9. INTERROGATIVE C LAUSES.
OBS. Questions are of two kinds : (1) FA CT-QUESTIONS, or
those that ask about the existence of a fact, and expect the answer
yes or no : as, scribitn e pater , is myfather writing ? ANS. yes or no.
Such questions (unless rhetorical) are generally asked by the helpof one of the interrogative particles,
-ne, ndnne, num. ( 2) WORD
QUEST IONS, or those that ask about something connected w ith a
fact, as who, what, where, when, how, why, etc., and they cannot be
answered by yes or no as, quis has littérl s scrips it, who wrote
this letter ? ANS. C icero. our n6n discddis , why do you not depart
R hetor ica l Question s .
OBS. Questions may be real or they may be rhetorical. A real
uestion expects an answer ; as, Who is calling ? ANS. John . A
r etorical question does not expect an answer , but, under the
of a question , contains an assertion , put for oratorical effect
In the form of a question ; as , What is baser than a lie? This is
a rhetorical question , expecting no answer, but conveying the
idea that nothing is baser than to lie. Sometimes no interrogativeword is used in asking a question . In such cases an affirmative
question generally expects a negative answer ; a negative question,an affirmative answer. The omission of the interrogative word is
common in rhetorical questions ( especially with negatives) expressing surp rise, irony, impatience, etc. ; patére tua consili a n6n s entis ,
do you not see (you must surely) that your designs are laid bare
338 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
Direct simple questions generally take the indicative ; but direct
simple questions that ask what is to be done, when it is intended toimply that some such an answer as nothing, nowhere, etc.
, is expected,take the subjunctive ( 2 7 8 . 1. as,
1. quid agam , what am I to do2 . quia hbc d iibl tet, who could doubt this ? ( rhetorical question )
n6m6 hbc d iib l tet, no one could doubt it.
Hence the rule
D IRECT QUESTIONS.
343. Direct Simple Questions are generally introducedby interrogative words, and, as a rule, take their verbs
in the indicative .
344. DirectSimpleQuestions may take the subjunctivewhen they express doubt, deliberation , or impossibility,
or imply a negative op inion on the part of the speaker
or w riter ( 2 7 8 . 1.
EXAMP LES.
1. R bmamne v6niéa, will you come to Rome ( ANS. yes or no.)2. quisnam in hortb amb iilat, who is walking in the garden
(A NS. Caesar .)3. quia paupert i tem n6n extimescit, who does not dread
poverty
quid 1160 hbm lne £50158 , what can one (you) do w ith this man ?
( ANS . nothing.)quia hoc créd at, who would believe this ? ( A NS . no o ne.)
th
01
D ouble Question s .
OBS . Fact-Questions may consist of two parts, i .e. they may be
disjunctive ( or double) ; as, is it this or is it that? The first member
of a double question is introduced by the particles utrum or -ne ,
and the second by an ( arms or -no) ; as, utrum ea vestra an
nos tra culpa est , is that your fault or ours Occas ionally the inter
rogative particle is omitted with the first member ; as , albquar
an s l leam, must I speak or be silent? The follow ing exhibits the
various forms of double questions
quaero utrum vaw m an fal sum s it ,
quaero v érum-ne an falsum Bit , I ask whether it is
quaero verum an falsum s it. true or false .
quaero verum falsum-ne s it,
The principle may be stated in the following rule
340 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
OBS. 2 . The particle an is used after such phrases as n 6s cio ,
haud scio , dub lto an , in the sense I do not know but, I doubt but,i .e. I am inclined to think ; as, hand solo an Ita s it, I do not know
but it is so. The forms of the interrogative quis , and qui , combinewith n 6scio , and are equivalent to an indefinite pronoun ; as,
n6scio quis , somebody or other ; the verb is in the indicative.
DEPENDENT DOUBLE QUESTION.
EXA M PLES.
1. pu6rt utrum 16gan t an scriban t nescio, I don’
t know
whether the boys are reading or wr iting.
2 . utrum légat necne nescio , I don ’
t know whether he is readingor not.
OBS. 1. Note that the subjunctive in indirect questions is translated by the indicative, because it stands for the indicative. Note,also, that the indirect question is always a dependent
duced by some interrogative word which connects it with the
preceding clause.
OBS. 2 . If the direct question had its verb in the subjunctive,no change is made on becoming indirect (except the tense of the
leading verb must be in a secondary tense if it is required by the
se uence of tenses) ; but the difference must be shown by the Englis rendering : thus, (1) quid agimus , what are we doing ? and
( 2) quid agamus , what are we to do become alike in the indirect
form ,—n 6n satin cons ti bat quid l gérent, they did not rightly
know (1) what they were doing, or ( 2) what they were to do.
Question s and A nsw er s .
OBS. There is no one word in Latin meaning Simply yes and no.
In answering a question the verb is generally repeated ; as, estnotib i penna, have you a pen ? the answer would be est m ini penna,I have a pen ; or simply es t. Sometimes adverbs are used in
answer to a direct question ; as, 6tiam , Ita, sic , v6rum, v 6r6 ,rect6 , oert6 , sané. etc .
,—haeclne tua dbmus es t ? Ita, is this
your house ? yes ; dasne hoc do s i n6 , do you admit this yes I do
indeed . N o may be expressed by repeating the verb w ith a nega
tive, or by nbn, n6n v 6r6 , n6n Ita , mlnlm6 , by no means , immo or
Imo , yes indeed, nay rather, etc. ; as, n6n Irfita as n 6n sum tri te,
you are not angry ? I am not. In answer to a double question , one
member of the alternative must be repeated ; as, thus an fi l ter
6rat. was it you or your brother ego (Gram) , it was I . Hence thefollowing rule
347 . In answering a question in Latin , either the
verb, with or without a negative, is repeated for the
SUBJUNCTIVE IN DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 341
words YES or NO ; or an intensive or negative parti
cle is used, w ith or w ithout the repetition of the verb.
EXERC lSES.
Translate into English
1. Fuist‘
ine Mint in schéla? 2 . Die fuerisne her‘
i in
schéla? 3. Quaerit num Caesar in urbe sit. 4. Num ita
audés dicére ? 5 . Utrum iinus an plfirés sunt mundi ?
6 . Quaeritur utrum finus an plfirés sint mundi'
? 7 . Utrum
C iitt'
) an Caesar tibi praestantior et clarior vir esse videtur ?
8 . Caesar juss it eOs specular‘
i num hostés ex castris exirent.
9. Quaeritur dii utrum s int, neone . 10. Isne est quem
quaero , annOn ? 11. Num dfibium est casfine an consiliO
factus s it mundus ? 12 . Cujus hic liber est? tuusne ? NOn ,
sed fratris . 13. Utrum vestra an nostra culpa est ?
14. Causa igitur n6n bOna est? immo optima . 15 . Quisnam
in hortO ambiilat? 16 . Nescio quis in hortO ambfilat.
SYN . Orbis terrarum , rather than tet ra, when there is decided
reference to other lands .
Translate into Latin
1. IS Caesar in the city? 2 . He inquires whether Owsar
is in the city . 3. Who is walking in the garden ? 4. He
asks who is walking in the garden . 5 . Is it true or false ?
6 . He asks whether it is true or false . 7 . Did Caesar come
into the senate yesterday ? No . 8 . I s this your book or
mine ? I t is mine . 9. A re you reading or writing? 10. He
asks whether you are reading or writing .
NOTES A ND QUESTIONS.
How may simple questions be classified (Ans . Fact questions and
word-questions . ) How many kinds of word-questions What is a
double question? How is a direct simple question asked ? Mention
the most common interrogative words . What is an indirect question ?
How is it asked ? What is the mode of the verb in indirect questions?
What is a rhetorical question ? How is a question in Latin answered
How is a double question answered ?
342 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
LESSON XCVIII .
INDIRECT DISOOUBSB.
OBS. 1. Direct Discourse (crane recta) gives the exact words ofthe speaker or writer ; as, A r iovistus said, I H AVE C ROSSED THE
RH [ NE Lat. A riovis tus d ixit, Rhénum trans ii ." The words
I have crossed the Rhine are in direct discourse ; the original speaker
is represented by the narrator as speaking in the fi rst person (because the speaker refers to himself) , and the words are given pre
cisely as they were uttered. Indirect Discourse (Oratio oblique )uses the same words , except that some are changed to conform to
the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted . These
changes affect only the pronouns, pronominal adverbs, modes, and
tenses (but not always all of these) ; as, A r iovistus said THA T HE
HA D C ROSSED THE RH INE Lat. A riov is tus d ixit S6 Rh énumtran sisse . The original words, I have crossed the Rhine, have been
changed to that he had crossed the Rhine, to indicate the change of
relation in the speaker ; the first person in English is changed to
the third, and the perfect tense to pluperfect, and, in Latin , the in
dicative to the accusative w ith the infinitive, which together forman infinitive substantive clause, the object of the leading verb dix it.
EXAM PLES.
1. a. r6x urbem oppfi gnat , the king assaults the city.
a. dux dicit , r6x urbem oppugnat,”
the leader says, The
king is assaulting the city .
”
6. dux dIoit regem ut h om oppugnar e, the leader says that
the king is assaulting the city.
a . sortbit, he writes.
b. dic it S6 scrfbére, he says that he is (now) writing.
a. DOS parfiti stimus , we are ready.
b. s 6 par i tés es se arb itrfiti sunt, they thought that they were
ready.
4. a. sunt n6nn ii llI qu6 rum aucté rl ti s apud p l6b em plfirl
mum valet , there are some whose infl uence prevails mostwith the common people.
b. Liscus dIoit es se n6nnfi llds quérum auctérltas i pud
plébem p liir imum valeat. Liscus says that there are
some whose influencep revails most with the common peop le.
OBS. 2 . In the foregoing examples marked a, note that each givesthe exact words of the original speaker or writer, and is, therefore,in Direct Discourse ; note, also, that each sentence marked a is a
declarative sentence, and that the principal verb is in the indicative.
344 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
Divico treated with C aesar asfollowsIftheRomanpeople shall make If the Roman peop le shoul d
peace with the Helvetians, the make peace with the Helvetians,
Helvetians w ill go to that p lace the Helvetians w ould go to that
and w ill remain there where y ou p lace and remain there where
shal l hav e determined and wished C ae sar should have determined
them to be ; but if y ou shall and wished them to be ; but if he
persist in following them with war , should persist in following them
remember the ancient disaster of with war, let him remember the
theRomanpeople and the ancestral ancient disaster of the Roman
valor of the Helvetians . p eop le and the ancestra l valor ofthe Helvetians .
OBS. 1. Note that, in passing from Direct to Indirect Discourse,the first and second persons of pronouns and of verbs are changed,when the sense so requires, to the third person . I n all cases, the
changes of pronouns depend on sense
OBS. 2 . The report in Indirect Discourse may be made either
from the standpoint o the speaker , i .e. as if the speaker reported was
still speaking (Vivi form) , or from the standpoint of the reporter ,the report being made as if the speech was a matter of the past.
INFINIT IVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
349. The Tenses of the Infinitive in Indirect Dis
course represent the time of the action as present, past,
or future, relatively to that of the principal verb.
EXA M PLES.
1. d icit montem ab hostibus t6n6ri , he says that the mountain
is held by the enemy.
2 . d ix it montem ab hos tibus t6n6ri , he said that the mountain
was held by the enemy.
OBS. Note that, in the foregoing examples, the leading verbs
d ici t and d ixi t have as an object a clause whose verb is in the
infinitive, and whose subj ect is In the accusative. Note, further,that the present infinitive is translated by the p resent tense after
d icit, and by a past tense after d ixit ; i .s. the infinitives denote the
same time as the verbs on which they depend. Hence we observe
that these infinitives represent the time 0 the action not as present
absolutely, but as present relatively to the time denoted by the
principal verb ; i .e. the present infinitive expresses contemporaneous
346 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
OBS. 4. The infin itive is said to stand, in Indirect Discourse,and its tenses to correspond to those of the finite modes, when itdepends on a verb implying thought, or the exp ression of thought ;thus, cupit v6nire, he desires to come, v 6nire is not in Indirect
Discourse, but is really a noun , the object of cupit. But in dicit
v énire , he says he is coming, vénire represents vénio ( indicative)of Direct Discourse.
OBS. 5. The subject of the infinitive in Indirect Discourse must( as a rule) be expressed, even though it is wanting in Direct Dis
course as, el6m6us sum ; dicit 8 6 esse c16m6ntem .
TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
350. Tenses in Indirect Discourse generally conform
to the ordinary rules for the use of tenses in the Subjunctive and Infinitive, as determined by the tense of
the introductory verb but an A orist ( i .s . a Perfect)Infinitive takes the sequence of past tenses, even if the
introductory verb is primary ( see 348 .
OBS. 1. Each tense in Direct Discourse is ordinarily representedby the same tense in Indirect Discour se ; but, when the indicativesof those tenses that have no subjunctive (viz .
, future and futureperfect are to be changed to the subjunctive, or when the indicatives 0 those tenses that have no infinitive (viz . imperfect and p luerfect) are to be changed to the infinitive, on passing to Indirectiscourse, they take the tense nearest them in time . Thus the
Future Indicative becomes Present or Imperfect Subjunctive,according to sequence of tenses.
Future Perfect Indicative becomes Perfect or Pluperfect Sub
junctive, according to sequence of tenses .
Imperfect Indicative z Perfect Infinitive .
Pluperfect Indicative Perfect Infinitive.
Future Indicative becomes Future Infinitive.
Future Perfect Indicative Future Perfect Infinitive .
OBS. 2 . The Historical Present is often treated in Indirect Discourse as a past tense, and is followed by a past tense of the
subjunctive in the dependent clauses ; as, H elv étii legatbs ad
C aesarem mittunt, qui d ic6t ent, the Helvetians sent ambassadorsto Caesar ( who should say, i .e.) to say.
OBS. 3. For the sake of vividness, a past tense may be followedby the present subjunctive ; as , ex i tus fuit 6 r6 ti 6nis , neque
vaoar e agras , qui am pos s in t , the close of the oration was , that
there were ( are) not lands unoccup ied which could (can) be given.
348 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
OBS . 1. When the principal clause, or apodosis , is in the subjunctive, as in Unreal Conditions, then special rules are required
( see 355 .
OBS. 2 . Interrogative sentences may sometimes have their verbsin the subjunctive, as in Rhetorical Questions (344 the subjunctive is either retained or changed to infinitive. T e deliberative
subjunctive ( 2 7 8 ) is always retained. But Rhetorical Questionsthat are in the indicative in Direct Discourse are changed to theaccusative with the infinitive in Indirect Discourse if the subject isof the first or third person, into the subjunctive if the subject is ofthe second person ( seeOBS. 3. Imperative clauses may have their verbs in the subjunc
tive the subjunctive is then retained in Indirect Discourse .
352 . The Construction of Indirect Discourse is used
after verbs of saying and thinking ( declarative) , asking
( interrogative) , commanding ( imperative) .
EXA M PLES.
1. C aesar cbgnbv it H elvetibs castra mbv isse, Caesar learned
that the Helvetians had broken up their camp .
2 . C aesar certior factus est exercitum v6aiss e, Cwsar was
informed that the army had come.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
353. Reflexive Pronouns, m i and anus , refer primarilyto the subject of the clause in which they stand.
1. In some Subordinate Clauses the Reflexive must beused to refer either to the subject of the principal, or to thesubject Of the subordinate clause ; but this happens onlywhen reference is made to the thought or will of the subjectin the leading clause, as in Infinitive C lauses , Final C lauses ,or in Indirect Discourse ( Indirect Questions ) .
EXAM P LES.
1. animus sentit 8 6 v i sua m6v 6ri , the mind perceives that it is
moved by its own power .
2 . quaesiv 6runt num 8 6 ess et 6tiam m6ri prbhib i tnrus , theyasked whether he was going to (would) p revent them fromdying too.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 349
PRONOUNS IN INDIRECT D ISCOURSE.
354. In passing from Direct Discourse to Indirect, pronouns
of the first or second person are regularly changed, if the sense
requires, to pronouns of the third person , as follows
1. PERSONA L : égo (n6 8 ) is changed to forms of the reflexive
8 6 ( sometimes ipse) tu is changed to forms of ille or is .
2 . POSSESSIVE : meus (noster ) and tuns (ves ter ) are changed
to forms of suus ( sometimes genitive of ips e or of is ) .
are changed to forms of ill e or is
nunc is changed to tum and tune .
3. DEMONSTRA TIVE
4. INTENSIVE : ipse may be retained, and then refers to the
principal subject, like an emphatic reflexive .
OBS. Hence we have two refiexives in some clauses, referringto (1) leading subject, ( 2) subject of the infinitive .
EXA M P LES.
1. DIRECT : ann iilum 650 ms ! manu cann ot, I have made the
ring with my own hand .
IND IREC T : glfiriatus est an nii lum 8 6 sul manucbnf6cis se,
he boasted that he had made the r ing with his own hand .
2 . DIREC T : s i ob s i d 68 a vbb is m ih i dabuntur , vbbiscum
pacem faciam , if hostages shall be given to me by you, I willmake peace with you.
IND IRECT : r68 pondit, Si obs id és ab ifs Sib i d entur , 8 68 6
cum iis pacem es se faotfi rum, he rep lied that if hostages
should be given to him by them, he would make peace with them.
3. our (16 sua v irtute aut d é ips ius dnigentia d 6 8 p 6r6rent ,
why (asked he) should they despair of their own courage or his
diligence
OBS . The personal pronoun may, of course, be retained in In
direct Discourse when the sense requires it ; in short, all changes of
pronouns must conform to the sense .
Exam p le .
DIRECT : quidv'
i’
s perpétiar , I will endure anything.
IND IRECT : adfirmfiv i qui dv is m6 perpessfi rum , I asserted
that I would endure anything.
350 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
C ONDIT IONAL SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISC OURSE.
355 . C onditional Sen tences, in passing from Direct to
Indi rect Discourse, undergo the follow ing changes
1. In SIMPLE CoND ITIONs (32 6 . 1) the apodosis is changed to
the accusative w ith the infin itive ( the tenses of the infinitive beingpresent, spast, or future, according as the tense of the verb in the
apodosis is present, past, or future) .
2 . The protasis is changed to the subjunctive, the tense beingdetermined by the leading verb of saying, etc. ; but an aorist ( i .e.
perfect) infinitive takes the sequence of past tenses.
EXAMP LES.
0. R . Si p6oiiniam hab et , dat.
O . o . PRESENT : d ici t 8 6 , Si péoi‘
m iam habeat, dare .
O . O. PA ST : dixit 8 6 , st péoiiniam hab éret, dare.
O . R . Si pécfiniam habui t, d6dit.
O . O . d icit 8 6 , Si p6cuniam hab 6ret , déd is se .
3. In FUTURE COND ITIONS (326 . 2 ) the present and perfect
subjunctive ( or future indicative) of the apodosis are changed to
the future infin itive ( or the periphrase { Ore ut,4. The tenses (present and perfect) in the protasis remain
unchanged if the leading verb of saying is in a primary tense ;
otherwise, they (present and perfect) are changed respectively to
the imperfect and pluperfect .
EXA MP LES.
o . R . si péofini am hab eat, dot .
O . O . PRESENT : d icit 8 6 , s i pécfin iam habeat, dat iirum esse.
O . O . PA ST : dix i t S6 , s i pécfin iam h 6b 6ret, d i tfi rum ess e .
5. In UNREA L CONDITIONS the imperfect and pluperfect
subjunctive of the apodosis, when active, are changed respectively to
the future or future perfect infinitive ; when passive, these tenses
are expressed respectively by the periphrases futurum esse a t or
ffitfi rum fuis se ut, with the imperfect subjunctive. This peri
phrase must be used in the active when the verb in the apodosis
has no future participle, and hence no future infinitives .
6 . The tenses in the protasis remain unchanged, no matter what
may be the tense of the leading verb.
352 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
3. a . num récentium injuriarum m6m6riam d 6p 6n6re pos
sum , am I able to lay as ide the memory of recent wrongs
b. respondit, num r6centium injuriarum mémbriam d é
p 6n6re pos se, he rep lied, could he lay aside the memoryof recent wrongs
4. a . quid v 6r6mini. aut our d 6 v es tra virtute d 6 8 p 6ratis ,
what do youfear, or why do you despair of your va lor ?
b. quid v6rer6n tur aut cfi r (16 and v ir tute d 68 p 6r6r ent,
what did theyfear, or why did they despair of their valor ?
OBS. In the foregoing examples, those marked a are Direct
Questions, and have their verbs in the indicative ( see In
the corresponding examples of Indirect Discourse, marked b, these
verbs have been changed to the subjunctive or to the infinitive.
Note that rhetorical questions (Exs. 3and 4) in the indicative inDirect Discourse are changed to the accusative with the infinitive
in Indirect Discourse, if the subject isfirst or third person (Ex.
il
l
l
l
to the subjunctive, if the subject is second person (Ex. Hence
t e rule
356 . Interrogative Sentences generally take the subjunctive, but sometimeS
'
( especially when rhetorical) the infinitivewith subject accusative.
OBS. Subjunctive Rhetorical Questions in Direct Discourse ( see344) remain , as a rule, in the subjunctive in Indirect Discourse .
Questions of Deliberation ( 2 7 8 ) always retain the subjunctive.
IMPERAT IVE SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
EXA M PLES.
1. a. r6m ini 8 c6re v6t6ri 8 incommbd i p6p iili R dman i , remem
ber the ancient disaster of the Roman people.
b. r6min isc6r6tur v 6t6ri8 incommbdi pbp ii li Raman i . let
him remember ( said he) the ancient disaster of the Roman
2 . a. cum légiéne v6ni. come with a legion .
b. scribit Lab i6n6 cum légidne v6niat, he writes toLabienus
to come ( lit., that he should come) with a legion .
OBS. In the foregoing examples, note that those marked a have
their verbs in the imperative ; in the corresponding examples of
Indirect Discourse, marked b, these imperatives have been changedto the subjunctive . Hence the rule
357 . A ll Imperatives in Direct Discourse are changed in
Indirect Discourse to the Subjunctive ; the negative is n6 .
FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
PURPOSE
OBS. The subjunctive w ith qui expresses a Purpose chiefly afterverbs of sending, giving, and choosing, w ith reference to the obj ectof the sentence ; a Purpose with reference to the subj ect being ex
pressed by ut, etc. If the construction be passive, then , of course,
qui will refer to the subject.
EXA M P LES.
1. l6g6t6 8 mi s érunt qui pacem p6t6rent, they sent envoys to
(who should, or that they might) suefor peace.
2 . l6g6 ti m is s i sunt qui pacem p6t6ren t , envoys were sent to
(who should) seek peace.
RESULT .
1. Relative Clauses are often used to characteriz e an ia
definite or general antecedent, especially after negatives , where
the idea of result is not obvious .
EXA M P LES.
1. sunt qui d ican t . there are some who say.
2 . n6m6 es t qui n6 n oiip it , there is no one who does not desire.
( I ) A Relative Clause of Characteristic is used even when the
antecedent is definite ; but it is especially common
a. A fter fi rm s and 8 61u8 .
b. A fter d ignus , indignus , i d6neu8 , and aptus .
c. A fter comparatives with quam .
OBS. The Relative of Characteristic is equivalent to the Restric
tive Relative with the subjunctive . The Relative of Characteristic
has a tendenc to take the subjunctive after indefinite and general
expressions or examples, see 324) but even then the indicative
may be used when the statement is a definite fact, and not a
general characteristic ( i .e. w ith a definite antecedent) as, sunt qui
d icunt imp6ria n6qui 8 8 e pati , there are some who assert, etc .
( i.e. I know some who assert, Particularly to be noted is the
Restrictive Relative in such phrases as quod soiam , so far as I
know ; quod m6m in6rim , as fa r as I remember .
EXAM PLE .
n6n is sum qui h is Star , I am not such a one as to use these things.
RELA TIVE SENTENCES. 357
COND ITION
361. RULE LXVI .— A C ond ition is som et im es in
trod uced by th e I nd efi n ite R elative (qu i , qua e , quod
s i qu is , s i qu i , an d th e mod es ar e u sed as in
o rdin a r y cond ition a l clauses .
EXAMPLES.
1. haec qui v ideat, ndnne cbgl tur cbnfi t6 ri deds 8 8 8 8 , ifany one should see these things, would he not be compelled to
admit that there are gods2 et rat long6 , qui or6d at , he greatly errs who supposes ( i .e. if
any one supposes, he greatly errs) .
CAUSE.
OBS. Causal C lauses introduced by qui alone, or strengthened
by ut , utpbte , quippe, generally take their verbs in the subjunctive, although the indicative is occasionally used.
EXAMP LES.
1. habeo 8 6nectiiti gratiam , quae mih r s ermdni s av id itatem
auxit , I cherish gratitude to old age, which has increased mylove of conversation .
2 . mi s6t et tui m6 qui cum tu) hun c tan tum h 6m inem
fi ci i s in imicum am, I p ity you since you ( in thatyou) makeso great a man as this inimical to you .
3. h i b eo S6nectfi ti gratiam , quae mih i sermdni s av id i tatem
auxi t, I cher ish gratitude to old age, which (because it) hasincreased my love of conversation .
OBS. In C icero the mode with quippe qui is the subjunctive ;In Sallust, the indicative .
CONCESSION .
ab solv i te Vert em , qui cum is ) 8 6 fateatur p6ciinias
o6pi 8 8 e, acquitVerres, although he confesses ( should confess )that he has taken br ibes .
362 . RULE LXVII . R e lative C lau ses in I n d irect
D iscourse, l ik e oth er d ep end en t clau ses , tak e th e
subjunctive .
EXAMP LE .
nun tifitum est 6qui t6 8 qui praemis si es sent r6vertis se , it
was announced that the horsemen who had been sent in advance
had returned .
358 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
a . A Relative C lause , even in Indirect Discourse , maytake the indicative , if it contains a statement on the authorityof the narrator the present speaker or writer) , or if itis a mere circumlocution .
EXA MP LES.
1. C aes ar per exp loratorés certior factus est , ex ea parte
Viol quam G allia conces sérat , omnes noctfi di sces s'
is se ,
Cwsar was informed through his scouts that all of them had
withdrawn dur ing the n ight from that quarter of the village
which he had assigned to the Gauls .
2 . qui s néget haec omn ia quae v i d émus d e6 rum pbtestate
adminis trar i , who would deny that this whole visible wor ld is
managed by the power of the gods
OBS. The statement on the authority of the present speaker or
writer is equivalent to saying that the statement is a fact ; hence,the indicative is used. The relative clause quam conces sé
rat , although standing in Indirect Discourse, is in the indicative,because it is an exp lanation given by the writer himself (Caesar) .
The relative clause quae v id émus , ma be considered as explanatory ( i .e. it is a circumlocution) , and alt ough introduced into the
Indirect Discourse, the verb (v l d émus ) is in the indicative, becausethe manner of making the assertion is not important enough to rise
into consideration ; hence, the verb remains in the mode in which
it would naturally be, viz . the indicative . The statement is virtually made on the authority of the p resent speaker , because he does
not think it worth while to shift the responsibility ; i .e. it often
depends merely upon the feeling of the w riter whether he will use
the indicative or subjunctive.
INTERMEDIATE C LAUSES.
OBS. In Latin we often find a clause subordinate to another
clause which is itself subordinate. When the first subordinate clause
is a subjunctive ( or an infinitive) clause, then the subjunctive isused in the second subordinate ( or intermediate) clause, because
anything depending on a potential is itself necessarily potential .
The verb in the second subordinate clause is said to be in the sub
junctive by attraction . The verb in the second subordinate clause
may be in the indicative, but, if the clause ( intermediate) is inIndirect Discourse, its verb is naturally in the subjunctive ( as inthe foregoing lesson ) , unless the clause is merely explanatory, i .e. a
circumlocution (36 2 . Obs .) containing a statement which is regarded
360 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
of the speaker or narrator himself may take this construction . On
this principle, indirect questions and dependent constructions fo l
lowing verbs of wishing, desir ing, etc., as well as final clauses, maybe explained as Indirect Discourse, the indirect relation often beingconfined to a dependent clause, and not extending to the whole
sentence ; as, n6va nupta fl et quod ire neces s e s it, the br ide is
weep ing because she must go ( says she) . This sentence in Indirect
Discourse is : nova nupta d icit s é fl ére quod ire néces se s i t.
Hence
INFORMAL IND IRECT D ISCOURSE.
364. RULE LXIX . A r elative or oth er subor d in a te
c lause m ay tak e th e subjun ctive w h en it exp r esses ,
th ough n ot in fo rm a l in d ir ect d iscour se , th e th ough t
of som e oth er p er son th an th e Sp eak er or w r iter .
EXA M P LES.
1. omnes lib ros quos frater suus réliquis set t i donav it ,
he gave tome all the books which (as he said) his brother had left.
2 . Socrates accfi satus es t quod corrumpéret jfiven tfi tem ,
Socrates was arraigned because (as was alleged) he corrup ted
the youth
3. A edui questi'
sun t quod H arfi d és fin és e6 rum pbp hla
rentur , the E dui comp lained because ( as they said) the
Harudes were laying waste their territory .
OBS. 1. The constructions following verbs of wishing, desiring,commanding, per mitting, car ing, str iving, hinder in fearing, and the
like, may be explained as Informal Indirect iscourse (usuallycalled pétltié obliqua ) .
EXAMPLES.
1. nihil ind ignlus es t quam cum qui culpa careat suppli cié
n6n carére, nothing is more unbecoming than that he who is
freefromfault should not befreefrompun ishment.2. mfl i tés mis it.ut 6 5 8 qui ffigéran t perséquérentur , he sent
soldiers to (who should) pursue those who had fled ( i .e. the
fugitives) .
OBS. 2 . Note, in the foregoing examples, that the relative clause
qui careat ( see depending on an infinitive, has its verb in
the subjunctive by the ordinary rule ; in Ex. 2, the clause qui
fiigérant has its verb in the indicative, because it is regarded as
parenthetical, i .e. it is a circumlocution ( see 36 2 . a) .
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES .
Translate into Latin
1. The waves on the Shores [of the sea] are high . 2 .
Vols inii, a town of the Tuscans , was consumed 1 by light
n ing. 3. Neither you nor I have done this . 4. You and he
praise the streams of the countrv. 5 . The man said one
thing and the boy another .
“z 6 . Homer is called the king of
poets . 7 . The Sequani Shuddered at the cruelty of A riovis
tus . 8 . Hear much ,3speak little . 9. A fter his death the
people repented of their judgment 10. Caesar kept
demanding corn of the jEdui. 11. The elephant is said to
live two hundred years . 12 . A ugustus died at Nola . 13.
He wandered about the banks of the river Po and the Shores
of the A driatic Sea . 14. A good man forgets all injuries .
15 . A t what price does he give lessons?‘ 16 . It is not law
ful for any man5to lead an army against his country . 17 .
Having learned these things , Caesar returns to the fleet. 18 .
What o’
clock is it ? 19. Is that your fault or mine? 20. He
asked whether that was your fault or mine . 21. If they
( Shall) give hostages , Caesar will make peace with them.
22 . Can anybody do this? 23. Can somebody do this ? 24.
Plato lived eighty-one years . 25 . Wherefore it pleased him
to send 6 legates to A riovistus , to demand7 from him that he
Should appoint some place central w ith respect to both of
them for a conference, ( saying) that he wished to treat withhim concerning the republic, and the highest interests of
both. 26 . On the 10th of A pril we set out for the province .
27 . IS this said to have been done by night or by day? 28 .
The Germans have not entered a house for fourteen years .
29. It is of great consequence8to me 9 that I Should see you.
864 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
30. On the last day of December he set sail ,10and arrived at
A thens on the 10th of January . 31. In the first of the
spring the consul came to Ephesus , and , having received the
troops from1‘Scipio , he made12 a speech
‘3in-presence-of14 his
soldiers ( in which) , after extolling their bravery , he exhorted
them to undertake 15a new war w ith 16 the Greeks , who had
( as he said ) helped A ntiochus w ith auxiliar ies .
Use concrématum est .
Use aliud aliud .
Use the plural .
Lit. teach.
Use li cet némini .
See 321.
See 321. Obs . acclpére .
See 315 . 3.oo
q
cz
curs
oa
w
p
MISCELLANEOUS EXERC ISES.
I . SUJII AND ITS COMPOUNDS.
[Learn the principal parts and meaning of ab sum ,l adsum , d ésum ,
insum , intersum , ob sum ,
2p raesnm , pré sum , pos sum , subsum ,
8
sfipersum j
Translate into Latin
1. God is present in all places . 2 . They profit neither
themselves nor others . 3. They were not able to profit me .
4. He has been absent from home six months . 5 . This can
not profit vou , but injures you and your friends . 6 . A
leader was wanting to the army . 7 . The cavalry profited
our army . 8 . He was present in the battle . 9. They were
able to be present. 10. They governed the city for ten
Veal'S.
1. For euphonic changes , see 7 . and if .
2 . Principal parts : ob sum , obes se , offui .
3. Principal parts : subsum , subcase, no perf.
See 315 . 3. a .
Use s olvit.
Use 5.
Use habui t.
Use cont iénem.
Use apud .
Use ad with the ger .
Use cum.
366 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
6 . The wise man will teach his son justice . 7 . The
people made Caesar consul . 8 . Every tenth man was
chosen . 9. Every sixth man was chosen . 10. A ll the best
men ( lit. , each best man ) were chosen . 11. They fear
this enemy . 12 . Hannibal crossed the A lps with his
army . 13. The river goes through the midst of the city .
14. This , lastly ( ad extrémum ) , I particularly (magn épére )ask you. 15 . We ought not to conceal our opinions from
our friends . 16 . He leads his army over the river . 17
Caesar leads the cavalry over the bridge. 18 . The people
appoint him general. 19. O wolf , excellent guardian , as the
saying is ( at ajunt ) , for the Sheep 20. The Romans
were eager for glory . 21. One man ( dat. ) must not fight
w ith ( cum ) two . 22 . What pleases you also pleases me .
23. This thing is unlike that. 24. The life which we enjoy isshort. 25 . We pity those who repent of their faults . 26 .
We love those who have repented of their faults . 27 Whenthese things had been done, and the whole of Gaul had been
subdued , the nations which dwelt beyond the Rhine sent
ambassadors to ( ad ) Caesar . 28 . C icero went to A thens . 29.
The ambassadors came from Carthage. 30. The men fled to
Rome . 31. The soldiers departed from Italy . 32 . Settingforth (prefectus ) from Carthage , he made for (pétére ) I taly .
33. He was a brave man at home and in war . 34. He will
return home in the evening. 35 . When my son returns from
the country , I will send him to ( ad ) you . 36 . We perceive
that snow is white . 37 . I t is said that snow is white . 38 . I
believe that the souls of men are immortal . 39. Who wasthe man ? 40. I w ill tell you who the man was . 41. The
wall is two hundred feet long. 42 . I will send you a letter .
V.
I . No brave man shudders at the enemy . 2 . Who was
present ( intéresse ) at your conversation ? 3. A gainst the
Tarentines , who were in the lowest part of ( ultimus ) Italy ,
GENERAL RULES OF SYNTAX.
AGREEMENT OF VERBS, NOUNS, PRONOUNS,
AND ADJECTIVES.
SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE ( P .
1. The subject of a finite Verb is put in the nomina
tive case.
A GREEMENT OF VERBS ( P .
2 . A finite verb agrees w ith its subject-nominativein number and person .
A PPOSITION ( P .
3. A noun used to describe another noun or pro
noun , and denoting the same person or thing, is put in
the same case.
PREDICATE NOUN ( P .
4 . A noun in the predicate, denoting the same person
or thing as the subject, agrees w ith it in case.
A GREEMENT OF RELATIVES ( P .
5 . A relative pronoun agrees w ith its antecedent in
gender, number, and person , but its case depends on
the construction Of the clause in which it stands .
A GREEMENT OF A DJECTIVES ( P .
6 . A djectives agree w ith their nouns in gender,number , and case.
PRED ICATE A DJECTIVE ( P .
7 . A predicate adjective agrees with its subject in
gender, number, and person.
GENERAL RULES OF SYNTA X . 371
GEN ITIVE.
GENITIVE WITH NOUNS ( P .
8 . A noun limiting the meaning of another
and denoting a different person or thing, is put
genitive.
GEN ITIVE WITH A DJECTIVES ( P .
9 . Many adjectives are followed by the genitive to
complete their meaning.
PARTITIVE GENITIVE ( P .
10. Words denoting a part are followed by the
genitive denoting the whole.
PREDICATE GEN ITIVE ( P .
11. A noun in the predicate, denoting a different
person or thing from the subject, is put in the genitive.
1. Certain adjectives Of quantity as magni , parvi. pith-is ,
minbris are used to denote indefinite price.
GENITIVE W ITH VERBS ( P .
12 . Verbs Of reminding, remembering, and forgetting,—récordor , mém in i , rem in iscor , and ob l iviscor ,— are
followed by the genitive ( sometimes the accusative) .
1. The genitive is used (p . 295)(1) With mi sereor , m i sérés co .
( 2) With the impersonals réfert and interes t .
(3) The impersonals mi séret, paeni tet , p i ss t , pfiget, andtaedet, take the genitive of the object with the
accusative of the person.
(4) Verbs of accusing, convicting, condemning, and acquit
ting, take the accusative of the person and the
genitive Of the crime (p.
( 5) Sum , and verbs of valuing, take the genitive to express
the price or value indefinitely (p.
372 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
DATIVE.
INDIRECT OBJECT ( P .
13. The indirect object of an action is put in the
dative
1 With intransitive and pas sive verbs.
2 . With transitive verbs, in connection with the direct object.
DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS ( P .
14 The dative of the indirect Object is used w ith
most Intransitive verbs signifying to favor , p lease, trust,assist, and their contraries ; also, to believe, persuade,command, obey, serve, resist, threaten, spare, pardon, and
be angry.
DATIVE OF PURPOSE OR END ( P .
15 . The dative is used with sum and a few other
verbs to denote the purpose or end, usually with
another dative of the person or thing affected or
interested.
DATIVE OF POSSESSOR ( P .
16 . The dative of the possessor is used with the verb
sum .
DATIVE OF A GENT ( P .
17 . The dative of the agent is used with the gerun
dive to denote the person interested in doing the action .
DATIVE WITH COMPOUNDS ( P .
18 . The dative of the indirect Object is used with
many verbs compounded w ith ad , an te , con , in , in ter ,
ob , post , p rae , p r6 , sub , and super , and sometimescircum .
DATIVE W ITH ADJECTIVES ( P .
19 . The dative is used after adjectives to denote theObject to which the quality is directed.
GENERA L RULES OF SYNTAX. 375
A BLATIVE OF MEASURE ( P .
34 . The ablative w ithout a preposition is used to
denote the standard by which anything is measured.
MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE ( P .
35 . The ablative is used w ith comparatives, and
words implying comparison, to denote the measure Of
difference.
A BLATIVE OF PRICE ( P .
36 . The price is expressed by the ablative when it
is a definite sum.
1. D ignus and ind ignas are followed by the ablative .
A BLATIVE OF SPEC IFICATION ( P .
37 . A noun , adjective, or verb may be followed bythe ablative to denote in what respect its signification is
taken .
A BLATIVE WITII COMPARATIVES ( P .
38 . The comparative degree is followed by the abla
tive when quam , than, is omitted.
A BLATIVE OF MATERI AL ( P .
39 . The material of which anything is made is regu
larly expressed by the ablative w ith ex or d é ; but
con stare , to consist, sometimes omits the preposition .
1. Opus and ii sus , signifying need, are followed by the ablative
Of the thing needed ( p.
2 Most verbs and adjectives Signifying p lenty and want are
followed by the ablative (308 . Obs .
A BLATIVE OF MANNER ( P .
40. The ablative Of manner generally takes the
preposition cum , unless it has a modifying adjective or
genitive ( when cum may be omitted) .
376 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
A BLATIVE OF A CCOMPANIMENT ( P .
41. The ablative Of accompaniment takes the preposition cum , except in a few military and other
phrases .
A BLATIVE OF QUALITY ( P .
42 . A noun denoting quality, quantity, or description , and having an adjective joined w ith it, may be
put in the genitive 01 in the ablative.
LOCATIVE.
PLA CE IN WH ICH ( P .
43. The name of the p lace where, or in which, regu
larly requires in with the ablative .
NAMES OF TOWNS ( P .
44 . Names of towns and small islands, and also
dam us , r ii s , and a few other words omit the reposition ,
and the name Of the p lace where, or in whio takes the
locative.
TIME ( P .
45 . The time when, or within which, is put in the
ablative time how long, in the accusative.
A BLATIVE A BSOLUTE ( P . 222 )46 . A noun or pronoun ,
w ith a participle or an
adjective, or two nouns, may be put in the ablative, to
express the time or circumstance of an action .
INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE MODES.
IND ICATIVE MODE.
4 7 . The indicative mode asserts action or being as
a fact, or inquires after a fact.
SUBJECT A CCUSATIVE ( P .
4 8 . The infinitive with subject accusative is used
after verbs Of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving,hear ing, and the like.
378 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE (P .
5 5 . Final clauses take their verbs in the present or
imperfect subjunctive, according as the leading verb
is in a primary or a secondary tense.
SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT ( P .
5 6 . Consecutive clauses take their verbs in the sub
junctive mode, the tense being determined by the
regular rules for sequence of tenses . ( See 32 2 . Obs .)
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES ( P .
5 7 . Conditional sentences w ith Si , n isi, m , Sin ,
takeSimp le P resent and P ast Conditions .
1. Any present or past tense of the indicative in
both clauses when nothing is implied as to the fulfil
ment of the condition .
Future Conditions.
2 . The future indicative in both clauses, to represent
the supposed future case in a distinct and vivid manner ;
the present ( or perfect subjunctive) in both clauses, to
represent the supposed future case in a less distinct and
vivid manner .
Unreal P resent and P ast Conditions.
3. The imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive in bothclauses, to represent the supposed case as unreal, or
contrary to fact. The imperfect denotes present time,and the pluperfect past.
C OMPARATIVE CLAUSES ( P .
5 8 . Comparative clauses, introduced by ut, hti , Sicut,quémadmddum , etc., and followed by the demonstrative
particles i’
ta , sic etc., regularly take the indicative
or the subjunctive as in independent sentences .
1. Comparative clauses, introduced by ac Si , ut Si ,
quam Si , quasi , tan quam , tan quam Si , vélut, velut Si ,
are, in fact, conditional clauses , Of which the conclusion
GENERA L RULES OF SYNTA X. 379
is Omitted or implied, and therefore take the subjunctive like conditional sentences ; but the tense is deter
mined by the regular rules for sequence Of tenses .
CONCESSIVE CLAUSES ( P .
5 9 . Concessive clauses are introduced by concessive
conjunctions, although, granting that,— and take the
indicative or the subjunctive ( according to the principlesstated on p. 321
CAUSAL CLAUSES ( P .
6 0. Causal clauses, introduced by quod , quia , qu5
n iam , take the indicative when the reason
assigned is stated as a fact, and indorsed by the Speaker
or writer .
I . Causal clauses introduced by cum or the relative qui regu
larly take the subjunctive.
2 . Causal clauses introduced by quod , quia, qubniam , take the
subjunctive ( in Indirect Discouse, to state the reason as the
assertion or op in ion of some one else than the speaker or wr iter .
TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
A NTECEDENT A CTION ( P .
6 1. Temporal clauses, introduced by po stquam , po st
ea quam , ub i , tit, I'
I t p r imum , I'
Ib i p r imum , simul ac,
etc. , take the indicative ( commonly the aorist indicative
or historical present) .
CONTEMPORANEOUS A CTION ( P .
6 2 . D um , dOn ec, quoad , while, as long as, take the
indicative ( any tense) .
l . D um , dbn ec , quoad , until, take the indicative in
the statement of afact, the subjunctive when purpose
is expressed ( i .e. if the accomplishment Of the purpose
is the limit Of the action ) .
380 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
SUBSEQUENT A CTION ( P .
63. A n téquam and p r iusquam , before, are used w ith
any tense of the indicative, except the imperfect and
pluperfect, to express the mere priority of one event to
another .
1. A n téquam and p r iusquam are used w ith the
subjunctive to express (1) the intentional priority of
one action to another ( i .e. when the action is purposed
or desired by the subject of the leading verb) , ( 2) orwhen its non-occurrence is expressed or implied.
CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM .
C UM TEMPORAL ( P .
6 4 . C um temporal when ) , introducing a clause
that defines the mere time Of an action , may be used
w ith all the tenses Of the indicative.
CUM H ISTORICAL ( P .
6 5 . C um , meaning when , is used in historical narra
tion w ith the imperfect subjunctive for contemporaneousaction , with the pluperfect subjunctive for antecedent
action .
CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CUM ( P .
6 6 . C um causal since) and cum concessive
although) may be used with any tense Of the sub
junctive.
INTERROGATIVE CLAUSES.
DIRECT QUESTIONS ( P .
6 7 . Direct Simple questions are generally introduced
by interrogative words, and, as a rule, take their verbs
in the indicative.
1. Direct Simple questions may take the subjunctivewhen they express doubt or deliberation , or imply a
negative opinion on the part of the speaker or writer
( 2 73. 1,
READ ING LESSONS .
I . FA BLES.
NOTE.—The figures in the follow ing sections refer to the rules on p . 370 ff.
1. THE KID AND THE WOLF .
Capella ,1stans
6 in tectO dOmI'
IS,
8 liipum20vidit 2 praetéreun
tem , et Indif‘
icavit. Sed lllpus , NOn tI‘
I , inquit, sed lécus
tuns , mé liidificat.
Saepe lécus et tempus hOminéS timidOS audaces reddit.
2 . THE BOY BATH ING .
Puer , balneum péténs in fli’
IviO, aqua paene exstinctus est .
Et vidéns viatOrem quendam , clamavit, Subvéni mih’
i” 14
Sed hic exprOhravit puért'
)13 téméritatem . Puelh
'
IluS autem
dixit, Primum subvéni , deinde répréhendére‘9 licet.
”
3. THE Fox A ND THE LION .
Vulpés Vidit leOnem rétibus 3’ Captam, et stans prOpe, lI'
Idi
ficavit eum insOlenter . LeO autem, NOD tn,”
inquit, me
ludificas ,2sed malum quod inme incidit.
”
4. THE A SS IN THE LION’
S SKIN .
A sians , pellem27 leOn is indfitus , circum currébat, cetera
{inimalia z0 ter reus . Et cum vulpem vidéret, eam qq ue
terrére49
cOnatus est. Sed haec, asini virgin-
14“
and'
I'
tO,
Scito , inquit, mé qq ue territam fntiiram fuisse nis i
té vagientem audissem.
” 57
5 . THE HOUND AND THE LION .
Canis véniiticus6 leOneIn vid it, et insécfitus est. Cum
autem leO Sé vertéret, ac riigiret, canis métuéns rétrorsum
REA DING LESSONS. 383
ffigit. Tum vulpes , cOnspicata, O malum caput inquit ;
Téne 21 leOnem sectari ? cujus “ né vécem quidem tOlérare
pOtu‘
ist'
i .
6 . THE WOLF AND THE LAMB .
Liipus lnSéCfitus est agnum. A t hie in templum cOa'
igit.
LiipO autem agnum invOcante , et minitante pontificem cum
sacrificatfirum, réspondit agnus , Mallem quidem de5 Sacer
esse quam a té trfic‘
idar’
i .
F
t . THE FARMER AND THE SNAKE.
AgricOla Senex , hiémis tempOre, serpentem invénit gelu
rigentem , et miséréscéns sub veste condidit. MOX serpens ,
incaléscéns , et indOlem suam récfipérans , benefactOrem m5
mordit interfécitque qui InOriénS dixit, Justa patior , qui5
animali ‘3 imprObO vitam servavérim.
” 7‘
8 . THE WI DOW’
S HEN .
Vidua quaedam gallinam habuit, quae Singhla Ova cottidié
pépérit. A t rata , Si plI‘
iS horde'
i 10
gallinae13 dédisset,
“ hanc
bina cottidié Ova paritiiram ,ita fecit . Sed gall
'
I'
na , pinguis
facta , né SingI'
Ila quidem postea parere valébat.
II . LIFE OF CJESAR .
CE SAR IS PROSCRIBED , BUT PARDONED BY SULLA .
1. G . Jfilius Caesar , x n5bilissima génitus familia,31annum
agens sextum et décimum, patrem amisit . l ’aulO post Cor
neliam di’
Ixit uxOrem , cujus cum pater Sullae19esset inimicus ,
véluit Sulla Caesarem compellére49ut eam dimittéret ; néque
id pOtuit efficérc . Ob eam causam Caesar bOniS 3‘spdliatus ,
cumetiam ad mortem quaerérétur , mutataveste , noctuelapsus
est ex urbe , et, quamquam tunc quartanae morbO labOrabat,
prOpe per Singhlas noctés latbbras commfitare cOgébatur ; et
compréhensus a Sullae libertfi , vix data péciiniz‘
i.33 évaSit.
384 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
PostremO per prOpinquOS et afl’
inés suOS veniam impétravit,
din répugnante Sulla, qui cum déprécantibus ornatissimis
viris dénégasset, atque illi pertinaciter contendérent victus
tandem dixit, cum, quem salvam tantOpére cfipérent, ali
quandO Optimatium partibus ,15quas Simul defendissent, exi
tiO15 fiitiirum, multOsque in eO puerO inesse‘8 MariOS.
CE SAR’
S CA PTURE BY THE PIRATES.
2 . Caesar , mortuO Sulla et compOs‘
ita SeditiOne civili , RhO
dum sécédére 4” statuit, ut per Otium A pollOniO, tunc Claris
SimO dicend’
i magistrO, Operam claret ; sed in itinere a pirfitis
captus est, mans itque apud eOS quadragintadiés?4 Per omne
autem illud spatium ita Sé gessit, ut piratis9"terrOr
‘
I' ‘5pariter
ac vénératiOni ”5 esset Interim cOmitéS servOsque dimisérat
ad expédiendas pécfimas , quibus rédimérétur . V'
iginti talenta
piratae postulavérant ; ille vérO quinquaginta datiirum‘8
Sé
spOpondit. Quibus nhmératis , expOsituS est in litOre . Caesar
libératus cOnfestim Miletum ,
25
quae urbs proximé abérat, prO
péravit ibique contracta classe , stantés adhuc in eOdem lOcO
praedOnéS noctii adortus , aliquot navés , mers‘
is ali'
is ,46cépit,
piratasque ad déditiOnem rédactOS eO affécit suppliciO, quod5
illis saepe per jOcum minatus erat, cum ab iiS détinérétur ;
criIcibus 28 illOS sufi'
igi jussit.
CE SAR’
S QUE STORSH IP IN SPA IN .
3. Caesar quaestor3 factus in H ispaniam prOfectuS est ;
cumque A lpés transiret, et ad cOnspectum paupéris ciijusdam
vic’
i cOmités éjus per jOcum inter Se dispfitarent, an lllic étiam
esset ambitiOni 16 lOcus ; SériO dixit Caesar , malle Sé ibi
primum esse quam ROmae “4 Secundum . I ta animus dOmi
natiOnis 9 avidns a prima aetate regnum conchpiscébat,
semperque in Ore habébat hOS Euripidis , Graec’
i poetae , ver
sus : Nam si viblandum est jus , régnandi gratia viélandum
est ; dliis rébus p ietatem Cum vOrO Gui des ,25
quod est
H ispaniae oppidum , venisset , visa A lexandr‘
i 8 magni imagine
386 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
aquiliférum terga vertentem fancibus “3 compréhendit, in
contrariam partem retraxit, dextéramque ad bostem prOten
dens Quorsum ti'
I ,”
inquit, abis ? I llic sunt, quibus cum
dimicamus .
”
QuO factOmilitibus i nimOS addi'
dit.
13
CE SAR BEGINS THE C IVIL WAR .
6 . Caesar cum adhi'
Ic in Gallia détinérétur , né imperfectO
bellO discédéret, postfilavit ut Sib’
I‘licéret, quamv
'
is absenti'
,
iterum cOnSnl’atum pétére quod ei a Senatfi est negatum.
Ea ré commOtuS in Italiam rédiit, armis injiiriam acceptam
vindicaturus ; plfirimisqne urbibns 46 occiipatis Brundisium
contendit, quO Pompéius cOnSi'
Ilésque cOnfi'
Igérant . Tunc
summae audaciae facinas Caesar édidit : aBrundiSiO Byrri
chium inter OppOSitaS classes gravissima biéme 45 transiit ;
cessantibusque cOpiiS, quas subséqu'
i jussérat, cum ad eas
arcessendas 5" frustra misisset, mOrae1” impatiens castris
noeth Ogréditnr , clam sOluS naviciilam cOnscendit ov lfitO
capite, né agnoseérétur . Mare, adversO ventO vehementer
flante, intfiméscébat ; in altum tameh prOtinuS dirig‘
i navi
gium jiibet ; cumque gi'
Ibernator paene obrI'
Itus fluctihus 33
adversae tempestati cédéret :“ Quid times ?” ait ; Caesa
rem véhis .
CE SAR DEFEATS POMPEY AND SUBDUES THE EA ST.
7 . Deinde Caesar in Thessaliam prOfectuS est, I'
Ibi Pompei
ium PharsalicO proeliO fudit, fiigientem pérsecfitus est,
eumque21 in itinere cOgnOvit occisum fuisse. Tum bellum
PtOléma ,
18 Pompéii interfectOr'
I'
,
3 intiilit a quO Sibi qq ue
insidias parari vidébat ; quO vietO,Caesar in Pontum transiit
,
Pharnacemque, Mithridatis filiam rébellantem aggressns in
tra quintum ab adventii diem, quattuor vérO, quibus in
cOnspectum vénérat , hOr'
I'
S, I'
inO proeliO prOfl‘
igavit. QuamvictOriae céléritatem inter triumphandum nOtavit , inscriptO
inter pompae ornamenta trium verbOrum titi'
IlO, Vent, vidi ,vici . Sua deinceps Caesarem I
'
ibique cOmitata est fortuna .
REA DING LESSONS.
ScipiOnem et Jiibam, Nfimidiae régem, reliquias Pompeiana
rum partium in A frica rev entes , dévicit. Pompeii libérOs
in H ispania Siipéravit. C lementer usus est victOria,33
et
omnibus ,14qui contra Sé arma tfilérant, pépercit. Régressus
in urbem, quinquiés triumphavit.
CE SAR IS DECLARED PERPETUAL DICTATOR , BUT'
IS SOON
A FTER A SSA SSINATED .
8 . Bellis civilibus cOnfect'
I'
s , Caesar , dictator3in perpétuum
creatus , agere inSOlentiuS coepit. Sénatum ad Sé vénientem
Sédéns excépit, et quemdam , ut assnrgéret mOnentem, iratO
vultii 4° respéxit. Cum A ntOniuS , Caesaris in omnibus expe
ditiOnibuS cOmes , et tune in cOnSI'
I latu collega , e'
i 18 in sella
aurea sedent’
i prO rostri'
s diadema , insigne régium , impOnéret,
nOn visus est eO factO Offend'
i .49 Quare cOn‘
Iratum est in
cum 5 sexaginta amplius viriS,32 CassiO et BrfitO dI
'
IcihuS cOn
sp’
iratiOniS. Cum igitur Caesar Idibus“ Martiis in sénatum
vénisset, assidentem spécié Officii circumstétérunt, illic ue
firms 5 conjuratis , quasi aliquid rOgatI‘
I ruS , prOpiuS accessit,
rénuent‘
ique tOgam ab utq ue iimérO appréhendit. Deinde
clamantem ,“ I sta quidem vis est,
”
Cassius vfilnérat paullO
infra j iigfilum . Caesar Cascae brachium arreptum graphiO
trajécit, cOnatusque prOSili'
re aliud vulnus accépit. Cum
Marcum Brfitum , quem lOcO fi lii habébat, in SC irruentem
vidisset, dixit° Tu qq ue , fi li mi !
”
Dein I‘
ihf animad
vertit undique SO str icti'
s phgiOnibus pét‘
i, tOga caput Obvol
vit, atque ita tribus et viginti plagis3”cOnfossuS est.
CHARA CTER OF CE SAR .
9. Erat Caesar excelsa statI'
Ira42nigris végétisque Ochl
’
is ,42
capite‘2calvO quam calviti
’
i déformitatem aegré férébat, quod
saepe obtrectantifim jOciS esset Obn5xia . Itaque ex omnibus
hOnOribus Sibi a Senatfi pOpI'
iq ue décrétis nOn aliud récépit
ant I'
isurpavit libentins , quam jus laureae perpét uO gestandae .
Eum v'
in'
i 9 parcissimum fuisse né inimic‘
i quidem négarunt ;
390 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
montem Juram et flumen RhOdanum ; altérum per prOvinciam
nOstram multO facilius atque cxpéditius , proptéreé. quod
RhOdanus nOnnI'
I lli'
S lOc'
I'
S43viidO33 transitur . Extrémum op
pidum A llObrOgum est Genava . Ex eO oppidO pOnS ad Hel
vétiOS pertinet. Omnibus rébus 46 ad prOfectiOnem compara
tis , d iem dicunt, quadié ad ripam RhOdani omnés convéniant .
Caesari cum id nuntiatum esset, maturat ab urbe prOficisci ,
et in Galliam ultériOrem contendit. Pontem jiibet réscind‘
i .
”
CE SA R RECEIVES A N EMBA SSY FROM THE HELVETI I .
6 . Ubi dé éjus adventfi Helvétu certiOréS 7 facti sunt, léga
tOS ad eum mittunt, qui7‘dicérent Sibi 16 esse in animO sine
i'
IllOmaléficiO iter per prOvinciam facere .
’
Caesar a lacii Lé
mannO ad montem Jti ram murum fossamque perdiicit. Négat
SO posse‘8 iter i
'
Ill‘
i per prOvinciam dare .
49 Rélinquébatur I'
ina
per SequanOS via , qua, Séquanis invitis , propter angustiéis ire
nOn pOtérant. His 1‘cum persuadere nOn possent, legatOS ad
DumnOrigemmittunt, ut, eOdepréci'
ttOre,48 impétrarent. Dum
nOrix apud SéquanOS plurimum pOtérat, et Helvétiis 1” érat
amicus , quod OrgétOrigiS fil iam in matrimOnium dfixérat. I ta
que rem suscipit, et a Sequanis impétrat, ut per fines suOS
HelvétiOS ire patiantur .
THE JEDU I AND OTHER TRIBES COMPLA IN To CE SAR OF
THE ENCROACHMENTS OF THE HELVETI I .
7 . Caesar in Italiam magais itinéribus contendit, duasque
ibi légiOnéS cOnscribit, et tréS ex hibernis édficit, et in 131e
Orem Galliam, per A lpés , ire contendit. In finesVOcontiOrumdié septimO pervénit ; inde in A llObrOgum finés , ab A llObrO
gibus in SégusianOS exercitum di'
Icit. Hi sunt extra prOvin
ciam trans RhOdanum Helvetii jam per angustias et
finés SequanOrum suds cOpIaS transduxérant, et A eduOrum
agrOs pOpfilabantur . A edu'
I'
, cum SO20défendére nOn possent ,
legatOS ad Caesarem mittunt rOgatum5‘auxilium. ROdem
tempOre A edu’
i Ambarri , cOnsanguine‘
i 3A eduOrum, Caesarem
REA DING LESSONS. 391
certiOrem faciunt, sese, dépOpi’
l latis agris , n6n facile ab
oppidis vim hostium prOhibére. I tem A llObrOgés , qui trans
RhOdanum vicOs possessic’
mésque hébébant, fugz‘
i 33 sé ad
Caesarem récipiunt. Caesar n6n exspectandum sibi17 stamit,dum in SantOnOs Helvetii pervenirent.
CE SAR SURPR ISES AND ROUTES ONE CANTON OF THE HELVETI I
AT THE RIVER A RAR .
8 . Flumen est A rar , quod per fines A eduOrum et Séquano
rum in RhOdanum influit, incredibili lénitz‘
ite ,40 ita ut Oculis ,
in fitram partem fluat, j iidiciiri n6n pos sit. Id Helvetii , rati
bus et lintribus junctis , transibant. Ubi Caesar certior fac
tus est tres cOpiarum partes Helvetiés ”1transdfixisse , quartam
fere partem citrfi. flfimen esse , dé tertia vigilia é castris prO
fectus ad eam partem pervénit, quae nfindum transiérat. EOS
impéditOs aggressns , maguam eOrum partem concidit. Réliqui
Sésé in proximas silvz‘
is abdidérunt. I s piigus appellabatur
Tigiirinus3nam omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagOS
divisa est. H ic pagus Lficinm Cassium cOnsfilem interfécé
rat, et éjus exercitum sub jugum misérat. I ta , quae pars
calamitatem pOpiilO18 ROmfinO intiilérat, ea princeps poenas
persolvit.
CE SAR CROSSES THE RIVER A RAR AND RECEIVES A
SECOND EMBA SSY FROM THE HELVETI I .
9. HOC proeliO factO, réliquas cOpias HelvétiOrum ut cOnsé
qui posset, pontem in A rzi re faciendum Carat, atque ita exer
citum tri nsdficit. Helvétii , repentino éjus adventii commOti ,legatOs ad eum mittunt, cujus légs
‘
itiOnis DivicOprinceps fuit,
qui bellO45 Cass ifinO dux HelvétiOrum fuérat. I s ita cum
Caesare égit : Si palcem pOpiilus ROmanus cum Helvétiis face
ret, in eam partem itfirOs , ubi Caesar eOs”1esse VOIuisset ; sin
bellO perséqui persévérfiret, réminiscérétur et vétéris incom
mc‘
im12pépuli ROmani , et pristinae Virtutis HelvétiOrum ; sé
ita a patribus majOribusque suis didicisse, ut magis virtl’
ite
392 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
quam d616 contendérent. Quare , né committéret , ut is l6cus ,Iibi cOnstitissent, ex Calamitate p6pi
’
11i ROmani nOmen capé
ret.’
THE HELVETI I , ENCOURA GED BY THE SUCCESS OF THEIR
CAVA LRY, PREPA RE TO A TTA CK CE SA R’
S A RMY.
10. His Caesar ita respondit6 Sibi16 minus dfibitatiODis
dari , quod eas rés , quas commém6rassent, mém6r iii.33 ténéret .
Si Vétéris contiiméliae ‘2 Oblivisci vellet, num récentium injl‘
iri
arum mem6riam dépOnére posse ? Tamen , si Obsidés ab iis
sibi dentar , uti ea13quae polliceantur factfirOs intelligat, et Si
A eduis dé injfiriis quas ipsis s6ciisque e6 rum int1‘
ilérint, item
Si A llobrOgibus satisfaciant, sese cum iis pacem factfirum .
DivicO respondit : Ita HelvetiOS amajéribus suis institutOs
esse , fiti Obsidés accipére , n6n dare cOnsuévérint ; ejue rei
p6pulum ROmanum esse testem .
’
HOC responsOdatO,discessit.
Poster6 die castra ex e6 1606 m6vent. Idem facit Caesar .
Equitatum omnem praemittit, qui5 Videant
, quas in partés
hostés iter faciant. Qui alién6 1606 cum equitatfi HelvétiOrum
proelium committunt, et pauci dé nOstris cadunt. Helvetii
audacius subsistére , nOnnunquam nOstrOS lacessere coepé
runt. Caesar suOS a proeliO continébat, ac satis habébat in
praesentia bostem rapinis31pr6hibére . I ta dies 2‘circiter
quindecim iter fécérunt, uti , inter n6vissimum hostium agmen
et nOstrum primum , n6n amplias quinis ant Senis milibus 38
passuum intéresset.
THE JEDUI NEGLECT TO FURNISH THE CORN THEY HAD
PROMISED AND CE SAR CALLS THE GALLIC CH IEFS TO
A COUNC IL .
11. Intérim cottidié Caesar A eduovs22 frumentum, qu
‘
od 5
essent publice polliciti , flagitare . Nam , propter frig6ra , n6n
m6do friimenta in agris matura n6n érant, sed né pabfili qui
dem satis magna COpia suppétébat. E6 autem
quod flfimine A rare navibus subvéxérat, minus iiti49p6térat,
394 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
DIVITIA CUS BESEECHES CE SAR NOT To TAKE SEVERE MEA S
URES AGA INST H IS BROTHER .
13. Cum ad has suspiciOnés certissimae rés accédérent, satis
esse causae arbitrabatur , quare in eum aut ipse animadver
téret, aut civitatem animadvertére jubéret. His omnibus
finum répfignabat, quod D ivitiaci fratris summum in p6pI'
IluIn
ROmanum studium, summam in SC V6luntatem, égrégiam
fidem, justitiam,tempérantiam cOgnOvérat : nam né éjus
suppliciO D ivitiaci animum Offendéret vérébatur . I taque ,
priusquam quicquam Cfmarétur ,63D ivitiacum 48
ad sé v6eari
jubet Simul comm6néfacit quae , ipSO4“
praesente , in conciliO
GallOrum s int dicta ; et ostendit quae separatim quisque dé
e6 apud Se dixérit. Divitiacus multis cum laerimis Obsécrare
coepit, né quid gravins in fratrem statuéret : scire‘9Sé
2‘illa
esse Vera , sese tamen et amOI'e fraterné et existimatiéne vulgi
comm6véri . Quod Si quid ei13aCaesare gravins accidisset, cum
ipse cum 16cum amicitiae apud cum téuéret, néminem existi
matiirum n6n suaV6luntate factum , qua ex ré futurum , uti
tOtius Galliae 8 animi a 8 6 avertérentur .
’Caesar éjus dextram
prendit ; Dumn6rigem ad sé V6eat ; fratrem adhibet ; quae
in c6 répréhendat ostendit m6uet ut in réliquum tempus
omnés suspiciOnéS vitet.
CE SAR PREPARES TO ATTA CK THE HELVETH .
14. EOdem die ab explOratOribus certior 6 factus hostés sub
monte cOnsédissemilia 2‘passuum ab ipsius castris octo , qualis
esset68natfira montis et qualis in circuitfi adscensus , qui 06g
noscérent misit. Rénuntiatum est facilem esse. De tertia
Vigilia Titum Labienum, legatum , cum duObuS légiOnibus
summum jugum montis adscendére j l‘
ibet. Ipse de quarta
vigilia eOdem itinere , qu6 hostés iérant, ad e6s contendit ;
équitatumque omnem ante sé mittit.
READING LESSONS. 395
CE SAR’
s PLAN Is DEFEATED BY THE MISTAKE OF CONSIDIUS.
15 . Prima liice , cum summus m6ns aTit6 Labien6 téné
rétur , ipse ab hostium castrie n6u longius mille et quingentis
passibus abesset, neque aut ipsius adventfis , aut Labiéni ,
c6gnitus esset, COnsidius , équ6 admissO, ad eum accurrit ;
dicit montem , quem a Labien6 occfipari v6luérit, ab hosti
bus 32teneri ; id sé ex GalliciS armis atque insignibus c6gn6
visse . Caesar suas coplas In pI'
OXImum collem subdiicit,
aciem instruit. Labienus , ut erat ei praeceptum (ut undiqueiiu6 temp6re in hostés impetus fiéret) , monte occupatO,
n6str6 8 exspectabat, proeli6que abstinébat . Mult6 dénique
die, per exp16rat6rés Caesar c6gn6vit montem a suis ténéri ,
et C6nsidium, perterritum, quod“n6n vidisset pr6 vis6 ré
nuntiasse . E6 die, qu6 c6nsuérat intervallO, hostés sequitur ;
et milia passuum tria ab e6 rum castris castra p6uit.
TO SECURE SUPPLIES CE SAR TURNS A SIDE FROM THE PUR
SUIT OF THE HELVETI I .
16 . Postridié éjus diei quod‘
Omnin6 biduum s iipérérat,
cum exercitui frumentum metiri 6portéret, et quod 6 Bi
bracte , Oppid6 A edu6 rum longé maxim6 et 06pi6 sissim6 , n6u
amplius milibus passuum du6déviginti abérat, rei friimen
tariae‘8 prospiciendum existimavit. acBibracte2"ire contendit.
Helvetii , seu quod perterrit6 s R6man6 s discedere existimarent,
sive quod ré friimentaria31intercludi posse c6nfidérent, itinere
conversO, nOstrOS a n6vissim6 agmine inséqui ac lacessére
coepérunt.
CE SAR PREP ARES FOR A GENERAL ENGAGEMENT .
17 . Postquam id animum advertit, c6pias suas Caesar
in proximum collem subducit, équitatumque, qui sustinéret
hostium impetum , misit. Ipse inte'
rim in colle médi6 tri
plicem aciem instrfixit. Sarcinas in finum l6eum c6nferri , et
NOTES .
I . FA BLES.
1. sti l ls , present participle, see sto ; d6miis, genitive, fourth declen
sion, see 174 ; how does it differ in meaning from d6mi’ —
praet6reun
tem ( see praetéreo ) agrees with li'
Ipum, object of Vidit. A ccount for
the position of inquit. Is n6n tii , etc direct or indirect discourse it
How is 160118 declined in the plural? A NS. 160i, M. , means places in
books ; l60a,N ., places ; gen. 16c6rum, dat. l6cis , acc. l6c6s, M. ; 16ca, N .
,
etc.
2 . Subvéni ( imperative ) , help .—pu6r6 , etc. ,
reproached to the boy his
rashness, or, as we say , he reproached the boy for his rashness .
—répré
hendére ( infinitive ) , to reprove. licet, it is permitted, i.e. you may
reprove.
3. captum is a partie ., from capio, agreeing with lc6asm.-mi lum
(nominative ) , understand n é liidificat.
4. pollem indfitns , having put on the skin ; induor, although passive
in form,is used in a middle or reflexive sense, as, I clothe
, i .e. I put
clothing on myself,and may be followed by the accusative.—Vidéret
why subj . ?—06natns est , a deponent verb ; see 28 2 — haec, i.e .
vulpes . audissem for audivissem ; see 89. 2 .
5. téne secti ri , you hunt a lion ? té is the subject of secti ri ;
ne asks the question.—n§ quidem,
not even whose voice even you
could not endure ; 116 quidem,not even
,always have the emphatic word
between them .
6 . hic, he. lfip6 , abl.—pontificem sacrifici tiirum,se. esse, tha t
the priest would, etc. For the construction in indirect discourse, see
348 fi . I would rather .
7 . temp6re ; why ablative ? — Justa, j ustly, lit. j ust things ; see
83. 4.
8 . pépérit, see pario . rata hanc paritiiram (esse) , thinking that
she would lay see 348 . pliis hordei , more barley see 237 .
NOTES. 399
II . LIFE OF CE SA R .
[F or a sketch of Cazsar’
s lyz» , see p .
1. annum décimum,being in his sixteenth year .
—pau16 post
fix6rem,a little while after he marr ied Cornelia , dficére fix6rem,
to marry,
is said of the husband only .—ciijus inimicus , since her father was
unfi'iendly to Sulla how does inimicus , as a noun, differ from hostis ?
at eam dimittéret, to divorce her, lit. that he should divorce her .—b6nis,
property . cum quaerérétur , when he was even soughtfor in order to
be put to death what kind of a clause is this ? why imperfect subj . ? on
what verb does it depend?—mfiti ti veste : what does this participle
denote ? how is the ablative absolute rendered (2 59 ) quarti nae,
supply fébris , lit. sick with the disease of qua rtan ague li bbr i bat. per
pr6pinqn6s , etc . ,by means of his relations . qui dénégasset, when he
would have refused it to the distinguished men who begged for it dénégas
set, see 338 . aliqnandi'
) ffitfirum ,will ruin ( lit. be for a ruin ) the
party of the ar istocracy, etc. ; give the synonyms of cfipio ; of pner .
2 . Sulla died B .C . 78 .—morta6 , 2 8 2 . sécédére, to retire.
—per
Otium,at (his ) leisure.
—dicendi , of oratory .—6péram di ret, might
give (his ) attention.—SYN . maneo , rema in, whether for a long or short
time ; comm6ror , remain for some time in a place, soj ourn ; hi bito,dwell permanently. 86 gen it, he conducted himself. at esset
does this clause denote purpose or result ? why is esset in the impf.
subj . —Give the syns . of intérim.—ad péciinii s, to get money :
the gerundive sometimes denotes purpose . servus , mancipium,famil
lus , all mean a slave ; servus, as one politically inferior ; mancipium,
a salable commodity ; fi mfilus , a family possession.—SYN . 06mm,
companion, a fellow-traveller sOcius, a companion, member of the same
society ; 86d51is, a companion in amusement or pleasure. quibus
rédimérétur : does this relative clause denote purpose or result?
Miletus , a flourishing city of Ionia. proxime abérat, was at
the nearest distance ofi‘
. SYN . poena, general word for punishment ;
snpplicium ( supplico, kneel ) , a severe punishment ( the criminal kneelingfor the blow ) criiciatus (crux,
cross ) , torture, as of one on the cross ;
tormentum (torqueo, twist) , a racking torture, to extort confession .
3. quaestor factus : fio, in the sense of to be made, appointed,
is used as the passive of facio .—inter sé, together .
—conciipiscébat,
desired earnestly, coveted .—ia Ore habébat, lit . had in his mouth, i .e.
kept repeating—0615s , see 2 78 . 1.
—quod : a relative generally
agrees in gender with a noun in its own clause .—mém6r§,bile a par
titive genitive could not be used after nihil only neuter adjectives of
402 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
8 . 0oepit has passive perf. and infinitives, 305 . 1.
-quendam, for
quemdam. assurgéret, why imperfect subj . ei sedenti , on
him sitting in the golden chair .—regiam,
royal. 5. sexi ginti
vir is, by more than sixty men.—06njiir5.tnm est, a consp iracy was formed .
— Idibns Martiis , on the Ides of hl arch, i.e. the 15th . assidentem
circumstétérunt, they stood around him s itting, under pretence ofpaying honor .
—quasi r6g§tiirus , as if to ask something. claiman
tem,sc. sum,
i .e. Caesarem.— arreptum,
which he had seized .—quem
habébat, whom he had regarded as his son .
9. erat statura, Caesar was of , etc. , see 292 . aegré férébat,
grieved (on account) quod obnoxia ,it was often the subj ect j br the
j okes of his slanderers . sibi, to him. laureae gestandae, of wearinga crown of laurel.—eum fuisse, that he was . inimici : give the
synonymes.—n6 and quidem enclose the emphatic word as in the
text —ad rempublicam,to overturn the republic.
—anteibat,see
anteeo .—d6tectum, uncovered : see détégo. sive esset, whether
it was sunshine or rain.—SYN . pluvia,
ra in (general word ) imber , ra in
(heavy , pouring shower ) ; nimbus , ra in (from dark clouds ) . - longis
simi s vias . Ce sar was noted for the rapidity of his movements ; he
is said to have travelled at the rate of one hundred Roman miles per
day , equal to about ninety-two English miles . innixus atribua,
resting upon inflated bags .
I II . THE HELVETIA N WA R .
SKETCH OF CE SAR’
S LIFE .
GA IUS JULI US CE SAR was born, by the common account, in the
year B .C . 100 (or , by a probable reckoning, two years earlier ) , and was
assassinated in the year B .C . 44, at the age of fifty-six. The earlier
date of his birth is consistent with the fact that he was Que stor in
R C . 68 , JEdile in,
65, Pre tor in 62 , and Consul in 59, since one was
not eligible to these Qflices, according to the Lex A nnalie, until he had
entered upon the age offthirty
-seven, forty , and forty-three respectively .
But Ce sar was most likely exempted by a special act,as Pompey and
many other prominent political leaders had been (from the LexA nnalie) .
Ce sar sprang from an old patrician family , but the circumstances of his
early life brought him into close connection with the Marian , or demo
cratic, party ; for his aunt Julia had married Marius, and he himself,
when but a boy of seventeen ,had taken the daughter of C inna, one of
the Marian leaders, for his wife . A t the bidding of Sulla, when dic
404 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
and was now a prominent member of the senate, fearing to be defeated
by one so much inferior in rank , station ,and age, offered Ce sar large
sums of money to pay his debts, if he would withdraw from the con
test. On the morning of the election, Ce sar is reported to have said
to his mother, who would gladly have had him withdraw from the
struggle, I shall this day be either chief pontiff or an exile .
The next year Ce sar was Pre tor, and as Propre tor he went, at
the end of his year of office, to govern Spain . Before his departure,
his old friend C rassus, the richest man at Rome, had to pay a part of
his debts, and to stand security for the rest to the amount of nearly a
million of dollars . Ce sar is reported to have said in his reckless way
that he needed a hundred million sesterces to be worth just nothing at
all . In Spain be displayed that civil and military ability which after
wards made h im famous . It must have been a strange sight to see
this dissolute spendthrift, th is profl igate demagogue, with his counte
nance pale and white, withered before its time by the excesses of the
capital, this delicate and epileptic man ,walking at the head of his
legions , and fighting as the foremost soldier with the wild tribes of
Lusitania .
On his return to Rome, Ce sar found Pompey , who had just com
pleted the Mithridatic war in the East,and was arranging for his
triumphal entry into the city , at variance w ith the senate. Ce sar at
once saw his opportunity ; he formed a political coalition with Pompey
and C rassus,one part of the bargain being that Ce sar should have
the consulship for the next year (R C . and after that the govern
ment of Gaul for five years . In accordance with this programme,
Ce sar was entrusted, at the expiration of his consulship, w ith the
command of C isalpine Gaul, I llyricum,and the province of Narbo
,
or simply provincia with three legions, for a term of five years .
Ce sar had now attamed his object. A s Proconsul of C isalpine Gaul,
he could watch the progress of affairs in the capital , while the threat
cuing movements of the tribes in Gaul opened to him the prospect of
subjugating the country and training an army for the impending civil
war,for Ce sar no doubt then clearly saw that a struggle between him
self and Pompey for the chief power at Rome was inevitable.
For a long time the Romans had felt the importance of possessing
Gaul, but as yet no systematic effort had been made to extend their
dominion in that quarter farther than occupying the seaboard between
the A lps and Pyrenees (R C . The climate of Gaul was health
ful, the soil rich and fertile, and the intercourse with Rome easy by
land and sea. Roman merchants and farmers had already emigrated
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
line of entrenchments had been constructed from Lake Geneva to the
Jura Mountains . Defeated in the attempt to cross the river in this
direction, the Helvetii were compelled to take their way along its
right bank, and thus make their journey westward by a more north
erly route. Ce sar hastily collected his forces, followed up the left
bank of the Saone, cut to pieces in a fierce battle a part of the Helve
tian army , and pursued the remainder to Bibracte, where he defeated
them in a terrible battle, and compelled the survivors to return to their
native country and rebuild their homes.
1. Gallia : Gaul extended from the Pyrenees and the Gulf of Lyons
on the south to the British Channel and German Ocean on the north .
It was bounded on the west by the A tlantic Ocean,and on the east by
the Rhine and Italy . It was called Transalpina ( i.e. beyond the A lp s ) ,to distinguish it from Cisalpina ( i .e. on this side of the A lps ) , in north
ern I taly . I t included France, Belgium, part of Switz erland and Hol
land, and the part of Germany west of the Rhine . In the division
which Ce sar here makes he does not include the southeast part, called
Gallia Narbonensis , or commonly Pr6vincia , whence the modern name
Provence. The Roman dominion in the Pr6vincia was secured by the
establishment of Narbo Marcius,a Roman colony on the A tax, in
B .0. 121.
The most remote Roman towns towards the west and north were Lug
dunum, Convenarum (or Convenne ) , Tolosa ,Vienna, and Geneva . The
country was well provided with roads and bridges . The commerce on
the Rhone, Garonne, Loire, and Seine was considerable and lucrative,
and extended even into Britain . The people were tall, of fair complexion
and of sanguine temperament, fond of fighting, but easily discouraged .
They were skilled in working copper and gold. Copper implements of
excellent workmanship, and even now malleable, have been found in the
tombs in many places in Gaul . The Romans are said to have learned
from them the art of tinning and silvering. The Gauls, or as they
called themselves the Celts , had attained so much skill in mining,
that the miners, especially in the iron-mines on the Loire, acted an im
portant part in sieges . There was no political union among the different
clans, no leading canton for all Gaul, no tie, however loose , uniting the
whole nation under one leadership . Sometimes one canton would ex
tend its power over a weaker one, as the Suessiones in the north, the
maritime cantons in the west, the two leagues in the south , one headed
by the JEdui, the other by the Sequani ; but the Celts as a nation lacked
political unity, and the cantons, for themost part, existed independently
NOTES. 407
side by side. In matters of religion they had long been centraliz ed.
The association of Druids embraced the British islands, all Gaul, and
perhaps other Celtic communities . The Druids had a special head
elected by the priests themselves, special privileges, as exemption from
taxation and military service, and an annual council.
The Province in Ce sar’s time extended from the Pyrenees to the A lps
on the coast, and was bounded on the east by the A lps, on the west by
the Mons Cevenna (Cevennes ) , southward from the latitude of Lugdu
num (Lyons) , and on the north (where it narrowed off) by the Rhone,from the western extremity of Lake Geneva to the junction of the
Rhone and Saone . omnis : Ce sar means all of Gaul, except that part
which had been subdued by the Romans, in opposition to Gallia in the
limited sense of one of the three divisions .—est divisa , lit. has been
divided ; usually translated is divided, as this form in English expresses
a completed action, the participle being used as an adjective.—tr68 is
placed at the end of the sentence as being the significant word, indi
cating the number of divisiona—I'
mam: supply partem as object ofinc61unt. aliam , another (part ) : if Ce sar had been enumerating
them in order, he would have used altéram or sécundam. tertian
appellantur , the third, those who a re called in our language Gauls .
institfiti'
s, in customs ; when three or more nouns stand together, the
conjunctions may be omitted altogether , or used between the first and
second, and second and third, etc. inter 86, among themselves or fromone another . dividunt is to be supplied after Matr6na et Séquana .
proptére'
a'
, quod , because ( lit. because of this) ; distinguished between
proptérei , for this reason , and praetérea, besides . Germanis, to the
Germans .—inc61unt, dwell. Give the synonymes of bellum . qu6que,
also ; the ablative of quisque is qu6que. virtfite, in valor ; virtfis, from
same root as vir , means manhood.— I
‘
ina pars, one part, of the main
divisions of Gaul, i .s . Gallia Celtica . flfimine, etc. notice that the
connectives are omitted —finibus : finis, limit ; plur . , finés, limits,often applied to what is included in those limits, territory —ad, towards .
Belgae hence the modern Belgium. inferi6rem pat tern, i.e.
towards the mouth of the river . ad, near to.—spectat inter occi sum
s61is, it looks between the setting of the sun, i.s . it looks northwest, i .s . from
the Province.
2 . apud, among ; i pud with the name of a person often means at
the house of ; with the name of an author, in the writings of .—n6bilis
simus, see 141. ditisslmus from dis (149.— Is is expressed
because it is emphatic. Note the position of the word Orget6r ix
at the end of the sentence, to give prominence to the name. SYN .
408 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
n6bilis, clam s,illustris, denote distinction : clarus is one celebrated
for his deeds ; illustris, for his rank or character ; n6bll is, for his noble
birth ; céléber and incliitus ( inclitus ) denote celebrity, are generally
used of things, not of persons . civi tati, the state,i .e. the people, all the
inhabitants of a state under one government ; it is here the indirect
object of persuasit, while the clause introduced by ut is the direct
object (321. l ) . exirent is plural on account of the plural implied in
civitas ; why in the imperf. subj . ? continentur , are hemmed in.
6116 ex parte, on one side. Helvétium, see Helvétius . altissim6 ;altus, high, when reckoned from belOW ’ deep ,
when from above down
ward —tertia, sc. ex parte Lemann6 : now Lake Geneva .
The pupil should be required to describe the rivers and give the situa
tion of the places mentioned in/the text.
3. adducti , induced . pertinérent is in the subjunctive, because it isimplied that these things belonged to their departure in the opinion of
the Helvetians ; which (as the Helvetians thought) , perta ined to their
departure—jfiment6rum (from same root as jungo, jt ) is
both pack and draught animals. sementes facere, to make as
large sowings as possible for the force of quam with the verb possum
in connection w ith the superlative, see 151. Obs. 3.—proximas has no
positive ; its place is supplied by pr6pinquus . in c6nfirmant,theyfix by law upon their depa rturefor the third year .
4. A d cOnf iciendas, to accomplish con is here intensive ; it usually
means , in composition,together . In how many ways may a purpose
be expressed in Latin (321.3, Obs . 1) deligitur : deligo, to choose in
general (not to be undecided in one’
s choice) Eligo, choose, in the sense
of selecting from several. Séquan6, the Sequanian . ut régnum
occfiparet : this clause is the direct object of persuid et, preva ils uponpersuadet is in the historical present, and may therefore be followed
by the imperfect subjunctive (320. Give the synonymes of régnum .
—p16bi, to the plebeians ( see L.
’s Rom . Hist ) . ut idem c6nar6tur , tha t
he should strive for the same thing.-7 t6tius , all. SYN . omni s, all
(without exception ) , in opposition to n6m6 ; finiver si (finns-verto, lit.
turned into one, i .e . the parts brought into unity ) , all collectively , in oppo
sitiou to sing'llli ; cunctI all united together in opposition to di spersi
t6tus , the whole, in opposItion to separate parts ; whereas intéger ( in
tango, lit. untouched ) , uninj ured, still whole.—ea rés, this design, lit. this
consp iracy. ut, when. ex dicére,to plead his cause in chains ; lit.
out of chains , i.e. (being ) in chains . damnatum, se. sum,translate, it wa s
necessary that the punishment should follow him condemned,namely, tha t he
should be burned ; the clause at igni cremarétur explains poenam (342 .
410 F IRST STEPS I N LA TIN .
dor,a lieutenant ; Ori tor , one who pleads a cause
,an envoy, an orator ;
rhétor , one who gives lessons in rhetoric, a rhetorician. qui dicérent, to
say, lit. who should say, a relative clause denoting purpose—sibi esse
in animb, that it was their intention, lit. that it wa s to them in mind : what
is the subject of the verb esse ? What is the object of dicérent ?
sine 11116 mfl éficib, without (doing ) any harm. The Helvetii had two
ways by which they could go from home, one through the narrow pass
between Mount Jura and the banks of the Rhone ; the other by the
fords of the Rhone, which led directly into the Province. In order to
prevent the Helvetii from taking the latter route, Ce sar drew a line of
fortifications on the southern side of the river, from Lake Geneva to
the Jura mountains, a distance of about
eighteen miles . To accomplish this work ,
C e sar had the loth legion 5000, and
about 5000 or 6000 new levies or
infantry . négat 86 posse, he says
he cannot ; négo is generally used in pref
erence to dico n6n . fine. is emphatic, one
only. ut lmpétri rent, that, he being the
intercessor,they might obta in ( their request ) .
plfirimum pbtérat, was able to accomplish
a great deal (Rule amicus , f riendly.
in mi trimbninm dfixérat, had marr ied ;
when speaking of a man tak ing a wife,
dficere (ux6rem) was used, i .e. he leads
her to his house ; of a woman taking a
husband, niibere was used, lit nfibére 96
vir6 , to veil herself for a husband,—an allusion to the veil worn during
the marriage ceremony . itaque , therefore ; itaque means and so.
What is the object of impétrat?
7. in Italiam,into I taly , i .e. into C isalpine Gaul . dui s 16gi6nés
c6nscribit : the 11th and 12th, and the three ( the 7th, 8 th, and 9th )legions in winter
-quarters at Aquileia, in Illyria one legion (the loth )
was already on the Rhone six in all z about men. The A110
broges andVocontii were both in the province. jam,at this time, i .e .
while Ce sar was absent collecting troops. A ngustias, the narrow pass
between the Jura and the Rhone. SYN . p6piilor , to ravage (by pillageand fire ) ; vasto
,to lay waste ; dép6piilor , utterly to ravage. A edai
'
Ambarr i'
,the E dui near the A rar (or Sa6ne ) .—r6g§tnm,
to ask, see
2 66 .—d6p6piilatis , the use of the participle of the deponent verb in
a passive sense, see 2 79. a ; the way led through the Pas-de-l’Ecluse.
NOTES. 411
8585 n6n facile pr6hibére, that they with difliculty could ward
of ; etc . se recipiunt, betake themselves . n6n exspectandum
(esse) sibi statuit, he thought he ought not to wait.
8 . fliimen est A rar , there is a river (called ) A rar; now the Sadne.
It unites with the Rhone at the city of Lugdunum (Lyons ) , about seventymiles from Lake Geneva .
—quod agrees with flfimen (Rule — in0r6
dibili possit, with incredible smoothness of current, so that it cannot be
determined by the eyes in what direction itflows ; léni ti te, smoothness, con
trusted not only with the Rhone, but with the rapidity of the rivers in
I taly .—posait, 32 2 .
—ratibus ct lintrlbus junctis, the ablative abso
lute to supply the place of the perfect active participle ; lintribus , small
boa ts ; these were boats made of logs hollowed out—transibant, werenow crossing ; note the force of the imperf. Helvétibs tri nsdi xisse,that the Helvetians had, etc. In Napoleon
’s Ce sar, this place of crossing
the Saone is said to have been at Chalons sur Sa6ne ; according to
G61er , near Lyons, between Trevoux and Villefranche.—0itra flfimen ,
on this s ide of the r iver , i.e. on the east side.—dé tertii vigilii , j ust at
the beginning of the third watch. The Romans divided the night into four
watches ( the first beginning at sunset ) , each of three hours ; the third
watch began at midnight and extended it now being the month of
June ) to 2 o’clock A .M . aggressns has the sense of a perfect active
participle, the verb being deponent—How does concidit difier from
concidit ?—is pi gus, this canton , in the neighborhood of Z iirich .
appelli bi tnr , from appello, name, also to speak to ; v600, call, summon
n6m1no, name, in the sense of appointing or electing ; cit6, quote. L.
Cassium, this defeat was in B C . 107 . c6nslilem,see L .
’s Rom. Hist
,
p . 50.— sub jiigum. I t was considered the lowest degree of military
disgrace for the Roman soldiers to be obliged to pass under the yoke .
The yoke was formed by placing two spears upright in the ground, and
fastening a third across the top of the other two ; under this the con
quered army must pass in token of subjugation. ea persolvit,
was thefi rst to sufl’
er punishment ; princeps is equivalent to prima .
9. consequi , to overtake. in A rare, over and upon, i.e. a fl oatingbridge. fi ciendum, 2 8 6 . Why is éjus used, not su6 —16gat68 , indiplomatic language, an ambassador or envoy ; in military affairs, lieu
tenant, i.e . the commander of one or several legions ; the tribunes still
ranked as formerly , among the higher officers of the legion, but their
duties were in Ce sar’
s time limited more to the management of the inter
nal affairs of the legion . Neither did a tribune take the place of a légi tus
in case the latter was disabled, but a quaestor , who also outranked the
tribunes. ciijus fuit, thechief of which embassy was Divico. bell6
412 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
in the war with Cassius, i .e. in 107, when the consul Cas
sius was the commander. égit, argue, discourse. SYN . dux,a leader
,
a general ductor , a guide impéri tor , a commander or emperor .—pi
com and bell?) are placed prominently to mark them as significant
words. This section is an indirect discourse depending on div
céus (saying) implied in égit. Compare the form of direct discourse
under 348 . For the use of the future indicative or present subjunctive,see 32 6 . 2 , and 355 fi .
—rem1niscérétur ineommbdi , he should
remember both the old overthrow (lit. inconven ience) this refers to the
defeat of Cassius . né committeret, he should not bring it to pass com
mittere ut often forms a periphrase like efi‘icEre (see 342 . 3) né com
miséris in direct discourse .
10. his, se . légi tis . sibi di ri'
,that the less doubt is given to
him minus , subj . ace. of dari'
, following respondit.—t6néret mémbrii ,held in memory ; remembered . vétéris contiiméliae, former insult .
facturés , se. Helvétibs . A eduis is gover ned by satisfi ciant. ipsis
( see 354. 4) the dative follows the compound, intiilerint, 203.
satisfaciant, pay damages. The direct discourse (355 ) would be : mihiminus diibiti tiiinis datur , quod eas res , qui s commémbravistis ,
m6m6ria téneo. Si vétéris contfiméliae oblivisci velo, num possum
récentium injfiriarummémbriam d6p6nére Tamen si obsidés ii vebis
mihi dabuntur (dentur ) , uti ea , quae pollicemini , v6s esse factiir'
es
intelligam, et si A eduis dé injfiriis qui s ipsis s6ciisque e6rum iutii
li'
stis, item si'
A llbbrbgibus satisfaciétis , v6bi'
s cum pacem faciam.
hbc responsb di tb cum hoe responsum dedisset. idem, neut the
masculine is idem. qui videant : what does this relative clause denote,
cause, purpose, etc . videant is plur ., because équiti tum im
plies équités as the subject —qui , these, i.e. équités . aliénb 16c6 , in
an unfavorable place, lit. a place better for the other party ; for the omission
of the preposition, 2 70. 2 . c.—audi cius, still more boldly. ac prae
sentiii , and deemed it sufiicient for the present. ita, in such a way.
n6visslmum agmen , the part of the army nearest to those pursuing, i .e .
the rear . nfistrnm pr imum,our f ront, or van ; supply agmen .
—ubu
interesset, not more than five or s ix miles (each day ) intervened ; the
distributives quini'
s and senis imply that this was the constant differ
ence between the armies.
l l . intérim, give the syns.—eotti'dié, every day, is used of things that
are daily repeated ; in singiiliis dies ,da ily, of those things which from day
to day are making advance. quod fli giti re, kept demanding
which they had promised in the name of the state ; flagiti re, the historical
infinitive, equivalent to fli gitiibat ; polliciti essent refers to the prom
414 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
ceive by the senses or by the mind. quamdiii p6tuérit, as long as he
had been able. SYN . tacao, utter no word, be silent, pass over in silence ;
sileo, make no noise,be still.
12 . Dumnérigem désignari'
,that Dumnorix was meant. Dumno
rix led the national party among his people, as opposed to Rome,while
his brother Divitiacus favored an alliance w ith the Romans.—pliiribus
praesentibus (abl. lit. more being present, or in the presence of so
many—eds rés jactar i , that these matters should be agitated ; jacti ri ,
a frequentative from jacie .—Give the syns . of concilium .
—repérit
esse véra,hefinds ( that these statements ) things a re true.
— ipsum
audacia, tha t it was Dumnorix himself, a man of the greatest boldness .
cfipidum nbv i rum rérum , desirous of a revolution.—complfir§s
hi bére, that he hasfarmedfor many years all the revenues of the xEdui at
a low p r ice.—SYN . vecti
'
gal, tithes (decuma ) , on agricultural produce ;
tribfitum,an extraordinary p roperty tax
,levied in the tribes, and paid
back when the exigency was passed scripti ra, rent of the pasture
lands ; portbr ium,harbor duties originally , afterwards applied to tolls
paid on trans it of merchandise . The revenues among the Romans
were not collected directly ,but were farmed out (or leased) by the
censors to contractors called publicani , who paid a fixed sum into the
treasury , and collected the taxes for their own use ; they so abused their
privileges, that the name publican became a term of reproach—illa
licente, he bidding, i.s . when he bid . andest, see348 . rem fi milii rem,
private property. Dumnbrix is the subject of fi vere and
SYN . pbtentia, power as an attribute of a person pbtestiis , power as of
a magistrate, power to do anything ; ditio ( see dicio) , power, j urisdiction.
—si'
quid Rfimi nis , if anything then should happen to the Romans ,
i.e. in case of any disaster . obtinendi'
, see 2 64. 1.—impéri6 , under the
government, ablative of time and cause. dé reg’
ué, of royal power .
13. certissimae rés, the most undoubted facts . animadvertéret,
should punish him. finum répfignabat, one cons ideration opposed .
summnm stiidium,the very grea t attachment towards theRomanpeople
the clause quod, etc .,is in apposition w ith imam, and might be intro
duced by namely.—v61unti tem, good will, as a friend ; stiidium,
attach
ment,z eal
,as a partisan—fins refers to Dumnorix. give
the synonymes .—lti que cbni rétur , therefore before he attempted any
thing for the subjunctive, see 337 . commbnéfi cit, reminds , lit. warns .
- ip86 (354. 4) praesente, when he himself was present, i .e. Diviaticus .
de e6 , concerning him, i .e. Dumnorix.
—apud as, before himself; i .e.
Ce sar .—n6 quid sti tuéret, that he should not determine anything
too severe aga inst his brother . scire véra, ( saying) that he knew those
NOTES. 415
things were true. SYN . pbpiilus, the people, originally only the patri
cians,came to include the plebeians ; plebs, common people, opposed to
the patricians ; vulgus , the ignorant multitude. quod accidisset,
because if anything too severe should be done to him by Cwsar ; accidiaset
represents, in indirect discourse, the fut. perf. indie. (accidérit ) bysequence of tenses ( see 32 6 . sum lboun ,
that place so high a
place—i pud sum, i.e. Cwsar . fiitfirum,
it would happen, see 349.
animi , the afl ections . fratrem adhibet, he has his brother present.
14. exploratbribus : SYN . explorator , a scout : spéciilator , a spy
Emissarius, a secret agent—milia passuum 4854 ft.
, a little less than
an English mile 5280 ft. qui lls adscensus, what kind of an
ascent it was by a circuitous rotlte, i.e. at various parts of its circuit. qui
cbgnbseérent, misit, he sent (persons ) to ascerta in ; qui cbgnoseérent
denotes the purpose ( see the antecedent of qui is the Object of
misit : what is the object of eagnoscérent faci lem,se . adseensum
dé quarts. vigilis'
iv about 2 o’
clock A .M . e6dem itinere, along the
same route. by which
15 . prima liice, at daybreak. summus m5n s, the summit of the moun
tain .—ipse, and when he himself, se. cum.
—passibus ( see 215 . l ) ; a
Roman pace was the distance from where the heel is raised to where it
is set down again 5 Rom . ft . nearly Bug. ft. a Rom . mile
4840 ft. , an Eng. mile 5280ft. néque Labiéni , and (when )neither his own approach nor that of Labienus . Equb admiss5, with his
horse at full speed . vbluérit, in indirect discourse —sé is the
subject of eognovisse. ex insignibus, by the Gallic arms and
ornaments ; insignibus , lit. devices on the shields and helmets . subdficit,
draws oj i—ut si'
praeceptum,as he had been instructed . What is the
subject of praeceptum érat ? exspectabat, continued to look out
imperfect, see 317 . 3.—mult5 denique die, at last, when much of the day
had passed. pr5 visb, as seen lit. for seen . What is the object of
rénuntii sse ? qub cbnsuérat intervallb, with the usual distance
intervalli'
) is the antecedent of qub.
16 . diei'
is gen. after the adverb postri'
dié.—métiri , to measure out.
rei existimavit, he thought he must look outfor supplies, se . sibi esse.
Bibracte Mont Beuvray.—seu existlmi rent, because they be
lieved that the Romans,being terrified, were departing ; the subjunctives
existim'
arent and cbnfidérent : sometimes the subjunctive is used after
quod , quia, with verbs of saying, thinking, etc ., although the idea ex
pressed is that of the writer, and the reason assigned is his own . Roby
explains this subjunctive in 1746 , and rems . ; Vanicek ,527, sum. 2 .
Caesar’
s army was composed of four veteran legions, and two legions
418 F I RST STEPS I N LA TIN .
for the subjunctive, see 321.—ancip
'
iti proelib, in a double confl ict ( lit.
two-headed ) . a
19. altéri alteri , the one pa rty the other party, referr ing to the
Helvetians,and to the Ben and Tulingi respectively .
— ah hbra'
. sep
tima, from one O’
clock in the afternoon the day began at sunrise, and
ended at sunset ; the end of the sixth hour was noon . piignti tum sit,
the ba ttle raged, see 313. 1. aversum hostem,an enemy turned about.
ad multam noctem,till late a t night
—pr?) vallb, for a rampart ; the
vallum was composed of the dirt heaped up (agger ) from the ditch
(fossa ) against the stakes (vall i ) .—e5que tbtfi. nocte, dur ing tha t whole
n ight, 196 . nostri , se. mili tes . p5tui ssent, see 338 . littéras , a
letter .—né re jiivarent ( ordering) , that they, etc.
20. qui cum,when they. suppliciter lbcfiti , speaking suppliantly .
qu6 tum essent, where they then were ; the subjunctive is used to ind i
cate that Caesar did not know where they were. pam érunt, theyobeyed
—qui perfi
'
l gissent, which hadfl ed to these,i .e. whatever , etc .,
see
361.—ut facérent, lit. that they should supply them with corn
,i .e. to
supply, etc.—ipsos, them,
emphatic, used to distinguish the Helvetii
from the A llobrogibus (354 .
21. tabfilae, lists .— littéris Graecis cbnfectae, made out in Greek
letters,which had been learned in Greek Massilia. ratib c5nfecta erat,
an account had been kept.—qui niimérus e5rum,
wha t number ofthem.
—possent, see 364. summa
,the sum.
The following brilliant description of the battle near Bibracte is from
Mommsen’s H istory of Rome (vol . iv. p . 253, Eng.
“ The two
arm ies posted themselves on two parallel chains of hills ; the C elts
began the engagement, broke the Roman cavalry which advanced into
the plain, and ran onward against the Roman legions posted on the
slope of the hill, but were there obliged to give way before Caesar’
s
veterans. When the Romans, thereupon following up their advantage,descended in their turn to the plain , the Celts again advanced against
them,and a reserved Celtic corps took them at the same time in the
flank . The reserve of the Roman attack ing column was pushed forward
against the latter ; it forced it away from the main body upon the bag
gage and the barricade of wagons , where it was destroyed. The bulk
of the Helvetic host was at length brought to give way , and compelled
to beat a retreat in an easterly direction, the Opposite of that towards
which their expedition led them . This day had frustrated the scheme of
the Helvetii to establish for themselves new settlements on the A tlan tic
Ocean,and handed them over to the pleasure of the victor ; but it had
been a hot day also for the conquerors .
”
I ND EX.
The references are to pages figures or letters in parentheses to pa ragraphs . The
index is very full, and w ill aid pupils greatly if they are taught to consult it. ]
A, sound of, 28 ; 5. or ab 64,
171; after pé to or p os tulo ,w ith
abl. of agent after pas sives , 130,211; w ith gerund , 229.
ABLA TIVE, 48 ,97 rule of position , 98 ;
ending-t
'
ibas , 56 ; in -e, 92 ; -i , 92 ;
in -i of adjec . ,109, 111; in -e of ad
jectives , 109, 111; in -iibus, 141;after prepositions, 172 . SYNTA X,
97 , 130; of crime, 294; duration of
time, 182 ; uses of, 209; abl . proper ,209; instrumental abl., 209; loca
tive abl . , 209; gen . rule for abl .
proper , 210; compounds with prep . ,
210; abl . of cause, 210; or w ith
prep., 210; instrumental abl . : (1)means or instrument , 131, 287 ; (2 )measure, 287 ; (3) difference, 281,288 ; (4) distance , 182 , 288 ; (5)price, 283, 288 ; ( 6 ) abl. of time
with adverbs , 288 ; (7 ) material ,288 ; ( 8 ) manner , 289, accompani
ment, 289; (10) quality and charac
teristic, 289 ; of agent, 130, 211; oftime, 167 ; abl . absolute, 222 ; meaning of, 222 ; of quality , 269 ; speci
fication , 278 ; of difference, 281.Ablative absolute, 222 .
-iibus , in dative plural of l st deelen
sion , 56 .
Abutor,
no, see atque .
Accent, rules of, 33.
ac cld it, synopsis of, 291.
Accompaniment , abl . of, w ith cum,
152 .
A C CUSAT IVE, 55 ; in -im , 88 , 92 ;
pl ., in-is
,88 ; after prepositions ,
64; as Objects , 55 ; w ith verbs
of remembering, etc. , 294; w ith
impers . , 294; w ith juro , etc.,164.
SYNTA x , 55 ; as direct object , 55 ;w ith verbs of feeling, 294; after
compounds , 173; with impers .
, 294;
cognate , 373; two accusatives ,
158 ; passive use , with verbs of
ask ing, 156 ; adverbial , 373; duration of time and extent of space,
167 , 182 ; with pe r , 183; as subjectof infinitive, 217 ; in indirect dis
course, 343; in substantive clauses ,334 f . ; of gerundive, 226 f.
Accus ing and acquitting, verbs of
ac si,321.
A ctive voice, 8 , 39-119; how to con
vert to passive, 136 .
ad, 63, 173; meaning near , 237 ; in
comps . , 173.
AD JECTIVES. 5 ; defined , 66 ; posi
tion , 67 ; like nouns , 67 infl ection
of, 66 ; of l st and 2d doels . , 6 6, 68 ;
model for parsing, 67 ; of 3d decl . ,105 , 107 ; of two or three terminations , 108 ; of one termination , 108 ;the inflection of comparatives , 111;cases of, used as adverbs , 123;model for parsing, 112 ; gen . with ,114 ; dat. w ith , 114 ; adj . clauses,297 ; adjectives in -
quus , 114.
COMPA R ISON , 110, 111; construetion w ith comparatives, 112 ; com
parison by adverbs,116 ; rule of
agreement, 66 : rule of gender , 66 ,105 ; position , 67 ; demonstratives
as adj . , 199; neut. adjs . as nouns ,
420
67 ; superlatives , 110 ff. ; w ith gen . ,
115 ; with dat. , 114; model for
parsing, 67.
ad j ii ro w ith acc. , 164.
ADvERBs , defined, 12 , 119; classified ,13, 122 , 124 ; illustrated , 12 ; howformed , 122 , 124 ; compared , 12 ,124; position of, 119; numeral , 119,180; der ived from adjectives, 123;classification of, of place, of time,etc., 13, 124; model for parsing,125 .
Adverbial accusative, 373.
Adverbial clauses , 297.
Adverbial phrases , 12 , 13, 119.
Adversative conjunctions, 175 .
ad versu s 173.
Agent, abl . of, w ith a or ab, 130,
211; dat. of, we; agreement , 53; ofsubject, 53; of predicate, 54.
infl . of, 286 .
-al,-ar , as neut. endings , 87 ff.
aliquis , infl . of, 207.
511113,infl . of, 177.
Alphabet, 23; vowels and diph
thongs , 23; consonants , 23, 24, 25 ;classification of, 24; see table, 25 .
alter , infl . of, 177.
Al ternative questions ,
answer to , 338 .
ambo ,infl . of, see duo .
Although , 322 .
amb io , 280.
ammi s , gender of, 95 .
an , anne , annbn , 338 f . ; an used
after né sc lo ,h and
, sc io ,du
bIto an , 340.
Analysis of sentences , 18 , 189; directions for analyz ing, 191; of verbs ,42 , 44, 72 , 120; of pass . voice, 127 .
Answer, form of, 340.
ante w ith quam , 325 , 328 .
A ntecedent , its use with relatives ,
203; omitted , 203.
Antepenult, 30.
antéquam , 327 ; often written sepa
rate, 328 .
Aorist, 37, 299; rendered like plu
perfect, 326 .
338,32 ;
F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
A podosis , 314.
Apposition, 60.
arbo r, gender of, 95 .
Arrangement of words, 90.
Article, 6.
A s , used as a rel . prom, 203.
A sk ing, verbs of, 156 .
Assimilation of consonants ,atq ue , 175 .
A ttraction of mode, 359.
A ttributive adjective, 100.
an d eo, 255 .
an t , 175 .
Auxiliary verb, 7 , 100.
-ax, adjective ending, 108 ; adjectivein , w ith gen.
,115.
B, sound of, 28 .
-bam, tense-ending, 44 ff.
Bargaining, verbs of, 283.
belli , locative, 235 .
-bo,verb-ending, 44 ff.
bbnu s,declined , 66.
bbs , decl., 96 .
C G, sound of, 28 ; guttural , 25 ; for
q u .
canis , gender of, 95 ; gen . pl . of, 89.
Cardinal numbers, 180.
ohm , gender of, 95.
Cases , 4, 47.48 ; general view of, 49;
genitive, 48 dative, 48 ; accusa
tive, 48 ; vocative, 48 ablative,48 ; independent, 4.
Case, defined , 4 ; oblique cases , 48 .
Case-endings , table of, 51, 58 , 78 , 88 ,89.
Case-sufi x, 46 .
causa, used with gen ., 210.
Causal clauses , 323, 324; cum and
qui , causal , 324.
Causal conjunctions, 176 , 323.
cé lo , with two accus . , 156 .
Characteristic, clause of, 40, 130, 133,135 , 138 , 144, 151, 152 ; charac
teristic vowel , 40it ; sometimesdropped , 135, 139.
C ities , construction of, 234ff.
civis , abl . sing. of, 92.
422 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
324, 330; concessive, 322 , 330; not
used with certain ablS. , 289 itera
tive use, 329; historical , 330; translation of, 331.
DA TIVE endings , 51, 58 , 78 ; in «ibus ,56 ; in
-i, 77 ; dat. of4th decl in -u’
bus ,
41. SYNTAX , 164 ; indirect Object ,62 , 164 ; used for the locative, 235 ;w ith intransitive verbs , 164 ; w ith
transitive verbs , 62 ; uses of, w ith
verbs meaning favor , etc. , 164 ;with compounds of ad ,
an te, etc . ,
173 w ith compounds of satis,
b éne , etc.,164; of possession , 242 ;
agency w ith gerundive, 258 ; of in
terest , 169 ; of purpose or end , 170;of advantage and disadvantage,170; of apparent agent , 170; dat.reference, 170; dat . instead of gen . ,
170; w ith adjectives ,114 of fi tness ,
114 ; w ith impers . verbs , 294.
d ea , inflection of, 56 .
Declarative sentence, 74.
Declension , 46 ; of nouns , 49; how
distinguished , 49; general rules
for , 50; termination , 49; l st decl . ,
51, 52 ; 2d decl . , 57—63; stem , 57 ;
case-endings , 58 ; nom. and voe.
endings wanting in nouns in -er ,
59; neut . nouns , 62 ; 3d decl . , 77-93'
4th decl ., 140; 5th decl . , 142 .
Defective nouns , 83, 96 , 142 .
Defective verbs , 7 , 285 .
d é lecto, with acc . , 164.
Deliberative subjunctive,m , 348 .
Definite, see Perfect .
Definite price, 283.
Demonstrative pronouns , use of, 199,
used as personal pron ., 198 ; as
adjec. pron . , 199 ; position of, 199;voc . wanting, 199; in ind . disc. ,
d éns , gender of, 95 .
Dental stems , 80.
Deponent verbs , 250; conjugation of,251, 253; participles of, 252 ; abl .
w ith , 253; synopsis of, 253f.
d eus, inflection of
, 59; stem of, 59.
d ic , imper . of, 179.
d ié s,infl ection of,142 ; gender of, 142 .
d iffic ll is , comparison of, 116 .
diffid o, w ith abl., 210.
d ignus , w ith abl . , 288 ; with relative
clause, 312 .
Diphthongs , 23; sound of, 28 ; quan
tity of, 31.
Direct discourse, 342 .
Direct object, 55 .
Direct question , 338 .
Disjunctive conjunctions , 175.
d is sim il is , infi . Of.,106 ; w ith gen . or
dat . , 114, 115 ; compar . of, 116 .
Distance, ace. or abl . , 182 f.
Distributive numerals , 180; how used
w ith pl . nouns with a sing. mean
i ng, 182 .
d o, infln . of, 56 ; irregular , 74.
-do , feminine endings , 95 .
d bmi , locative, 234 f.d bmbs , d 6mum
, 118 .
d 6mus , inflection of, 140; gender
of, 141.dbnec
, 326 .
Dubitative subjunctive, 248 .
dubito an, 340.
dub lto , w ith quin ,336 .
due , imperative of , 179.
dum , 326 ; in the sense of whi le, etc . ,
327 denoting purpose, 326 , 327 .
dummbd o, 318 .
duo, infl ection of, 181.
Duration , ace. of , 182 .
-dus, participle in, 256 f.
E, prep . , see Ex.
édo , infl . of, 280; irregularity o f,
280; pass . of, 280.
Effecting, verbs of, 311.egeo , w ith gen .
Emphasis , as affected by or affectingarrangement, 90.
Enclitic, 176 . [42 f .
Endings , of case, 51, 58 , 88 ; of verbs ,English method of pronunciation ,
34-36 .
English verb, forms of, 14—17.
En im , 176 .
INDEX .
90 , irreg. verb , inflection of, 279;stem of, 279; intrans . compounds
of, 279; trans. compounds , 279;
pass . Of, 280; perfect of, 280.
-s r , nom. ending, 59.
e rgo , 175 .
-es, as nom . ending , 88 .
es se and its compounds , 272 ; inflec
tion of, 102 inflection of com
pounds , 272 .
et at, both and , 175 .
etiam , in answers, 334.
étiam s i, 322 .
ets i , 322 .
EUPHON IC CHA NGES, 25 ; vowel weak
cuing, 26 ; of 3d conj . , 149, 154.
évén it , synapsis of , 291.
Exclamatory sentences, 74.
Expletive, 192.
F, sound of,
Fac, imper . of, 179.
rac i lis , comparison of, 116 .
ffic io , 282 ; compounds of, 282.
fi ri , def. verb, 287 .
ti e , w ith supine , 232 .
Fearing , verbs of (né or ut ) , 307.Feminine, rule of gender , 95 .
fer , imper . of, 179.
féro,infl . of , 276 ; compounds of
,
277 ; irregularity of, 277.
fid o , semi-deponent, 255 ; w ith abl
210.
fi l iu s , infl . of, 58 ; voc . of, 48 .
Fifth declension , 142.
Filling , verbs of, w ith ablative, 288 .
Final clauses , 298 , 306 ; how trans
lated , 306 , 307 ; in indirect dis
course , 347 f.
Final conjunctions , 176 , 306 .
F inal vowels , quantity of, 86 .
finis, gender of, 95 ; abl . Sing., 92 .
F inite verb, 9.
no, infl . of, 282 ; used as pass . of
fac io , 282 ; compounds of, 282 .
First conjugation , formation , 41if . ;inflection of, 41if .
First declension, 51.
fiag ito , constr . of, 156 .
423
fbns, gender of, 95 .
fbre ut , 345.Forgetting, verbs of, 294.
fbrem , 241.Fourth conjugation , formation of,
157 ii ; inflection ,157 if .
fré tus , with abl ., 210.
fruor , fun g or , with abl ., 287
FUTURE TENSE, 10, 44, 109, 120, 130,144; vowel changes, 145 , 158 .
FUTURE PERFECT, 9, 10; syntax,304;for Simple future, 315 ; represented
in subj , 304; in ind . disc., 304.
futurum s it ut , used instead of
periphrastic form, 304.
G c ( in early use) , sound of, 28 .
gand oo ,255 .
GENDER , 13; natural and grammati
cal , 47 ; common , 94; oi l st decl .,51; of 2d decl ., 57 , 62 ; of 3d decl .,94, 95 ; of 4th decl ., 140; 5th
decl . , 142 ; gen . of indeclinable
words , clauses , etc . , 47 , 334.
General truth , 328 .
General relatives , 331, 357.
GENITIVE. 48 , 60; pl . in -um, 92 ; of
l st decl . , 51; of 2d decl ., 57 , 59; ofnouns in -ius , and
-ium, 58 ; gen
der , 58 ; of 3d decl . in -ium, 92 ; in
-ius, 177 ; of adjec . , 66 , 109. SYN
TAx, 61; subjective , 162 ; objective ,
162 ; possessive, 60, 162 ; in predicate, 103; partitive, 198 ; predicate
gen ., 103,104; with adjectives , 115 ;with verbs , 294 f. ; of memory , 295 ;of charge and penalty , 294; of
feeling, 295 ; impers . , 295 ; interest ,295 ; of plenty and want, 115 ; ofvalue, 295 ; of gerundive, 228 ; of
quality , 269.
GERUND,38 , 225 ; not one of the
principal parts of a verb, 38 ; nom .
how supplied , 225 ; how formed ,
226 ; endings of, 226 ; acc., how
used, 226 ; its government, 227 ;
equivalent gerundive forms , 227
of 3d and 4th conjugations , 255.
SYNTAX, 228 .
424 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
GERUND IVE, 227 ; uses of gen . , 227 , IMPERATIVE SENTENCES, 74; imply228 ; dat. 228 ; acc., 228 ; abl., 229; ing condition , 319; in ind . disc .
,
after what verbs used , 228 ; of 3d
and 4th conjugations , 255 ; whennot admissible, 228 .
g rat ii ,with gen., 210.
Greek nouns , 52 .
Guttural stems, of nouns , 17 ; of
verbs, 148 , 161.
H , Spirant, 23; guttural , 24 ; sound
of, 28 .
1110, infl . of, 197 ; use of, 197 , 198 f.
Hindering, verbs of, w ith né or
q ubmlnu s , 308 ; negative w ith
quin ,310; sequence of tenses , 310;
after neg . indef. expressions , 310.
H istorical infin . , 412 .
Historical present, 303, 346 .
H istorical tenses , 302 .
Hoping, verbs of, 345 ; w ith infin .,
HORTA TORY SURJ ., 248 .
hum i, locative, 235 .
I , sound of, 27 ; i and j interchangeable, 24 ; l suppressed in cbn ic io
,
etc . ,169; how pronounced betweentwo vowels , 286 ; of perfect, 71.
-i , abl. in, 87 , ff., 92.
-i, stems of nouns, 91; of adjectives ,105 , 106.
-ibam -iébam (4th 221.
idem , infl ., 200; derivation of, 201'
use, 201.Idbneus , compared , 114; id bneu s
qui , 312 .
-iés in 5th decl., 142 f.Ig itur , meaning of, 175 .
ign is , gender of, 95 ; abl . sing , 92 .
ii in gen . of 2d decl ., 58 ; contracted
into -i , 58 .
ILLAT IvE C ONJUNCTIONS, 175.
ille , inflection of 197 ; use, 199.
-im, ace. ending in 3d decl ., 88 , 92 .
Imperative mode, 9, 75, 177 , 178 ;
personal endings , 74, 178 ; negative
with , 178 ; tenses of, 178 ; fi rst per
son of, 179, 241; passive, 186 .
IMPERFECT TENSE, formation , 44,130
, 145 , 152 , 158 ; uses , 96 , 37 , 299,121.
IMPERSONAL VERBS, 291; syn0ps is ,7 , 291; class ification , 292 ; pass ive
of intrans . , 293. SYNTAX , 294f. ;
consec. clauses after impers . , 311;ace. w ith infin . or quod w ith in
dic. , 335 ; subst. clauses after im
pers . , 335 .
in , constr. of, 172 ; w ith express ions
of time, 167 .
Incomplete action, tenses Of, 121.
Increment of nouns , 77
Indeclinable nouns , 47 ; rule o f gen
der, 47.
Indefinite pronouns , 207 ; indefin ite
second person, 328 .
Indicative mode, meaning and use
of, 8 .
ind ignu s , 288 ; relative clause w ith ,
312 .
IND IRECT D ISCOURSE, 342 ; appl ie d
to what, 359; used after what
verbs , 348 ; informal , 360; infin . in,
344 ; tenses in, 346 ; reflex. pronouns
in , 348 ; conditional sentences in ,
350; imperative sentences , 352 ; in
terrogative sentences , id .
Indirect object, 62.
IND IRECT QUESTIONS, 336 , 337 f.
Indo-European, 21.Infinitive clause, 334.
Infinitive verb, 347.
INF INITIVE MODE, 9, 213; meaning ,
9 ; use, 213; formation , 40, 123, 129,144, 157, 214; present infin ., 40,
129, 144, 157 ; infins . of active
voice, 213; of pass . voice, 214 ;
personal endings , 214. SYNTAX,
213; classification of uses of, 213;when in ind . disc. , 346 ; subj . mustas a rule be expressed , 346 ; as
subject, 217 ; object, 217 ; complement, 217 ; with subj . acc., 216 ; asmeaning purpose, 308 ; perfect,
426
mISéreor,w ith gen . , 295.
mls é ret, 292 ; w ith ace. and gen . ,
Modern languages derived from
Latin, 22 .
Modes , 8 , 239.
Mode-signs , 243, 268 ; modes in de
pendent clauses , 297 , 306 if . ; infin .,
213ii , 344.
Modification, of words , 3; of subjector predicate, 190.
mod o , d um mbd o, w ith subj . in
conditions , 318 .
m6 ns, gender of, 95.
Mood , see Mode.
Motion, expressed w ith prep. , 172 .
Mountains , names of , gender , 47 .
Mutes , 23if . mute stems (3d78 if .
N, sound of, 28 ; stems in n , 80.
Nasals , 23.
nav is, abl . sing. of, 92.
DE, w ith hortat. subj ., 248 ; prohibitions , 248 ; final clauses, 306 f. ; con
secutive clauses, 308 ; w ith verbs of
fearing , 307 .
-ne, enclitic , in questions , 75 , 76244.
Necessity , verbs of 2 57 .
necne, 339.
néfi s, w ith supine, 232 .
Negative particle , 76 ; as expressingno in answer to questions 340.
nego , better than d ico n6 n, 410.
use of, 165 .
né n6 n, 335 .
neque , 175 .
néqu is , 207 .
116 qu id em , 412 .
nesc io an, 340.
ne sc io quis , 340.
NEUTER NOUNS , 62 ff. , 94 f.
-nf lengthens preceding vowel , 32 .
111, 11181, 314 ff.11610
,273f.
NOM INAT IVE, 4, 53; Sign o f, 77 form
ation from stem, l st decl . , 46 , 51;2d decl . , 57 , 59—63; 3d decl., 77 , 78 ,81, 82, 83, 85, 87 ; summary of rules
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
0, sound of, 27 ; quantity of 0 final , 86 .
O in amo a and o and m .
0 Si , w ith subj . of w ish , 248 .
Object defined , 4, 55 ; direct , 55 ; in
direct , 62 ; model for parsing the
objective , 56 .
Object clauses , 307 .
Oblique cases , 48 ; oblique disc ., 342 ,
6 d i, 285 .
offend o, w ith acc., 164.
oportet , 292 .
Optative subjunctive, 248 .
Opus , work , infi . of, 81.
Opus and 118118 , need , wi th abl . , 288 .
0rdtz‘
6 obliqua, see Indirect Dis
course.
for forming the nom. of 3d decl . ,87 ; 4th decl. , 140; 5th decl. , 142 f .
SYNTAX : as subject. 53; pred . after
es se , 100.
n6 n , in answer , 340.
n6 n dub ito quin , 323.
116 11116 , 75 , 176 .
n6 n“
quia ,n6 n quod , n6 n quin ,
324.
nOster , 194; in ind . disc. , 349.
nostri , as obj . gen. , 193.
nostrum, as partitive gen ., 193.
NOUNS, defined ,1, 2 ; class ified , 3;
Latin nouns , 46 ; infi . , 46 ; modifica
tion of, 47 ; paradigms , 51fi . rule
of agreement , 60ff. ; model for pars
ing, 54 ; abstract and collective ,
397 ; of l st decl 49 if . ; 2d decl . ,57 ff. ; 3d decl . , 77 ff. ; class ification
of, 77 , 93; 4th decl . ,140 5th decl . ,142.
-naas adjective ending,10! f. ; gen . pl .
of,92 ; lengthens preceding vowel ,
c)
nullus,infiec . of, 177 ; used for gen .
and abl . of némb , 165 .
num, force of, 74, 206 ; in indirect
questions , 339.
Number , 2 , 3, 10, 47 ; of nouns , id . ; of
adjectives , 66 ; of verbs , 10, 41ff.NUMERA LS, 180; classification of, 180.
INDEX.
Order of words, 90.
Ordinal numbers , 180.
o rd o , gender of, 95 .
-03for -as , in nom. sing. of 2d decl . , 57 .
Origin of Latin language, 21; howrelated , 21; where spoken , 21.
P, sound of, 28 .
p aen itet , constr . of, 295 .
Palatal consonants , 25 .
pan is , gen . pl . of, 89; gender of, 95 .
Participial clauses , 219 implyingcondition , 319.
Part icipal stem, 38 , 137 .
PA RTIC I PLES, defined ,11 illustrated ,
11, 38 , 219; classified , 11, 219; infl .
of, 38 , 108 , 109, 128 ; abl . in -i , 109,nom. and gen . pl ., 109; how trans
lated , 219, 223; in abl . abs . , 222 ;
voices of, 220; of trans . verb , 220;
of intrans . verbs , 220; formation
of, 220; infl . of, 221; directions for
parsing, 223. SYNTAX , 219; time of,2 2 1; of deponent verbs , 250; peri .
pass., w ith passive meaning, 253;
perf., 128 ; pert. act . , how supplied ,
224; perf. partic .,denoting paren
tage, etc. , 210; agreement of, 220;
gerundive, 220, 226 it ; neut . of the
perf. in enumerating the principal
parts of a verb , 155 .
PA RTICLES, defined , 74 ; interroga
tive and negative, 74. SYNTAX of,
248 , 306 fi . ; conditional , 315 ; tem
poral , 325 .
Parts of speech defined , 1-14.
Passive voice, 8 , 119 ; analysis of,
120; origin , 121; pass . s ign , 121.Pass ive sign , 120, 121fi
‘.
p é lgaus , neut. , seeVocab.
Penalty , gen . of, 294.
p éneS , 172 .
Penult, 30; quantity of, 33.
per , 64, 172 ; w ith expressions of
time, 167 , 183; for agent , 210; in
composition , 174 (7Perfect stem , 10, 71; analysis, 72 ;synopsis of rules for forming, 161;in composition , 118 .
427
55
po stea, 326 .
po s tquam , 326 .
p ostulo , constr . with E or ab , 156 .
Potential mode, 9; how expressed,
240.
PERFECT TENSE, 71 perfect def
inite , 37 , 303; personal endings,71, 133, 147 , 161; used as present,286 ; origin of, 134; v suppressed in
perfect, 72 ; stem,how formed
, 71,of subj . in sequence
of tenses, 301f.
PERIPHRA ST IC CONJUGATIONS, 2256 ;act. , 257 ; pass . , 257 ; pass . , how
used , 294; meaning and formation
Of, 257 per iphrastic forms in sub
ordinate clauses , 303.
Person , defined , 10; the first personis the first in order , 195 .
PERSONA L ENDINGS,42
, 71, 120, 121,123
, 166 ; meaning of, 42, etc ., 121;
how formed , 166 .
PERSONA L PRONOUNS, 5 , 193f. ; re
tained in ind . disc., 349.
Persons of verbs , 3, 10.
Petitid obliqua, 360.
peto , with a or ab,156 .
Phonetic changes , 25 , 26 , 154.
Phrases, 13, 173; defined , adj .and adverb , 65 ; prepositional , 172 .
p lge t , constr . Of, 295 .
Place,to which , 187 , 234 ; relations of ,
requireprep . , 237 ; locative uses ,235 .
Plenty , verbs of, 288 .
Pleonasm , 4 ( c) .Pluperfect, 10, 72 ; analys is of, 72
Plural , of nouns , 3, 47, 51it ; of
verbs , 10, 36 , 39fi’.
p lfi ris , gen . Of value , 283.
p lus , inflection of, 106 , 111.
posco , constr . of, 156 .
p oenIte t , see paen itet .
pé n s , gender Of, 95 .
p o sse , 270f.
Possessive pronouns , 194; in ind .
disc ., 349.
Position , rules of, 90.
p ossum , infi . Of, 271; how formed ,
428 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
Potential subjunctive, M8 , 328 .
p 6 t ior , w ith ablative, 287 ; with geni
tive , 287.
p rae ,172 .
PRED ICATE, 18 , 190; defined , 18 , 190;after e s se , 18 , 100; agreement , 18 ,100.
l'REPOSITIONs , 64, 171, 172 ; use of
,
172 , 173; inseparable, 174.
Present stem, how formed, 40if .
PRESENT TENSE, 9, 10; used for
aorist , 303.
Preter itive tenses, 395.
Price, abl ., 283.
p I‘Id ié , loc. , see 415
Pr imary tenses , 300.
PR INC I PA L PA RTS of verbs, 38 , 126 ;neut. of the perf. partie. , 155 .
p r ior used instead of p r imus , 182 .
p riu squam , 327 : often written separate, 328 .
p rO, preposition, 172 .
Prohibitions , 178 , 248 .
Promising , etc., verbs of, 345.
PRONOUNS, 5 ; defined and classified ,
5 , 172 ; infi . Of, 193—207 ; personaland reflexive, 193, 194; rule for
position of, 196 ; possessive, 194;demonstrative, 197 determinative,200; relative, 202 ; interrog . , 205 ;
indefinite, 207 pronouns strength
ened by -met, -te, etc., 193; redu
plicative forms , 194; exs . illustrat
ing use of, 195 ; rule for position ,
196 . SYNTAX of, 203.
PRONUNC IATION , modes of , m; ROman , 27 , 28 ; phonetic, 27 English ,
p rOsum ,infi . Of, 272.
Protas is , 304.
Proviso , 318.
pudet , 295 .
p fi gnatur , impers ., synops is of, 291.PURPOSE , 306 ; ways of expressing ,
Qu , sound of, 28 .
quaero (OUA SSO ) , irreg. verb, 286 ;constr. of, 156.
quam , with superl . , 118 , 275 ; withcompar..112 , 2 75 ; comparative particles , 320.
quam libet , 207 ; infi . of, seeVocab.
quams i, 320, 321.
q uamvis , 207 ; infi . of, seeVocab.
q uan ti , gen. of value, 283.
QUA NTITY, general rules of, 31, 32 ,86 ; Of final vowels , of oth er
syllables , see Preface.
quas i , 320, 321.
-que, enclitic, 76 ; as conj . , 175 .
queo , irreg. verb, 282 , 286 .
QUEST IONS, 74, 206 ; Single or double ,206 ; fact questions , 337 ; d irect,338 ; indirect, 339; rhetorical , 337 ;dependent and independent , 339 ;alternative, see double, 338 ; in indirect disc.
, 351f.
qui , relative, infl . of, 202 ; agreementof, 203; position of, 203; model fo r
parsing, 203; general relative , 202 ;indefinite, 207 , 209 expressing
purpose, 306 , 356 ; concess ive , 322 ;w ith né sc io , 340; strengthened byu t , ut pOte , etc. , 357 .
qu icumque ( quicunque ) , 212 .
quia , 176 , 323.
q uidam , 205 ; indef. , 207.
quid em , 412 .
quin , in consecutive clauses , 310;with verbs Of hindering , 310; 116 11
quin , 310.
qui s , infi . of, 205 ; distinction from
qui in use, 205, 207 compounds of205 ; indef. 207 with nésc io , 340.
quisnam , 205 .
qu isp iam , 207 .
quisquam , 207.
qu isqu is , 202 .
quivis , 217.
qu6 , in final clauses , 310.
q uoad , 326 .
quod , conj . , 176 ; clauses w ith , 323,324,335 ; as ace.of specification, 373.
quod SI , seeVocab.
qubminus , 308 it ; with verbs of
hindering, 308 .
quOniam , 323f.
430 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
sub, 172.
SUBJECT , defined , 17 , 53, 55 ; omitted ,
42 ; plur . subj . , 150; in indir . d isc.,
346 ; with verbs of promising, etc .,
SUBJUNCT IVE MODE, 9; paradigm of,
243, 245 i has no fut., how sup
plied, 256 , 239; uses of, 239; analysis of, 243; personal endings , 243
tenses of, 240, 303; tenses wanting,303 how translated , 240, 241, 244 ;classification of uses, 250; conces
sive, 248 ; hortatory , 248 ; Optative,
248 ; dubitative, M8 ; potential , 248
negative w ith , 244, 248 ; four con
jugations Of , 245 ; pass . of, 246 ; in
independent sentences, 248 ; in de
pendent clauses , 248 ; in re] . clauses ,248 , 355 if . in intermediate clauses ,248 , 358 ; in indirect discourse,248 , in indirect questions ,339; how translated in indirect
questions , 340.
SUBORD INA TE CLAUSES, 190, 248 ,
291ff. ; how classified , 297 f. ; in in
d irect disc. , 342 .
Subordinate conjunctions , 176.
SUBSTA NTIVE C LA USES, defined and
classified ,333; infinitive, 334; of
purpose, 334; Of result, 335 ; w ith
quod , 335 ; ind . question , 336 ; gen
der of, 334.
subter, 172 .
Snfiix, defined , 46 ; of nouns , 4 6 ; of
verbs , 42 ff.
sum , inflection Of, 101, 102 .
summus, compar . of, 117 ; meaning
Of, 118 , 415 .
sunt qui , 356 .
super , 172 .
SuPERLAT IvE, defined , 5 ; of adjec .,
different ways of forming, 5 ; infi .
Of, 111; how trans ,113, 118 ; of
adverbs , 124.
SUP INE, noun Of 4th decl ., 38 , 231;meaning and use of, 231; not com
mon , 232 ; not one of the principal
parts Of verbs , 232 ; government of ,232 dependence of, 232 ; uses of,
231; its government, 232 ; sup . in-um not common . Stem , 231; howformed , 231.
Surds , 25 .
Syllabication , 29.
Syllables , rules for division of, 29,34.
Synopsis of tenses , 73; of impersonalverbs
,91.
SYNTA X 17 , 53if . See each case and
mode In index.
T , sound Of, 28 .
taed et, constr . of, 295 .
tanq uam , 321.
tanquam Si,321f.
tanti , gen . of price, 283.
Teaching , verbs of, 156 .
Temporal conj . ,176 ; classification of,325 clauses : (1) antecedent a ction ,
326 ; (2 ) contemporaneous action ,326 ; (3) subsequent action , 327 .
TENSES, 9; how classified , 9, 37 ;meaning, 9, 41, etc . ; analysis of ,44; classification Of, 299; denotingincomplete, complete , or indefinite
action , 299; primary and second
ary , 300; endings , 260ii . ; formation Of, 2601
’f. SYNTAX , 9 f., 299.
306 ff. ; classification , 299; present,299 ; imperf. , 9 f 299; future, 9 f. ,
299; perfect, 9 f. , 299; pluperfect ,9 f. , 299; future perfect, 9 f., 299;sequence of, 300it ; of infin ., 344 .
Tense-signs , 45 it , 74,121,145 , 243, 268 .
Terminations, 46 ; Of infi . , 46 , 51ff. :Of nouns , 51it ; of verbs , 40, 42 ff.
terramar ique , 235, 236 .
That, uses of, 336 ; 306 1’f.
TII IRD CONJUGATION ,Verb8 of,144 ff.formation of, 144 if infl ., 144-155 ;verbs in -i0, 168 .
TH IRD DECLENSION . nouns of, 77 it ;rules Of gender , 47 , 51, 57 , 94, 95 .
Though , see A lthough.
Threatening, infin. w ith , 345 .
Time and place, construction of, 167 ,182 , 188 , 234 If .
TIME, when, 167 ; how long, 182 .
INDEX .
tbtus,177 .
TOWNS, names of, gender of, 47 ;
construction with or w ithout prep
osition , 234 ff.
trans, prep . , 172 ; comps . of, w ith
acc. , 374.
Transitive verbs , 7 , 119.
Translation of subjunctive, 241.
tres,infl . of, 181.
turr is , abl . sing. of, 92 .
4 53, noun-ending, 95 .
U, sound of
,27 ; a consonant , 24 ;
interchanged w ith v, 24.
ub i , in temporal clauses , 326 : ub i
p r imum , 326 .
-ubus , case-ending in 4th decl . , 141.‘fidO, noun-ending, 95 .
fi l lu s, infl . Of , 177 .
fi r ms , infl . of , 181; in pl . , 181; w ith
pl . nouns of a sing . meaning , 181.unu s qui , w ith subj . , 356 .
fi nu sq u isq ue , 207.
aim s , future participle, 220; in ih
direct discourse, 346 .
fi sus , need , w ith abl ., 288 .
ut , as coh oess . , 322 ; comparative,320; as final , 306 ; of result, 309;u t n é , 306 ; w ith subst. clauses ,333, 334 ; omission after , 337 .
u t , when ,325 , 326 ; ut p rimum , 326 .
ti te r , infl . of, 177 .
uterque , infl . of, 177 .
I‘
i t i,utinam , w ith subj . Of w ish ,
248 ; ut i , comparative particle, 320.
uto r, etc .
,w ith abl.
, 287 ; as transi
tive , 228 .
u trum, 339; utrum an , 338 .
ut Si,320, 321.
V, sound of, 28 ; originally not dis
tinguished from u, 28 ; interchange
able with u, 24 syncopated in
perf., 72 , 161.
Value, gen . of, 283.
ve l, 175 .
vé lut, 320, 321.
vé lut Si,320
, 321.Verb-stem , 40.
431
W , not in Latin alphabet , 23;Want, verbs of , 288 .
Way by which , abl ., 237 .
Wish , expression of, 248 .
Winds , gend . of names Of, 47 .
Wishing, constr . with verbs , 334.
v, 24.
X, sound of, 28 ; lengthens precedingsyllable , 32 .
Y, sound Of, 27 .
Year , how expressed, 182, 222 .
Verb , as complete sentence, 43.
VERBS, defined , 6 ; mod ification , 6 ,
36 , 38 ; formation,3911; regular ,
7 ; deponent , 253f. ; semi-deponent,
255 ; irregular , 7 , 273; defective,285 ; impersonal , 291; rule Of agreement , 54. SYNTA X of
, 54 ff.
Verbs Of perceiving , declaring, etc.,
217 , 334, 348 .
Verbal endings , 42 , 44 ii , 130.
Verbals in -a :r, 115 ; in-bi lis, 115.
vé rO, in answers , 340.
v e sco r, with abl . , 253.
ve sper i , 60, seeVocab .
vé to , w ith ace . and infin . , 334.
vétu s , infl . of, 109 ; compar ., 116 .
-r i , in perf. , 71, 134. The i is part of
the stem. 71.v is , infl . of, 96 .
VOCA TIVE, 48 , 58 ii ., 182 ; case, 15 ;like nom ., 59, 62 , 77 ; except in 2d
decl . , 57 , 77 ; in-i of nouns in -ius,
58 . SYNTAx , 75 .
VOICE, 8 , 119, 137 ; act. and pass .,
8 , 119; formula for converting act.to pass ., 136 .
vblo , infl . Of, 273.
VOWELS, 24 ; quality of, 24 ; open ,
close , medial , 24 ; vowel stems , 78 ,161; characteristic vowel of the
stem dropped , 139; vowel of the
stem lengthened , 161; Characteristic vowel changed , 130, 133, 135 ,138 , 144, 145 , 147 , 151, 154, 158 , 160,163, 179; characteristic vowel of
stem shortened , 72 .
4 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
al ti tfi do ,-d inis , F .
, height, depth.
altus , -a,-um , part. high,
deep .
alv eus , -i. M . ( alvus ) , a channel,trough, skiy
'
.
A mbarri , -6 rum , M . pl ., a people
of Gaul.
amb -lb ,-ire ,
-ivi or -ii , -i tum
( s o ) , to go about, canvass .
amb i -tib,-6 ni s , F . ( amb io ) . a
canvassing, ambition .
ambo ,-ae ,
-o , num . adj . , both.
amb iilo . A re. A vi , -atum , to
walk.
amIC -i tia ,-ao, F . (am icus ) ,fr iend
ship .
am-iena, -a,-um , adj . (amo ) ,
loving, fr iendly. kind .
am-ieus , -i , M ., a fr iend.
a-m itto ,-m itt5re ,
-mi s i , -miss um , to let go, lose, destroy .
amnia.-is , M .
, a r iver ( large, deepstream) .
i mo ,-5 re ,
-avi , -atum , to love.
amor ,-6 ris , M . (amo ) , love .
am-p lector ,
-p lecti,
-p lexus sum ,
dep. , to w ind around, embrace .
amp lia s , comp . adv . ( amp le) ,more, longer , further .
amp lus , -a ,-um , adj ., great, ample,
vspacious , grand, large.
A mulius , -ii , M ., a king Of A lba,brother of Numitor, and great
uncle of Romulus .
i n , disjunctive inte r . particle
whether , or .
an-cep s , -C ip i tis , adj . ( an ; caput ) ,two-headed, doubtful, cr itical .
angus t-iac , A rum , F . ( angus tus ) ,
narrowness , a narrowpass, defile.
angus-tus , -a ,
-um , adj . ( ango ) ,narrow, scanty .
da-ima,-ae, F .
,air , breath, life.
anim-adv erto ,-t5re ,
-ti , -sum
(animus ; adv erto ) , to turn themind to, to attend to animad
v ertére in aliquem , to pun ish
one.
anim-al , A lia, N . (anima ) , an
animal ( including man) , livingcreature.
fin-Imus ,-i , M .
,the soul, mind, d is
position, temp er , thought.
an-n 6n , conj . , or not
aunti-lus , -i , M ., r ing.
annus ,-I, M .
, a year .
an ser ,-éris , M .
, goose.
an tea, adv ., before.
an te-ao ,-ire, -ivi or 47, no p .p.,
N .,to go before, precede, excel .
anté-pbno ,-ére ,
-p5sui , -pbs i
tum , to p lace before, prefer .
ante quam , conj ., before that.
an t-i quus , -a ,-um , adj . ( an te ) ,
former , ancient, old .
A nténius ,-ii , M .
, hIarcus A nton i
us, the distinguished triumvir ,conquered by Octavianus, at
A ctium,B .C . 31.
anx ius , -a ,-um , adj. ( ango ) , tor
mented, anxious, troubled .
apério ,-ire, -ui , -tum , to op en ,
unclose, show, reveal .
aper-tus , -a,
-um , part . (apério ) ,vopen .
A p o llOn ia,-ao, F ., a town of
Macedonia .
A po ll énius ,-ii , M .
, Apollon ius ,a celebrated rhetorician Of
Rhodes .
ap-p i reo ,
-ére , -ui , -i tum ( adpareo ) , to appea r , be vis ible .
ap—pello , a re ,
-av i , -atum ( ad ;p ello ) , to address , call, name .
ap-péto ,
-p5tére ,
-p 6tivi or pétfi ,
-p5ti tum , to seekfor .
ap-p réh endo , e re, -d i. -sum
( ad ; p réhen d o ) , to seize, take
hold of:ap—prbp in quo , a re,
-av i , é tum
(ad ; p rbp inquo ) , to ap
x proach.
A p ri lis ,-is , M . (apério ) , Apr il ;
the month in which the earth
OPENS itself to fertility ; as
adj . , op ril.
6 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
aud -io ,-ire , -ivi or -ii , -Itum , to
hear , listen .
au-féro ,-ferre , ab s tiil i.ab latum,
irr. ( ab ; féro to carry away,remove ( 295 . bs.
au-fiigio ,-ére ,
-ffigi ,-fi igi tum
( ab ; fiigio ) , toflee away .
augeo ,-ére, -auxi , -auctum, to
increase, enlarge.
aug'lir-ium ,
-ii , N ., predictions
founded ( in part) on the ob
servation of birds ; divination,
p rophecy, soothsaying.
aur-eus ,-a ,
-um , adj . ( aurum ) ,golden .
auspic-ium ,-ii , N . ( auspex ) , an
omen ( taken from the watchingof birds) , an ausp ice ausp icia
habére, to hold or take the aus
p ices.
ut, conj . ( 205 . or ; aut
aut , either or .
autem , conj . ( 205 . but, how
ever , besides .
aux i lium ,-ii , N . ( angee ) , help ,
aid, assistance aux i lia ,-6 rum ,
auxilia ry troops.
5 -v erto ,-ére,
-sum , turn away
from, a vert, withdraw .
av i d-R 58 ,-atis , F .
, eagerness.
i v-idus , -a ,-um , adj .
eager , covetous.
avi s , -is , F ., a bird .
avus , -i , M .,a grandfa ther .
balneum ,-i , N . ( pl. mostly balne
ae ,-arum , a bath.
Bal ticus , -a,—um , Ba ltic .
b arbérua, -a,-um , adj . , foreign ,
strange, barbarian ; barbari ,-6 rum , M .
, foreigners, barbar ians a name applied first by theGreeks and afterwards by the
Romans to people of other na
tions.
be-dtus , -a,-um , adj . ( boo ) . hap
py, p rosperous , fortunate.
Belgae ,-arum , M . , theBelgians , a
warlike people dwelling in the
north of Gaul .
b—ellum ,-i , N . (Old form d u
ellum ) ( duo ) (a contest be
tween two parties) , war .
béne , adv . , well, finely, prosperously ; béne p iigndre, to fightsuccessfully.
béné-factor , -6 ris , M . (béne ; facio ) , a benefactor .
béné-ficium ,-ii , N . (béne ; ta
cio ) . well-doing, favor , benefi t .
b ib O ,b ib ére ,b ibi , nop.p.,todrink .
B ib racte ,-is , N .
, Bibracte, the
chief town Of the iEdui.B ib rax ,
-actis , N . Bibraa' , a tow n
of Gaul, in the terr itory Of the
Remi.B ib lilus , -i , M .
, Marcus C a lpur
n ius, consul B .C . 59, colleague
of Caesar.
b i-duum , 411. N . (b is ; d ies ) , a
space of two days.
bi-ui , -ae, -a.numeral distributiveadj. (b is ) , two each, two by two.
b I-partitb, adv. (b is ; pars ) , intwo parts, two divisions .
b is , num . adv.,twice.
Bo ii , -6 rum, M . , theBon , a people
Of Gaul .bbn-i tas , «i ti s , F . (bbnus ) , good
ness, virtue, worth.
bbnus , -a,-um , adj . , good (149.
as noun ,bbnum .
-i , N .
good ; N .pl . as noun , b5n i ( cf. 3.
good men ; b 5na, -6 rum ,
goods , p roperty.
bOS , bbv is , com. gen . an
or , a cow.
b rachiump ii , N . ( b race arm.
b r5v18 , -e , adj ., short, small, brief .
B ri tann ia, -ae , F ., Britain .
Bri tann i , -d rum , M , the inhabi
tants of Britain, Britons .
Bri tanniam ,-a,
-um, British
8 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
céléb er, -b ris , -b re, adj . , fre
quented, celebrated .
céler , 3m ,-ére, adj., swift,fl eet.
célér-i tas ,-atis , F . ( céler ) , swift
ness, quickness, speed.
célér-i ter , adv. ( céler ) , swiftly,quickly, speedily.
0610, A re, -5vi , -atum to
hide, conceal.
C eltae, -5rum , M ., the C elts the
inhabitants Of Central Gaul.
ech aco ,-ere ,
-ui , -um , to reckon,estimate ( of proceedings in
Senate) , vote, to give one’
s op in
ion.
cen tum , adj ., indecl ., a hundred .
centuria, -ae, F . ( cen tum ) . a
divis ion of one hundred ; a cen
tury, company .
centurib,-6 nis , M . ( cen tum ) , the
commander of a century a cen
tur ion .
certs-men,-Inis , N . ( certo ) , a
contest, battle.
certidrem to inform.
cert6 , adv. ( eertus ) , certa inly.
certo ,-are , -av i , { tum , to fight,
contend.
certus ,-a,-um , adj. ( cerno ) ,deter
mined,fixed, certain ; resolved.
cess o , A re , -av i , -atum , intens.
( cédo ) , to delay, cease, linger .
( CGtErus ) , -a,-um , adj . ( nomina
tive singular M . not found) ,the other, the rest.
ceu, conj . , as, as if .
cibaria, -6 rum, N . ( cihua) ,food,p rovis ions,fodder .
Ci cérb. -6 nis , M ., Marcus Tul
lius C icero, the greatest of RO
man orators and writers
106C imb ri , -6rum , M . , a people of
Northern Germany.
b ingo , Oingére, cinz i. cinctum ,
to gird, surround, besiege.
circa, adv . and prep. with the
acc., a round, about.
circi ter , adv. and prep. w ith the
acc., round about, near .
c ircui-tus , -fi s , M . ( circumeo ) ,a going around in a circle ; a
circuit, compass.
circum , adv. and prep . w ith acc.,
around, about, near .
circum-d o , d are ,-d5d i , d atum ,
to p ut around, surround with,encompass ; circumdare m iirum urbi or urbem min-6 , to
put a wall round the city, or to
surround the city with a wa ll.
circum-fun d o ,-fun d5re, Jud i .
-ffi sum, p our around, ( pass )rush in on all sides .
circum-s to ,-s t5re ,
-s téti , no p .pto stand around ; to surround,beset, besiege.
circum-v anio ,-ire , -v én i , -ven
tum , to come around, encompass ,invest.
cis , prep . w ith acc., on this side.
e i tér ior , -us , adj . (150. on
this side, hither ; Gal lia c i téri
o r , hither Gaul, i .e ., this side of
the A lps .
ci td , adv., quickly, speedily, soon
( comp. ci tius , sup . ci tis s i
meci tré, prep . w ith abl . and adv.
,
on this s ide ; before, within .
civ-i lis , -e , adj . ( civis ) , belongingto citizens, civil, courteous.
civis , -is , com . gen . , a citizen.
civ -Itas , i tis , F . ( civ is ) citizen
ship ; a city, state ; freedom ofthe city.
clades , -is , F ., disaster, slaughter .
clam , adv .,secretly ; prep. w ith
abl., without the knowledge of .
clamo , a re,-avi , i tum, to cry
out, call, p roclaim.
C larus , -a, -um , adj., clear , bright,illustr ious.
C las s is , -is , F ., a fl eet.claudo ,
-ere, -s i , -sum , to shut,close, surround,finish.
10 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
con-ci lium ,-ii , N . ( con ; Cale , to
call) , ameeting, a ssembly, council.con-c lam o ,
-are ,-av i , -atum
, to
cry out, to shout.
con -ciip i-s co , c up is cére ,-c iip i
v i or -c iip ii ,-C iip i tum , inch .
( eon ; Cup io ) , to be very de
sirons of , strive afl er .
con-curro , c fi rrére ,-curri or
-cfi cur ri , -cursum , to run to
gether , assemble, fight.con cur-sue, 433, M . ( concurro ) ,
a concourse, assembly, attack.
con-d emno ,-are ,
-av i , -atum
( con ; d amn o ) , to condemn .
con -d i C -id ,-6n is , F .
, terms , condi
tion .
cond i t id , see con d icid .
con-d o ,-dére ,
-d id i , -d i tum,to
p lace together ; tofound , hide.
con-d iico ,-d ii cére ,
-dfix i , -duc
tum,to lead together, collect ; to
C dnféro , cOnfer re , con tii li , co l
latum,to br ing together , collect.
cénfertus , -a,-um
, part. ( Cantercio , to cram together ) , close,crowded , crammed .
cdnfes tim , adv . ( cénféro ) , immediately, sp eedily .
cdn-ficio ,-fi cére, -féci , -tectum
( con ; fac io ) , to accomplish,
finish .
cOn -fi d o ,-fi d ére, -fisus sum
( 2 48 . 2 , Obs . to trust confidently, confide .
cOn-fi rm o ,-are ,
-av i,-atum , to
makefi rm, establish, strengthen .
cOn -fi teo r ,-fi t6 ri ,
-fes sus sum ,
dep. ( eon ; fateo r ) , to confess .
cOn-fbd io ,-f5dére , -f6 d i , -fos
sum,to dig ; to p ierce through,
stab.
cOn-fiigio ,-fiig5re , -fiigi , no p.p.
,
to flee for refuge .
cOn-grédior , -gr5d i , -
gres sus
sum , dep . ( con ; grad io r ) , tomeet, encounter, contend,fight.
con-grnc ,-gru5re ,-grui , no p .p.
,
to agree w ith, meet.
COn-le io (pronounced con -iic io ) , J eers ,
-jec i , -jec tum
( con ; ji c io ) , to throw together ,throw , hur l ; in ffigam c on i
cére , to p ut tofl ight.con-jungo ,
-gére , -x i,-c tum
, to
j oin together , connect, unite .
con jii ra-tid , -6 nis,F .
,a swea r
ing together , consp iracy .
con jura-tus,-i, M . ( con jure ) ,
consp irator .
con-jiiro ,-are ,
-av i ,-atum , to
swear together , consp ire.
con jux ( con junx ) , -iigis , com .
gen . ( con jungo ) , a wife, hasband , a betrothed .
con-lega ,-ao , M . ( con ; lego ) ,
associate , colleague.
eon-ligo ,-are ,
-av i ,-5 tum ( con ;
to bind together restra in .
con-16 00 ( co ll -are ,-av i
,
fi tnm, to p lace together ; to
settle in a p lace ; to give a wo
man in marr iage.
con-lbquium ,-ii , N .
, a talking to
gether , conversation, conference .
con-lbquo r , -i ,-cutus , dep . , con
verse, have a conference together .
Cane r , -ari,-atus sum
, dep., to
attemp t, endeavor, try .
Can-s anguin-eus ,
-a,-um
, ad j.
( con ; sanguis ) , related byblood , related .
can-s cen d o ,-d 5re , -d i , -s um
( con ; scan d o ) , to climb; (nav és ) , embark.
cc‘
m-s cri bo ,-bére , -p s i ,
-p tum , to
enlist, enroll, inscr ibe, wr ite.
cén s en-sus , di s , M . ( con sen tib ) ,an agreement.
can-Séquor ,-qui ,
-ciitus sum,
dep . , to follow after , overtake.
c6 n-séro ,s érére , -s érui , -s er
tum , to j oin, unite, bring to
gether ; pfi gn am or proelium
cénsérére , to j oin battle ma
VOCABULA RYO I .
num cénsérére , to engage in a
hand-to-hand conflict.céns ldéro ,
a re ,A v i , -atum , to
examine , consider , observe care
fullyC éns id ifi s -ii , M .
, one of Caesar’
s
officers .
can-s id e ,s id ére , s es sum ,
to s it down together, encamp .
céns i lium ,-ii
, N . , deliberation ,advice, talent ; cbnsfl ib, on
purpose, intentionally.
cén-s is to ,s is tére , -s titt, -s tI
tum , to stand still,make a stand .
c énspec-tus ,-fi s
, M . ( consp ic io ) , a sight.
can-splc io ,s p lcére , -spex1,
a pectum ( con ; spécio ) , tolook at, behold , observe.
cansp lco r ,4 11,4 tus , dep., to see.
cénsptra-tiG,-6 nis
, F . ( consp it o ) , an agreement, consp iracy .
cbnstan-tia ,-as , F . ( cbnstans ) ,
firmness, constancy .
c6n-s t1tuo ,-uére , -uI , -fl tum
( con ; s ti tuo ) , to p lace, make,determine.
can-s to , s tare ,-s tItI, s tatum , to
stand together ; consist ofc6 nsu6—sco ,
e scére ,-6vI, é tum ,
inch. ( consus o ) , to be accus
tomed, be wont.
cbnsué-tfi d o ,-ln is
, F . ( cénsuétus ) , custom,
habit, usage, inter
course.
cbnsul , -iilis , M ., a consul ; one
of the two chief magistrates
of Rome, chosen yearly .
cbnsfil-ata s , -fi s , M . ( cbn sul ) ,the ofi ce of consul, consulship .
cans ifl o ,-ére , -u
‘
i, 4mm , to delib
erate, consider , advise, consult
for ; El len! cénsfi lEre , to con
sultfor one’s interest ; i li quem
cbns ii lére , to consult, take ad
vice oj ; one.
cénsul-tum ,-I, N . ( cbnsfilo ) , a
decree, decis ion, resolve.
11
con-tendo , d ére, -d i'
,-tum, to
strivefor, contend,fight hasten .
conten-tib, -6n.is , F . ( contendo ) ,a straining ; dispute.
con-testor , A r i , -atus sum, dep.,
to call to witness , invoke.
continen-ter , adv. ( continen s ) ,moderately ; continuously, with
out interruption .
con-tlneo ,-tIn ére ,
-tInuI, -ten
tum ( con ; téneo ) , to hold to
gether, to hold in , keep back, re
strain, confine.
con-tingo ,-ting6re, 415i , -tac
tum ( con ; tango ) , to touch,border upon ; impers . , contin
git mihi, it is my lotcon tln-uus , -a ,
-um , adj . ( contin eo ) , unbroken , continuous .
con tra, adv. and prep. w ith acc.,
over against, oppos ite to.
con -trého ,-h6r e ,
-xI, -etum , to
draw together , assemble, contract.
con tra-t in s , -a ,-um , adj . ( con
tra ) , opposite, contrary, opposed ,hostile.
con trévers-ia ,-ae , F . ( contro
v ersus ) , controversy, dispute.
con tfimé-lia ,-as , F . ( contfimeo ) ,
abuse, insult ; in pl., abus ive
ep ithets .
con-venio ,-v énlre, -v ént, -v en
tum , to come together , assemble ;convéntre i ll quem , to accost
one conv én it, impers ., it is
agreed upon
conven-tus , 41s , M . ( convénio ) ,a coming together ; an assembly .
con-verto ,-tére ,
-ti , -sum, to turn
round, change, turn ; conver
téta in fiigam , to put tofl ight.con~v6co , A re ,
-5v i , 4mm , to
call together , assemble, summon .
co—briot , -6 rIr'
i , -ortus ( con ; brior ) , dep.
,3 and 4 conj ., arise,
break out (war ) .
cophlnus , J , M ., a basket.
cépia, «a s , F . ( con ; cp s ) , abun
12
dance pl.,wealth.
cop i-osus , -a, -um , adj. ( copia ) ,
well supp lied, abounding, p lenti
ful, copious .
coquo ,-ére , cox i , ooctum, tocook.
coram , adv. and prep. w ith abl.,openly ; in thep resence of,before.
C orin thus , -I, F ., Cor inth, a city
of Greece .
C o rnelia ,-ae, F . , the first w ife
of Caesar .
co rnu, 418 , N ., a horn ; the wing
of an army .
co rpus ,-oris , N .
, av
body, corpse.
cotti di—an us or cotidi-anus -a ,
-um , adj., daily.
co ttidié or 06 511116 (quot ) , adv.,
daily.
créber , -b ra ,-b rum , adj ., thick,
close, frequent.oréd o ,
-d ére , -d Itum (w ithdat. to trust ; (w ith acc .
and believe.
orémo , a re ,-5v i , -5 tum , to burn .
creo , A re , i v i‘
,-5 tum , to bring
forth, beget, create, elect.oré-soo , orescére , crévi
'
, crétum
( creo ) , to grow, grow up , in
crease.
crini s , -is , M . , the ha ir .
crucia-tus , -1'
is , M. ( criicio ) , torture, tor ment.
crux ,-ucis , F ., a cross, torture.
cub o , A re,-ui
'
,-Itum, to lie down,
recline.
culpa,-ao, F .
, crime,fault,failure.
culpo , «i re , -avi , -atum ( culpa ) ,to censure, blame.
cum , prep. w ith abl., with, together
with, among.
cum ( quum ) , conj ., when, since,although, though ; cum . tum ,
both and .
cunctor , -5ri , A tus sum , dep ., to
linger, hes itate, delay.
cfip i—d é , adv. ( cupldus ) , eagerly,
zealously, ardently.
supp lies, troop s,
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
cup i d-Has , é tis , F . ( cup l dus ) ,a longing, desire, avarice.
cup-Idus , -a,-um , adj. ( cup io ) ,
eager , desirous, covetous, fond .
cupio ,-ére, -iv i ( or -ii ) , Ji tum,
to long for a thing, covet ; to
favor ( w ithcfi r , adv .
, why ? for what reason ?ot
'
iria,-ao, F .
, a curia , one of the
thirty parts into which Bomulus divided the Roman people ;the senate-house.
cura ,-ae, F . ( quaero ) , trouble,
care, attention, pains.
C fi riatius , -ii , M ., an A lban family name .
cfi ro ,-i re, { v i «i tum ( cum ) ,
to care for ; manage, govern ;cure.
curro .currére ,cucurri, oursum ,
to run, hasten .
currus ,-i
'
ia, M ., a chariot.
cur-sue,-fi s , M . ( curro ) , a run
ning, race, j ourney, voyage.
cus tos , -6 di s , M ., guard, watch
man.
D .
damno , i re , d vi , { tum ( damnum fine, damage) , to con
demn, pass sentence on damna
re capl tis , to condemn to death.
damnum ,-i , N . , loss .
d é, prep. w ith ah] . ( the subjectof thought) , of ; ( of place ) ,down from, from ; ( of time ) ,during, at, concerniu
d ea,-ae , F . (dat. and a
sh]. pl. doabus ) , a goddess .
d é-b eo ,-bére, -bui , -b1tum ( do ;
h i b eo ) , to owe, be bound, be
due ; w ith an infin itive after
it, translate it by ought, must,etc. impers.
, debet, it behooves,ought
decem , num . adj. indecl., ten.
Decem-b er , -b ris , M . ( decem ) ,the tenth month of the Roman
VOCABULA RY. I .
oi tum ( dis ; placco ) (w ithto displease.
d is -puto , «i re, A v l , -atum , to
discuss ; argue.
d is sens -id ,-6n is , F . (dissen tio ) ,
difl‘
erence of op inion, disagree
ment, quarrel .
d is s idium ,-i , N .
, discord.
d is-s imi lis , -e , adj . , unlike, dissimilar .
d i tior , d i tis s imus , comp . and
superlative of d iv es .
d iii , adv. ( dies ) , by day, a
long time, long ago ; comp.,
difi tius ; superlative,aimé.
d i v-os , J tis , adj., r ich ( the nom.
and acc. of the neut. pl. do not
occur ; comp., d iv i tior or d i
ti or ; superlative, divi tis s imus
or d itis s lmus ) .D ivied ,
-6ni s , M .,Divico, a Hel
vetian leader.
d i-v id o ,-v l d ére ,
-v i s i , -v isum , to
separate, divide, distinguish.
D iv i tiacus , -I, M ., D ivitiacus, an
ZEduan chief.
d o , dare, ded l , datum ( 7 5 . N .
to give ; finem d i re, to p ut an
end to.
dooco , e re,-ui, 4mm, to teach.
d oc-tus , -a,-um , part. ( doceo ) ,
learned,versed, exper ienced .
‘dbleo , é re , Al i , -Itum , tofeelpa in ,lament, be sorryfor .
d bl-o r , -6 ris , M . pain,anguish, anger .
dolus , -i , M ., guile, fraud, deceit.dom-I-c i l-ium ,
-iI, N . ( d6mus ) , a
habitation, dwelling, abode.
domina-tib,-6ni s , F . ( d om inor ) ,
rule ; despotism.
d bmlnus , -i , M . ( dbmo ) , a mas
ter , lord, chief ; owner .
d bmo , A re,-ui , ~l tum , to subdue,
vanquish, overcome, conquer .
d bmus ,-i or 418 , F . a house,
home ; ddmi , at home.
15
B .
6 , ex , prep. w ith abl . , outof;from,
of ; ex Itinére, on the march ;ex equd , on horseback .
é-d i'
co ,-d
'
icére , -d ix‘
i , -dictum,
to declare, publish order .
e
d 6neo, conj . , as long as, while ;until
dono , A re ,-avi , -5 tum ( donum ) ,
to give (with ace. of thing and
dat. of person, or ace. of per
son and abl. of thing) .d 6num ,
-i , N . ( d o ) , a gift, present.d o rmi o , i re , -i
'
vi or -ii , -i'
tum , to
sleep, rest.
D i'
ib is ,-is , M ., a river of Gaul.
dub i ta-tid ,-6nis , F . ( dub i to ) , a
doubting, doubt, hesitation .
d iibi to , A re, A v i , -atum , intens .
( duo , through old form, dubo ) ,to doubt, hesitate.
dubius , -a ,-um , adj . ( duo ) , doubt
ful as noun, dub ium ,
-i , N ., doubt.
d ii-cen ti , -ao,-a, num . adj. ( duo ;
centum ) , two hundred.
dfi co , dfi cére , dfixi , ductum , to
lead ; put ofl, consider , think ;m i
'
irum dfi cére, to build a wall
ux drem in mat rimdn ium dfi
cére , to marry ( a woman ) .
du lcis , -e, adj . , sweet, agreeable.
dum , conj . , while, so long as , un
til, provided that
d um-mbdo , conj ., p rovided that,
if onlyDumnbrix ,
-Igis , M ., Dumnorizv,an E duan chief.
duo ,-ae ,
-o , num. adj two
dud-d écim , num . adj. , indecl.,twelve.
duo-d é-v i‘
ginti , num . adj ., ihdecl., two from twenty, eighteen .
D y rrachium,-ii , N .
, a sea-coast
town of I llyria, formerly calledEpidamnus ( now Duraz zo) .
16
edo , édére or esse, Ed i , ésumor essum to eat.
é—d o ,-d ére ,
-d id i , -d Itum , to give
forth, p ublish, exhibit, display.
e-duco ,-dfi cére ,
-d iix i , -ductum ,
to leadforth, march out troops.
Educo ,-are, -avi
'
, A tum, to bringup , rear , educate.
ef-féro , eifert e , extul i , Glatum ,
irreg. ( ex ; féro ) , to carryforth,to br ingforth, publish
ef-fi cio , fl eet s , 4ed i , -tectum
( ex ; facio ) , to make out, bringto pass to efl ect (323.
ef-fun do ,-fun d ére ,
-ffi sum
( ex ; fund o ) , to pour out or
forth ; to overflow ; squander ;effundére 8 6 , to spread out.
ese-nus ,
-a ,-um , adj . (egeo ) , in
want, destitute, needy.
égo , met, pron . , I ; pl . n6 s
e-grédi o r , -grédi , -gressus sum ,
dep. ( ex ; grad ior ) , to go out,
goforth, leave.
é-greg-ius , -a, -um , adj . ( é ; gréx ) ,
(out of the herd) , excellent, remarkable.
é-Icio (pronounced e-jl cio ) , J oet e,
-jeci , -jectum ( e ; jac io ) , tocast, thrust or dr ive out, expel,banish élcére 8 6 , to rush out.
e-lab or , -lab i , -lap sus sum , dep.,
to slip away, escape.
Gl atus , -a ,-um , part. (efféro ) ,
exalted, lofiy, high.
élégan s ,-ntis , adj . , elegant.
Glbquent-ia ,-s e, F . (elbquens ) ,
a being eloquent, eloquence.
é-mlneo ( ex ; mineo ) , -ere, -uI.
no sup ., to stand out, excel.
emo , emere , em i‘
, emp tum , to
buyenim , conj . ( strengthened formof nam , for ; placed after the
first word or words) , for , indeed, in act ( 205 .
e-nuntio cio ) , A re , A v i , -5tum ,
to divulge ; to rep ort.
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
eo . ire , iv i or ii , Itum , irreg., to
go
ed , adv. ( is ) , thither ; to thatp lace,so far ; therefore. With com
paratives, by so much, so much,the qu6 ed , the the.
edd em , adv. ( id em ) , to the same
p lace, the same way.
Bp l cfiréus ,-a,
-um , adj. Ep icarean .
Ep is tii la, -ao, F . , a letter, ep istle.
éques , equi tis , M . (Equus ) , a
horseman, rider ; pl . , équl tés ,
cavalry ; also the knights, theequi
tes, as an order in the state .
Eques-ter , -tris , -tre , adj . (éques ) ,belonging tohorsemen equestrian .
é-qui dem , adv .,ver ily, truly .
Equi ta-tus , -de, M . ( équl to ) , ar id ing, cava lry.
squIt-o ,«are,A vt,A tum ( éques ) ,to be a horseman to r ide.
equus , J , M ., a horse, steed .
ergd , adv. ( 205 . therefore, ac
cordingly.
e-rip io ,-rlpére, -rlpui ,
-reptum
( e ; rap io to snatch away, r es
cue érlp re 8 6 , to snatch one’s
self away, to escape.
é-rud-io , i re ,-iv
'
1'
or -iI , -Itum
( e ; rud is ) , to free from rude
ness, educate, instruct.
et , conj . and a lso, too, as ;et et, both and, not only
but also.
etiam , conj . , and also, besides,likewise, ( 205 . certa inly,
yes with comparatives, still ;magi s etiam , still more.
et-s i , conj . , even if, although
yet, but.
Eurip id es , -is , M ., a celebrated
A then ian tragic poet .
e-vad o ,-dére, -si , -sum , to go
forth, to escape from.
é-vello ,-v ellére, -vellI or -vuls !,
-vulsum , to tear out, remove.
6-vén io ,-vénIre, N ani , -ventum ,
18 F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
exsul-to ,-fire,
-5vi , A tum , in
tens. ( ex ; to leap up ; re
j oice exceedingly.
ex-ter ( térus ) , -éra, -érum , adj.
( ex ) , outside, foreign, strangecomp. exterior. outer , exte
r ior superlative, extremus or
( extimus ) , outer most, last.ex -tlmésco ,
-timés cére , -timui ,
no p.p., v. A . and N .
, fear
grea tly, dread.
ex-to llo ,-to llére , no perf., no
p . p. to lift up , raise up , exalt.
extra, adv. , and prep. w ith acc.
on the outside, beyond.
fa-ber, -b ri , M . ( facio ) , a carp en
ter , smith, artisan .
fab ri co , «are , d v i , -atum (fab er ) , toframe, make, construct,
budd.
fi b rlcor , «fu l , -5tu s sum , dep.,
toframe, build, fashion .
fa-bfi la, -ao, F . (for ) , a story,
fable.
facétus , -a, -um , adj., courteous .
ti on-e , adv. ( faci lis ) , easily.
ti c-His , -e , adj. ( facio ) , easy,courteous, afl
'
able (149.
fi e-inns , -6 ris , N . ( facio ) , a deed,crime.
facio , facere, féci , factum , to
make, do ; passive, fio ,fi éri ,
factus sum , to be made, to be
come (302 ) castra facére , to
p itch camp impers . fi t, it hap
p ens, is usual , fiat , so be it.
fac-tio ,-6nis , F . ( facio ) , a mak
ing ; a p arty, faction.
fac-tum ,-i , N . ( facio ) . a deed, act,
exp loit.
fal lo , fal lers , féfelli , falsum , to
deceive.
fal -sus , -a,-um , part. ( fallo )
fam Il-ia, -ae , F . ( famifl us , a
servant) , family-servants , retainers family, household ; pater
fami liAs or fami liae , master ofa family .
famIIi-aris , -is , M . ( fam i lial ) , ofthe household ; subst. , a friend .
fas , indecl., N . ( for ( that wh ichis right in the sig t of heaven) ,divine law ; right
fas cis , -is , M .
, a bundle, p arcel ;fas ces . pl ., a bundle of rods
and an axe carried by the lic
tors before a chief magistrate,with which criminals were
scourged and beheaded ; the
fasces.
fateor , fated , fes sus sum, to
confess .
fa-tum ,-I, N . ( for ) , destiny, fate,
calamity.
fauces , -ium , F . ( found in thesing. only in the abl. ; fauce) ,the throat, gullet a defi le, pass .
F aus tulus , -i'
, M .,Faustulus , the
shepherd who brought upRomulus and Remus.
faveo , favérej avi , fautum , tofa
Vvor, p rotect.
P éb ruArius , -ii , M ., February .
féli c-Iter, adv . ( félix ) , ausp i
ciously, favorably.
fel'
ix,-Ic is , adj. (too , to p roduce) ,
fruitful ; happy,fortunate.
fet a, -s e , F . ( férus ) , a wild ani
mal, wild beast.
féré, adv., near ly, generally.
fero , ferre, tuli , latum , irreg.
to bear, bring, endure ;bring forth ; tell, relate ; raise,exalt ; iernut, they say ; fertur.it is said ; auxi lium ferre , to
bring aid ; in juries ferre , to
infl ict inj ur ies ; ferre légem ,
to propose a law.
fer-dx ,-dcis , adj. ( féro ) , bold,
fierce.
ferrum ,-I, N .
, iron ; sword, arms .
22 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
hortor , «h i , -atus sum , dep ., to
incite, cheer , exhort, urge.
hortus , -i , M ., a garden .
hosp It-ium,
-iI, N . (hospes ) , ap lace of hosp itality, inn .
hos tis , -is , com . gen . a
stranger , an enemy.
hum-Anus , -a ,-um , adj . (homo ) ,
p erta in ing toman, human ; court
eous, civilized.
humérus , see umdrus .
Ib i , adv . ,in thatp lace, there.
Ib idem , adv .,in the same p lace.
ico , icére , ici , ictum , to str ike,hit, smite, stab; foedus icére,to make or conclude a treaty.
ic-tus , 41s , M . ( ico ) , a blow,
thrust.
Idem , ead em, i d em, pron .,the
some, very id em qui ,
the same as .
Iddneus , -a,-um , adj ., meet, p rop
er , suitable
idus , -uum , F . pl . , the Ides ; the
fifteenth day of the months
March, May, July, and Octo
ber, the thirteenth day of the
remain ing months .
Igi tur , conj . ( 205 . then, there
upon ; therefore, consequently.
i’
gnis , -is , M . ,fi reI-gnds co ,
-gn6 scére ,-gn 6vl ,g ut
”
)
tum ( in gnds co ndsco ,with
to pardon , forgive, excuse,overlook.
I-gndtus ,-a ,
-um, adj. ( in ; gubtus ndtus ) , unknown .
il l i tus , or inlfitus , see in-féro .
ille, -a ,-na, pron . demonstr .
( 234. that, that yonder ; hic
. ille, this that, the one
the other .
il lic , adv. ( ille ; es ) , in thatplace,there.
il-licd , adv. ( in ; on the
spot, instantly, there.
imago ,-Ini s , F ., an image or like
ness, statue, picture.
imb er , -b rls , M ., a shower of rain .
-a,-um , ad] . ( in ;
m i tfi rus ) , unripe, immature.
immd ( im d ) , adv . , on the con
trary no indeed, yes indeed .
im-mort i lis , -e , adj . ( in ; mor
ti lis ) , undym fi
’ immortal.
im-par ,
-ar1s ( in ; par) , uneven, unequal, not a matchfor .
im—patiens , -en tie, adj. ( in ; patiens ) , notable to bear.impatien t.
impdd i—mentum ,-I, N . ( impe
dio ) , a hindrance, impediment ;imped i
‘
m enta, -6 rum , N . pl . ,baggage.
im-pédio ,
-ire, -ivi'
or -lI, -i tum
( in ; pés ) , to entangle, hinder ,impede.
imped1-tus -a,-um , part. (M pe
d io ) , hindered, imp eded.
im-pello ,
-pollére, p un,-pu1
sum ( in ; pello ) , topushagainsturge on , impel.
impéra-tor , -6 ris , M . (impero ) ,general, commander ( in chief) .
im-perfectus , -a,-m , adj. ( in ;
perfectus ) , unfinished, imp erect.
imper—ium ,-iI, N . ( impéro ) , a
command ; authority ; emp ire,
gover nment.
im-péro , a re,
-atum ( in ;paro ) , to command ; govern, rule
over ; impérare obs i d és an
out, to demand hostages fromany one.
im-petro , A re, a vi , -atum ( in ;patro ) , to accomp lish ; to make
a request and have it granted.
impetus , -tfi s , M ., an attack, as
sault, onset; impetuosity.
im-pldro , fi re, é vi , { tum ( in ;p ldro ) , to invoke with tears, callto one
’
s assistance ; to imp lore.
24
ferre s ign a , to advance the
standards, attack ; in ferre pé
d em or gradum ,to advance,
attack ; se in ferre , to betake
one’
s self,go.
iu-férus , -a ,-um , adj . ( comp. in
fer ior , sup. infimus or imus ) ,low, nether . A S noun ,
in fer'
i,
-6 rum , M . pl . ( the inhabitantsof the lower regions) , the dead .
infes to , «are,-8 v i
,-5 tum ( in fes
tus ) , to attack, molest, infest.in-fes tus
,-a
,-um
, adj . ( old part.
of infero ) , hostile ; unsafe.
infimus,-a ,
-um, adj . ( superlar
tive of intern s ) , the lowest, last,lowestpart of .
in—fl ecto ,-fl ectére
,-fl ex
um,to bend down warp afl eet.
in -flo ,fl are ,
-flav i,
-flatum , to
blow into ; inflate.
in-fluo ,-fluére , -flfix i , -fluxum ,
tofl ow into,flow upon ,glow.
infra, adv. and prep. wit acc., be
low, beneath, under , underneath .
in-gén s ,
-en tie, adj . ( in ; gén s ,beyond its kind, so) , great, vast.
in i c io (pronounced in -jiclo ) ,-i cére, -jeci , -jectum ( in ; iicio ) , to throw or cast into, cast
upon or against ; infuse into,insp ire ; in i cére metum al i cui ,
to insp ire one withfear .
in—imi cus , -a , -um , adj . ( in ; m i
cus ) , unfriendly, hostile. A s
noun , M ., a private enemy or
foe.
in-iquus ,-a
,-um
, adj . ( in ; s equus ) , unequal, unj ust unkind.
ini-tium, N . ( in eo ) , a begin
n ing, commencement ; origin .
injfi ri-a ,-ae F . ( injfi rius ) , inj ury,violence insult, inj ustice .
ih -nasco r ,-natus sum ,
dep .,to be born in ; spring up in .
ln-n i to r , -n‘
1'
sus or -nixue
sum, dep . , to lean or rest upon,
support one’
s self by.
FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
ln-nocéns , -en tis , adj .
,harmless
blameless, innocent ; d isinter
ested .
inbp-ia
,-ae , F . ( inOp s ) , p over ty ,
need, want.
inquam , def. (305 . 2 b) , I say .
in-s cri b o , a cri bére,-s criptum ,
to wr ite upon, in
scribe ; indicate.
in-séquo r , s écfi tus sum ,
dep .,tofollow af ter , pursue.
ih -s i d eo ,-s i d ére ,
-sessum
( in ; sed co ) , to sit in ; sit up on ,settle upon ; to get possession of ;occupy.
ins i d -iae,A rum
, F . pl . ( in s i dcc ) , an ambush artifice, p lot ;per ins i d ias , by stratagem,
craftily.
in s i d i-or ,-5 ri ,
-5tus sum , dep.
( in s i d iae ) , to lie in wa it for ,watch for , expect.
in s ign—e
,-is
, N . ( in s ign is ) , a distinctivemark ; badge ( of office) ,a signal ; ensign in pl. , in s ign ia,
-ium, badges of honor , dec
orations, ornaments .
i h -e , adj . ( in ; s ignum ) ,remarkable, distinguished, extra
ordinary .
in-s i l io ,-s i l i re ,
-s i lui, no p .p.
( in ; salio ) , to leap or sp r inginto to leap or spr ing upon .
in-s inuo ,-5 re
,-5v i
,-5 tum ( in ;
s inus ) , to penetrate or enter
anywhere by winding in ; insin
uate ; with 8 6,work one
’
s wayinto.
in solen-ter, adv . ( in solens ) , un
usually ; haughtily, insolently .
in-s ti tuo,-s ti tuere, -sti tui
'
,-s t i
tfi tum ( in ; s tatuo ) , to ar range,educate.
in s ti tfi -tum ,-i, N . ( in s ti tuo ) ,
custom, arrangement ; in pl.,institutions .
in-s to ,s t i rs ,
-sti tt, -s tatum , to
stand upon ; approach ; harass.
26
in-v i'
tus , -a, -um , adj. ( in ; V610) ,unwilling, reluctant.
in-vbco , -are , A tum , to call
on or up on ; invoke ; imp lore.
ip s e ,-a,
-um , pron . ( 238 . self;very ; himself; herself,itself .
ira ,-a
,e, F ., anger , wrath, ire.
i ra-cundus , -a ,-um , adj. ( ire ) ,
p rone to anger , irr itable.
i r-asoor , irasci ,'
1'
ratus sum , dep.
( ira) , to be angry, be in a rage.
Ir i -tu s,-a
,-um
, part. act . ( i rascor ) , angry, angered .
ir-rid eo ,-ris i , -risum ( in
rid eo ) , to laugh in ridicule
ridicule.
ir-rumpo ,-rumpére ,
-r i'
1p i ,-rup
tum ( in ; rumpo ) , to break in ,burst in .
ir-ruo ,-ruére ,
-rui , no p. p . ( in ;ruo ) , to rush in or into ; attack
furiously, assault.is , ea, id , pron . ( 238 . this, that;he, she, it ; is qui , the man who,such a one that ; in ed es se, to
be on the point of .
is te , -ta, -tud , pron ., this of yours,
that near you this, that ; that
fellow ( in contempt) ( 234.
i ta , adv. , thus, so ; to such an ex
tent ; i ta ut (w ith in
such a manner that.
tain ,-ac, F .
, I taly.
i ta-que , conj . ( 205 . and so ;therefore, accordingly.
i tem , adv.,in likemanner ; so also.
i ter , i tinéris , N . j ourney,march, route ex i tinere ,
on the march ; magn is i tinéri
bus , byforced marches .
i terum , adv ., again , a second time.
i tfi rus , -a, -um , part. from cc .
J.
jaceo ,-ére,
-ui , no p .p . , to lie, lieL
prostrate, lie dead .
jac io , jacEre, jeci , jactum , to
throw, cast.
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
jacta-tid ,-6nis , F . ( jacio ) ,
throwing ; boasting.
jaet-i to ,-are , no perf., no p .p .
,
frequentative ( jacto ) , to p ourforthfrequently tomake a great
disp lay .
jac-to ,-are ,
-avi , -atum , frequen
tative ( jacio ) , to throw ; ta lk
about.
jam , adv ., now, already, p resently ,
at length ; w ith a negative, as
jam n 6n , no longer .
jam-did , adv .,long ago, already,
for a long time.
janua, -s e , F . ( janus ) , a door ,
gate.
janu-arius , -a ,-um , adj . ( janus ) ,
of or belonging to January . A snoun , M .
, January.
Jan us , -i , M ., an ancient Latin
divin ity, represented w ith twofaces, one in front, the other
behind.
jocue, -i , M . ( in pl . , also joca,-6 rum ) , a j est, j oke.
J6v is , gen . of Jupi ter .
Juba ,-as , M .
, a king of Numidia .
jiib eo , jub ére, jus s i, jus sum , to
order , command.
jfi d ex ,-i cis , com. gen . ( jfi s ;a j udge, ump ire.
jiid i c-ium ,-ii , N . ( ind i co ) , a
j udgment, trial, court.iii -d i co ,
-are ,-atum ( jus ;
d i co ) , to j udge, determine.
jfig—fi lum ,-i , N .
,-us ,
-i , M . ( jungo )( that which joins) , that whichj oins the shoulders and neck ;the throat.
jug-um ,-i , N . ( jungo ) , a yoke
team; a summit ( of amountain) .
Jul ius , -ii , M ., Julius, the name
of a Roman gens ; especiallyGaius Julius C aesar , and his
adopted son , Gaius Julius C az
sar Octavianus A ugustus .
Jul ius , -ii , M ., the month of July ;
so called after Julius Caesar .
VOCA BULARY. I .
Julius , -a, -um , adj ., of July .
iii-mentum ,-i , N . ( jungo ) , a beast
of burden .
jungo , jungers , junxit. junctum ,
to j oin , harness sdcieti tem
jungére , to 0m a partnership .
juni or , -us , j., comparative ( juvénia, 150. younger .
J’
fi -pi ter , see Jfippiter .
Jfi -ppi ter , Jbiris , M . Jup i
ter, son of Saturn ,rother and
husband of Juno, king of gods .
Jura, f ae, M ., a chain of moun
tains extending from the Rhineto the Rhone .
jut e, abl . of jfis , used adverbiallyby right, j ustly .
juro ,-are, a n .
-atum , to swear ,
take an oath.
jfis , jfl ri s , N . , j ustice, law ; court
of j ustice ( acc. pl. wanting) .jfis jfiran dum , jiiris jurand i , N
an oath.
jus t-6 , adv . ( jus tus ) , rightly ,
j ustly.
jfivénis , -is , adj com . gen . (109.
N . and 150. young, youthful ,as subst., jfivems ,
~is , com.gen .
(gen . pl. jfivénum ) , a youngman or woman ( between 17and 45 or
jiiv en-tus , -fi tis , F . ( juvenis ) ,youth, the season of youth.
jiivo , jiivdre , juv i, jfi tum, to help ,
jux ta, prep . w ith acc., near to,
near ; as adv., near by, in like
manner , alike.
Kalend ae ( C a1 d rum , F Cc
lends, the first day of the
month.
KarthAgd ( C ar -inis , F ., Car
thage ; a celebrated city of
Africa.
27
L, an abbrev . for Lucius .
Lab ienus , -I, M ., Labienus an
officer of Caesar in Gaul,who ai
terwards went over to Pompey .
labdro ,-are , -av i , -8 tum ( lab or ) ,
to toil, labor .
lac , lactis , N ., milk.
lacer , -era,-erum , adj., torn ,man
gled, maimed.
laces so ,-es sere ,
—ess iv i , or—es s ii ,or -ess i , -ess itum, to p rovoke,excite, assail, attack.
lacrima,-as , F .
, a tear ; lacrim5sdare, to weep .
laoue, -fis , M ., a lake.
laedo , laed ére , laes i, laesum , to
strike, inj ure ; annoy, violate.
laetor , 4 ri , -atue sum, dep. ( laetus ) , tofeel j oy, be glad.
lambo ,-ere,
-i , no p .p . , to lick, lap .
lanio ,-are ,
-5v i , A tum, to rend,tear in pieces .
lap is , -i d is , M ., a stone , a stone
( placed at the end of every1000paces) , a mile-stone.
laqueus , -ci , M ., a noose, halter ,
snare.
l i t-e, adv. ( latus ) , widely ; farand wide.
lat-éb ra, -as , F ., ( latoo ) , a hiding
p lace, lurking-p lace.
later , -5rls , M ., a brick or tile.
latro ,-are ,
-2vi , -Atum , to bark,
yelp ; bark at.
latro ,-6nis , M .
, a robber , highwayman.
l i tus , -a, -um , adj . , broad wide.
latus ,am .N ., the side,flank,body,lungs ; latéris or latérum d 6
lor , pain in the side, pleurisy.
la-tus , -a ,-um , part. ( féro ) , borne,
carried .
laud o.-are, -5v i , -atum , ( laus ) ,
to p raise.
laurea ,-ao, F ., a laurel-tree lau~
rel-crown .
28
laus , laud is , F ., p ra ise, glory ;laud és ,fame.
léga-tid ,
-6ni s , F ., on ambassy,
legation .
lega-tus , -i , M . ( lego ) , an ambas
sador, lieutenant, messenger .
leg-id ,-6n is , F . ( légo ) , a legion ;
consisting of between 4200
and 6000men .
légidn-Arius
,-a ,
-um , adj . ( légio ) ,of or belonging to a legion ; le
gionary .
lego , légére, legi , lectum , to
gather, select ; read.
Lémannus ,-i , M . , Lake Geneva .
lén-i tas , -atis , F . ( lén is ) , softness,smoothness .
led ,-6n is , M . , a lion.
lex , légi s , F . ( lego ) , law, pre
cep t.
li bent-er ,adv. ( lib en s ) ,willingly,cheerfully, gladly.
lib ec ,-ére,
-ui , -i tum , to p lease ;libet, impers . (314. itp leas
es, it is agreeable.
li ber , -éra, é rum , adj. , free, un
restricted in pl., li beri’
,-6 rum ,
M . ( the free members of the
household) , children .
lib er , -b ri , the inner bark of a
tree ; a book ( since the bark of
a tree was used as material for
writing upon ) .
li'
bEral-i tas , -atis , F . ( li beral ia) ,generosity, liberality.
li ber-e, adv. ( li ber ) ,frankly.
li b6ri , -6 rum , M . pl . ( see liber ) .li bero ,
-are ,-atum ( li ber ) ,
tofree, liberate, acquitli ber-tas ,
-ati s , F . ( li ber ) , freedom, liberty ; candor .
liber-tus , -i , M . ( li bero ) , a freedman .
lib et , 1ib6re, libuit or lib i tum
es t , impers . (314 . itpleases .
liceor , -6ri , -i tus sum , dep.,to
bid (at an auction) .
freely,
FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
li cet , licere , licuit or lic i tumes t , impers . (314. it is allow
able, permitted ; one may, can ;li cet vénias , you may come.
licet , conj . ( 206 . although,though, even if .
lie-tor , -6 ris , M . ( ligo ) , a lictor ;an attendant granted to a
magistrate as a sign of official
dign ity.
lignum , N ., wood ; pl .fire-wood .
lmea-mentum , 3. N . ( linea, a
line) , a line ; pl., drawings,features, lineaments.
Lingon és , -um , M . ( acc . pl.Lingd
nas ) , a people in Celtic Gaul .lingua,
-ae , F .,the tongue ; lan
guage.
l in ter , -tris , F ., a boat, skif ;wherry.
Liscus , -i , M ., Liscus , an E duanchief .
l ittera ( litéra),-ae, F .
, a letter
( of the alp abet) ; littérae ,
pl., an ep istle, literature .
li tus ( littus ) , -6 ris , N .,the sea
shore, shore, coast, beach.
lbcus , M . pl ., loci or lbca,M . and N . ( 8 7 . N . a p lace .
long-é , adv. ( longus ) , far of ,
much, by far ( comp . longius ;superlative, longi s s ime)
longus , -a ,-um , adj . , long ; ta ll ;
distant,tedious.
loquo r ,16qui ,16 cfi tus sum , dep.,
to speak.
lfi ceo . l i‘
icére, li‘
ixi , no p.p ., to
shine, be evident.
Liicius , -ii , M ., a Roman name .
lfi-crum , N . ( luo ) , gain .
liid -i crum , N .,
sport ; show,
public games .
lfid -i -fi co ,-are ,
-av i , { tum (l ildus ; to make sport of ;mock.
lfi d -i-tioor , -ari , -5tus sum , dep.
( Indus ; to make sport
Qf ; tomock.
M i l d ,-6 nis , ill ilo, a friend of
C icero.
m in or , A r i , -5tus sum, dep., to
j utforth ; threaten, menace.
m ino r , -us , adj . comp . (parvus ) ,less. A s noun, m in6 r6s , -um ,
com . gen . pl . , descendants.
m inno ,-u6re ,
-ui , -fi tum , to les
sen, diminish, lower, reduce ; to
grow less.
m inus , adv .,less ; 8 ! minus , if
not ( parum , minus , minime) .m iro r , -rar i , -ratus sum , dep. , to
admire ; to wonder at ( 2 79.
m ix-us , -a ,-um , adj . (miro r ) ,
wonderful, extraordinary.
m i s er , -era,-6rum , adj wretched ,
unfortunate ; sick, ill .
m i ser-eor , -é ri , -i tus or -ertus
sum , dep . (mi ser ) , to p ity,feel
p ity for , commiserate.
m i s éré-s co ,-s cére, no perf., no
p . p .,inch . (mi s6reo to feel
p ity, have compassion jgr .
m i séret , m i sérére , mi seri tum ,
impers . (314. it distresses,stirs p ity ; m i séret m 6 , Ip ity.
M i th ri d fités , ~is , M ., Mithr ida
tes the Great, king of Pontus,who waged war with the R0
mans, and, being at last con
quered by Pompeius, stabbed
himself .
m 6 d o , adv . , only, merely ; at all ;
j ust nom ; m6do m6 d o ,
now now, at one momentat another ; n6n m6 do
s ed 6tiam , not only but
also ; m 6d o , with the subjunctive mood, if only, p rovided
that.
m 6 dus , M ., a measure or stand
a rd bounds, limits, end ; way,manner , method, mode ; ad m6dum , in m6dum , with the
gen . , after the manner of ; likem6d 6 fl iimini s , like a r iver ;hunc in m6dum, after this
31
fashion nfi ll6 m6d 6 , by no
means.m oenia, -ium , N . pl., defensivewalls, city walls ; fortifications .
m616 s ,—is , F ., a mass,mole ; dam ;
difliculty.
m6 les tus , -a, -um , adj ., troublesome
,irksome, annoying.
m6 lo ,-6re , -ui , -i tum , to gr ind.
m6neo ,-61'e, -ui , -i tum , to admon
ish, warn ; punish ; teach.
m6 n -s , montis , M ., a mountain .
mons tro ,-are ,
-atum (mon
s trum ) , to show, point out.
on-s trum ,-i , N . (m6neo )
divine omen ; a monster .
m6 ra, -ae, F . , a delay ; obstacle.
mo rbus , -i , M ., a sickness, disease ;afl iction .
mordeo , mordere , m 6mo rd i
(m6mord i ) , morsum , to bite ;hurt.
m6 rio r ,m6ri (m6riri ) ,mortuus
sum , dep . ( fut. part. , m6 ri tfirus ) , to die, decay.
m6 t o t , A ri , atus sum , dep . (m6t a) , to tarry, stay, loiter ; hinder .
m or-s,mortis , F . (m6rior ) , death.
m 6 e,m 6 ris
, M ., usage, custom; in
pl., customs, character : ex m6 re ,according to custom.
mo-tus,-fi s , M . (m6vcc ) , a mov
ing.
m6v eo,m6vera,mov i , matum ,
tomove, set inmotion ; take away,remove influence arma m6vere, to take arms b ellum
m6v ére, to undertake war .
mcx, adv.
,p resently, soon,directly;afterwards, then.
m lilier , -i6ris , F . , a woman,female.
mult-i tiid o , -d inis , F . (multus ) ,a great number, multitude a
crowd.
mult-6, adv. (multud) ,much,for ;
byfar, bymuch ; mu1t6 pos t orante
, long after or bcqfore.
multus , -a,-um, a j . (comp.
32 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
p lus ; superlative, plurimus ) ,much, many (149.
mundus ,-i , M .
, the universe ; the
world, the earth.
mfin-io ,-i re
,-iv i or -ii
,-i tum
(moenia) , tofortify, build .
mi ni -6 nis, F . a
fortification, rampart.mfi rus , -i , M .
, a wall.
mus , -1'
1ris , com. gen., a mouse.
mus ca,-ao , F ., afly.
mfi -to ,-are ,
-av i ,-atum
,intens.
(m6veo ) , to change ; exchange
nae-tus ,-a,
-um , part. (nanc iscor ) , having obta ined.
nam , conj .,for ( 205 .
nam-que , conj ., for, for indeed
for truly.
nanc-is co r, nan cis ci , nactus or
nan ctus sum,dep., to get, re
ceive find.
nan s,-an tis , part. of no .
narro ,-are ,
-av i ,-5 tum
, to tell,relate, narrate, recount.
nas cor , nas ci , natus sum, dep.
,
to be born ( 248 .
na-to ,-are
,-av i ,
-atum (no ) , toswim.
na-tura,-ae, F . ( h asoor ) , nature ;
disposition, character ; natfi ra,
naturally.
n auta ( nav i ta) , -ae , M ., a sailor,seaman .
nav -i oula , -s e , F ., dim. (navis ) ,
a small vessel boat, skip".
nav ig-ium , N . (nav igo )sailing ; vessel, ship , boat.
nav is ,-is
, F . (acc.,ui v em or
nav im ; abl., nav e or nav i ) , aship ; nav is longa , a ship ofwar .
né , adv. and con j ., l . adv., not, no ;n é qui d em , not even ( theword or phrase emphasized
always between the n é and
qui dem ) ; 2 . conj ., thatnot, lest;in final clauses, that not, lest ;with verbs of fearing, that or
lest (321. 2 8: 2 7 8 . 1-n e, interrog. and encliticparticle,whether ( in direct questions neis not to be translated, exce t
by laying emphasis upon e
word to which it is joined) .nec , see n6que .
neces sari-d , adv. (nécessar ius ) ,necessarily, unavoidably.
né-ces-se , neut. adj. ( found on lyin nom. and acc. Sing.) (116 ;06d o ) , unavoidable, necessary.
neces s -i tas ,-atis , F . (necess e) ,
necessity ; force.
necess -i tiido , -inis , F . (néces s e),closely bound ; intimacy ; close
relationship .
nec-no, conj ., or not.
neco , -5.re ,-5v i ( -ui ) ,é tum , tokill.
n é-dum , conj by nomeans , muchless not to say, much more .
né-fas , N . indecl . , that which isunlawful
nEg-ligo ,-lig6re , -lex i , -lectum
( nec ; to neglect, disre
gard .
nego ,-are,
-av i,-atum
, to sayno ; deny, refuse.
n 6g-6 tium 41, N . (nec ; dtium ) ,a business, occupation diyiculty matter ; nu116 n égdtid ,without trouble.
né-md ( in place of gen . n 6m inis,
n ii llius is used ; in place of ab].nomin e , nu116 , M .
, or 11171115F . ,
is used) , M . and F . (né ,
h6mo ) , no one, nobody ; nem6n6u, every body, all ; n 6n n 6
m6 , some.
nepo s , -6 tis , M . and F . , a grand
son, a grand-daughter, a neph
ne-que or nec , conj . , and not ;n6que (nec ) néque (nec ) ,neither nor .
34
N ovemb ri s , -e , adj of N ovember .
n 6v i , see n6 s co .
n6vus , -a, -um , adj new ; recent,
strange ; u6vae rés , revolution
the comparative of this adj . iswanting, superlative n6v is s i
mus , latest, last; n 6v is s imumagmen , the rear .
nox , noctis , F ., night ; darkness .
n iibé s,-is
, F ., a cloud.
ndh o ,nfibere , m
'
ipei'
,nfi p tum
(nub es ) , to veil one’
s self,marry (used only of a woman
marrying a man , and governs
the dative) , see matr imdn ium .
n1‘
111us , -a, -um , adj . (ne ; fi llus )not any, none, no .
num,interrog . particle (91. 1.
c) , whether ?n iiméro
,-are ,
-5v i,-atum (n ii
m6rus ) , to count, number ; es
teem.
nfimérus , M ., a number ; a
multitude.
N iim i d ia , -ae , F . , a country of
northern A frica ( now A lgeria) .N iim i to r
,-6 ris
,M .
, a km of
A lba, brother of Amulius and
grandfather of Romulus and
Remus .
numquam ( nunquam ) , adv. ( na ;umquam ) , at no time, never ;n6n nunquam , sometimes .
nunquam , see numquam .
nuntio ( nuncio ) , -are ,-5v i ,
atum (nun tius ) , to announce,
declare.
nun tius -c ius ) , -ii , M ., a messen
ger ; news, tidings .
nfi -per , adv . (n6vus ) , recently .
0 , interj . , oh1ob , prep . w ith acc . , on account of;for ; quam ob rem
,wherefore,
accordingly.
F I RST STEPS IN LA TIN .
6b -aer-atus , -a,-um
, adj . ( ob ;aes ) , involved in debt. A s noun ,
6b aeratus , -i , M . , a debtor .
6b -edio ,-i
'
re ,-iv i or -i tum
( ob ; audio ) (with to
give ear to ; obey.
6b -ao ,-'
i re ,-'
iv i or -ii ,-i tum , to
go towards, meet, die.
ob-i cio (pronounced oh -ji c io )-ji cére , -jeci , -jectum ( objacio ) , to cast in the way ; re
p roach.
obli -tus ,-a ,
-um, part . ( obliv i s
co r ) , having forgotten ; forgetul .
chiliv iscor
, ob liv is ci , ob li tus
sum , dep .,toforget.
oh -n6xius , -a ,-um
, adj . ( ob ;n6x a ) , frail ; liable ; obedient.
ob -ruo ,-ru6re, -rui , -tutun , to
overwhelm ; crush.
oh -gécro ,di re ,
-av i,-atum ( ob ;
Sacra) , to beseech, supp licate.
ob ses ,-id is , M . and F .
, a hostage.
oh -s igno ,-are ,
-atum, to
seal, seal up attest.
oh -s is to ,'
-s is tere , -eti ti , -s ti tum ,
to oppose, hinder , obstruct.
oh -s to ,-s tare ,
-eti ti, to stand
against, oppose, hinder .
ob -s tringo ,-s ting6re ,
-s trinx i ,-s trictum , to bind .
oh -t ineo ,-tinére ,
-tinui , -ten
tum ( ob ; tenec ) , to hold, possess, occupy ; last.
oh -trecto ,di re ,
A tum ( ob ;tracto ) , to disparage inj ure,thwart.
oh -v ius ,-a
,-um
, adj . ( ob ; v ia ) ,meeting, in the way, so as tomeet ;obv ium i re 6110111, to meet
one.
oh -vo lvo ,-v olv6re , -vo lv i , -v6
lutum,to wrap around , mufi e
up cover , disguise.
coca-sua,-us
,M . ( coci d o ) , a
fall, setting ; death, overthrow .
cc-cido ,-ci d 6re, -013um
38 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
pérégrino r , -5.tus sum ,dep.
,
to travel aboutor inforeign lands .
per-ea ,
-i'
re,-ii no p . p.
,irr .
( to go through) , to per ish, die .
per-fem ,
-ferre, 41111, -latum ,
irr ., to carry through, convey ;
accomp lish ; sufi'
er , endure.
per-fi cio ,
-fi cére, -feci , -fectum
(per ; to make ( com
pletely) ; finish ; ej’
ect.
per-fringo ,
-fringére,-frégi , -frac
tum (per ; frango ) , to break
through ; to shatter .
peri cul-Gsus , -a, -um , adj. ( perioiilum ) ,fullofperil dangerous .
peri-culum -clum ) , N . ( pé
rior , obsolete) , a tr ial ; r isk
danger .
péri-tus
,-a,
-um , adj . (peri or ,obsolete) , exp er ienced, skilful.
per-magnus , -a
,-um
, adj., verygreat, very large.
per-mitto ,
-mittere,-m i si , -mis
sum,to let through permit.
per-movao ,-m6v ére ,
-m6 v i ,-m6 tum , to move deep ly.
pernIc-ies ,
-éi ( also -ii ) , F . (pernéco ) , destruction , ruin , over
throw.
per-pauous ,
-a,-um , adj ., very
little, veryfew .
per-péfi or ,
-peti , -pes sus sum
,
dep . (p er ; patior ) , to endure.
perpétu-G, adv . (perpetuus ) ,
constantly, p erp etua lly .
perpétu-um
, adv. (pemetuus ) ,forever , p erp etually .
perpetuus , -a,-um , adj., continu
ing ; constant, lasting.
per-saepe , adv.
,very oflen .
per-aequo r , -sécfi tus
sum , dep . , to follow after , p ursue.
persevero ,-are ,
-av i , -atum
(persév érus ) , to p ersist, persevere ( in anything) .
per-s alvo ,-so lvére ,
-sol ,-sb
lutum , topay ( fully) , render .
per-s tringo ,-s trin gére , -s tr inx i ,
-strictum , to bindfi r mly,fas tenseiz e ; wound slightly ; censure.
per-anad eo ,
-suad ére ,-suas t
,
-sui sum , to convince,persuade.
per-terreo ,
-terrére ,-tat rut, -ter
rl tum, to frighten or terrify
thoroughly .
pertinfic-ia,
-ae , F . (pert lnax ) ,perseverance, obstinacy .
p ertlnac-i ter , adv . ( pertlnax ) ,firmly, stubborn ly .
per-tin eo ,
-tln ére ,-tinui , no p. p .
(per ; tén eo ) , to stretch, extend ;have reference to .
per-turb o
,«fire
,-&v I
, é tum , to
confuse utter ly ; to disturb.
per-véni o ,-vén ire ,
-v én i ,-ven
tum ( to come through to) , toarr ive at, reach.
pés , pédi s , M ., thefoot; ped lbus ,
on foot.p es s imus
,-a ,
-um, adj. ( superl.
of malus ) , worst.pestis ,
-is , F ., a p lague, p est.
peto , pétére , p6tiv I, peti tum , to
aim at, go to ; hence, to ask
(18 5 .
phalanx ,-angis , F ., a band of sol
diers, phalanx.
P harnacés ,-is ,M . kingofPontus,defeated by Caesar .
Pharsal-l cus ,-a ,
-um, adj .
(P harsalus ) , of P harsalus,P harsalian .
pi-étas ,
-atis, F .
, (p ins ) , p iety ;love, gratitude.
p lget , p lgére, plguit and p ig!
tum es t,impers. (314. it
vexes, annoys, troubles; p igotm6al i cfi jus rei , I dislike, a thing.
pnum ,-I, N .
,a j avelin ( a heavy
javelin of the Roman infantry,which they hurled at the enemyat the beginnin of an action,and then used t eir swords) .
p inguis , -e , adj ., fat, fertile ;stup id .
VOCA BI‘
JLARY'
.
pi rata,-as , M .
, a sea-robber ,pirate.
p laceo , é re,-ui ,
-i tum , top lease
p lacet , impers. (314. it
p leases .
p laga,-as
, F ., a blow, stroke .
p lan-l ti és , 461 -as ) , F . (p lanus ) ,
level ground, p lain .
p leb s , pléb is , F . (pleo ) , the com
mon peop le.
p lé-nus
,-a
,-um
, adj . (p lea , to
fi ll) , full,filled ; comp lete.
plfi-rlmus
,-a
,-um
,adj . ( superl .
of multus ) , verymuch ; most ;as adv.
, p lfi rlmum, mostly .
p lus , plfi ris , adj . ( comp . of mul
tus ) , more. A s noun in pl. ,
plfi res , d l1m , M ., several .
p lus , adv., more, too much .
po ena,-ae , F ., punishment, pen
alty ; poenas dare , to pay the
p enalty, be punished po s nas
sfimére, to inflictpunishment.poen
-Itat , see paen l tet .
poé ta,-as
, M ., a poet.
p o l-liceo r , -lIcérI,-ll cl tus sum
,
dep. (p6 t li ceo r ) , to aj'
er,
promise.
pompa, -as , F ., a procession
suite, retinue parade, pomp .
P ompei-finus , -a,
-um, adj .
(P ompéius ) , of P ompey, P ompeian .
P ompeius , -iI , M ., Gneius P om
peius Ill agnus a Roman gen
eral and rival of Caesar ; de
feated at Pharsalus,B .C . 48 .
p6mum , J , N . , fruit.p6ne , adv . and prep . with acc .
,
after , behind, back.
pbno , pénére , poeni , pbs i tum ,
to put, p lace, set, lay ; cas tra
pbnére , topitch camp .
pon s , pon tis , M ., a br idge.
p on tlfex ,-fi eis , M . (pans ; fa
cio ) , a high-p r iest, pontifi'
.
P on tus,J
, M .,the Black Sea
( P ontus Bux inus ) , also a
region about the Black Sea .
pas tes-quam , conj . , after that,
when
po s térior , -ius , adj . (comp . of
pos tern s ) , after , later ; inferior latter .
po s t-érus , -a , -um , adj . (po s t ) ,
coming after , following, next, ensuing, future. A s noun , po s
térI, -6 rum , M . pl . , descendants,
poster ity.
pos t-h i e
, adv., after this , here
after , henceforth.
pos t-quam , conj . , after that,after , as soon as, when
po s trém-G, adv . (pos trémus ) ,
at last, lastly,finally.
po s tr“
i'
d ié, adv. ( po s térus
d ies ) , on the day after , on the
next day .
po s tulo ,fi re
,-av i ,
-atum, to
ask, demand (18 5 .
pbtén s , -en tis , part . ( p os sum ) ,able, powerful, strong.
pbten t-Atus , -1'
i s,M . ( pbténs ) ,
rule, domin ion, command .
pbten t-ia , -ae , F . ( pbténs ) ,might, power .
pbt-ior , i ri ,-'
1'
tus sum,dep.
pbpulo r , a n,-atus sum
,dep .
( pbpiilus ) , to lay waste, p il
lage.
pbpfi lus , -i , M ., a peop le, nation .
porta, -s e , F . , a gate, door .
po rto ,-5.re ,
-av i,-atum
,to carry .
po s co , po s cére, p6po s ci , no
p. p . , to beg, demand (18 5 .
po s s es-s io, -6n is, F . ( po s s i
d eo ) , a possessing, possession ,
p roper ty .
pos—sum , po s se , p6 tui , irr .
( p6 titi ; sum ) , to have the
power , can , be able
p lfi rlmum pos se, to have very
great infl uence.
po s t , adv., and prep . with acc .,
behind, back, after , beneath.
po s t-ea, adv.
, afterwards, here
VOCA BULA RY. I .
p iin io ,-ire, and -iI,
-'
i tum'
(poena ) , to punish avenge .
p ii to ,-are ,
-av i ,-atum , to think,
consider , reckon, believe.
P i rénaeus ,-a
,-um , adj . , only
w ith mon tés , the Pyrenees
Mountains .
Q .
Q . or Ou ., an abbreviation for
Quintus .
quad ras-és lmt s , 41, «am, adj .
( quadrAgin tA) ,fortieth.
quad r-a-gin ta, num . adj . indecl .
( quatuor ) ,forty.
quadr-in-gen ti , -ae ,
-a , num .
adj . ( quatuor ; cen tum ) ,fourhundred .
quaero ( old form ques so ) , quaeré re, quaes iv i , quaes Itum , to
seek ; search strive for (18 5 .
quaerl tur , the question is .
quaes-tor ,
-6 ris , M . ( quaero ) , a
gua star ( treasurer or quarter
master ) .qu i lis , -e , interrog. and rel .
adj . l . interrog., of what sort ;2 . rel., of which sort ; such as ;talis qui lis , such as .
quam , interrog. and rel . adv . ,
how ( in comparisons) as, than ;(used to strengthen superla
tives ) quam maximus, asgreat
as possible.
quam-d in, as long as .
quam-ob-rem , interrog. and rel.
adv ., for which or what reason ,wherefore, why ?
quam-quam , conj ., though, al
though however, and yet
quam-v i s , adv . and conj (v i s fr .
vblo ) , however , however much,although (322 .
quan tus ,-a ,
-um , interrog. and
rel. adj. l . interrog., howgreat?
2 . rel., as great, as, such in abl.,
quantb (as by how much,
43
by as much as ; quan to magis ,how much more.
qua-p rop ter , adv . ,f or what, why,wherefore
qua-ré , interrog. and rel . adv .
(quae ; res ) , from what cause,wherefore, why?
quart-An a, F . ( quartus ) , the
quartan ague ( recurring every
fourth day) .
quas i , adv . ( quam , as ; s i, if ) ,as if , j ust as , as it were
quater , num . adv. ,four times .
quattuor , num . adj . indecl
four .
quattuor ( quatuo r ) , -décim ,
num. adj. ( quattuo r ; d écem ) ,fourteen .
-que, enclitic conj . , and, also.
queror , queri , ques tua sum ,
dep . , to complain of , lament.qui , quae , quod ,
interrog. , rel . ,and indef . pron . : 1. interrog.
,
which, what ; 2 . rel., who, which,what ( 240 8: 3. ( after stand né ) any ; Id em qui , the
same as.
quia, conj . , becausequi cumque, quae cumque ,quad -cumque , indef. relative
pron . ( 240. whoever , what
ever , whosoever , whatsoever .
quid , see quis .
qui-d am , quae-d am , quod
( subst. , quid d am , indef .
pron ., a certain one, somebody,something quidem h6
min és , some persons .
qui d em , adv . ,indeed, at least ;
n é qui d em , not even ( theword or phrase that n é
quid em modifies always comesbetween né and quid em ) .
qui-llbet
, quae-llbet , quod
( quid llbet , indef . pron . , any
you p lease, any one
quin , conj . ( qui ; né ) , whonot, that not, but that; from( after
44 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
verbs of hindering) ; qu'
in
ét iam,moreover , nay even .
Quinctius , M ., Quintius, a
Roman name .
quin-décim
, num . adj . indecl .( quin que ; d écem ) ,fifteen .
quin a s ,-a
, num . adj .
( quinque ; cen tum ) ,five hundred.
quin-gin t
‘
i, see quin
-gen ti ( cen
qui-n I
,-ae
,-a, num . distributive
adj . ( quinque) ,five each, byfive .
quin qu-A-gin td , num . adj . in
decl . ( quinque ) ,fifty.
quinque , num . adj . indecl .,five.
quinqu-ies , adv. ( quinque ) ,five
times.
quin-tus
,-a
,-um
, num . adj .
(quinque) , the fifth.
Qu in tus , -I , M . , see Catulus .
quippe, adv . and conj ., surely,
certainly, indeed for indeed.
quis , quae , quid ( quod ) , interrog. and indef . pron . 1. inter
rog., who, what, which qui d
(used adverbially) , how ? why ?wherefore ? ( 245 and 2 46 )2 . after s i and n é , indef . ,
s i
quis , if any one ; n é quis , lest
any one, that no one .
qui s-n am , quae
-nam , qui d-n am
( quo d interrog. pron .,who,
p ray ? which, p ray ? what,
pray ?
qui s-p iam , quae
-p iam , quod
piam , and ( subst .) quid-p iamor quip-p iam , indef . pron . ,
any one, any
quis -quam , quae-quam , quio
quam ( quid-quam ) , indef .
pron . , any, anything A s noun ,
any one
quis-que , quae-qua, quod
-que
( subst . , quio-que , quid-qua) ,
indef. pron ., each
quis-quis , quae-quae , quod
R
quo d or quio-quid or quid rad ix , 5 018 , F . , a root ; foot (of
quid , indef. pron whatever , a hill) .
whatsoever . A s noun , whoever ,whosoever ; every one, each one.
qui-v is
, quaevIs , qu o d v i s
( subst., quidv i s ) , indef. pron .
,
any one orwhatyouplease
qu6 , adv. and conj ., Interrog. and
rel. , whither , towhatp lace; con j . ,wherefore, why ; in order that
(321, Obs.
quo-ad , adv . , how long ; con j . ,
as long as, until.
quod , conj . , that because ;
quod s'
i'
, but if .
qu6-m inus , conj . ( qub , neut .
abl . of rel . pron ., qui ; m i nu s ,
less) , that thereby the less, that
not, f rom (w ith part .)qu6
-m6d 6 , adv . , in what manner .
quon , d am , adv . , former ly, oncesometimes, some day, ever .
qubn-iam, adv. ( quom quum
cum ; jam ) , seeing that, s ince
qu6que , conj . , also, too (placedafter the word it affects) .
quo rsum , adv . ( qu6 ; v ersus ) ,whither to whatpurp ose.
quot , indecl. in terrog. and rel.
adj . ; l . interrog., how many ;2 . rel., as many ; quot to t ,
as many so many .
quotann is ( quo t ; annus ) every
year .
quot'
i d-ianus,-a
,-um ( see 00t
tidi i n us, or 06 tid i i nus ) , every
day, daily.
quot-i-d ié ( see cott'
i'
d or 06
ted ad v. ( quot ; d iés ) , da ily,every day.
quotus , -a,-um ,
interrog. adj . ,one of how many, what in num
ber ; quota hora, what time ;what o
’
clock.
quum or quom , see oum .
50
s i—quis or s i—qui , si qua, s i quid
( subst.) or s iquo d , indef. pron .,
if any one if anythings is to
,s i s tére , s ti ti , s tatum ,
to
set, place, stand .
s i-v e ( seu ) , conj . , or if,whether , or .
sdb r ius,-a
,-um
, adj . , not drunk,sober sensible, moderate.
sboer , M . , afather-in-law.
s 6 l, s 61is , M .
,the sun .
sbleo ,sblére , sbli tus sum , semi
dep. to be wont.
s 61-i t1'
1d o ,-in is , F . ( s 6 lus ) , lone
liness, solitude a desert.
ablus ,-a
,-um
, adj . alone,only, single, lonely.
s o lv o , so lv ére , so lv i , sblutum ,
to loose, unbind cast of ( fromshore) ; pay, break up .
sbn-i tus , -tfi s , M . ( s 6n o ) , a noise,sound, din .
sbro r , -6 ris , F ., a sister .
s6 r6 r-ius,-a
,-um , adj . ( sbro r ) ,
of or belonging to a sister .
s ors , s o rtis , F ., a lot, luck,fate.
spét ium , N ., room, space ; in
terval, per iod .
spec i-és , F . (gen . and dat.
pl . not found) , ( spécio ) , a show,
app earance,form view .
sp eoto ,-are
,-av i
,-atum
,intens .
( spéc io , to see) , to look at, ob
serve .
spéculo r , -ari , -§tus sum ( spec io ) , dep .
, to spy out, watch, ex
p lore .
spero ,-§re,
-§v i ,-atum ( spés ) ,
to hope, expect, trust.
sp6s , epei , F . ( spéro ) , hope.
sp i r-i tus
,-fi s , M . ( spi ro ) , a
breath ; the breath of life, life ;pl ., sp ir it, airs .
sp lend-o r ,
-6 ris , M . ( sp len d eo ,
to shine) , br ightness, splendor ;honor , dignity .
spbl io ,-5 re ,
-atum ( spdlium ) , to str ip rob, plunder .
spblium,-ii
,N .
,booty, p rey, spoil.
FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
spon-sus
,-i , M . ( spond eo ) , a
betrothed, bridegroom.
spon te , abl . ; gen .,spon tis , the
only cases found, ( spond eo ) ,of free will, of one
’
s own accord .
s td-tim , adv. ( s to ) ,forthwith, immediately, at once .
s tatuo , s tatuere , s tatui , s ta
tutum , to put, p lace ; station.
s td-tura,-ae , F . ( s to ) , a standing
up r ight ; height, size, statue .
s tel-la , -as , F . ( s terno ) , ( thestrewer of light) , a star .
s tercus ,-6 ris , N .
, dung ; fi lth.
s tipen di-arius ,-a
,-um
, adj . ( s tipen dium ) , tr ibutary, liable to
contr ibution.
s tipen dium ,-ii
, N . , a tax, contr i
bution ; pay ; military service.
s to,
s tare, s téti , s tatum , to
stand ; to cost (w ith abl. of
price,s trénu-é
, a v. ( s trénuus ) , br iskly, vigorously.
s trep-i tus , -fi s , M . ( s trépo , to
make a noise) , a noise.
s tr ingo , s tringére , s tr inx i,
s trictum, to bind tight ; grasp .
stud eo ,-ére ,
-ui,no p. p., to be
eager about ; study.
stud-ium , N . ( s tiid eo ) , z eal,devotion .
sudd eo , suad ére, suasi , sua
sum, to advise, exhort, ur e.
sub, prep. w ith acc. and abl.
( 200. under , beneath, dur ing ;sub mon te, at the foot of themountain.
sub -duco ,-d1
'
icére , -dux i , -d u0~
tum,to draw up ( especially on
shore) , withdraw.
sub-s o ,-i re, -i tum , irr .
, to go
under ; enter app roach susta in.
sub -igo ,-isere , -a0tum
( sub ; ago ) , to bring under ;subdue ; impel ; force.
s iib i t-6 , adv. ( s iib i tus ) , sud
denly.
52 FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
sup-porto , A re, 4 vi , A tum
,
( s iib ; porto ) , tobringup, carryconvey .
supra, adv., and prep . w ith acc.,
l . adv., on the top , above ; ( oftime) , before,formerly , 2 . prep.
,
beyond, besides ; over , above.
sfiprémus,-a,
-um , adj . ( superlative of sfipérus ; the
highest, greatest, last.
sur-go ,surgére , surréxi , sur
rectum ( sub ; rego ) , to raise,
sus-c ip ic , p ipers , -06p i , c eptum ( sub ; capio ) , to take up ,
undertake in imioi tias i nsc i
pére, to incur enmities.suspi0
-16 , -6n is , F . ( suspi oo r ) ,mistrust, distrust, susp icion .
sus-tin s o ,-tin6re ,
-tinui , -ten
tum ( sub , téneo ) , to hold upunder , support, sustain.
sus tuh , pei f. ind. of tollo .
suus ,-a ,
-um , poss . pron . ( sui ) ,his , her , their, their own , own
(353
T ., an abbreviation for Titus .
tah eru-aoulum ,-i , N . ( tab erna )
a tent.
tabula.-ae, F ., a board, plank ,
list ( of proscribed persons) ; awill ; writing tablet.
taceo ,-6re ,
-ui , -i tum, tobe silent.
taed et, tas dere, taedui t , or tae
sum est, impers. (314. it
disgusts, of ends, wearies ( one) ;me, etc. I ( thou, he, etc.) amdisgusted.
talen tum,-i , N ., a talent ; aGreek
weight, equal to about one-half
a hundred weight , a sum of
money, c
anal to about $1080.
tali s,-e , a such, of that kind
( the relat1ve adj . correspond
ing to tans is qui lis ) .
tam , adv ., so, so very tam
quam , as as.
tarnen,conj ., nevertheless, yet, still.
tam-s tat, conj ( tamen : ets i ) ,although, though (332 , d) .
tam-quam ( tam) , adv. ( of com
parison) , as much as, so as, like
as, j ust as ; as if , j ust as though.
tan-d em , adv . ( tam-d em at
length, at last,finally ; in Inter
rogative clauses, p ray, p raynow, now, then .
tango ,tangere, tétigi , tectum ,
to touch, afiect.tan t6
, see tan tus .
tantbpére , see tantus .
tan t-um , adv. ( tan tus ) , so much,so greatly, to such a degree
only, alone, merely ; tan tumn6u , almost, all but tan tum
quod , only, j ust then , but j ust.-a,
-um , adj. ( tam ) . sogreat; tantbpérs ( tant6 bpsre) , as adv., somuch, so greatlytan t6 ( abl. of degree of differ
ence) , by so much, so much the.
taurus , -i , M . , a bull.
tee-tum ,-i , N . ( tégo ) , ( a thing
that covers) , a roof ; a house,dwelling.
té-cum , see tu.
tégo ,tégere, téxi , tectum , to
cover , conceal ; p rotect, guard .
tégi-mentum ,-i , N . ( t6go ) , cover
ing, helmet.télum ,
-i , N ., a dart, spear, j avelin
( offensive weapon ) .témer-Arius , -a,
-um , adj. ( t6~merb ) , rash, indiscreet.
témér-i tds , i tis , F . ( tbméro ) ,rashness, temerity.
temperent-ia, -ae. F . ( temp6rans ) , self-control, moderation,discreetness, temperance.
tempera , a re, -av i , 4 1mm, to con
trol, control one’
s set (w ithquin ) , manage ; restrain.
tempes-tl s , i tis , F . ( st. of tem
54
tran s -s o ,-ire,
-ii , -i tum , irreg., to
cross over ; cross .
tran s-ago , Jigére,-fix i , -f
'
1xum ,
to thrust or p ierce through ; to
transfix.
tri n s-grédio r , -gr§d i , -gres sus
sum , dep. ( tr i n s ; grad ior ) , tostep across .
tr i n-s i lio or tran s-ci lia ,-s i lire ,
-s i liv i , -s i lui , no p .p. ( tran s ;salio ) , to leap or j ump across ;
leap or sp ring over .
tr i ns-mi tto ,-m i tt§re,
-mi s i ,-mis sum , to send across, throw
across ; cross over .
tran s-no ( or tran o ) , -dre,-v ,
é tfim, to swim across or over .
tran s-porto ,-are ,
-av i , -atum , to
carry or convey across (w ithtwo transport.
tre-c en ti , -as ,-a, num . adj . ( trés ;
cen tum ) , three hundred.
tre—d écim , num . adj. indecl.
( trés ; decem ) , thirteen .
trés , tria , num . adj., threeTrév i ri , -6 rum, M . pl ., a people
of Gaul.
tr ib -duus , -I, M . ( trés , three tr i
bus , a tribe) , a tr ibune .
tri-d uum,-ui , N . ( tres ; dies ) ,
the space of three days, three
days .
tr i-gémin i‘
,-6 rum , M . pl. ( trés ;
géno gi gno ) , three born at a
birth, three brothers.
tri-gin ta, num . indecl. adj ., thirty.
tri-ui , -ae,-a, num. distributive
adj. ( trés ) , three each, three.
tri-p lex ,-p li cis , adj . ( tres ; p li
threefold ; 5016 8 , in threelines, or divisions .
tris tis . -e , adj ., sad, sor rouful,mournful.
tr iumpho , A re , A v i , -atum , ( triumphus ) , to tr iumph rej oiceat.
trii-oi d o ,-5re, -av i , { tum ( truz ,
savage ; caed o ) , to slaughter .
tu, pers. pron., thou ( 2 29.
F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
tub a,-as , F .
, a trumpet.
tuli , see fero .
Tul ingi , -6 rum , M . a
German tribe in GaulTul lia, -as , F .
,Tullia , a Roman
name.
Tull ius , 41, M ., Tullius, a Roman
name .
Tul lus H os tfl ius , -i , M ., third
king of Rome, 672—640.
tum, adv.
, then, at that time ; cum
( quum) tum , both
and ; not only but also .
tfimultus , -ti1s , M . ( tiim eo ) , a
swelling ; up rising ; tumult, in
surrection.
tum-mus , -i'
, M . ( tumeo , swell) ,a mound, hillock, hill, tomb.
tuno, adv . , then, at that time ; im
mediately.
turba, -ae, F ., a crowd ; a dis
turbance.
turma,-ae, F . , a troop , s uadron
( of horse, consisting o thirtymen
turp is , -0, adj ., ugly ; foul,fi lthy.
turris , -is , F . , a tower ; castle.
tuus , -a, -um, pos. adj. pron ., your,
yours.
fib er ,-éris , N . , a teat, udder , breast.
fib er , -éris , adj ., rich,fruitful, fertile.
iih f, adv., where, when ; ubi p ri
mum , as soon as.
Ub ii , -6 rum , M . pl., the Ubu ( aGerman ople on the right
bank of t e Rhine) .ubi-que, adv ., wherever ; everywhere.
ulcis cor , ulcis ci , ultus sum,
dep ., to punish ( an injury or
the doer) , avenge ( an in jury ) .ultér—ior , -ius , adj . , gen . 6 ris
( comparative of ultra) (150.
farther, ulterior.
VOCA BULA RY. f.
ultimus , -a ,-um , adj . ( super l . of
ultra) , thefarthest,mostdistant ;last.
u1tra, adv . , and prep . with acc .,
beyond ; on the other side of ;ultrafi dem , beyond belief .
-u1tr6 , adv ., beyond besides, more
over ; voluntarily.
ul-tus , -a ,-um , part. (ulcisoo r ) ,
having avenged, punished.
umb ra, -ae , F ., a shade, shadow ;
on image.
iim érus (humerus ) , -I, M . , the
shoulder .
fin d, adv. (unus ) , together , at the
same time.
un d e , adv ., from which p lace,
whence.
un d -i -que , adv . indef .
que) ,from all sides .
fi n—i -versus , -a ,-um , adj . ( finus
v ersus ) , all together , all ( in a
mass) , universal.un-quam ( um-quam ) , adv., ever .
arm s ,-a ,
-um , num. adj. (gen .
sing.,un ius ; dat . ,
un i ) , one,
alone, sole, single
fi nus-quisque , unequaeque ,unumquod que, indef. adj .
pron ., each, every
u rb s , urb is , F ., a city, esp . Rome.
u squam , adv., anywhere.
u sque ,adv.
,all theway,oll thewhile,until ; usque ah , all the way
from ; usque ad , even to, up to.
usu-rpo ,-ar e , -av i , -atum ( iisus
rapio ) , to use, emp loy.
usus , 41s , M . ( iito r ) , use, advantage ; experience.
fi -s us , -a ,-um ,part. (uto r ) , having
used .
ut or uti , adv . and conj . ; interrog.
, how ; rel . , as, so, when ,since ; tha t, so that, in order that,that not (with words of fearing)(321ff.
u t-cumque -0unque) , adv ., in
what way soever , whenever .
(und e ;
55
uter , fi tris , M . a bag ; skin .
ti ter ,utra ,utrum , adj . pron . ( gen .
sing. u trina ; dat., in
terrog., which of the two ; r .,el
which
uter-que , iitraque , utrumque ,
adj . p1on each ( of two) , both ;ex utr i que parte , on either
side.
4uti
, see ut .
iit-i li s , -e, adj. ( ii to r ) , useful ;advantageous ; suitable.
uti l-i tds , -5 ti s , F . (fi tfl is ) , use,
utility.
ifti-nam , adv., oh that I wish
that, would that! ( 2 7 8utor , uti , ii sus sum , dep.
,to use
( 2 80)utrim-
que (utrinque ) , adv.
( ti ter ; que) , on both sides ,fromboth sides .
iitrum , adv., whether ; see ii ter .
ux or ,-6 ris , F .
, a wife ; d fi céreux6 rem , to marry.
V.
vaoo , a re,-av i , -5tum , to be
emp ty or vacant ; be free from ;( of lands) lie unoccup ied .
vad-um -i , N . ( vado , to g oo) ,shoal,ford ( that through whichone can go) .
vagio ,-ire, -iv i or -ii , no p.p .
,to
cry ; bray.
vagI-tus , -fi s , M . ( v i gio ) , a cry
ing ; braying.
v i go r ,-ari , -5tus sum , dep. (va
gus , to wander about) ( 2 79.
val eo ,-ére ,
-ui , no p .p .,to be
strong ,to be well, healthy ; to be
able ,valé ,farewell, adieu.
valerius , -i1, M ., Valer ius ( esp.
,
GaiusVal . P10c111uS) , a Roman
name.
v 516 -ti'
1d 6,
-in is , F .
health also ill-health.
vallum ,-i , N .
,rampart ( earthen
(val eo )
56 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
wall set w ith palisades) , wall,fortification .
v as to ,a re ,-atum ( v as tus ) ,
to lay waste, ravage.
v as tus , -a ,-um , adj ., waste ; huge,
vast.
vati cina-ti6 ,-6 n is , F . (vatici
nor ) , a foretelling, p rophecy,p rediction.
v e0ti ga1, -i l is , N ., a toll, tax ; pl.
revenues ( of state) .vég-étus , -a,
-um , adj . (végeo , to
arouse) , vigorous, active.
véhéméns , -en t is , adj., eager ,violent, vehement.
vehemen-ter , adv. ( v éhéméns ) ,eagerly ; forcibly, very, verymuch.
veho ,véh ére , v éx i , v ectum , to
bear , carry, convey ; in pass .,
v éhi , to be carried, go, r ide, sail.
vel , conj ., or ; vel v el , either
or ; even , indeed, surely ; the
very (w ith superlatives ) .val-6 x ,
-6 018 , adj . ( vblo , to fly) ,swift,fleet, rap id.
vél-ut ( v él-uti ) , adv., j ust as ;
j ust as if ; as if.v énat-i cus ,
-a ,-um
, adj . ( v énatus
, hunting) ,for hunting.
v en-d o ,-dére , -d i tum
( v énum , a sale ; d o ) , to sell
vénéra-ti6 , -6 n is , F . ( venero r , toreverence) , reverence, veneration.
vén ia, -ae, F .,favor ; forgiveness .
vénio , v énire , veni , v entum , to
come, app roach, draw near .
vénor , { tus sum , dep., to
hunt, chase, pursue.
ver , v éris , N ., sp ring.
verbum ,-I, N .
, a word ; verba
fa06re, to speak, discourse
v erb! causa, for example.
véreo r , -6ri ,-i tus sum
, dep., to
fear ; be afraid of v éri
tus , p.p., pres . in sense,fearing.
Vergilius , -ii , M ., P ublius Vergit
iusMaro, the celebrated Roman
poet ; Eng. Vergit (notVirgil ) .v ergo , v ergere , no perf., no p .p.
,
to bend, lie towards, be situated.
v ér-6 , adv. ( v érus ) , in truth, in
fact, ver ily ; truly, yes ; but.Verres , -is , M .
, Verres, a Roman
name .
v er-sus ,-fi s , M . (verto ) , a turn
ing ; verse ; line.
v erto , v er tére, v erti , v ersum , to
turn,change, revolve.
v érus , -a,-um , adj ., true, real,
actual. A s noun ,verum ,
-i , N .,
the truth, reality .
ves cor , ves ci , no perf., dep.,to
feed, eat ; live on ( 28 0Vésontid ,
-6nis , M . , eson tio,a city of Gallia, the chief
town of the Sequani (modern
Besancon) .vesper , é ris and M .
, the
evening.
Ves ta,-50, F ., daughter ofSaturn ,
goddess of flocks and herds, and
of the household in general.
ves-ter , -tra, -trum, possessive
pron . (v 6 s ) , your .
v es tig-ium.
-ii , N . ( v es tigo , to
track) , a footstep , track, trace,step .
v es tis ,-is , F .
, a garment, vestment;clothing.
veto , a re ,-ui , -i tum , toforbid.
vetus , é ris , adj ., old, veteran. A s
noun ,véterés , -um , M . pl., the
ancients ; ancestors .
v ia, -ae , F ., a way, road, street ;
j ourney.
via-to r , -6 ris , M . ( via , to go) , a
wayfarer , traveller .
Vic-to r , -6 r is , M . ( vin co ) , con
queror , victor .
v ictor-ia, -as , F . ( v ic tor ) , victory.
v icus , i , M a village.
v i d é-li cet , adv.,it is manifest, of
course, forsooth.
v id eo , v id ére, vid i , v isum, to
VOCABULA RY. I I .
anoth er , a'
lius, -a , -ud ; gen .-ius
( of two) , alter,-te
'
ra,-té
’
rum
one inter s‘
é.
an sw er , respondeo, fi re,-spondi ,
-sponsum ( withA n tiochus , A ntidchus, 45, M .
A n tonius , A nténius,-i, M
any ( in neg. and condit. sen
tenoes) , altus, -a , -um ( anybody youwish) , quivis , quilibet;( intern ) , numquis ; ( after s i
or né) , qui , quae ( qua) , quad ,
-thing, quicquam, or quid
quam.
ap iece, distributive numeral .appeal prava
'
co, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
appear , appareo, fi re,-ui, Mum.
apple, pémum, J , N
appo int, dico, dicé'
re, dm , dictum;appoint the time of the elec
tions, cfimitiis dies dico, dicére,d im, dictum.
app roach , apprd’
pinquo, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum (Wl th dat. or ad with
aggré’
dior, -gre'
di , -gres
sus sum adeo, -’ire,
-ii, Jitum
( noun ) , adventus, 423, M.
A riovi stus , A riovistus, -’l , M.
aris e, codn'
or, fi rm,-ortus, dep.
army , exercitas , fi s , M . ; acies,-c"
i
F . ; agmen, dais , N .
around , circa (prep. with
arriv e , advé’
nio,-ve
’
nire,~véni ,
-ventum.
arrow , sdgitta,-ae, F .
art , ars, artis, F .
as , see 199 ; conj ., at; astam quam ; such
talis . qualis ; as
ashamed , b e , piidet, fi re,-uit, or
(314. 5 , Obs .
A sia, A sia, -ae, F .
as k , ré’
go, fi re, fi vi , fi tum (withtwo acc. , for,pé
’
to,pe’
te’
re,
p é’
ti’
vi , pe’
titum (18 5 . inter
rb’
go, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
as sault , oppugno, fi re, fi vi, fi tum.
59
assemb le, convé’
nio, -ve’
nire,4 76m,
-ventam.
as sis t, sublé’
vo, fi re, fi vi,fi tum ;
adjuva, fi re, y'
uvi , j atum.
at , ad (prep. with or loca
tive or (at thehouse of) , dpud (with
A th ens , A thenae, fi rum,F . (p
attack impetus, fi s, M . ;a'
db’
rior ,fi rm,-artus sum
attempt , tento, fi re, fi vi,fi tum;
cb‘
nor , fi ri , fi tus.
attentive, attentus,-a,
-um ( adj) .
A ugust (month of) , A ugustus ,-a ,
-um adj . mensis beingunderstoo
A ugus tus , A ugustus,-i, M .
auxi li aries , auxilia, fi rum, N .
(p1avenge , vindioo, fi re, fi v
’t, fi tum ;ulciscor, ulcisci , ultus sum.
aw ay from , a or abwith abl.
b ad ,ma'
lus, -a ,4am (adj
ty) , imprb’
bus, fi ,-um
b aggage, impe’
d‘
imenta , fi rum, N .
b ank ( of a river) , ripa, fi e, F .
b ark ( verb) , latro , ( at-are, fi vi
, fi tum , ( of a tree) ,cortex,
-icis ( outer) , M . ; ( inner) , liber, -bri, M
b attle , pugna,-d e, F . ; ( engage
ment) , p raelium,-i , N .
b e, sum, esse, fut.b eam , trabs, -is, F .
bear , f é’
ro,ferre, titli , la‘
tum for
w ard , inf é'
ro, inferre, w as,
b eautiful , pulcher, -chra;-chrum.
b ecause, quad, quia (conj .b ecome , (be made) , fio, fier i ,factus sum , (be becoming) ,decet, dece
'
re, dé’
cuit ; (be ap
pointed) , creor, fi ri, fi tus sum.
60
before (prep.
.w ith ante
anté’
quam, p r iusquam
(336begin, ineo, fi re, 47, -itum, inci
’
p io,wipere,
-cep i , wep tum b egin
ning of ( seeBelgian , Belga, fi e, M .
b eliev e , credo, fi é’
re, fi idi , fi ftum
w ith dat. of person ) .bel ng, p ertineo,
-tinére, fi nu’i,
no p.p.
betak e ( one’
s self) , 325 conf é’
ra,
conferre, contiii i , collatum.
b ey ond , trans (prep . w ith acc .
extraor ultra (prep.w ith
b ird , 6vis, -is, C .
b lack , niger ,-gra,
-grum
blame, culpo, fi re, fi vi, fi tum.
boat, linter, -tr is, M .
bo ld , audc'
ix fi cis
b ond , vinciilum,-
'
i, N .
b ook , liber, -bri , M .
b orn , b e, nc'
iscor , na'
sci , na‘
tus
sum ; gigno, gigue’
re, genui ,
bo th ( each of two ) , uterque, iitrd
que, utrumque both
and, et et ; ( num. adj ) ,ambo.
b oun d aries , finés, -ium, M .
b oy , puer , fi ri , M .
b rav e , fortis, -e ( adj ) .b rav ely , fortiterb ridge, pans,
-tis, M .
b righ t , cldrus,-a,
-um
b road , ldtus , -a, -um
b roth er , fré ter, -tris, M .
build , aedifl’
co, fi re, fi vi,fi tum.
build ing, aedijfl’
cium,-i,N .
burd en , anus, i ris, N .
burn , cré’
mo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
bus in es s , né’
gfitium,-
'
i , N .
but, sed, autem ( 205 . ( on ly) ,tantum, mo
’
do ( un less) , nisi
conj ) ; ( except) , p raeter
(prep. w ith
by ( a person after a passive
verb) , a or ab; by day, inter
F IBST STEPS IN LA TIN .
dis by night, m eta
adv . ) dative agent
means, abl.
per (prep . w ith
C e sar , Caesar, fi ris, M .
cal l, vdco, fi re, fi vi , fi tum out,evo
’
co, fi re, fi vi , fi tum to
gether, convé’
co, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum ( name) , appello, fi re,
fi vi , fi tum.
camp , castra, fi rum, N .
can ,possum,posse,p6tui may) ,licet, impers . (314) w ith dat .
cand id ly , a'
perte
care , cum ,-ae, F .
careful ly , diligenter
carry ,porto,fi re, fi vi , fi tum; carryon , gé
’
ro, gé’
ré’
re, gessi , gestum ;on war against, bellum ia
ferro, ferre, intiili, illatum
( inldtum) .C arth age , Carthdgfi,
Jim'
s , F .
cas t aw ay , abicio, -icé'
re, j eci ,j ectum.
cavalry , e'
qui’
tes,-um,
M .
cav e, antrum,-i, N . specus , fi s , F .
central , mé’
dius, -a, -um central
place (with respect to both of
them) , Ideas mé’
dius .
century , centiiria, -ae, F .
certain one, a, quidam, quaedam,
quoddam; and subst. ( quiddam) ; (fixed) , certas, -a, -um.
chief, princeps, wip is, M . ; ( adjsummus, -a, -um.
child ren , pae’
r‘
i ( in relation to
parents ) , libe’
r’i, fi rum, M . ; ( of
age) , infans , fi ntis , 0.
ch o o se ( for a purpose) , del igo,fi gé
’
re, Jer i , -lectum,
°
( out of
a number) , éligo, 469i ,-lectum.
C icero , C icé'
rfi, fi nis .
citi z en , civis , -is, c .
62
d eep , altus, -a , -um
defend , defendo, -dére, fi i , -sum.
d eliberate , delibé’
ro, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum.
deliberation , often perf . part.
neut. of cons iil o .
deligh t , ( lélecto, fi re, fi vi , fi tum
gaudeo,-é
‘
re, gdvisus
sum
d eliver , trado, fi é’
re, d idi , fi itum
(what is due) , reddo, -dé’
re,
fi idi , fi itum ( free) , libe’
ro,
fi re, fi vi , fi tum ; (of a speech) ,ka
’
beo, fi re, -ui, -itum.
demand , postu'
lo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum
(18 5 . fldgito, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum; ( noun) ,postiddtum,-i , N .
dens e , densus, -a, -um
d epar t , decedo (discédo) , -cede’
re,
-cessi ,-ce
"
ssum ( set out) , pro“
ficiscor , -f { cisci , -fectus sum.
d es erv e , me’
rcar , fi r i , fi us sum ;dignus sum (324.
d eserving, dignus ,-a,
-um ( adjdesert, désé
’
ro, fi re, -ui ,-tum.
deserter , perj uga, fi e, M .
d es ire, cup io, fi re,-ivi ,
-itum.
d es irous , appéténs ,-ntis ; cup idus,
-a,-um ( adj ) .
d estroy ( ruin ) ,perdo, fi é’
re, fi idi ,fi itum ; ( annihilate) , de
'
leo,-l
‘
ére, dem,-létum.
detain , de‘
tineo, fi nere, fi nui , no
p .p. ; ré’
tineo, fi ne‘
re,-tinui ,
no p .p.
d etermine , cfinstituo,-ue
’
re,-ui ,
fi tum.
dev our , de‘
vo'
ro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
di ctator , dictator, fi ris, M .
die , m6rior , -mo’
r i ( or -iri ) , -mm
taus obeo, -ire, fi ,-itum.
differ , dif é’
m,difierre, no perf.
nor p .p. ; from each other ,inter se
‘
difié’
ro .
d ifferently , a’
li’
ter
d imcult , dif icilis, -e ( a j . )di ligenc e, diligentia,
-ae, F .
d iligently , diligenter
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
d is cip line, disciplina , fi e, F .
disord er , confusio, fi nis , F .
d isp leas e, disp liceo, p licére, 1911'
cui,-p licitum.
di spos ition , inge’
nium,-i, N .
di s sens ion , dis sentio, fi n is, F .
d is tan ce , spa'
tium,-i, N .
d i stant , longinquus,-a ,
-um ( adj . )am distant, disto, -stdre ( noperf., no
d is tinguish ed , clc’
irus,-a ,
-um
div ide, divido, -vidé'
re,
-vis‘
i ,-vi
sum.
D iv itiacus , D ivitiacus, -i , M .
d o ( auxiliary in questions or
commands , not translated ) ;fa
’
cio, fdcé’
re, feci, f actum.
d oes , see d o .
d og, ca’
nis, -is, M .
d oor , j a'
nua, fi e, F .
d oub t , diibito, fi re, fi v’l, fi tum
( noun ) , diibium,-i , N . ; there
is no n6n est dubium, w ith
quin and subj . (333.
d oub tful , dubius, -a , -um
d raw up , instruo, -strue’
re,-structum
d rive, pello, pellé’
re, pé’
pu'
li, p ul
sum ; back, re‘
icio, réicé’
re, ré
j e'
ci , réj ectum.
due, de‘
beo, -bére, -bui, fi itum ; par
tic ., debitus, -a ,
-um.
duty , (Wcium,J , N . ; or gen .
(130.
dw ell , kdbito, fi re, fi v‘
i, fi tum
inco’
lo, fi re, -ui, no p.p.
each (one) , quisque, quaeque,
quodque and quidque,or quioque unusquis
que ; ( of two) , iiterque, utra
que, utrumque.
each oth er ( i .e. one another) ,dlius d
'
lius, alter alter.
VOCA BULA RY. II .
eager , dvidus , -a ,-um
eagle , a'
quila, fi e, F .
earth , terra, fi e, F . ; (world) , or
bis terrdrum.
fi icile ( advé)easy , fi icilis, -e ( a
educate , educo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
eith er or, vel vel ; aut
aut.
elect , ft'
icio, fl icé'
re,fect, factum ;creo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
elephant , éle'
phantus ,-i, N .
eloquence , élé’
quentia,-ae, F .
emb roid er , 5012 (306 ) p ingo,
pingé'
re, p inxi , pictum.
en compas s , czngo, cmgé’
re, cinxi ,cinctum.
en courage , hortor , fi ri , fi tus sum.
en d , cfinfl cio,fl ce’
re,féci , fectum ;noun , inis, -is, M . ( or sometimes ln sing.
endure , perj é’
ro, ;ferre, um, la
tum ; tale'
ro, fi re, fi vi, atum ;
pdtior ,-i, passus.
en emy , hostis, -is, c . ; the enemy( collectively) , bostés, -ium
(personal) , inimicus, -i , M .
enjoy , fruor , f rui, f ructus (306 .
1en ro ll , cfinscribo, -be
'
re,-p si ,
-p tum.
en ter , intro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum ; s iib
eo,-ire,
-ii,Jtum.
en trus t , committo, -mitte’
re,4mm
,
-missum.
Eph esus , Ephesus , -i, F .
es cape , efi ugio, fuge’
re, fugi , no
p .p.
estab lish , cénfirmo, fi re, fi v'
i,
fi tum stdtuo, stdtué’
re, stdtui ,stdtutum.
ev en ing, vesper , fi ri , M .
ev ery ( one) , quisque, quaeque,
quodque quidque or quic
que omnis, -e
every tenth (man) , dé’
ci’
mus
uis ue.
excellen t , excellé’
ns,-tis .
ex ercis e, exerceo, fi re,-ui,
-itum.
63
exh ort , hortor ( or co'
hortor) , fi ri,
fi tus sum
expect , exspecto, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
experience , usus, fi s , M .
extreme , extr'
émus, fi ,-um
ey e , o’
cq s,-
'
i , M .
fai thful ,fideas , -e ( adjfai thfuln ess ,f ides, -ci , F .
fals e ,falsus , -a, -umfamily ,fdmtlia, -cc, F .
far , longé p ro’
cul
far and w id e , late
farmer , agrico’
la, -ae, M .
far th er ulte’
r ior ,-us ( adj .,
150. 7
fath er , pa'
ter,-tris, M .
fault , culpa,-ae, F .
fear , timeo, fi re,-ui ( no p .p . )
(321. mé’
tuo, mé’
tué’
re, m5tui , no .p. ; vé
’
reor , fi ri ,-itus
sum ( noun) , timer,-or is, M .
F ebruary (month of) , F coruar ius, -a, -um (mensis being nu
derstood) .
fellow -c iti z en , civis , -is, M .
few , pauci , fi e,-a , pl. a
words, pauca, fi rum, N .
fidelity ,f ides, -ei , F .
field , d'
ger , dgri , M .
fierce, atroz , atroeis
fiercely , acr iter
fifth , quintus, fi ,-um ( adj ) .
figh t , dimico, fi re, fi vi, fi tum
pugno,fi re,fi v‘
i ,fi tum; ( subst.)pugna, fi e, F .
fi l l , comp leo,-p ie
"
re,-p lévi,
-p lé
tum ; rep leo,-p lére,
-p lévi,
-p ic
7tum.
find (by search or inquiry) , re’
pe
rio, re’
pe’
rire, re’
pe’
ri , ré’
per tum ;invé
’
nio, -vé’
nire,-véni ,
-ventum.
fin ish, finio, -ire, -ivi , -itum ; con
fl cio, fi cere, fi at, ;fectum.
64
fire ,“
ignis,-is, M .
firs t ,p rimus , fi ,-um
primum and pr imfi.
fis h, p iscis,
-is , M .
flee, f iigio, f iigé’
re, fugi , f iigitum.
fl eet, classis, -is, F .
flight ,f izga, -ae, F .
fl ow ,fl uo, fi re, fi t, -a:um.
fly , vd’
lo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
foll ow in g ( day) , posté’
rus,-a,
-um
( adj ., 150.
fo lly , stult’ttia, fi e, F .
foot, pés, pe
’
dis , M .
foot-s o ld ier , pe'
des, fi is, M .
for
(see conj ., nam, e
’
nim
ollows the first word or
words) , eté’
nim ( 205 . 5 ) prep.,
de‘
or p raw ith abl . ; ( sign of
forage, pabiilor , fi ri, fi tus sum
forb id , ve'
to, fi re, mi , -itum.
force , cfigo, fi re, fi gi , fi ctum.
forces , cfip iae, fi rum, F .
fores igh t , prudentia ,-ae, F .
fores t , silva ,-ae, F .
forget , obliviscor , oblivisci , oblitus
sum, dep . (315 .
form a p lan , cfinst’
lium ineo, -ire,-ii , -i
’
tum.
fort ify , munio, fi re, fi vi , ~itum.
fortun ate , fortundtus , a -um
fortune, fortuna, fi e, F .
foun d , condo, fi é’
re, d idi , fi itum.
free , liber , fi ra, -e"
rum ( 8 6 .
be free from,11600, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum set free, libé’
ro, fi re,
fi vi,fi tum ; of a slave, ma
'
nu
mitto, -mitte’
re,-misi , -missum.
fr ien d, a
’
micus, -i , M .
frien d sh ip , dmicitia, fi e, F .
frog, rana,-ae, F .
from ( away from ) , a, ab ( outof) , 6, ex ; ( denoting cause) ,ab] see 248 .
fruit ( of trees) , fructus , fi s, M . ;
( of fields) ,frug'
es,-um
, F .
FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
fugi tiv e , j ugiéns , part. of f’
ugio.
full, pl
'
énus,-a ,
-um
furth er , adj., ulte'
rior , -us ( adj.,( furthermore) , autem,
conj . placed after one or more
words) .
fury ,fi ror , fi ris, M .
gain , lucrum,-‘
i , N .
games , ludi , fi rum, M .
garden , bartus,-t, M .
gate , j a'
nua,-cc, F . ; porta,
-ae, F .
Gaul ( the country) , Gallia, -cc, F .
Gaul ( an inhabitant) , Gallus, -i ,M .
general , dust, du'
cis, M . ; impé’
rdtor ,-t6ris, M .
German ,Germanus, -a , -um ( adjget , acqui re, fi re, -sivi ,
-s itum
assé’
quor ,-sé
'
qui ,-cutus sum
gift , dfinum,-i , N .
girl , puella,-ae, F .
giv e , do, ddre, de’
di , dc‘
itum ; give
up, trado,-dé
’
re, fi fth , fi itum
what is due, tribuo, -ué’
re,
-ui , fi tum.
glad , laetus , -a, -um ( adj ) .glo ry , glfi
’
ria ,-ae, F .
go , eo, ire, ii ( ivi ) , { tum
go on , pass. of gé’
ro , gé’
ré’
re ,
gessi , gestum ; forth, exeo ,
fi re,-ivi or -ii , fi um through
(permeate) , p ermeo, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum.
god , deus, -i , M .
go in g to ( fut. act . part ) .
go ld , aurum,-
'
i, N .
good , b6nus , fi ,«um
goods , merx, mercis, F .
gov ern , ré’
go , ré’
gé’
re, réxi , rectum ;
guberno, fi re, fi vi , fi tum p rae
sum,-esse, fut
grain ,f rumentum,-i , N .
grandfath er , dvus , -i, M.
66 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
inhab itant , inedla , fi e,M . k ing, réx, rfigis, M .
in jure, n6ceo, fi re,-ui
,-itum ( with k ingd om ,
régnum,-i, N .
absam,-esse, ;fui know ( of things) , scio, scire,
in jury , injuria, -ae, F . scivi , scitum n6sco, n63cé’
re,
in quire, quaero, quaeré’
re, qua e n6vi , n6tum (become ac
sivi , quaesitum (18 5 . quainted w ith) , c6gn6sco, -gn6in s is t 011,flagito, fi re, fi vi
, fi tum. scé’
re,-gn6vi ,
-gnitum (not to
in s truct , Erudio,-i re,
-ivi or -ii, know ) , nescio, -scire,
-scivi or
-itum.-scii, -scitum ignor6 , fi re, fi vi,
interes ts , it , interest, -esse fi tum (understand) , intellégo,(315 . 3 Jé
’
gé’
re, 461i ,-lectum.
into , in (prep . with know ledge, scientia , -ae, F .
is lan d,insiZla, -ae, F .
it , see he .
I taly , I ta'
lia, fi e, F .
it is, est ( see 12 7 , sign of pas sive
voice) .
its ( referring to the subject) ,suus ,
-a ,-um ; omitted if im
plied from the context.
J.
January (month of, mensis beingunderstood ) ,Jdnudrius,-a ,
-um.
jav elin , té’
lum,-i , N .
jo in , j ungo, j unge’
re, j unxi , j unctum'
.
journey , iter, itiné’
ris, N .
joy , gaudium,-i, N .
joyful , laetus , -a, -umjudge , j udex, d iois, M .
jud gm ent, j udicium,
-i , N . to
pass upon , sentia,-ire, sensi ,
sensus (w ith (16 andJune (month of) Julius, -ii, M .
jus t, j ustus, -a , -um
jus tice , j ustitia, -ae, F .
k eep off, prb’
hibeo, fi re,-ui ,
-itum.
k il l , interf icio, f ice'
re, ;fe'
ci,
ec
tum ; (by cutting down ) , occido,
-cidé’
re,-oidi , -cisum.
k ind , bé’
nignus,-a,
-um
( noun ) , gé’
nus,fi ris, N .
L.
Lab ienus, La
'
bie'
nus,~i, M .
Laceda mom‘
an , La'
cé’
daemoi
n ius, fi ,-um
lak e , la'
cus , fi s, M . (174.
lame, claudus, -a,-um
land ( a country) , terra, -cc, F . ;
( native land) , pa'
tria, fi e, F . ;
(by and sea) , terrci e .
language, lingua,-ae, F .
large , magnus,-a,
-um
amp las,-a ,
-um
las t , ultimus, fi ,-um (150.
( nearest, as last n ight) , p ro’
xi
mus, fi ,-um (150. (most
remote) , extrémus, fi ,-um
(150. 2 ) ( at last) , dé’
mum
( adv.)Latin , La
'
tinus,-a ,
-um
law ( statute) , le'
z , lé’
gis, F .
law ful, j ustus, fi ,
-um ( itis licet (314. j fis ( in
lay b efore , p r6p6uo,-p6né
’
re,
-pa
’
sui ,-p6situm.
lay d ow n (place) , p6no, p6né’
re,
p6sui, po'
situm arms , ab
armis dis cEdo, fi re, -ce'
ssi ,-ces
sum laywastefvasto, fi re, fi vi,
dtum.
lead , duco, ducé'
re, duxi, ductum
( over) , transduco, fi ucé'
re,
fi uxi , fi uctum ( out or from) ,Educo, fi ucé
'
re,fi rm
,fi tictum,
68 FIRST STEPS IN LATIN .
merchant , merctitor , fi ris, M .
m es senger , nuntius,-i , M .
m idday , m6r idi6s, fi i , M .
m idnight , média nor .
mids t of, in , médius, -a , «um.
mi gh t , see may .
mi gr ate, migro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
mi le , millepassuum.
M iletus , M il6tus,-i , F
m ili tary affairs , res mi litaris .
m ind , dnimus, -i , M .
mi ne , meus, fi ,-um.
mis tak en , b e, erro, fi re, fi vi ,
fi i um fallor , falli , falsum
(pass. of fal lo ) .m on ey , pé
’
cunia, -ae, F .
mons ter , monstrum,-i, N .
mon th , mensis, -is, M .
moon , luna, fi e, F .
more (Sign of comp . degree) ,ma
’
gis ; ( of quantity) , plus
(Wi th expressions of number ) ,amp lius .
morrow ( on the) , poster6 die.
mos t ( sign of superl . degree) ,mdxime
“
.
mother , m6ter , m6 tris , Fmoun tain , m6ns, -tis , M .
mourn , lugeo, lugére, luxi , luctum.
mov e ,moveo,mové’
re,m6vi ,m6tum.
mus ic , musica, fi e, F .
must , 6por tet, or gerundive (2 8 6 )my , meus, -a , -um.
my s elf, ey6met ; ipse,-a ,
-um ; agreeing wit ego, ex
pressed or understood.
N .
name, n6men, -inis, Nnarrow , angustus,
-a,-um (ad j .
naturally , n6tur6 ( ablnature , n6tura, fi e, F .
near , pro’
p e, ad (prep . w ith
neares t, p roximus , fi ,-um ( adj.
need , 6pus (308 . Obs . egeo
( indigeo , fi re,-ui , no p .p.
(308 . O
n eith er ( of two) , neuter ,-tra
,
-trum ; neither nor, né’
que
né’
que ( 205 .
n ev er , nunquamnev ertheles s , nihil6minus ( adv.)
ta'
meanew ( opp . to antiquus) , adous,—a,
-um ; fresh ( opp . to vé’
tus) ,ré
’
cens,-entis news, nuntius,
fi ,-um; nuntiummittfi
'
re, to send
word ; or c‘iliquid n6vi .
next , p rb’
ximus , -a , -um
nigh t , nox, noctis, F . ; by night,noctu.
n o , adj., nullus, -a , -um ; no one,
n6m6 ,-inis ( for gen . nullius is
used) .
nob le , dé’
c6rus,-a,
-um n6bilis ,-e
n on e, mi llus , -a ,-um
n or , né'
que, nee, ( conj ) ; neither
nor , nee nee (né'
que)( 205 .
not , n6n baud , used w ith
adverbs and w ith scio n6nne,
interrog. particle ; that not
( in final, hortatory, imperative, and optative clauses) , né.
nothing, nihil, N .
nouri sh , niitrio, -iri, -ivi , fi tumfilo, fi re, -ui , dlitum and altum.
now , nunc
now here, nusquamnumb er , nu
'
mé’
rus,-i , M .
N umitor , Numitor , fi ris , M .
O .
oak -tree , quercus, fi s, F .
ob ey , p 6reo, fi re,-ui , no p .p. ;
6b6dio, -ire, -ivi or-ii , -itum.
ob ject, obsto, -st6re, -stiti, -st6tum.
ob tain , adip iscor ,-ip isci ,
-ep tus
sum ( possession) , p6tior , an ,
-itas sum, dep.
2
of, g
)en . or abl . case ; see 292 ;
£16 (prep . with
70
pleasure, v6lup t63, fi tis , F . ; with
pleasure, libenter
p lough , dro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum
( noun ) , 6r6trum,-i , N .
P o , Pa'
dus , -i , M .
poet , p66ta , fi e, M .
p o in t out ,monstro, fi re,fi vi , fi tum.
P ompey , P ompeius ,-i , M .
poor , paup6r , fi ris
pos s es s ion , ob tain , p 6tior ,-iri ,
-itas sum (306 .
pos tman , t6bell6rius, -i , M .
p ow er ( in of) , p6nes (prep.
with
p ow erful .p 6t6ns ,-ti3
Sa j )prai s e laus , ud is , F .
( act of praising) , lauda'
ti6,
fi nis , F . (verb) , laudo, fi re,
fi vi , fi tum.
prefer (w ish rather) , m6 lo, malle,m6 lui , no p.p. ant6p6no,-p6n6re,
-p6sui ,
-p 6situm ( with
acc. and dat. , epra 6ro,f erre,4m,
-16 tum2with at .
p repare , pdro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
p res en t , b e, adsum,-esse, fui ;
at or in , intersum,-esse,
preserv e, c6nservo,
fi tum.
pretend , simiilo, fi re, fi vi , fi tumdissimu
'
lo, fi re, fi vi, fi tum.
prev ent, p r6hibeo, fi re,-ui ,
-itum
(323.
p rice, pr6tium,-i , N . ; 304 .
p ris oner of w ar , cap tivas,-i, M .
p roduce, fruges, -um, F . (pl.)fructus, fi s, M .
profit , pr6sum, pr6desse, pr6fui
(with dat.
promis e ,pr6missum,-i N . (verb) ,
p r6mitto,w itt6re,-misi , -missum,
polliceor , Jicfiri ,-licitas sum.
property , b6na, fi rum ( N .
prosper , sficundo, fi re, no perf
no p.p.
protection , praesidium,-u, N .
provided , dum, dumm6do
fi re fi vi ,
F IRST STEPS IN LATIN .
p rov id ence, p r6videntia, fi e, F .
provin ce, pr6vincia,-ae, F .
prow es s , virtus, fi tis , F .
pub lic th ank sgiv ing,3upp licdti6,fi nis , F .
punish , panio, fi re,-ivi ,
-itum.
pun ishment (penalty ) , poena,fi e, F . ; supp licium,
-ii , N .
pup il , discip iilus,-i , M
put (place) , , p6n6re, p63ui,p6situm to flight) , in figam c6nicio,-ic6re,
-j 60i ,
-j ectum.
Q .
qua s to r , quaestor , fi ris, M.
queen, r6gina, fi e, F .
quiet , qui6tu3,-a
,-um ( adj.
rapacious , rdpa'
x, fi cis
rap id ly , c6l6riter
rather (had) , m6 lo, malle, md lui,no p.p. p 6tius
compar . (151, Obs . I ) .
reach ( come to ) , v6nio, v6nire,v6ni , ventum (w ith in andperv6nio,
-v6nire, -v6ni , -ventum.
read , i6go, i6g6re, l6gi , lectum.
receiv e, accip io,-cip6re,
-c6p i ,fi ep tum.
recogn iz e, 6gnosco,-n6306re,-a6vi,
-nitum ( or c6grecov er ( to 36 r6cipio,
-cip6re, -c6p i, -cep tum r6cipero
fi re, fi vi , fi tum
from disease, conva'
lésco,fi sc6re, Jui , no p.p.
refresh , r6ficio, -f icere,;fectum.
reign , r6gno, fi re, fi vi, fi tum in
the of, ab. abs.
rejo ice, gaudeo, gaud6re, g6 vi3ussum ( semi-dep.
,
relate, narro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
rely ing, fre‘
tas, fi ,-um ( 248 . 2 ,
Obs.
VOCABULA RY. I I .
remain (wait) , m6neo, m6n6re,mausi ,mansum; ( staybehind) ,r6m6neo, fi re,m ansi ,
-mansum.
remember ( call tomind) , r6miniscor ,
-isci , on perf. m6mi
ui ,-isse (w ithgen . or acc.
,
remind , adm6neo, fi re, -ui ,-itum
with acc. pers and gen . of
t ing, also d6 W1th
remov e, auf 6ro, ;ferre, abstu’
li ,ablatum; to a distance) ,r6m6veo, fi re, -vi , -tum ( or 6
render , reddo, fi re, -idi , -itum.
renew , r6dint6gro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
renow ned , cldrus, -a,-um
repent ,poenitet,poenitére,poenitu
it,no p.p. ( impers .)reply , responsum,
-i, N .
repo rt (noun ) , f6ma ,
( verb) , 6nuntio ( orfi vi , fi tum ; ( divulge) ;ferre, -tiili , la
'
tum ( report) .repub lic , rés, rei , publica ,
-d e, F .
repulse , r6pello r6pell6re, rfipu'
li ,r6pul3um.
res train , temp6ro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum;coerceo, fi re,
-ui,-itum.
retreat , 36 r6cip io,-cip6re, fi ep i ,
fi ep tum p 6dem, r6f6ro, f erre,-tiili , -latum.
return , r6vertor , -verti , -versus sum
dep. ( intr .) r6deo,-ire,
-ii,
-itum ( inst .) reddo ,-d6re,
d idi , fi itumrev olution , n6vae rés, F .
rew ard , praemium,-i, N .
R hin e, Rh6nus , -i , M .
rich , dives, divitis (149.
r is e , 6r ior , 6riri or 6ri , artus sum
surgo, surg6re, surr6xi ,surrfictum.
riv er ,fl ilvius, -i ,M . ;flamen , -ini3,N .
r iv er-bank , r ip a,-cc, F .
road ( traveled road) , via, -ae, F . ;
( journey) , iter , itin6ris, N .
rob , sp 6lio (or ex fi re, fi vi , fi tum
(with sea. and
rock , sacrum, vi, N .
71
ro l l , volvo; volv6re, volvi , v6lutum.
R oman , R6m6nus, -a , -um.
R ome , R6ma, -ae, F .
rugged , asper , fi ra, fi rum
rule , r6go, fi re, r6xi, rectum ( acc.)the republic) , g6ro, g6r6re,
gessi , gestum; imp6ro, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum(w ith pr6sum,-esse,
;fui , no p.p.
run , curro, curr6re, cficurri , cur
sum (flee) , fvigio , f iigé’
re,
8 .
s ad , tristis, -e
safe , tutus,-a ,
-um salvus , -a,-um
safety , 3616s , fi tis , Fsai lo r , nauta, fi e, M .
sak e , for th e , causd or grdtia
( abl. followed by gen .
same, idem, eadem, idem.
s atis fy , sdtisfdcio, f dc6re, ;féci ,;factum ( with
say , dico, dic6re, dixi , dictum ,
report) ,j firo,ferre, tuli , l6 tumgsays he) , inquit (placed after
one or more words of a direct
quotation ) .s cho lar , discip iilus,
-i , M .
schoo l , ludus, -i , M .
Scip io , Scip i6, fi nis, M .
sea, mdre, -is, N .
s ea-s hore , 6ra m6ritima.
s eated , b e, c6nsido,-d6re, -s6di ,
-se3sum.
s ee , video, vid6re, vidi , visum.
s eek , p 6to, p6t6re, p6tivi p 6titum
quaero, quaer6re, quaesivi , quae
situm.
seem , videor , vid6r i , visus sum
(pass. of video) .
s ei z e ( take possession of) , occupo,fi re, fi vi, fi tum.
select ,d6ligo,fi re, d6l6gi, d6lectum.
s elf, ipse,-a,
-um; ( reflex . 36 or
pers . pron ) .
72 F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
sell , vendo, -d6re,-didi, d itam; be
sold, v6neo, -ire, -ii—itum.
senate , s6n6tus, fi s , M .
s end , mitto, mitt6re, misi, missum ;forward) , p raemitto, fi re,
sens e, 36nsus , fi s, M .
Septemb er (month of) , Sep tember , -bris -bre ( adj .) (mensisbeing understood)
servant , servus ,-i , M . ; man ser
vant, fdmiilus , -i , M. ; maid
servant, ancilla, fi e, F
serviceab le, utilis , -e
s es terce, sestertius , -i , M . ; one
thousand sestertium,-i, N .
set out , prbf iciscor ,-fectus sum, dep.
sev ere , grc‘ivis , -e ( ads)sev erely , rc
‘
iviter ( a v.)shade, um a ,
-ae, F .
shal l , Sign of fut. tense or subj .sharp , 6cer ,
-cris , -cre
she, see h e.
sheep , 6vis , -is, F .
ship , n6vis, -is, F .
sh ore, 6ra , fi e, F . ; ( of the sea) ,litus, fi ris , N .
short br6vis, -e parvus ,-a ,
-um ; scan -a,-um.
should (1mply1ng duty) , 6portet,fi re, «uit otherwise
by subj . ( 2 7 8 ,sh ould er , iim6ru3, -i , M .
sh ow , monstro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum
ostendo, fi re, -tendi , -tentum ;3p60i6s , fi i , F .
shud d er , horreo, horr6re, no perf.,no p.p. ; at,perhorrésco, etc
S icily , Sicilia, fi e, F .
s ide, ldtus , fi ris , N . ; ( on thiscitr6 (prep. with on all
sides, undique ( adv.)s ignal , signum, 4 , N .
s ilent , be, tdceo, fi re, -ui , -itum.
s ilver , argentum,-i , N .
since, qu6niam, cum, conj.abl . abs.
s inging, cantus , fi s , M .
s is ter , s6ror , fi r is , F .
sit , 36deo, s6d6re, 36di , sessum.
s ix , sex ( six hundred ) , sescenti,-ae,
-a.
sixteen , 36d6cim.
skilled , p6r itus ,-a ,
-umsky , caelum,
-i, N .
s laugh ter , cl6d6s , -is, F .
s lave (male) , servus,-i, M . ; ( fe
male) , serva ,-cc, F .
s leep , dormia, -ire, -ivi or -n,-itum.
small , parvus ,-a ,
-umsnow , nix, nivis , F .
so , ita , sic ( sotantus,
-a ,-um ( so
tot, tam ; multi .soldier , miles, -itis, 0.
s ome one ,quidam, 6liquis some,
dliquantum ( 236 ) n6nnulli
somebody) , quispiam ; ( somet ing) , dliquid see 237 .
some other , dlius dlius .
s on ,f i lius , -i , M .
s oon , mox cit6
soul , dnimus , -i , M .
s overeign ty , r6gnum,-i , N .
Spain , Hi3p 6nia ,-ae , F .
sp are,parco, paro6re, p6perci no
p .p .
speak , l6quor , i6qui , l6cutus sum
( of an orator) , dico,dic6re, dixi , dictum.
spear , sdgitta,-ae, F .
speech , 6r6ti6 , -6nis , F .
spring, v6r , v6ris , N .
stab le, stdbilis , -e
s tand , sto, st6re, st6ti , st6tum.
s tand ard , signum,-i , N .
s tar , stella, fi e, F .
s tate, civitds, fi tis, F . ; r63publica,
gen . ; rei publicae, F .
stone, ldp is ,-idis, M . ; saxum,
-i, N .
s to rk , cie6nia, -ae, F .
s torm ( assault) , expugno, fi re,
fi vi , fi tum storm (noun) , tem
pestds , fi tis , F .
story ,fdbula , -cc, F.
74
th es e, see this ;haec
th ey , see he ; dat . pl. of the.
demon .
thi ck , densus , -a ,
ldtus , -a ,-um.
th ing, r63, rei , F . neut. sing. adj.
( 83.
th ink , p itta , fi re, fi vi , fi tum
( form an idea) , c6gito, fi re,
fi vi ,fi tum ( judge) ,j iidico,fi re,
fi vi , fi tum ( as a view, be sen
sible of) , sentio, fi re,-si ,
-sum ;
( estimate,or an official opinionas a senator ) , c6nseo, fi re, -ui ,-um ; ( an individual opinion ) ,6p inor , fi ri
,fi tus sum, dep.
thi rd ,.
tertius , fi ,-um ( ord. num .
( these things) ,
( wall) ,
thirs t ( noun ) , sitis, -is, F . ; (verb) ,sitio, fi re, -ivi or -ii , no p .p.
thi rteen , tr6d6cim.
this , hie , haec , hoe something to be mentioned, ille,illa , illud .
this s id e of, citr6 ( prep.with ace.)thorough ly , p rob6 ( adv.
th os e, illi , -ae, -a anteced .
of rel., pl. of is ; these
those , hi illi .
th ough , quamvis licet
(331) ; even— ( d efore331) .th ous and , mi lle ( 213.
th ree, tres , tr ia ( num . j .)through , per ( prep. with
( cause) , abl.throw , j dcio, j dcfire, j éci , j actum ;
to , adicio, fi re, 7'
6ci,-j ectum.
Tiber , Tib6ris , -is, M . ; ( acc.-im) .
time, tempus , fi ris , N . ; ( season) ,temp estds, fi tis, F . ; ( times) ,num . adv .
timid , timidus , -a ,-um ( adj .
Titus , T itus , -i , M .
to (of motion) , ad , or in , prep.
w ith ace . ( 200. ( of rela
tion) , dat . or by the infin .
before a ve1b ; denoting pur
F IRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
uncertain , incertus , fi ,-um ( adj.
und er , sub (with verbs ofmotlon
with acc. ; (w ith verbs of rest)with abl., or see 259.
pose (321, and Obs . 2 andto-d ay , k6die
togeth er ( in companyw ith) , and
( adv. ) ( at once) , simulto-morrow , ords
top ( of ) , summus , -a , mmtow ard s , a d (prep. with
( of time) , sub (prep .with acc .,
or abl.) ( into or against) , in(with
tow er , turris , -is , F .
tow n , opp idum,-i, N .
train, exerceo, fi re, -ui , -itum.
tran sfer , tr6nsj 6ro, ;ferre, 461i ,-16 tum.
treach ery , p r6diti6 , fi nis , F .
treas on , pr6diti6 , fi nis , F .
treat , dgo , 6g6re, 6gi , actum.
tremble , contr6mi3co, -isc6re, Jmui .tribun e, tribunas , -i , M .
tribuneship , tribundtus , 423, M .
tribute, stipend ium,-ii , N .
tr iumph, tr iumpho , fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum ( noun ) , triumphus, -i , M .
tr00p s , e6p ice, fi rum, F .
troub lesome , m6lestus , -a ,-um
true, v6ru3,-a ,
-umtrus t , créde ,
-d6re , fi idi , fi itum
f ido, f id6re, f isus sum ( semidep.
,2 83
truth ( true t ings) , v6ra, N .
v6rit63, fi tis , F .
tumult , tiimultus , fi s , M .
turn ( verb) , verto,verté’
re,verti ,ver
sum ( adv.,by turn ) , invicem.
Tuscan s , Tusci , fi rum, M .
tw o , duo, fi e, -o ( num . adj . )(with nouns pl. in form, but
sing . in meaning) , bini , fi e,
-a ( 213.
VOCA BULA RY. I I . 75
und ers tanding, intellectus, fi s , M .
undertak e, suscip io,-cip6re,
-c6p i
fi eptum.
und ertak ing, incep tum,-i , N .
(work) , 6pus, fi ris, N .
unequal , impar , fi r is
unfriend ly , inimicus , -a ,-um
( adJun les s , nisz ( conj . ; w1th subj .
unlik e, dissimilis , -e ( adj ) .til up to ) , ad, prep. with
w e ; dum, d6nec, quoad, conj .(334) ( before) , ant6quam,
priusquam,
unw illing, b e , n6lo, nolle, n6lui
unw illing, invitus , -a , mm
unw orthy , indignus, fi ,-um (307
Obs .
upon , in , stiper ( 200 or see verb
or other word 0 a phrase, as
waitfor see w ai t.
us , objective of w e , see 2 29. 12 7 8 .
use ( verb) , utor , uti , usus sumdep .
(306 . ( noun ) , usus, fi s, M .
to force, vimfd cé’
re.
valor , virtus , fi tis , F .
v alue, aestimo , fi re, fi vi , fi tum
existimo, fi re, fi vi, fi tum
p rfitium,-i , N .
Verres , err63,-is , M.
v ery ( superlative degree) ; vald6m6gn6p 6re
easily ( after sdtis comm6d6 ( self) , see 238 , 239,Ex. 3.
v ess el , n6vis , -is , F . vds , v6sis , N .
v exed at , b e,p iget, p igére, p iguit
and p igitum est ( impers .,314)
v ictory , victor ia, fi e, F .
v illa, villa , fi e, F .
Vo ls inii , Volsinii , fi rum.
vulture, vultur , fi r is , M .
w age, g6ro, gerere, gessi , gestum ;
(upon or against) , inf 6ra, in
ferre, intiil i , illdtum (with dat.and
ait, for, exspecta, fi re, fi vi ,
fi tum ; ( remain ) , m6neo, mdn6re, mansi , mansum.
w alk , or take a walk, ambiilo,fi re, fi vi
,fi tum.
all ( general term) ,murus, -i , M . ;
( of a city) , moenia, ~ium, N
( of a house) , pdriés ,fi tis , M . ; ( rampart about a
camp) , v6 llum,-i, N .
w an der , erro, fi re, fi vi , fi tum
(about) , vdgor , fi ri , fi tus sum
w ant, ca'
reo, fi re, -ui ,-itum ; ( to
be wanting) , desam,-e33e, ;f ui .
ar , bellum,-i , N . ; (wage
against) , infe’
ro , inferre, intilli ,illa
‘
tum; ( in belli
w arn , m6neo, fi re, -ui ,-itum.
w as te , lay , vasto,fi re, fi vi , fi tum
p 6pu'
lor, fi ri , 6 tus sum, dep.
w atch , vigilia ,-ae, F . ;
—men ,
vigiliae, fi rum, M . ; (verb) ,vigilo, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
w ater , dqua, fi e, F .
w av e ,fluctus , fi s , M .
w ay , via ,-ae, F .
w e, n6s, see I .w eak , grow , languésco,
-u6se6re,-ui (no
w eapon , telam,-i, N .
w earied , fessus , —a ,-um (be
weary, pained) , (verb) , taedet,taed6re, taeduzt or taesum est
impers.
w eeping,flens ,fl entis pres.part.)w ell , b6ne ( a j. , in goodhealth) , s6uus , -a , -um ( adj ) .
w ent, see go .
w hat , interrog., qui , quae, quad
( adj . ) and quid ( substa) ;
rel., id quad ; see 240an 245 .
76
hatever, quicumque, quaecum
que, quodcumque ( indef. rel .
pron .) any quivis, quaevis ,
quodvis and quidvis
( subst.) indef. pron .
w hat o ’c lock , qu6ta h6ra.
en , cum (338 and 6b’
i
) apost
herefo re , quam6brem, qu6re,unde.
w hether , num, n6 (91. 1, a, b, c) .w h ich ( of two) , titer see
h ile , dumw hi te , albus , -a, -um ( adj .)ho (which ) , relative, qui,
1quae,
quad (321, w ho (w at) ,1nterrog.
, quis ( qui ) , quae, quad( quid)ho ever , quicumque, ( adj.) quaecumque, quodcumque ( indef.rel. pron .) you please, qui
libet, quaelibet, quodlibet, and
que’
dlibet, indef. pron .
w h o s e, rel. , see w ho .
w hy , our quid (neut. ace.
used ( for what reas on ) ,qud dé causd .
w id e , latus , -tl , -um ( adj.)w il l , v6la
, or ( subj . or S1gn of
future tense) ; (noun ) , v6lunt63
, fi tis, F . ; testa'
mentum,-i , N .
w in d , ventus, -i , M .
w inter, hiems, -is, F . ; (winter
quarters) , biberna, fi rum,N
( pl. ) ( to winter or pass
lu'
6ma, fi re, fi vi , fi tum.
w is e , sdpifins,-ntis ( adj ) .
w ish , v6la, velle, v6lui ( no p.p.,
well to) , ciip ia, fi re,-ivi ,
-itum (withw ith , abl. case ( in com
pany cum (prep.,81. Obs.,
or each other, inter36 or 3636.
FIRST STEPS IN LA TIN .
y ear , annus ,-i , M . ; (be in the
year, to be old) , annumdgo, 6g6re, 6gi , actum the
after, ann6 post (307 . Obs .
y ear ly , qu6tannis
y es , repeat the verb wit or without 6tiam, v6rum, etc .
y es terday , h6ri .
y et ( nevertheless) , ta’
men ( notyet) , n6ndum
y ou , Slng. , 16 ; pl . , v63; to ( i.e.
where you are) , ista, c .
y our , sing. ,tuas ,
-a ,-um (of
more than one) , vester ,-tra,
-trum.
y ours elf, tui , tibi , t6, pers . pron .
used ,reflex ( 230 and
y outh (young man ) , ddiiléscénS.~entis , c . ; j iiv6nis , -is , c . ;
(younger) , minor n6tu
( abst. adiiléscentia, fi e, F .
Z eno , Z 6n6 , -6nis , M .
ssawncx 4. SMITH, PRINTERS, sosron.
w ithin , intr6 (prep. w ith
sign of abl. of time
w ithout, sine (prep. w ith
or 2 61. N . 5 (w ith part1e.
noun after neg. expressions)quin (323.
w o lf, liipus ,-i, M .
w oman , mdlier , m6li6ri3, F .
w ood ( forest) , silva ,-cc, F . ;
( fuel lignum,-i,N . ; (build ing
woo m6 t6r ia ,-ae, F .
w orthy , dignus,-a ,
-um ( adj. ,307 . Obs. 4) w ith rel. clause
with subj . (324.
w ould ( subj . , would that, 2 7 8 ,u’
tinam.
ound , vulné’
ro , fi re, fi vi, fi tum,
‘
( noun ) , vulnus, fi ris , N .
w rite, scr ibo, scribfi'
re, scr ipsi ,scr ip tum.
points are illustrated by forty-five outs and diagram , tw elve
elab orate p lan s of the most important battles and s ieges , and a
double-page colored map of Gaul , revised according to the most
recent investigations,—features not in any other English edition.
TheVocabulary attempts to give, first, the etymological mean
ing of each word so far as is possible ; second, the general meanings
of the words, representing the conceptions as they appeared to the
Romans ; third , such renderings as may be necessary to present the
thought in a suitable English form. In the last case care is taken
to indicate by the use of phrases and by notes the difference between
the Roman and the English conceptions .
In giving the etymologies, the actual mode of formation in each
case, so far as it is known , is shown , and all the elements which
have entered into the formation are noted.
This edition follows , with slight change of orthography, the tex t
of Nipperdey, the more important various readings being given in
the notes. R eferen ces are given to the Grammars of A llen
Greenough , Gildersleeve, and Harkness .
Though the Ce sar was not placed in the hands of teachers for
examination until the middle of August, 1885, when in many cases
books had been selected and ordered , it was almost immediately
adopted by about 500 institutions . The indications are that the
fall of 1886 will find it in nearly or quite 1000 schools .
Letters received by the publishers specify among others these
PO I NTS OF EXCELLEN CE .
FIR ST. The judicious no tes ,—their full grammatical refer
ences, crisp idiomatic renderings , scholarly interpretations of dith
cult pas sages, clear treatment of indirect discourse, the helpful maps,
diagrams, and pictures ; in particular, the mili tary notes , throwinglight on the text, and giving life and reality to the narrative.
SBCOND . The v ocabulary ,—convenient, comprehensive, and
scholarly, combining the benefits of the full lexicon with the advan
tages of the special vocabulary.
TH IRD . The mechanical features of the volume, its clear type,
convenient size and shape, superior paper, and attractive binding.
FOURTH . In general , this ed ition supp lies all that a book
can supp ly , leaving the teacher time and s trength for his
p roper w ork of in s truction , the work that a book cannot do .
Leuctra, Plataea)
Imperium Romanum ( et Imp. Rom. Orient. et
Graecia ( et A thenae, Marathon , Thermopylae) .
Peloponnesus, A ttica, Boeotia, Phocis, rEtolia, et A carnania.
Gra cia a BellO Peloponnesiaco, usque ad Philippum 11. ( ct Mantinea
A sia Minor ( et Campus Trojae, Bosporos, Troas ; Ionia,Syria et Palestina ( et H ierosolyma,Armenia, Mesopotamia, Babylonia, A ssyria ( et Iter Xenophontis) .Regnum Alexandri Magni ( et Granicus, Issus, A rbela) .Persia et India ( et India Ptolentaei) .
n yptus, A rabia, et fEthiopia ( et E gyptus Inferior) .
Africa ( et Carthago, Alexandria, Numidia et A frica Propria) .Europe, showing the general direction of the Barbarian Inroads during
the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire.
Index.
A llen’s Geography of the AncientWorld.
Used at Eton , Harrow , Rugby ,and other Prominent English Pre
paratory Schools and A cademies . A lso used and recommended by such
Colleges and Preparatory Schools as
Harvard , Trinity , Oonn . ,
Yale , Tr in ity , N .O . ,
Lafay ette , N . W . Univers ity ,
Rutg ers ,W es ley an ,
Obe r lin , Lak e F orest ,Marietta , W iscons in ,
W orcester Univ . , Be loit ,Oh io W es ley an ,
H iram , O l ivet ,Ph illip s Exeter A cad emy ,
W il liston Seminary ,
W . W . Goodw in , Pr of:of Greeb,Harvard Un iv . It is a most beautiful
and highly useful work,and I am glad
to see what used to be an expensive
luxury brought within the means of all
students Of the classics . (Dec. 2,
Elish a Jones , A sst.Pro/i of Latin ,
Univ. of M ich . From my curso ry ao
quaintance I have recommended it to
our teachers. The map of the Home
r icGeography is a feature not contained
in either of my other atlases, and will
aid Homeric students greatly.
Law rence , W is
Tracy P eek , Prof: of Latin ,Yale
Coll . I have heretofore known the
A tlas sufficientlywell to feel justified inrecommending it to inquiring students.
(May 9,
S R . W inans , Tutor in Greek,Pr inceton Coll. , N ”? It is superb :
noth ing to criticise,and everything to
commend . Every student of the clas
sics needs something of the sort and
this is by all odds the best of its kind
( Oct.4,
H illsdale ,
Dick in son ,
W es ley an , C onn . ,
Princeton ,
Bates ,Grinnell ,C o lby ,
Kentuck y Univ .,
Vand erb ilt .
Phill ip s A ndover A cademy ,
Boston Latin Sch ools , etc .
ALLEN 8: GREENOUGH :
ALLEN
BLACKBURN
C ROWELL .
Latin Grammar
Latin C ompos it ionC aesar ( four books , with vocabulary) .
Sallust ’e C atiline
C icero , 13orations (or 8 orations with vocabulary) .
Cicero de Senectute
Ovid (with vocabulary)Virg il (Bucolics and 6 Books of theE neid)Preparatory C ourse or Latin ProseLatin Pr imer
New Latin Meth od
Introduction to Latin C ompos itionLatin Read er
Latin Lexicon
Germania and A gr icola of TacitEssentials of Latin Grammar
Latin Exerc isesLatin Grammar and Exercises ( in one volume)Selections from th e Latin Poets
I . I 2
.60
50
-90
-9°.90
140
.90
-75L CD
-7o
.60
C ROWELL RICHARDSON : Brief History of Roman Lit . (BENDER ) 1.00
GREENOUGH . Virg il .
Bucolics and 6 Book s of E neid withBucolics and 6 Book s o fE neid withoutVocab.)Last 6 Book s 01E neid , and Georg ics (with notes )Bucolics E neid
, 81Georg ics ( complete,with notes ) 1.60Text of Virgil ( complete) .75Vocabulary to th e
pw h ole of Virgil .
GINN &HEATH : C lassical A tlas and Geog raph y ( cloth ) .
HALSEY Etymology of Latin and Greek .
C lass ical Wall Map s
h(‘three or more) , each 3.50
KEEP Essential U ses of th e code in Greek and Latin . 25KING Latin Pronunciation .2 5LEIGHTON Latin Lessons
MADVIG Latin Grammar (byThacher)PA RKHURST Latin Verb 35PA RKER 81PREBLE : Hand book ofLatinWriting 50
SHUMWAY . Latin Synonymes . .30STICKNEY . C icero de Nature Deorum’
I ETLOW Inductive Latin Lesson s .
TOMLINSON Manual for th e Study ofLatin Grainfnar .2 0
WH ITE
(J.W Schmid t ’s Rhythmic and Metric 2 .50
WH ITE J. T .) Junior Students’ Lat in-Eng lish Lexicon (mor.) 1.75
Eng lish -Latin Lexicon ( sheep) .50
Latin-Eng lish and Eng lish-LatinLexicon ( she 300WH ITON A uxilia Vergil iana ; or, First Steps
'
in Latc
in Pro .15Six Week s
’Preparation for Read ing C wear .35
Cop ies sent to Teachers for Examination, with a view to Introduction,
on receipt of I ntroduction P rice.
Send for description of our new Illustrated Caesar ( seven books)
G INN C OMP A NY, P ublish ers,
BOSTON , NEW YORK, AND CHICAGO.
Top Related